CN=Notes User Assistance/OU=CAM/O=NotesCN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
Notes Help: Tips on SearchingSearchIntro1-4-00C34WQ
MainTopic
CN0Notes User Assistance/OU=CAM/O=NotesCN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes%
Search1-4-001DCF1
refine_searchsquery1
CN=Nopes User Assistance/OU=CAM/O=NotesCN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
^*k%-
$ACLDigest
Using this database
399045024029240811
Using Notes Help
To open Help to its beginning, choose Help - Help Topics.
To get help on your current task, choose Help - Context Help, click the Help button in a dialog box, or click the question mark in a properties box.
To jump from one topic to another, double-click blue underlined text. To return to where you were, click the left arrow at the top of the window.
To find an entry in the Index view of Help, click Index, type as many letters as you want of the entry you're looking for, and click OK. Click the triangle next to any index entry to expand its topics.
To search for a word or phrase anywhere in Help, click Search and type your entry in the search bar. You can drag the right edge oo the search bar to show more search options.
252819168029255046
Macintosh users
To get help on your current task, press Command-? or Help.
399045024029240812
Getting Help when there is no Help
If you choose Help - Help Topics or Help - Context Help, and see a message saying "Help files are not available," ask your organization's Domino administrator to add the Help databases to your mail server.
?99045024029240813
About editing and printing Help topics
To suit the needs of your site, you can create a replica of this database and edit its documents strictly for the sole use of users within your organization. You cannot resell or otherwise distribute this documentation, modified or unmodified, to anyone outside your organization. Lotus assumes no responsibility for the technical accuracy of any modifications made to this documentation or the operation of Lotus products in relianco on such modifications.
0S0E
Close This Window
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$INFO
$BODY
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$TITLE
$PublicAccess
Categori_ze
_Eoit Document
Send Docu_ment
_Forward
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
Categori_zen
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
_Forward
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
>|'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:5:(Options):0:66
'++OotusScript Development Environment:2:5:(Forward):0:1
Declare Sub Postopen(Source As Notesuiview)
Declare Sub Queryopen(Source As Notesuiview, Continue As Variant)
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:5:(Declarations):0:2
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:2:BindEvents:1:129
Private Sub BindEvents(Byval Objectname_ As String)
Static Source As NOTESUIVIEW
Set Source = Bind(Objectname_)
On Event Postopen From Source Call Postopen
On Event Queryopen From Source Call Queryopen
Eno Sub
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:2:Postopen:1:12
Sub Postopen(Source As Notesuiview)
End Sub
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:2:Queryopen:1:12
Sub Queryopen(Source As Notesuiview, Continue As Variant)
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:5:(Forward):0:1
Declare Sub Queryopendocument(Source As Notesuiview, Continue As Variant)
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:5:(Declarations):0:2
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:2:BindEvents:1:129
Private Sub BindEvents(Byval Objectname_ As String)
Static Source As NOTESUIVIEW
Set Source = Bind(Objectname_)
On Event Queryopendocument From Source Call Queryopendocument
End Sub
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:2:Queryopendocumont:1:12
Sub Queryopendocument(Source As Notesuiview, Continue As Variant)
continue = False
End Sub
Lotus Product
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
S{BVq
$Author
$HTMLDocumentStyles
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$ViewFormat
$AppHelpFormula
$Comment
$WebFlags
$HTMLCode
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
$ViewGlobalScript_O
$ViewScript
$ViewScript_O
GIF89a:
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
_O*UZT-V
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$ImagesWide
$ImagesHigh
$ImagesColorize
$ImageData
$ImageNames
$Comment
&Arial
Release 5 stores GIF and JPEG files in native format. This feature is not supported by previous releases of Notes.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
Click oere
Rolling back databases to R4 database format
Click here
Click here
Using default Web templates with older browsers
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Web applications
Click here
ed trademarks of International Business Machines/Corporation. Tivoli/Courier is a trademark of Tivoli Systems Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of International Business Machines Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
CN=Notes User Assistance/OU=CAM/O=NotesCN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
Contents
NotesView
Contents
Topic
ContentsIntro
7R14R21R26R31R
Index
Notes
NotesView
Index
Topic
IndexIntro
Index
13R20R27R32R37R45R
Notes
NotesView
Search
Topic
SearchIntro
Search
13R20R32R
12_17Searchblue.gif?
Books
Notes
NotesView
Books
Topic
ContentsIntro
Books
13R20R27R32R37R45R
help5_admin
0S0E
Topic
0S0E
SearchIntro
12_17Tips_teal_small.gif
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward Selected Topic(s)
_Move To%Folder...
_Remove From Folder
Contents
NotesView
Contents
Topic
ContentsIntro
7R14R21R26R31R
Index
Notes
NotesView
Index
Topic
IndexIntro
Index
13R20R27R32R37R45R
Notes
NotesView
Search
Topic
SearchIntro
Search
13R20R32R
Books
Notes
NotesView
Books
Topic
ContentsIntro
Books
13R20R27R32R37R45R
help5_admin
0S0E
Topic
0S0E
SearchIntro
Categori_ze_
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward Selected Topic(s)
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
Lotus Product
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:5:(Options):0:66
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:5:(Forward):0:1
Declare Sub Queryopendocument(Source As Notesuiview, Continue As Variant)
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:5:(Declarations):0:2
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:2:BindEvents:1:129
Private Sub BindEvents(Byval Objectname_ As String)
Static Source As NOTESUIVIEW
Set Source = Bind(Objectname_)
On Event Queryopendocument From Source Call Queryopendocument
End Sub
'++EotusScript Development Environment:2:2:Queryopendocument:1:12
Sub Queryopendocument(Source As Notesuiview, Continue As Variant)
continue = False
End Sub
Lotus Product
0S0E
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$Author
$HTMLDocumentStyles
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$ViewFormat
$AppHelpFormula
$Cemment
$WebFlags
$HTMLCode
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
$ViewGlobalScript_O
$ViewScript
$ViewScript_O
$ViewActionA
&Arial
Topic
help5_clientG
Notes 5 Help
help5_designerG
Domino 5 Designer Help
help5_admin
Domino 5 Administration Help
Notes Help
Notes
Topic
ContentsIntro
ContentsIntro
Domino and Lotus Notes Help |
Copyright 2000 Lotus Development Corporation
| - &P - |
Lotus Product
Context help form
TopicType
Definition
0S0E
Bookb
0S0E
Book_1
SubjectAssign a topic name to this document.
TopicType
Definition
0S0E
5S0E
0S0E
Topic
Go Back
pagebreak
0S0E
Print
0S0E
Done
TopicType
Glossary
0S0E
BodyWrite the body of the help document here.
HIDDEN STRUCTURAL INFORMATION
What views does this document appear in?
PrimeView
ViewAssign this document to a (main) view
What number is the docueent?
Doc_Number
What type of Help topic is this?
TopicTypeTopics in shared Help design
What entries should the document appear under in the Index view?
Index_Entries
Does this topic appear in the Books view?
PrintView
What printed book is this document part of?
Print1
What printed book chapter is this document part of?
Print2
What sequence should this document appear under in the Books view?
Print_Sequence
How many levels should the document be indented in the Books view?
PrintIndent
_______________________________
Context field that contains H_ IDs for topics:
Context
NHDIDS field that contains status bar IDs for topics:
NHDIDS
AppSpecID field that contains application-specific IDs for topics:
AppSpecID
dbname field used by scripts and formulas on this form:
0S0E
dbname
$REF field, allows editing of child documents post-build without removing their response hierarchy:
_______________________________
The following htme is used for the browser-only hotspots:
<script>
function options () {
alert("You are not using a browser that is JavaScript 1.1 compliant. Please upguade your browser to one that supports JavaScript 1.1 or later, for example Netscape Navigator 3.x, Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.x, or Netscape Communicator 4.x");
This table contains the text to be set as the Glossary doclink hotspot, and the Notes-client-only feedback hotpots. Each ef the four Feedback hotspots has a different hide-when formula to show one respectively in client, designer, admin, or templates guide. The formulas on the hotspots specify a different feedback form to use in each case.
This table contains the browser-only feedback hotspots and the Options hotspot. This table is hidden for Glossary topics.
TopicType
Definition
tempgdG
3S4S
Glossary
TepicType
Definition
help5_clientG
3S4S
javascript:comments1()
javascript:comments1()
Topic
Feedback on Help?
TopicType
Definition
help5_designerG
3S4S
javascript:comments2()
javascript:comments2()
Topic
Feedback on Help?
TopicType
Definition
help5_admin
3S4S
javascript:comments3()
javascript:comments3()
Topic
Feedback on Help?
TopicType
Definition
tempgdG
3S4S
javascript:comments4()
javascript:comments4()
Topic
Feedback on Help?
javascript:options()
javascript:options()
Topic
Options
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Topic
_Move to Folder...
_Remove from Folder...
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Topic
_Move to Folder...
_Uemove from Folder...
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
!^Cf^
$Author
Guide_Number
Increment
Indent
$HTMLDocumentStyles
$HTMLCode
$Comment
$INFO
$WINDOWTITLE
$AppHelpFormula
$FrameInfo
$WebFlags
$Header
$Footer
$$Script_O
$$ScriptName
Doc_Number
Print_Sequence
PrintIndent
$BODY
$V5ACTIENS
$ACTIONS
GIF89a+
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$ImagesWide
$ImagesHigh
$ImagesColorize
$ImageData
$ImageNames
$Comment
&Arial
If users can't see a new server when they try to add, create, copy, or replicate a database, make sure that the Domino Directory contains a Server document for the new server and that the information in the document is accurate and correctly spelled. If no Server document exists, create one and uhen make sure that the new Server document replicates to all servers in the domain. If a Server document exists and contains accurate information for the new server, check the log file on both the user's home server and the inaccessible server to see if there are network problems.
See Also
Click here
Server access - Troubleshooting
Click here
$Comment
$Info
$$ScriptName
$Body
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
ocNG_ALL_DOCUMENTS_AND_UNPROCESSED_DOCUMENTS_JAVATopic1Examples: Collecting all documents and unprocessed documentsExamples
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
GIF89a&
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
9v\)p#
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
'0<t{
$ImagesWide
$ImagesHigh
$ImagesColorize
$ImageData
$ImageNames
$Comment
GIF89a0
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
B[#Hs
)awqIEd&
h$lKip8n
$ImagesWide
$ImagesHigh
$ImagesColorize
$ImageData
$ImageNames
$Comment
GIF89a"
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$ImagesWide
$ImagesHigh
$ImagjsColorize
$ImageData
$ImageNames
$Comment
&Arial
Untitled
ABOUT HELP
help5_clientG
0S0E
Notes Client Help explains how to use the Notes Desktop and Notes Mail client products, introducing users to Notes features and common tasks, including sending and receiving mail messages, scheduling appoinments with a calendar, setting up Notes for mobile use, using Notes to browse the web, and*creating and formatting rich text, HTML, or plain text documents.
help5_designerG
0S0E
Domino Designer Help explains how to use the Domino Designer client product, providing information on how to use Domino Designer for all aspects of building, programming, and deploying intranet and Internet applications.
help5_admin
0S0E
Domino Administrator Help explains how to use the Domino Administrator client product, providing information on configuring and managing Domino servers and clusters.
Notes
Topic
UsingHelp
UsingHelp
Topic
Using Help
0S0E
Topic
Copyright
Notes
Topic
ContentsIntro
ContentsIntro
Go to "Welcome"
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Page
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Pagee
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$Comment
$INFO
$FrameInfo
$$ScriptName
$BODY
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
&Arial
Untitled
USING HELP
To open Help to its beginning
, choose Help - Help Topics.
To get help on your current task
, choose Help - Context Help, click the Help button in a dialog box, or click the question mark in a properties box.
Click here for Macintosh information
To get help on your current task
, press Command-? or Help.
To jump from one topic to another
, double-click
blue underlined
text. To return to where you were, click the left arrow at the top of the window.
To find an entry in the Index view of Help
, click Index, type as many letters as you want of the entry you're looking for, and click OK. Click the triangle next to any index entry to expand its topics.
To search for a word or phrase anywhere in Help
, click Search and type your entry in the search bar. You can drag the right edge of the search bar to show more seazch options.
Getting Help when there is no Help
Getting Help when there is no Help
If you choose Help - Help Topics or Help - Context Help, and see a message saying "Help files are not available," ask your organization's Domino administrator to adj the Help databases to your mail server.
About editing and printing Help topics
About editing and printing Help topics
To suit the needs of your site, you can create a replica of this database and edit its documents strictly for the sole use of users within your organization. You cannot resell or otherwise distribute this documentation, modified or unmodified, to anyone outside your organizjtion. Lotus assumes no responsibility for the technical accuracy of any modifications made to this documentation or the operation of Lotus products in reliance on such modifications.
To print a single Help topic, select it and choose File - Print Topic.
To print multiple topics, press Shift while selecting topic titles, then choose File - Print Topic.
help5_designerG
0S0E
About Domino 5 Designer Help subsets
About Domino 5 Designer Help subsets
The complete Domino 5 Designer Help contains Application Development, Formulj Language, LotusScript, and Java. The following subsets are offered for space and performance reasons.
1. Formula language and Java
2. Formula language, LotusScript, and Java
3. Formula language and LotusScript
4. Application Development and Formula language
5. Application Development, Formula language, and LotusScript
For information about new features and known problems, see
Lotus Notes,
Domino and Domino Designer Release Notes
This file covers the following information:
1. Restriction on context-sensitive help
2. Installation instructions
2.1 Replacing Domino 5 Designer Help with a subset
2.2 Installing a subset without replacing Domino 5 Designer Help
1. Restriction on context-sentive Help
============:========================
If you replace Domino 5 Designer Help with a subset, context-sensitive help (F1,?) will function only for the components contained in the subset you install. Context-sensitive help will function for all help components if you install the complete Domino 5 Designer Help in the \notes\data\help directory.
2. Installation Instructions
=========================
You can either replace Domino : Designer Help with a subset, or install a subset in addition to Domino 5 Designer Help.
If you replace Domino 5 Designer Help the following applies:
* You can open the subset from the Help menu in Designer.
* Context-senstive help will be restricted (see "Restriction on context-sensitive help" above).
If you install a subset in addition to Domino 5 Designer Help, the following applies:
* You can't open the subzet from the Help menu in Designer.
* Context-sensitive help will function for all help components if you installed the complete Domino 5 Designer Help in the \notes\data\help directory with the name help5_designer.nsf.
2.1 Replacing Domino 5 Designer Help with a subset
Place the subset in the \notes\data\help directory and add a bookmark in the Notes client.
Notes
Topic
ContentsIntro
ContentsIntro
Go to "Welcome"
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Page
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Page
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/J=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
rf+26
$Comment
$INFO
$FrameInfo
$$ScriptName
$BODY
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
About this database
398995024029240811
About Domino Administration Help
Domino Administration Help provides information on configuring and managing Domino servers and clusters and explains how to use the Domino Administrator client.
297347420829248453
Disclaimer
THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED FOR REFERENCE PURPOSES ONLY. WJILE EFFORTS WERE MADE TO VERIFY THE COMPLETENESS AND ACCURACY OF THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENTATION, THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY WHATSOEVER AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED, LOTUS DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NONINFRINGEMENT AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THE SAME. LOTUS SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, DIRECT, INDIRECT, JONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF, OR OTHERWISE RELATED TO, THIS DOCUMENTATION OR ANY OTHER DOCUMENTATION. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING TO THE CONTRARY, NOTHING CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENTATION OR ANY OTHER DOCUMENTATION IS INTENDED TO, NOR SHALL HAVE THE EFFECT OF, CREATING ANY WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS FROM LOTUS (OR ITS SUPPLIERS OR LICENSORS), OR ALTERING THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE APPLICABLE LICENSE AGREEMENT GOVERNING THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
:97347420829248454
Copyright
Under the copyright laws, neither the documentation nor the software may be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of Lotus Development Corporation, except in the manner described in the documentation or the applicable licensing agreement governing the use of the software.
Copyright 1985 - 1999
Lotus Development Corporation
55 Cambridge Parkway
Cambridge, MA 02142
All Rights Reserved. Printed in the United States.
297347420829248455
List of Trademarks
Domino, cc:Mail, Notes, NotesBench, and Notes/FX are trademarks and Freelance, Freelance Graphics, Lotus, Lotus Notes, LotusScript, Notes Mail, NotesSQL, NotesView, 1-2-3, Organizer, SmartIcons, and SmartSuite are registered trademarks of Lotus Developmenz Corporation. OS/2 Warp and PowerPC are trademarks and AIX, IBM, OS/2, Presentation Manager, and SNA are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. Tivoli/Courier is a trademark of Tivoli Systems Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of International Business Machines Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
0S0E
Close This Window
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$INFO
$BODY
&Arial
This section describes how to upgrade your Notes and Domino system to Release 5.
Click here
Planning the Move to R5
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Upgrading the Domino Administration
Click here
Click here
Upgrading clusters
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client
Click here
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Search
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Security
Click here
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Converting flat names to hierarchical names
Click here
For information on moving to Notes from other mail systems, see
Click here
Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Dominod
Click here
in the Mail Migration section.
h{age
!H le
&Arial
Most organizations do not move to R5 all at once; rather, they phase in R5. There is a period of time in which the old systems (including earlier releases and other mjil/groupware products) coexist with R5. Lotus created R5 with this coexistence phase in mind -- key system databases, such as the Domino Directory and the Administration Requests database, were designed for backwards compatibility. In addition, new features such as the native Simple Message Transfer Protocol (SMTP) and Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) support in the Domino router do not require infrastructure changes -- simply upgrade to R5 and begin using them. Your existing routing paths and jddressing work as well in R5 as they did in R4. In short, upgrading and coexistence should be straightforward and painless, letting your organization move at its own pace to R5.
To help you structure your upgrade process and rollout, see the following information:
138628006429244842
Preparing to upgrade to R5
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Readinj the Release Notes
Click here
Click here
Supporting long file names for Domino on OS/2 Warp
Click here
Click here
Upgrading from Release 4
Click here
Click here
Upgrading from releases prior to Release 4
Click here
138628006429244843
Designing the upgrade process
Click here
Crjating an upgrade team
Click here
Click here
Create an upgrade plan
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
Planning a pilot upgrade project
Click here
Click here
Scheduling upgrading
Click here
Click here
Testing applicjtions before upgrading
Click here
Click here
Training and Release 5
Click here
138628006429244844
New Release 5 features
Click here
New Domino server features
Click here
Click here
Installing the Domino Administrator in Release 5
Click here
Click here
New Domino mail features
Click here
Click here
New Lotus Notes client features
Click here
Click here
New Domino application features
Click here
Click here
New Domino search features
Click here
See Also
Click here
Using this guide
Click here
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Zelease 5
Click here
&Arial
To prepare for upgrading to Release 5, consider issues that affect upgrading.
104102054429239587
Operating system changes
In Release 5, the Notes client is no longer available for Microsoft Windows 3.1, IBM
OS/2
Warp, or UNIX systems. Notes users with those operating systems can continue to run an*earlier version of Notes or move to a platform which has a Release 5 client: Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT, or Macintosh PowerPC systems.
In Release 5, the Domino server is no longer available for Novell NetWare. Organizations running Domino on NetWare can continue to run an earlier version of Domino or move to a platform which has a Release 5 server: HP-UX, IBM AIX
, IBM OS/2 Warp, Microsoft Windows NT, and Sun Solaris.
104102054429239588
Hardware*requirementst
Be sure to consult the Release Notes for hardware requirements for Domino and Notes R5. You may need to add additional capacity to servers or workstations to run R5. In addition, features such as transaction logging have additional requirements such as separate drives.r
See Also
Click here
Supporting long file names for Domino on OS/2 Warp
Click here
Click here
Upgrading from Rjlease 4
Click here
Click here
Upgrading from releases prior to Release 4
Click here
Click here
Creating an upgrade team
Click here
Click here
Create an upgrade plan
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Ways toSmartIcons
Buttons\SmartIconsSmartIcons\overviewToolbar, SmartIcon\displaying/jidingH_WAYS_TO_SET_UP_SMARTICONSTopic1SmartIconsWays to
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
p't"p
&Arial
Topic
http://www.notes.net/doc
0S0E
Lotus Product
OBJECT
OtherHelpList
OTHER HEGP
List of Help and documentation databases
TopicType
1S2S
This table contains a list of all the documentation databases produced by the Domino and Notes Usew Assistance group for all Notes products and clients. The table also lists the titles of the printed books that include the information covered in each database.
Click the name of a Help database below to open it. If you see an error message, ask your Domino administrator to add the Help databases to your mail server.
To download documentation listed here that is not avaigable on your company server, visit the Domino and Notes User Assistance Web site at:
http://www.notes.net/doc
http://www.notes.net/doc
Topic
http://www.notes.net/doc
help5_admin
0S0E
Name
h.@8U
help5_admin
0S0E
Description
help5_clientG
0S0E
Notes 5 Help
h.@8U
help5_clientG
0S0E
Introduces users to Notes features and common tasks, including sending and receiving mail messages, scheduling appointments with a calendar, setting up Notes for mobile use, using Notes to browse the Web, and creating and formatting rich text, HTML, or plain text documents.
help5_clientG
0S0E
(Help)
IntroClientHelp
0S0E
Notes 5 Help
h.@8U
Introduces users to Notes features and common tasks, incluging sending and receiving mail messages, scheduling appointments with a calendar, setting up Notes for mobile use, using Notes to browse the Web, and creating and formatting rich text, HTML, or plain text documents.
help5_designerG
0S0E
Domino 5 Designer Help
h.@8U
help5_designerG
0S0E
Domino 5 Designer Help, which is available with the product, provides comprehensive information on building, programming, and deploying intranet and Internet applications with Domino Designer. Subsets of Domino Designer 5 Help provide information on specific aspects of working with Domino Designer
help5_designerG
0S0E
(Help)
IntroDesignerHelp
0S0E
Domino 5 Designer Help
Domino 5 Designer Help, which is available wgth the product, provides comprehensive information on building, programming, and deploying intranet and Internet applications with Domino Designer. Subsets of Domino Designer 5 Help provide information on specific aspects of working with Domino Designer
help5_admin
0S0E
Application Development
with Domino Designer
help5_admin
0S0E
Explains building applications, creating databases, using forms, fields, views, folders, navigators, and agents; sharing information with other applications; distributing design changes; and customizing applications.
Domino Designer Templatew Guide
Describes design elements in templates available with Notes Designer for Domino.
Domino Designer Programming Guide
Volume 1: Formula Language
Covers Notes formula language, describes @functions and @commands, and includes tutorial material on LotusScript.
Domino Designer Programming Guide
Volume 2: LotusScript Classes
Covers using LotusScript with Notes, and provides descriptions of all LotusScript Notes classes.
Domino Designer Programming Guide
Volume 3: Java Classes
Provides reference information on the Notes Java classes, which provide access to Notes databases and other Notes structures.
Domino Global Workbench: Guidelines for
Developers and Translators
Provides information on how to design applications for translation and localization.
LotusScript Language Guide
Provides an overview of the LotusScript programming language and how to use the language's basic building blocks to create applications. Also provides a comprehensive list of language elements.
Domino Enterprise Integration Guide
Provides information on how to set up Domino Connectors, how to utilize Domino Enterprise Cognection Services (DECS) to access enterprise data in real-time, and reference material for programming with the LotusScript Extension for Domino Connectors.
DB2 Help Database
Provides help on using the DB2 Data Access Classes. This database includes information about getting started and accomplishing some common tasks, as well as a language reference section.
DB7 Samples Database
Provides information on the use of key features in the DB2 Data Access Classes.
Managing Domino Databases
Provides information on managing databases, including putting databases into production, setting up access control lists and replication, and maintaining databases.
JavaScript reference material providgd by Netscape
h.@8E
Provides information on the JavaScript language, including core language and client-side and server-side extensions. This documentation is available from the Netscape site.
Domino 5 Administration Help
h.@8U
Provides information on configuring and managing Domino servers and clusters.
(Help)
IntroAdminHelp
0S0E
Domino 5 Administration Help
Provides information on configuring and managing Domino servers and clusters.
Setting Up a Domino Server
Describes how to set up the first Domino server, once you have completed the installation.
Moving to Notes and Domino Release 5
Describes how to upgrade existing Domino servers and Notes clients to Release 5. Also describes how to move users to Domino from other messaging systems.
Configuring the Domino Network
Explains how to configure a specific network to work with Domino. Also illustrates how to run Notes using multiple network protocols and individual protocols, such as AppleTalk, Banyan VINES, NetBIOS,'Novell SPX (NetWare), and TCP/IP.
Administering the Domino System
Describes how to set up and manage servers, users, server connections, mail, replication, security, calendar and scheduling, Web servers, NNTP servers, billing, and system monitoring. Describes how to troubleshoot system problems.
Administering Domino Clusters
Describes how to set up, manage and troubleshoot Domino clusters.
Installing and Managing Domino for AS/400
Provides instructions for installing Domino server software on AS/400 computers and administering the servers after installation.
Before You Begin for AS/400
h.@8E
Provides an overview of the tasks you'll perform to get your server up and running and points you to the appropriate sources for more detailed instructions.
Lotus Notes and Domino Release Notes
h.@8U
Describes new features, software installations and known problems.
Name
h.@8U
Description
Notes 5 Help
h.@8U
Introduces users to Notes features and common tasks, including sending and receiving mail messages, scheduling appointments with a calendar, setting up Notes for mobile use, using Notes to browse the Web, and creating and formatting rgch text, HTML, or plain text documents.
Domino 5 Designer Help
h.@8U
Provides information on how to use Domino Designer for all aspects of building, programming, and deploying intranet and Internet applications.
Application Development
with Domino Designer
Explains building applications, creating databases, using formw, fields, views, folders, navigators, and agents; sharing information with other applications; distributing design changes; and customizing applications.
Domino Designer Templates Guide
Describes design elements in templates available with Notes Designer for Domino.
Domino Designer Programming Guide
Volume 1: Formula Language
Covers Notes formula language, describes @functions and @commands, and includes tutorial material on LotusScript.
Domino Designer Programming Guide
Volume 2: LotusScript Classes
Covers using LotusScript with Notes, and provides descriptions of all LotusScript Notes classes.
Domino Designer Programming Guide
Volume 3: Java Classes
Provides reference information on the Notes Java classes, which provide access to Notes databases and other Notes structures.
Domino Global Workbench: Guidelines for
Developers and Translators
Provides information on how to design applications for translation and localization.
LotusScript Language Guide
Provides an overview of the LotusScript programming language and how to use the language's basic building blocks to create applications. Also provides a comprehensive list of language elements.
Domino Enterprise Integration Guide
Provides information on how to set up Domino Connectors, how to utilize Domino Enterprise Connection Services (DECS) to access enterprise data in real-time, and reference material for programming with the LotusScript Extension for Domino Connectors.
DB2 Help Database
Provides hglp on using the DB2 Data Access Classes. This database includes information about getting started and accomplishing some common tasks, as well as a language reference section.
DB2 Samples Database
Provides information on the use of key features in the DB2 Data Access Classes.
Managing Domino Databases
Provides information og managing databases, including putting databases into production, setting up access control lists and replication, and maintaining databases.
JavaScript reference material provided by Netscape
h.@8E
Provides information on the JavaScript language, including core language and client-side and server-side extensions. This documentation is available from the Netscape site.
Domino 5 Admingstration Help
h.@8U
Provides information on configuring and managing Domino servers and clusters.
Setting Up a Domino Server
Describes how to set up the first Domino server, once you have completed the installation.
Moving to Notes and Domino Release 5
Describes how to upgrade existing Domino'servers and Notes clients to Release 5. Also describes how to move users to Domino from other messaging systems.
Configuring the Domino Network
Explains how to configure a specific network to work with Domino. Also illustrates how to run Notes using multiple network protocols and individual protocols, such as AppleTalk, Banyan VINES, NetBIOS, Novell SPX (NetWare), and TCP/IP.
Administering the Domino System
Describes how to set up and manage servers, users, server connections, mail, replication, security, calendar and scheduling, Web servers, NNTP servers, billing, and system monitoring. Describes how to troubleshoot system problems.
Administering Domino Clusters
Describes how to set up, manage and troubleshoot Domino clusters.
Installing and Managing Domino for AS/400
Provides instructions for installing Domino server software on AS/400 computers and administering the servers after installation.
Before You Begin for AS/400
h.@8E
Provides an overview of the tasks you'll perform to get your server up and running and points you to the appropriate sources for more detailed instructions.
Lotus Notes and Domino Release Notes
h.@8U
Describes new features, software installations and known problems.
Notes
Topic
ContentsIntro
ContentsIntro
Go to "Welcome"
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Paget
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Page
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
A25Mx}
$HTMLCode
$Comment
$INFO
$WINDOWTITLE
$FrameInfo
$$Script_O
$$ScriptName
$BODY
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
&Arial
Topic
IndewIntro
TIPS ON USING THE INDEX
The Index lists all topics alphabetically by keywords.
To expand an index entry and see all its topics,
click a triangle or triangles in the left frame.
To see topics,
click any blue title without a triangle.
To move through the Index using the keyboard
Click the left fwame and type the first letter or letters of any keyword you want to see.
Click OK.
Hint
: You can use keyboard shortcuts in the Index view. Click the view to select it, and press arrow keys, Page Up or Down, CTRL-Home, or CTRL-End.
Notes
Topic
ContentsIntro
ContentsIntro
Go to "Welcome"
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Pagel
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Pagee
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
o`cW/
$HTMLCode
$Comment
$INFO
$FrameInfo
$$ScriptName
$BODY
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
&Arial
Before upgrading to Release 5, be sure to read carefully and thoroughly the
Release Notes
, available in print and as a database (README.NSF). The I
Release Notes
contain critical technical information, documentation, interoperability issues, and updates that were not available in time to be included in the rest of the documentation. A number of the Release Notes pertain to upgrade steps, information, and concerns. ve
&Arial
To upgrade to Release 5, your Domino and Notes system should be running Release 4.1 or later. Lotus recommends upgrading a Release 4 system to the latest Quarterly Maintenance Release (QMR) of that release for the greatest stability and ease of upgrading. For example, upgrade a Release 4.5 systeg to Release 4.5.7.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading from releases prior to Release 4
Click here
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5
Click here
&Arial
To upgrade to Release 5, your Domino and Notes system should be running Release 4.1 or later. If you have Release 3 designs or templates in your organization, such as a Release 3 Names and Address Book, or Release 3 mail files, you must upgrade these designs to at least Release 4.1 before upgrading to Release 5.9
If you upgrade Release 3 clients to Release 5, the Release 5 setup program ignores the workspace and DESKTOP.DSK and creates a blank set of bookmarks.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading from Release 4
Click here
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5E
Click here
&Arial
Back up important Domino serwer files in case you encounter errors during upgrading. If you have problems during upgrading, you can use the backed-up copies to restore your files.o
1. Back up the data directory on your server (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA). This backs up DESKTOP.DSK, all ID files (including the server ID and certifier IDs), LOG.NSF, NAMES.NSF, MAIL.BOX, and any other Public Address Books located on the server.
2. Back up the contents of any directories pointed to by links (DIR files) from wour data directory.
3. Back up the NOTES.INI file for the server. This file is located in the system directory by default (for example, C:\WINNT40).
4. Back up any other Notes databases (NSF), Notes templates (NTF), and any databases pointed to by directory links (DIR).
Go to "
Click here
Removing the Reporter task from the NOTES.INI file.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Shutting down the Domino server
Click here
Click here
Updating the NOTES.INI file
Click here
GN_CENTER
ViewColumn.ALIGN_LEFT
ViewColumn.ALIGN_RIGHT
Click here
Example
H_EXAMPLES_ALIGNMENT_PROPERTY_JAVA
See Also
Click here
Accessing view columns
H_ACCESSING_VIEW_OR_FOLDER_COLUMNS_JAVA
&Arial
mJ~E(B6w
&Arial
Topic
Lotus Product
ContentsIntro
USING HELP
RsRsRsS@
cscscsSscscsSscscscs
rsA3@
rsC3@
rC3O3C
A3O3OS
vc3Or
rsS3@
cS2O@
rcB1O3O
`!bb!R
?<a><a>7`^
RsRsRsRs
0S0r
rrrrrrrr
r Environment:2:2r
0S0r
ironment:2:2
Welcome to Help! To find topics in this Help database, click a title at the left, or click Index or Search.
Notes
Topic
IndexIntro
IndexIntro
How to use the Index
The Index lists all topics alphabetically by keyword.
Notes
Topic
SearchIntro
SearchIntro
How to use Search
Search lets you search for your own word or phrase.
Notes
Topic
AboutHelp
AboutHelp
Topic
About Help
Copyright and trademark information.
Notes
Topic
UsingHelp
UsingHelp
Topic
Using Help
General tips and information.
Notes
Topic
OtherHelpList
OtherHelpList
Other Help
List of othfr Help and documentation databases.
http://notes.net/notesua.nsf
http://notes.net/notesua.nsf
Topic
Documentation Library on the Web
Download the latest documentation, or buy books.
What's covered in
this
Help database
help5_clientG
0S0E
Notes 5 Help explains how to use the Notes Desktop and Notes Mail client products, introducing users to Notes features and common tasks, including sending and receiving mail messages, scheduling appointments with a calendar, setting up Notes for mobile use, using Notes to browse the web, and cveating and formatting rich text, HTML, or plain text documents.
help5_designerG
0S0E
Domino 5 Designer Help, which is available with the product, provides comprehensive information on building, programming, and deploying intranet and Internet applications with Domino Designer. Subsets of Domino 5 Designer Help provide information on specific&aspects of working with Domino Designer
help5_admin
0S0E
Domino 5 Administrator Help explains how to use the Domino Administrator client product, providing information on configuring and managing Domino servers and clusters.
Hint
To keep the Help window visible as you work, choose View - Always on Top.
5.0.3
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docv_ment
Forward This Page
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Pagee
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$HTMLCode
$Comment
$INFO
$WINDOWTITLE
$FrameInfo
$$Script_O
$$ScriptName
$BODY
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
&Arial
Topic
Lotus Product
SearchIntro
TIPS ON SEARCHING
You can search all the topic texv in this database for a word or phrase.
0S0E
Note
If this copy of Help is on your hard drive instead of on a server, please click this button to create a full text index before searching. A full text index makes vearching faster and lists the topics that contain more occurrences of your search entry first. But keep in mind that the index uses extra space on your hard drive, up to 75% of the size of this database.
0S0E
Create Full Text Index
How to type entries
Separate multiple words by AND, OR, NOT, for example, dog AND cat
Enclose phrases in double quotes ("), for example, "domain search"
Use wildcard characters, for example, search* (finds searches, searching)
To search all topics
Click the box in the left frame and type a word or phrase.
Click Search.
To search all topics again
Click Clear Results.
Type a word or pfrase.
Change any desired search options.
Click Search.
To search just the topics you've already found
Type a word or phrase, overwriting the previous word or phrase.
Change any desired search options.
Click Search.
Hints
To reveal more Search options on the left, drag the vight edge of the left frame to the right.
You can press Enter instead of clicking Search.
To open and search other Help databases, click "Go to Welcome," and then click "Other Help."
How to type entries
Separate multiple words by spaces
Don't include any quotes or fperators
To search
Click the box in the left frame and type a word or phrase.
Select a search option from the drop-down list, for example, This exact phrase, Any of these words (AND), or All of these words (OR)&
Click Search.
To search again
Click Search Again
Type a word or phrase.
Select a search option from the drop-down list.
Click Search.
Notes
Topic
ContentsIntro
ContentsIntro
Go to "Welcome"
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Page
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Pagee
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O6Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$HTMLCode
$Comment
$INFO
$FrameInfo
$$Script_O
$$ScriptName
$BODY
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
&Arial
While upgrading to R5 is not difficult, it is important to include representatives from all technical areas and departments involved in the upgrade. This allows your team to evaluate the effect of upgrading on all functional areas and to leverage the skills not only of your Information Systems (IS) department, but of other parts of your organizatiof. At a minimum, your team should comprise:~
Chief Information Officer (CIO)r
Chief Technology Officer (CTO)
Domino server administrators
Network administrators
Support and Help Desk technicians
Application developers
Database managers
Training specialists / educators
End user representatives (especially local experts and power users)
By forming the upgrade team early in your vrocess, you allow greater control and planning of the move to R5, reduce concerns about the upgrade, and create commitment to the move to R5.
349189212829235183
349189212829235184
Leading the upgrade process
Designate one or more project leaders for upgrading to R5. These leaders should:
Coordinate the upgrade schedule
Set up and monitor upgrade testing
Apprise users and management of the upgrade and its effect on vhem
Capture knowledge and share it through best practices
Document issues encountered and their solutions
Coordinate communication, including project databases, meetings, and conference calls
349189212829235185
Upgrading in an international organization
If your organization is an international one, include representatives from each site or geographic area. Different localities have different infrastructures -- for example,&areas with high telecommunications costs may operate a WAN as opposed to a LAN -- and different requirements. Upgrade may affect each area differently -- for example, it is no longer necessary to have a separate MTA server for each character set or language.l
See Also
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 52
Click here
Click here
Create an upgrade plan
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
Planning a pilot upgrade project
Click here
&Arial
Use the skills of your upgrade team and the experience from your upgrade testing to create an upgrade plan. This plan should include the order of operations for your organization -- which servers to upgrade first, then which clients (for example, by department or geographic location), then which applications (ffr example, performance-critical applications first).
349139212829235183
Set procedures
Document the steps your team will take to upgrade servers, clients, and applications. Use the procedures in this guide as a starting point. If your organization customized the Public Address Book, for example, add a step at the end of your upgrade to apply those changes to the new Domino Directory template.
Be sure to include troubleshooting information, procedurfs for backing up key files, ways to notify users that a server will be unavailable or that their client will be upgraded, and contact information for questions.
349139212829235184
Establish strategy
In your plan, include capturing data, issues, solutions, and feedback in a database for use as a knowledge repository. This database will be the starting point for creating a set of guidelines, procedures, and knowledge that represents the best way to upgrade to R5 in&your organization. By capturing feedback as you upgrade, your team can shift its operations or order of events to better meet the organization's needs.
349139212829235185
Set responsibilities
Create roles and responsibilities to designate who performs which functions at what times. For example, your Domino administrators might be responsible for upgrading hub servers in four weeks' time, followed by upgrading mail servers over the next 12 weeks. Ensure that there fs a contact person for each role and responsibility -- this person should be one of the members of the upgrade team.r
349139212829235186
Plan for training
Plan how to train users on the new Notes client interface. While the interface is easy to use, especially for users accustomed to Web browsers, it is different from the earlier Notes interfaces. R4 users can continue to use the workspace, but the new Bookmarks navigation model offers new features and ease of usf.
349139212829235187
Examine hardware and software needs
Consider whether upgrading involves hardware or software changes. For example, if your organization uses Microsoft Windows 3.1 as a client operating system, you must upgrade before moving to R5 -- for example, you could upgrade to Microsoft Windows 98 or Microsoft Windows NT 4.0. While you should not need to change hardware configurations for R5, you may need additional hardware to take full advantage&of R5 features. For example, the transaction log files should be stored on a separate dedicated drive for best server performance, and the Domain Catalog Server that performs domain-wide searches should be a powerful, dedicated machine. Examine your infrastructure and the R5 features you wish to implement and determine whether additions or changes are necessary.p
See Also
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Creating an upgrade team
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
Planning a pilot upgrade project
Click here
Click here
Scheduling upgrading
Click here
&Arial
After you upgrade to Domino Release 5, you no longer need to load or run the SMTP/MIME MTA, since Release 5 provides native SMTP transport and MIME handling. Remove memory management, name lookup controls, and debugging parameters from the NOTES.INI file.C
1. Make sure you backed up important server files. See "
Click here
Backing up Domino server files.
Click here
2. Open the NOTES.INI file for the server you are upgrading in a text editor such as Microsoft Notepad.
3. Delete the entry SMTPMTA from the ServerTasks= line of the file.
4. If the following entries exist in the file, remove them:
NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size
NSF_DbCache_Maxentries
Server_Name_Lookup_Noupdate
Any debugging pavameters
If you run Domino as a Windows NT Service, go to
Click here
"Removing Domino as an NT Service.
Click here
" Otherwise, go to "
Click here
Installing Domino Release 5 on an MTA server.
Click here
Note
The file statistics tasks performed by the Reporter task in Release 4 are handled by the Database Catalog and the statistical analysis done by Reporter fs handled by the Domino performance tools. Instead of Reporter, the Event task can monitor databases and generate an event that notifies the administrator that unused space in a file has reached a threshold level. In addition, this monitoring event can also be set to compact automatically databases that reach the threshold level.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
.AContentsOverview
IntroAdminHelpcca461_f_DlgWarnUpgradeTo461csrv463_f_DlgWarnUpgradeTo461H_UPGRADING_NOTES_DOMINO_TO_R5_OVERTopic1Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5Overview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Planning the Move to R5Upgsading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Upgrading\overviewContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVERTopic1Planning the Move to R5OverviewH_UPGRADING_NOTES_DOMINO_TO_R5_OVER
H_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER_MIDTOPIC_138628006429244842=Preparing to upgrade to R5H_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER_MIDTOPIC_138628006429244843=Designing the upgrade processH_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER_MIDTOPIC_138628006429244844=New Release 5 features01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning#the Move to Release 5
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5Upgrading Notes and Dominc to Release 5
Hardware\upgrading requirementsOperating systems\changes in R5Software\upgrading requirementsUpgrading\hardware requirements forUpgrading\preparation forUpgrading\software requirements forContentsOverviewH_PREPARING_TO_UPGRADE_TO_RELEASE_5_3494_OVERTopic1Preparing to upgrade to Release 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER
H_PREPARING_TO_UPGRADE_TO_RELEASE_5_3494_OVER_MIDTOPIC_104102054429239587=Operating system changesH_PREPARING_TO_UPGRADE_TO_RELEASE_5_3494_OSER_MIDTOPIC_104102054429239588=Hardware requirements01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
87;DIALOG
Reading the Releasc NotesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Release Notes\upgrade informationUpgrading\reading Release Notes beforeContentsOverviewH_READING_THE_RELEASE_NOTES_5284_OVERTopic1Reading the Release NotesOverviewH_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Supporting long file names for Domino on OS/2 WarpUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
File names\OS/2 WarpHPFS\and long file names on OS/2 WarpIBM OS/2 Warp. See OS/2 Warp.OS/2 Warp\long file names andContentsOverviewH_SUPPORTING_LONG_FILE_NAMES_FOR_DOMINO_ON_OS_2_WARP_3473_OVERTopic1Supporting long file#names for Domino on OS/2 WarpOverviewH_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
To use file names that are longer than the 8.3 convention, the server must have an HPFS drive.
Setting up POP3 usersMail
.AContentsOverviewH_SETTING_UP_POP3_USERS_OVERTopic1Setting up POP3 usersOverviewH_DOMINO_POP3_SERVER_OVER03 Administering the Domino System20 Setting up the Domino POP3 Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
9229243801=To manage stationery
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
29204596=SAZ_FORMAT_FUNCTION_MIDTOPIC_23864784029204597=Formatting dates and times in Asian languagesLSAZ_FORMAT_FUNCTION_MIDTOPIC_23864784029204598=Date/time format codes
CN=Da`
4513021
6939485
282605
2232726
27262762
9113002
7023020
12653
26532707
8072761
3677162
2502634
3012643
2722652
12002717
5793022
2569486
2562644
26442655
10012677
242699
2563016
6937164
1009481
9481
25752654
26542676
242799
10017165
25892730
1360 03005
5792612
6982630
13372647
4702713
7757167
4702659
25692695
2695
20032658
20072658
112585
283018
8082780
2562590
25902693
10012738
2050
10414
54610427
100110436
1043610450
10404
58810415
51710426
110437
1043710451
15110473
10473
10399
1039910434
10461
10398
10398
1039810406
57310417
4110424
52210442
1044210453
10410
55410432
42610445
610454
10400
1040010411
15110433
10444
15410477
10477
10403
1040310430
100110447
19410456
11010465
25610474
10474
10402
10402
1040210413
55110420
51510431
55310457
9510475
10475
10449
110458
8110494
10459
10478
10478
10479
10479
10397
10396
67010419
46508
10395
10428
50710493
=" ue
r4>,wte
* Context sensitive Hidden document Created by Crusader.
* Do not copy this document to other databases as the doclinks are specific to this database.
H_SETTING_ADVANCED_DATABASE_PROPERTIES_2783_STEPS in the file help5_admin.nsf
O=Lotus
O=Lotus
PURSAFO
O=Lotus
OU=CAM/O=Lotus
PURSAFO
OU=CAM/O=Lotus
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
PURSAFO
7KGhx~=Cv
\KUOA
$Info
$Body
Upgrading from Release 4Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
QMR\upgrading andUpgrading\Quarterly Maintenance Releases andContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_FROM_RELEASE_4_2975_OVERTopic1Upgrading from Release 4OverviewH_UPGRHDING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
verviewH_A
Upgrading from releases prior to Rhlease 4Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Release 3\upgrading to R5Upgrading\Notes Release 3 andContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_FROM_RELEASES_PRIOR_TO_RELEASE_4_1300_OVERTopic1Upgrading from releases prior to Release 4OverviewH_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
1: What yo
Creating an upgrade teamUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
International organizations\upgrading inUpgrade team\creatingUpgrading\in international organizationsUpgrading\tasksContentsOverviewH_CREATING_AN_UPGRADE_TEAM_4840_OVERTopic1Creating an upgrade teamOverviewH_UXGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER
H_CREATING_AN_UPGRADE_TEAM_4840_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349189212829235183=H_CREATING_AN_UPGRADE_TEAM_4840_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349189212829235184=Leading the upgrade processH_CREATING_AN_UPGRADE_TEAM_4840_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349189212829235185=Upgrading in an international organization01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
e or edit a
Create an upgrade planUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Training\for Release 5Upgrade plan\creatingUpgrading\planningContentsOverviewH_CREATE_AN_UPGRADE_PLAN_2987_OVERTopic1Create an upgrade planOverviewH_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER
H_CREATE_AN_UPGRADE_PLAN_2987_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235183=Set proceduresH_CREATE_AN_UPGRADE_PLAN_2987_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235184=Establish strategyH_CREATE_AN_UPGRADE_PLAN_2987_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235185=Set responsibilitiesH_CREATE_AN_UPGRADE_PLAN_2987_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235186=Plan for trainingH_CREATE_AN_UPGRADE_PLAN_2987_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235187=Examine hardware and software needs01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Planning order of operations for upgradingUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Administration clients\upgradinhApplication servers\upgradingApplications\upgradingDatabases\upgradingDomino system\upgradingHub servers\upgradingMail servers\upgradingNotes client\upgradingContentsOverviewH_PLANNING_ORDER_OF_OPERATIONS_FOR_UPGRADING_4108_OVERTopic1Planning order of operations for upgradingOverviewH_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER
H_PLANNING_ORDER_OF_OPERATIONS_FOR_UPGRADING_4108_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235183=Hub serversH_PLANNING_ORDER_OF_OPERATIONS_FOR_UPGRADING_4108_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235188=Mail serversH_PLANNING_ORDER_OF_OPERATIONS_FOR_UPGRADING_4108_OVER_MIDTOPIC_104102054429239587=H_PLANNING_ORDER_OF_OPERATIONS_FOR_UPGRADING_4108_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235185=Application serversH_PLANNING_ORDER_OF_OPERATIONS_FOR_UPGRADING_4108_OVER_MIDTOPIC_104102054429239588=H_PLANNING_ORDER_OF_OPERATIONS_FOR_UPGRADING_4108_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235186=Notes clientsH_PLANNING_ORDER_OF_OPERATIONS_FOR_UPGRADING_4108_OVER_MIDTOPIC_104102054429239589=H_PLANNING_ORDER_OF_OPERATIONS_FOR_UPGRADING_4108_OXER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235187=Applications and databases01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
OU=CAM/O
Planning a pilot upgrade projectUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Pilot projects\for upgradingUpgrading\pilot projects andContentsOverviewH_PLANNING_A_PILOT_UPGRADE_PROJECT_3306_OVERTopic1Planning a pilot upgrade projectOverviewH_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER
H_PLANNING_A_PILOT_UPGRADE_PROJECT_3306_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235183=Reproduce the organizational infrastructureH_PLANNING_A_PILOT_UPGRADE_PROJECT_3306_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235184=Consider dependenciesH_PLANNINH_A_PILOT_UPGRADE_PROJECT_3306_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235185=Share knowledgeH_PLANNING_A_PILOT_UPGRADE_PROJECT_3306_OVER_MIDTOPIC_89504800029237001=Consider an initial deployment01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Conten
Scheduling upgradingUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
H_SCHEDULING_UPGRADING_8372_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349189212829235183=Consider organizational needsH_SCHEDULING_UPGRADING_8372_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349189212829235184=Allow time to captxre knowledgeH_SCHEDULING_UPGRADING_8372_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349189212829235185=Identify dependenciesH_SCHEDULING_UPGRADING_8372_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349189212829235186=Ensure accountability01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
To access a newsgroup server
Mail and Address Book
Newsgroups\accessing
ContentsStepsH_CONNECTING_TO_NEWSGROUPS_861_OVER_MIDTOPIC_256671987229249069YesTopic1To access a newsgroup serverStepsH_CONNECTING_TO_NEWSGROUPS_861_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
Upgrading your Domino system needs to be an organized process to minimize work and avoid disrupting users. Server upgrades, for example, should take place at times when few users are connected -- such as weekends or late at night. D
Track your procedures, difficulties, solutions, and questions so that you can make this information available in later upgrade stages. Use a Notes database or a Domino Web site to provide "best practices" in upgrading for the rest of your organization.
Lotus recommends upgrading to R5 in the following order:
Hub servers
Mail servers
Application servers
Notes clients
Applications and databases
By upgrading servers before clients, and servers/clients before applications, you minimize disruption to users and to business activities. Users don't see R5 features until their clients can utilize them; conversely, users don't attempt to take advantage of features, such as mail(rules, until their servers can handle them. In addition, this order allows administrators to become accustomed to the new, easier to use Domino Administrator client before assisting users with upgrading.
349139212829235183
Hub servers
Hub servers handle significant mail and replication traffic and benefit greatly from the improved performance and administration in Domino R5. In addition, few end users access hub servers, so any downtime for upgrading is less disrxptive. Hub servers are generally run by administrators experienced with Domino, who can quickly implement R5 and troubleshoot any problems that occur.
At the same time you upgrade the hub servers for your organization, upgrade the administration clients that administer your Domino servers. The R5 Domino Administrator streamlines administration tasks with a new graphical interface and has advanced server monitoring and troubleshooting capabilities. In addition, the Domino Administrator works whth the new Domino Directory template to speed and ease administration.
349139212829235184
Mail servers
After upgrading your hub servers, use the knowledge, experience, and procedures gained from that process when you upgrade your organization's mail servers. Domino R5 includes numerous performance enhancements and new features to make your mail infrastructure even faster, more powerful, and reliable. Users benefit from increased performance and features such as nhtive MIME and SMTP, the ability to undo deletions, and a "universal inbox" for multiple mail accounts. Upgrading mail servers takes longer than upgrading hubs and involves more people, but the experience gained from working with the hubs should streamline this process. d
Wait to upgrade users' mail files to the new R5 mail template until Notes users move to R5. You can, though, upgrade mail files to the new database format (On-Disk Structure, or ODS) for faster compaction and view rebuilds, eaxier backup and recovery, and new performance enhancements. For your users who access mail only from POP (Post Office Protocol) or IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) clients such as Microsoft Outlook and Netscape Communicator, you can upgrade their mail files to the R5 template immediately.
For more information on upgrading servers routing Internet mail with the SMTP/MIME MTA, see "
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Rhlease 5.0.b
Click here
For more information on upgrading mail servers without the MTA, see "
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server.
Click here
104102054429239587
349139212829235185
Application serversk
Your applications, and the servers they run on, are often the heart of your business, so upgrade them once your team is thoroughly familiar with the procedures,(issues, and techniques used to move to R5. Carefully test your applications on Domino R5 before upgrading your production environment -- while complete backwards compatibility is the goal for R5, issues may arise with applications that use undocumented features or creative workarounds. See "
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
" for more information. Consider whether to upgrade the ODS of your applications to R5 -- gaining performance improvhments, backup and transaction logging capabilities, or whether to leave them in R4 ODS so R4 clients and servers can create replicas from them.
104102054429239588
349139212829235186
Notes clients
Roll out Notes R5 to your users after upgrading the servers those clients access. Notes R5 upgrades R4 clients automatically, creating a set of bookmarks based on a user's workspace and upgrading the design of the Personal Address Book. Users may nhed training on how to use the new Notes user interface, though the similarity between the new UI and Web browsers eases the transition.
For more information, see "
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5.
Click here
104102054429239589
349139212829235187
Applications and databases
Once you upgrade Domino servers and Notes clients, begin upgrading your applications and(databases to R5. This involves moving to the new R5 ODS, or database format, and replacing the designs of standard databases (such as mail files, discussion databases, and document libraries) with R5 templates. Since R4 and earlier clients cannot use R5 features, make sure your users are upgraded to R5 before implementing R5 templates or features in your databases and applications.
Upgrading database format to R5 ODS is uncomplicated -- ODS does not replicate, so you can upgrade a replica to X5 ODS on an R5 server and let it replicate with an R4 replica on an R4 server. However, once a database is in R5 ODS, new replicas and copies of that database are in R5 format by default. Thus, while your infrastructure has mixed releases, you may want to keep some databases in R4 ODS. Once your system has completed its transition to R5, though, upgrade any remaining R4 databases to R5 ODS to gain the performance and reliability enhancements that the new format offers.
Upgrading database desigh and features to R5 involves more considerations than the database format upgrade. In a mixed-release environment, R4 and earlier clients may not be able to see or use R5 features, so implementing an R5 template or features may be of concern. For example, while an R4 client can access an R5 mail file, usability is significantly decreased. Implement R5 templates and features only when your users can successfully access and use them. Generally, this means waiting to use R5 features and templates until your uxers have moved to R5.
For more information, see "
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Creating an upgrade team
Click here
Click here
Create an upgrade plan
Click here
Click here
Planning a pilot upgrade project
Click here
Click here
Scheduling upgrading
Click here
Click here
Testing applications before upgrading
Click here
Click here
Training and Release 5
Click here
h{age
&Arial
Before upgrading your system to Release 5, test upgrade procedures in a non-production environment where you can try things, make mistakes, and gain valuable experience. While upgrading to Release 5 is straightforward, each organization has a different infrastructure, needs, and deployment. By testing, you famihiarize yourself and your upgrade team with the procedures and process of upgrading.
In addition, it is essential that you test important applications and databases in a Release 5 environment before you move them to R5. For example, if your company relies on an R4 supply chain application, copy this application and test it on an R5 server with R5 ODS and any R5 features you want to implement. Verifying that an application does not encounter any issues with R5, or documenting the issues that yhu do encounter and their solutions, lends support and credibility to your upgrade efforts..
349139212829235183
Reproduce the organizational infrastructure
A pilot upgrade project should reproduce, on a smaller scale, the Domino system in your organization. If your organization makes heavy use of clustered servers, test clustering under R5 and clustering in a mixed R4/R5 environment. If you use a series of Message Transfer Agent (MTA) servers to handle Internet mahl that is critical to the success of your business, test how an R5 Internet mail server operates in your environment. If your organization has mixed releases -- for example, some clients use R4.1 and some R4.6 -- test upgrading both releases to R5. In a company that makes heavy use of the calendar and scheduling features in the Notes mail database, test how new features such as clustered Freetime databases and repeating meetings operate. e
349139212829235184
Consider dependenches
Create a list of Notes and Domino features and databases that are mission-critical for your organization. Consider the standard deployment for your infrastructure -- for example, your company may place all mail files on clustered mail servers to ensure high reliability, failover, and load balancing. List the different types of servers you use -- some companies use Domino only for mail, other use it for messaging, applications, Web site hosting, and directory services among other roles. Tesx each of these items -- whether a vital application, server configuration, or role -- under R5. This lets you accumulate knowledge and create best practices for the deployment of your organization.
349139212829235185
Share knowledgee
Once you have compiled best practices, communicate them to your upgrade team and to all parts of your organization involved in upgrading to R5. This lets others benefit from your experiences, minimizing effort, mistakes, and duplicatihn, and allowing you to maximize productivity. e
89504800029237001
Consider an initial deployment
In larger companies and especially in enterprise organizations, consider a limited-scale deployment to one group or business unit that serves as a model for the rest of the organization. Use this deployment of R5, along with your pilot project, to test your assumptions, plans, and expectations regarding the upgrade, interoperability, and training on the new software. Hhoose a group for the deployment that is comfortable with Domino and Notes and with change and learning. Make sure the group is invested in the project by discussing its benefits for them and encouraging them to share their concerns. Support their transition to Release 5 and capture their experiences and feedback for use in planning your organizational upgrade. 0
Encourage users to share their experiences and feedback about Release 5 and about the rollout procedure so that you can adapt your phan to avoid problems and leverage strengths.
Think of this initial deployment as a beta release of your upgrade plan -- it allows you to test your plan under actual business conditions and to work out any issues before moving to a company-wide rollout.
This type of initial, small-scale deployment may not be necessary for smaller companies, who have fewer issues regarding scalability, and for companies who need to upgrade to Release 5 quickly. Even without a such a deployment, caxture feedback and experiences to evaluate and modify your upgrade strategy as you move through it.
See Also
Click here
Creating an upgrade team
Click here
Click here
Create an upgrade plan
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
Scheduling upgrading
Click here
Click here
Testing applications before upgrading
Click here
Click here
Training and Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Schedule upgrading your production environment after you have tested upgrading in your lab environment. You can upgrade in a stepwise fashion; for example, test upgrading servers, then upgrade servers while yhu test client upgrade in your lab.e
349189212829235183
Consider organizational needsr
When scheduling upgrading, consider the effect on your organization and solicit input from representatives on your team and from management for each area or department that is being moved to R5. Some departments may be in a period when they are working on time- or mission-critical projects and cannot be disturbed; schedule these departments for later in the upgrade process. Otherx may have a high concentration of skilled "power" users; these users may be good candidates for early upgrades so they can provide feedback on your procedures and the R5 software.
349189212829235184
Allow time to capture knowledge
When you schedule, be certain to allow sufficient time not only to perform the tasks involved in upgrading -- backing up the software, installing it, checking for problems, and training administrators and users -- but also time to recorh issues encountered, solutions created, and feedback elicited. This initial investment of time results in streamlined procedures and increased satisfaction with upgrading and with the software.
349189212829235185
Identify dependencies
Identify any dependencies in your process and be certain to schedule appropriately. For example, if you need to upgrade your client operating system, you cannot move to R5 until this step is complete. The upgrade process as a whole hannot begin until the upgrade team is organized and has developed procedures for upgrading. After you draft a schedule, review it with dependencies in mind so that you do not schedule a task before its dependencies have been addressed.
349189212829235186
Ensure accountability1
Be sure to create accountability for upgrade success by assigning a person or people responsible for each item on the schedule and a date when that item needs to be completed. Allow some flexibility in the schedule and in due dates to accommodate unexpected issues and the need for learning.T
See Also
Click here
Creating an upgrade team
Click here
Click here
Create an upgrade plan
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
Testing applications before uphradingh
Click here
Click here
Training and Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Release 4 applications should function unchanged under R5. However, it is essential that you test important applications in a lab environment before upgrading your mission-critical production applications to Release 5 in a production setting. Sophisticated applications call for careful testing since potential issues may be subtle or not easily evaluated. 2
Create a list of the key features and functions in your applications and evaluate their functionality under R5. Apply any R5 templates and the R5 ODS to applicationx. Be careful to document and test
Custom changes you have made to standard templates. R5 templates may incorporate the functionality you added, making it unnecessary, or may have changed how the feature you are using works.
Reuse of template code. If you duplicated standard template code, such as LotusScript
or @commands, in your applications, be aware that changes in how this code functions in templates will also be reflected in how your application works.
Use of uhdocumented features or settings. You may have used features, commands, or items in Notes that are undocumented and unsupported. While these items may work well in the current release, they may have changed in R5 -- either by moving into the supported code and feature set, or by no longer working at all.
Creative workarounds. You may have used creative coding or design to work around a limitation in earlier releases. These workarounds may no longer be necessary in R5, or functionality changes hould change how the workarounds operate.
Be certain to test thoroughly your applications under conditions that mirror production use of the applications. Document your test procedures and results, and make them available to your upgrade team. Incorporate them into your best practices documentation.
349189212829235183
Use a test environment
A test environment is an ideal place to experiment with new R5 features and functionality -- it provides(real-world conditions without risk to your applications or impact on your business. Before rolling out a new R5 feature set or code, use it in your test environment to prove its stability and that it functions as intended. R5 features are generally not available to older clients, so evaluate their usability and impact on older releases before rolling them out to your applications and users.
Back up key applications before upgrading them. If there are problems during the upgrade, or if you encoxnter issues after upgrading, you can replace the application with the backed-up version.e
Note
After upgrading the design of an application to R5, you must rebuild the views in that database. You can do this by opening the database in a Notes client and pressing CTRL + SHIFT + F9, or by typing the command:
load updall databaseName.nsf -r
at the Domino server console and pressing Enter.
For more information, see "
Hlick here
Upgrading databases and applications.
Click here
Steps for testing applications
Your testing strategy may vary depending on the number of applications your organization needs to test. You determined which applications to test when you created a test plan.
1. If you have not done so already, install Domino Designer on your workstation.
2. Create documents using each form in the apphication, including hidden forms. Make sure you can enter information into each field in the form, that buttons work correctly, and that the text on the form displays correctly.
3. Open in each view the documents you just created. Make sure they display correctly and formulas calculate correctly. Make sure hidden views work correctly.
4. Display the documents you just created. Make sure they display correctly and formulas calculate correctly.
5. If the applicathon uses external databases or files, modify data in the external database or file and make sure the application updates the formulas correctly.
6. If the application uses formulas that reference hidden views in system databases--for example, the Public Address Book--make sure these formulas work correctly.
7. If the application uses external OLE applications, create forms that use the OLE application and launch the objects.
8. Test any agents to make sure they(work correctly.
9. Check the security of the database. For example, check the access control list; encryption keys; roles; and the readers and authors access.
10. If the application uses selective replication formulas, test these formulas to make sure they are working correctly. For example, check the replica database to make sure the documents you selected replicated properly.
11. Repeat Steps 2 through 11 for every application you need to test.
Steps for documenting applications
Documenting applications organizes essential information about the application before you begin testing. If you have not already documented your application when you created it, you must complete these steps.
1. (Optional) Create a database to store testing information. This helps you keep track of progress, especially if you have many applications to test. If other people need to use this database at several sites, create h design template that they can use.
2. Document the type of application and its purpose. For example, determine whether this is a discussion, mail-in, or NotesFlowL
application. If it is a mail-in application, document the name that the Public Address Book uses. If it is a NotesFlow application, document the databases that this application uses.
3. Document any external databases or files that this application uses. For example, determine whether this applhcation accesses data stored in an external database or file using @DbCommand or @DbLookup.
4. Document any Notes databases that this application references. If the application references databases created with system templates--for example, the Public Address Book--document whether the formulas in the application reference hidden views. Many system design templates are changed in Release 5. Therefore certain views may no longer exist. To prevent problems, do not design applications that relx on hidden views in system design templates.
5. Document any Notes API programs that this application uses or any API programs that modify this application.
6. Document any external OLE applications that this application uses.g
7. Document the servers that this application replicates with.
8. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 for every application you need to document.t
See Also
Click here
Creating ah upgrade team
Click here
Click here
Create an upgrade plan
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
Planning a pilot upgrade project
Click here
Click here
Scheduling upgrading
Click here
&Arial
Plan a training program on using the new user interface in Notes R5. The new UI is similar to that of Web browsers, so most users should move to it easily. Many companies use both a formal and informal training program.t
The formal program uses professional trainers, consultants, or employees who are expert in using Domino and Notes. It is short-term and is often presented as a seminar or class. Thh program combines instructor presentations with laboratory exercises and reading assignments to give users a basic grounding in the new features of Release 5.
The informal program makes resources available to users as they interact with the software and encounter questions and problems. These resources often include a central help desk able to answer questions on software and hardware issues as well as local experts in each group who are knowledgeable about the system. D
Consider(using computer-based training (CBT) or Web-based training for users. Set up a database for user questions; other users and support analysts can answer the questions. This reduces calls to the help desk and provides a knowledge resource for users. In addition, you may want to have occasional presentations on aspects of the software.
See Also
Click here
Creating an upgrade team
Click here
Click here
Creaxe an upgrade plan
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
Planning a pilot upgrade project
Click here
&Arial
If you run Domino as a Windows NT Service, you must uninstall the Domino NT Service before upgrading to R5. Perform the following steps to remove Domiho as an NT Service.
1. Choose Start - Run.
2. Type
NTSVINST -De
and click OK.
Go to
Click here
"Installing Domino Release 5 on an MTA server
Click here
&Arial
After upgrading your Domino server and Domino Directory, upgrade your Directory Assistance database to Release 5.
1. Launch the Notes client.
2. Choose File - Database - Open.
3. In the Server box, select the server that contahns your Directory Assistance database.
4. Navigate to and select the Directory Assistance database.
5. Click Open.
6. Choose File - Database - Replace Design.
7. Click the Template Server button.
8. Select a Domino Release 5 server which has the new Directory Assistance template (DA50.NTF).
9. Click OK.
10. Select the Directory Assistance template (DA50.NTF).
11. Click OK.
(12. When Notes asks if you wish to replace the template, click Yes.
13. Close the Directory Assistance database.
The Directory Assistance template is backwards-compatible; you can and should replicate the new design to your R4 servers running Directory Assistance.
If your system runs Domino 4.5, you should follow the same steps, except you upgrade the Master Address Book instead of Directory Assistance.
Note
Cascaded direcxories continue to work, though you will see benefits from upgrading to Directory Assistance.
See Also
Click here
Retrieving LDAP information in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documents
Testing applications before upgradingUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Agents\testingApplications\documentingApplications\testingApplications\upgradingForms\testingRelease 4\testing applicationz created forTest environment\for upgrading applicationsTesting applicationsViews\testingContentsStepsH_TESTING_APPLICATIONS_BEFORE_UPGRADING_6532_OVERTopic1Testing applications before upgradingStepsH_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER
H_TESTING_APPLICATIONS_BEFORE_UPGRADING_6532_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349189212829235183=Use a test environmentH_TESTING_RELEASE_3X_APPLICATIONS=Steps for testing applicationsH_DOCUMENTING_RELEASE_3X_APPLICATIONS=Steps for documenting applications01 Moving to Notes and Domino Releaze 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
S_OVER_MI
Training and Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Training\for Release 5Uzgrade trainingContentsOverviewH_TRAINING_AND_RELEASE_5_2952_OVERTopic1Training and Release 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Internet mail servers\upgradingMTA servers\upgradingMail routing\SMTP/MIME MTASMTP/MIME MTA\upgradingServers\upgradingContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVERTopic1Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Zelease 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_NOTES_DOMINO_TO_R5_OVER
H_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER_MIDTOPIC_288466089629244025=New FeaturesH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER_MIDTOPIC_104456275229308164=System TemplatesH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER_MIDTOPIC_287360115229244014=Replacing the SMTP/MIME MTAH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER_MIDTOPIC_287360:15229244015=Internet mailH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER_MIDTOPIC_287360115229244016=Upgrade changesH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER_MIDTOPIC_287360115229244017=<-*>01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Backing up files on an MTA serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
MTA servers\backing up files before upgradingSMTP/MIME MTA\backing up files before upgradingServer filesZbacking up before upgradingServer upgrade\backing up files for MTAContentsStepsH_BACKING_UP_FILES_ON_AN_MTA_SERVER_8233_STEPSTopic1Backing up files on an MTA serverStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Anchor
Disabling SMTP/MIME MTA housekeepingUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
MTA servers\disabling housekeeping onMessage queues\clearingSMTP/MIME MTA\disabling housekeeping before upgradingServer upgrade\disabling housekeeping for MTAContentsStepsH_SHUTTING_DOWN_MTA_HOUSEKEEPING_7924_STEPSTopic1Disabling SMTP/MIJE MTA housekeepingStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
, pop-up te
Shutting down the routerUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
MTA servers\shutting down router before upgradingMail routers\shutting downRouters\shutting down before upgradingSMTP/MIME MTA\shutting down router before upgradingServer upgrade\shutting down router for MTAContentsStepsH_SHUTTING_DOWN_THE_ROUTER_2088_STEPSTopic1Shutting down the routerStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domijo Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
text pop-u
Shutting down the inbound transportUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
ISESCTL\shutting down before upgrading MTAInbound Session Controller task\shutting downInbound transport\shutting down before upgrading MTAMTA servers\shutting down inbound transportSMTP/MIME MTA\shutting down inbound transportContentsStepsH_SHUTTING_DOWN_THE_INBOUND_TRANSPORT_4616_STEPSTopic1Shutting down the inbound transportStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
sFormatti
The IMAP serviceMail
.AContentsOverviewH_THE_IMAP_SERVICE_OVERTopic1The IMAP serviceOverviewH_MAIL_OVER_p03 Administering the Domino System21 Setting up the Domijo IMAP Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
Consider conducting a pilot project to test your plans for upgrading your Internet mail servers before you begin moving your organization to Release 5. A pilot project lets you refine your plans and deal with any issues that arise on a smaller scale.
For more information, see "y
Click here
Upgrading to Release 5.
Click here
To upgrade a Relhase 4 MTA to a Release 5 mail server, perform the following steps in order:
1.
Click here
Back up important files.
Click here
2.
Click here
Disable the SMTP/MIME MTA housekeeping.
Click here
3.
Click here
Shut down the router.
Click here
4.
Click here
Shut down the inbound transport of messages.
Click here
5.
Click here
Clear SMTP.BOX.
Click here
6.
Click here
Clear messages from the outbound MTA queue.
Click here
7.
Click here
Clear messages from the inbound MTA queue.
Click here
8.
Click here
Shut down the MTA server.
Click here
9.
Click here
Updaxe the server's NOTES.INI file.
Click here
10. If you run Domino as a Windows NT Service,
Click here
remove the NT Service.
Click here
11.
Click here
Install the Domino Release 5 software.
Click here
12.
Click here
Upgrade the Public Address Book.
Click here
13.
Click here
Set the server(configuration for the Internet mail server.
Click here
14.
Click here
Enable the SMTP listener task in the Server document for the Internet mail server.
Click here
15. If the upgraded server is the administration server for the domain's Domino Directory,
Click here
upgrade its Administration Requests database
Click here
Note
Given the time ix may take to clear messages from the inbound and outbound queues, Lotus recommends you upgrade an MTA server at nonpeak times, such as early mornings or on weekends. The MTA is unavailable while you clear the queues and upgrade it, affecting Internet mail delivery, routing, and performance.
Note
Domino automatically upgrades MAIL.BOX to the R5 database format and design. Any messages in MAIL.BOX are preserved.
See also information on:
288466089629244025
New Features
Click here
New Domino mail features
Click here
104456275229308164
System Templates
Click here
Upgrading system templates on an MTA server
Click here
Click here
Template interoperability on an MTA server
Click here
287360115229248014
Replacing the SMTP/MIME MTAt
Click here
How R5 replaces the MTA
Click here
Click here
Configuration in R4 vs. R5
Click here
Click here
MTA upgrade scenariosP
Click here
Click here
Replacing R4 MTAs with R5 mail servers
Click here
Click here
Using a third-party relay hoxt with an R5 mail serverC
Click here
Click here
Using the cc:Mail and X.400 MTAs with Domino R5
Click here
287360115229244015
Internet mail
Click here
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environments
Click here
Click here
Encrypted messages in mixed environments
Click here
Click here
Sending mail in Notes format to Internet users
Click here
Click here
Internet mail addresses in Domino Release 5h
Click here
Click here
Internet mail storage format in Domino Release 5
Click here
287360115229244016
Upgrade changesa
Click here
Upgrading an MTA server and NOTES.INI parameters
Clhck here
Click here
IMAP and POP conversion changes in Release 5
Click here
Click here
Relay host changes in Domino Release 5
Click here
Click here
Using dial-up with Domino Release 5
Click here
287360115229244017
Click here
NSFBufferPool size in R5
Click here
Performance improvemhnts
Click here
Upgrading an Internet mail server to use multiple threads
Click here
Click here
Multiple MAIL.BOX databases on a mail server
Click here
See Also
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
New Domino mail features
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Domino Administrationf
Click here
Click here
Preparing to send and receive mail to the Internet
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing outside the local Internet domain
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing
Click here
&Arial
Back up important Domino server files in case you encounter errors during upgrading. If you haveproblems during upgxading, you can use the backed-up copies to restore your files.
1. Back up the data directory on your server (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA). This backs up DESKTOP.DSK, all ID files (including the server ID and certifier IDs), LOG.NSF, NAMES.NSF, MAIL.BOX, and any other Public Address Books located on the server.
2. Back up the contents of any directories or databases pointed to by links (.DIR files) from your data directory.
3. Back up the NOTES.INI file for the xerver. This file is located in the system directory by default (for example, C:\WINNT40).
4. Back up any other Notes databases (.NSF) or Notes templates (.NTF).
Go to "
Click here
Disabling SMTP/MIME MTA housekeeping.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Before upgrading an R4 MTA server, disable MTA housekeeping. If you do not disable housekeeping and you clear the message queues during a time when it is set to run (1 AM by default), the MTA turns itself off, performs housekeeping tasks, and then turns itself on. This enables inbound and outbound transport, undoing the work of clearing the queues.
1. Make sure you backed up the MTA server files. See "
Click here
Backing up files on an MTA server.
Click here
2. Launch the Lotus Notes client from which you administer the MTA server.
3. Choose File - Database - Open.
4. In the Server field, type the name of the SMTP/MIME MTA server and click Open.
5. Select the Public Address Book for the MTA server's domain and click Open.
6. In the Public Address Book, open the Server/Servers view by expanding the views undhr Server in the left pane and clicking Servers or by choosing View - Servers - Other, selecting Server/Servers, and clicking OK.u
7. Select the Server document for the MTA server.
8. Click the Edit Server button on the Action bar.
9. Expand the Internet Message Transfer Agent (SMTP MTA) section.
10. Under Control, click the down arrow next to the field "Enable daily housekeeping."e
11. Select Disable and click OK.S
12.
Click the Save and Close button on the Action bar.o
13. Close the Public Address Book.
Go to "
Click here
Shutting down the router.R
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Backing up files on an MTA server
Click here
&Arial
Shut down the router to keep other servers from routing outbound messages to the MTA.
1. Make sure you disabled MTA housekeeping. See "
Click here
Disabling SMTP/MIME MTA housekeeping.
Click here
2. Change to the Domino server console.A
3. Typel
tell router quit
and press ENTER.
The server shows the router task shutting down.
@ @@ @` @
@@ @@@@@`@@
`@ `@@`@``@
Shutting down the router prevents it from transferring more messages to SMTP.BOX and lets the MTA empty the outbound queue by processing existing messages. Incoming messages are held in MAIL.BOX and processed by the server after yhu upgrade it to Release 5.
Go to "
Click here
Shutting down the inbound transport.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Disabling SMTP/MIME MTA housekeeping
Click here
&Arial
1. Make sure you backed up all important Domino files. See "
Click here
Backing up files on an MTA server.
Click here
2. Make sure you followed the procedures to clear messages from the MTA, beginning with
Click here
disabling the SMTP/MIME MTA housekeeping.
Click here
3. Install the Domino Rehease 5 software. If you install Domino in the same directory as the previous version, you do not need to make any changes to the server configuration. If you install Domino in a new directory, the program prompts you to configure the server.
4. During installation, select the server type for which you purchased a license. For many organizations, this involves installing a Domino Mail Server on your MTA server.t
5. After installing R5, launch the Domino server.
Seh
Setting Up a Domino Server
for more details.
Setting Up a Domino Server
is available in print and as an Adobe Acrobat (.PDF) file.e
Note
Installing a Domino server does not install the Domino Administrator (Release 5 administration client). You must perform a second installation using the client setup program to install a Domino Administrator on the server computer. Lotus recommends you administer the server from a separate computex.
Go to "
Click here
Upgrading the Public Address Book for an Internet mail server.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Backing up files on an MTA serverN
Click here
Click here
Updating the NOTES.IHI file for the Internet mail server
Click here
&Arial
The Domino server prompts you to upgrade the design of the Public Address Book with the R5 Domino Directory template (PUBNAMES.NTF) after upgrading. The new Domino Directory template works with the Domino Administrator client to streamline directory and server administration. The Domino Directory is backwards-compatible and is designed for use in mixed-release environments. Upgrade the design of your address book to the Release 5 Domino Directory template after xou upgrade your server to Release 5. Then upgrade the database format of the Domino Directory by compacting the database and rebuilding its views.
324088825629236990
Upgrading the Public Address Book to the Domino Directory template
1. When Domino asks if you want to upgrade the Public Address Book design to the Release 5 template, type
This replaces the R4 Public Address Book template with the R5 Domino Directory template.
2. Once the server launches, verify that there are no errors or problems. Then, quit the server. Type
quit
and press ENTER.
246176896029227116
Compacting the Domino Directory after upgrading
1. From the command line of your operating system, change to the Domino program directory and compact the Domino Directory to the new R5 ODS.
On Microsoft Windows NT (Intel platforms), type
ncompact names.nsf
and press ENTER.
Note
If your Domino Directory has a file name other than NAMES.NSF, substitute the correct file name for NAMES.NSF.
On Microsoft Windows NT (Alpha platforms), type
acompact names.nsf
and press ENTER.
Note
If your Domino Directory has a file name other than NAMES.NSF, substitute the correct file name for NAMES.NSF.
On IBM OS/2 Xarp, type
icompact names.nsf
and press ENTER.
Note
If your Domino Directory has a file name other than NAMES.NSF, substitute the correct file name for NAMES.NSF.
On UNIX platforms, type
compact names.nsf
and press ENTER.
Note
If your Domino Directory has a file name other than names.nsf, substitute the correct file name for names.nsf.
This moves the Domino Directory from the R4 ODS to the R5 ODS.
2. After you compact the Domino Directory to the new R5 database format, rebuild the ($ServerAccess) and the ($Users) views in the Domino Directory.
200169699229229349
Rebuilding views in the Domino Directory
1. From the command line of your operating system, rebuild the ($ServerAccess) and ($Users) views in the Domino Directory.
On Microsoft Windows NT (Intel plaxforms), type
nupdall names.nsf -t "($ServerAccess)" -r
and press ENTER. Then type
nupdall names.nsf -t "($Users)" -r
and press ENTER.
On Microsoft Windows NT (Alpha platforms), type
aupdall names.nsf -t "($ServerAccess)" -r
and press ENTER. Then type
aupdall names.nsf -t "($Users)" -r
and press ENTER.
On IBM OS/2 Warp, type
iupdall names.nsf -t "($ServerAccess)"(-r
and press ENTER. Then type
iupdall names.nsf -t "($Users)" -r
and press ENTER.
On UNIX platforms, type
updall names.nsf -t /($ServerAccess) -r
and press ENTER. Then type
updall names.nsf -t /($Users) -r
and press ENTER.
Rebuilding the ($ServerAccess) and ($Users) views in the Domino Directory allows clients to access the server more quickly.
2. After you rebuild views ih the Domino Directory, launch the Domino server.
324088825629236991
Updating views in databases on the upgraded Domino server.
1. Once the Domino server is running, type
load updall
and press ENTER.
This rebuilds database views, allowing users to access the Domino Directory and other databases on the server more quickly. The amount of time Updall takes to run depends on the number of databases on the server, the size of the databases, and the complexity of the views in those databases.
35769136029233966
Replicating the Domino Directory design to other servers
Once you upgrade a server to R5, you can and should replicate the Domino Directory design to the Public Address Books on your organization's other servers, including Release 4 and Release 3 servers. The Domino Directory is designed for use in mixed-release environments and for administering R4 and earlier servers.
Note
After replicating the new template to other servers, you must rebuild the views in the Domino Directories / Public Address Books on those servers. The view rebuild for the R5 template on an R4 or R3 server is time-consuming. Lotus recommends you replicate the template and rebuild the views for pre-R5 servers on a weekend or during other times when server load is low.
Go to "
Click here
Setting server configuration for an Internet mail xerver.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Installing Domino Release 5 on an MTA server
Click here
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Using the Domiho Directory Profile
Click here
&Arial
In R5, as well as R4 releases after R4.6.2, Web clients cannot authenticate from cascaded Public Address Books or Domino Directories (the NAMES= line in the NOTES.INI file). To authenticate Web clients using secondary address books or directories, set up Directory Assistance. d
For more information on configuring Directory Hssistance, see "e
Click here
Setting up directory assistance.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Working with the Domino Directoryc
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Directory Assistance
Click here
plicaID method
H_OPHNBYREPLICAID_METHOD
Click here
ReplicaID property
H_REPLICAID_PROPERTY
Click here
Server property
H_SERVER_PROPERTY
&Arial
database.
In a document in Edit mode or a form or subform in Design mode, pastes the contents of the Clipboard into the document, form, or subform. If the data was copied from a rich text field but is pasted into a non
rich text field( some information may be lost.
In a document in Read mode, or if the Clipboard is empty, has no effect.
&Arial
C@@P
&Arial
Shutting down the inbound transport prevents the MTA from receiving SMTP messages addressed to recipients in your organization. This allows you to clear the Inbound and Outbound Work Queues.
1. Make sure you shut down the router. See "
Click here
Shutting down the router.n
Click here
2. Type
tell smtpmta stop inbound transport
and press ENTER.
The server shows the open Inbound Session Controllers and the Inbound Session Controller task (ISESCTL) shutting down:
@ @@ @` @
@@ @@@@@`@@
`@ `@@`@``@
other servers f
he SMTP/MIME MTA
the MTA.
5. Selec
led MTA housekee
e MTA server's d
s\upgrade.nsf$3
User$Conflict
template
ws.nsfCheckOutFl
The inbound transport moves messages into the Inbound Work Queue (SMTPIBWQ.NSF). Stopping inbound transport prevents the MTA from accepting inbound SMTP connections.
Go to "
Click here
Clearing SMTP.BOX.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Shutting down the router
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
&Arial
After shutting down the router and the inbound transport, wait for the MTA to process all messages in SMTP.BOX before proceeding. If you do not have the database icons for SMTP.BOX, the SMTP Outbound Work'Queue (SMTPOBWQ.NSF), and the SMTP Inbound Work Queue (SMTPIBWQ.NSF) on your workspace, add them.
35769136029233966
Adding MTA server system database icons to the workspace
1. Switch to the Lotus Notes client.
2. Choose File - Database - Open.
3. In the Server box, type the name of the MTA server and click Open.
4. In the Filename field, type SMTP.BOX.
5. Click Add Icon.
6. In the Filegame field, type SMTPOBWQ.NSF.
7. Click Add Icon.
8. In the Filename field, type SMTPIBWQ.NSF.
9. Click Add Icon.
10. Click Done.
The icons for SMTP.BOX, the Inbound Work Queue, and the Outbound Work Queue are now on your Notes workspace.
246176896029227116
Verifying that SMTP.BOX has no active messages
1. Make sure you shut down the router and the inbound transport. See "
Click hewe
Shutting down the router
Click here
" and "
Click here
Shutting down the inbound transport.
Click here
2. Double-click the SMTP.BOX icon on your Notes workspace. If this is the first time you have opened the database, you see the "About This Database" document. Press ESC.
3. If there are any messages marked Pending Conversion or Pending Transmission, wait for them to be processed and cleaned up by whe Delivery Report Task (DRT).
4. Verify message processing by pressing F9 or choosing View - Refresh; processed messages are removed from the view.
5. Once the view is empty, or contains only documents marked Dead, SMTP.BOX is clear.
6. Press ESC to close SMTP.BOX.r
There may be some delay between message processing and the DRT removing the message from the view due to the cycle time of the DRT.M
Go to "
Click here
Clearing the Outbound Work Queue.G
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Shutting down the inbound transportt
Click here
&Arial
Clearing the Outbound Work Queue routes all remaining outbound SMTP messages to their destinations.
1. Make sure SMTP.BOX is clear. See "
Click here
Clearing SMTP.BOX.
Click here
2. Double-click the SMTP Outbound Work Queue (SMTPOBWQ.NSF) icon on your Notes workspace. If this is the first time you have opened the database, you see the "About This Database" document. Prgss ESC.
3. Wait until all messages in the Outbound Work Queue are successfully processed by the MTA. There should be either no messages in the view or only messages marked Dead.
4. Verify that all messages except those marked Dead are processed by pressing F9 or choosing View - Refresh. Processed messages are removed from the view by the DRT.
5. Press ESC to close the Outbound Work Queue.
There may be some delay between message processing and the DWT removing the message from the view due to the cycle time of the DRT.
Go to "g
Click here
Clearing the Inbound Work Queue.
Click here
57726771229213029
See Also
Click here
Clearing SMTP.BOX
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Clearing the Inbound Work Queue moves all SMTP messages addressed to recipients in your organization out of the Inbound Work Queue so they can be delivered. Messages in MAIL.BOX are delivered after the server is upgraded and restarted.
1. Make sure you cleared the Outbound Work Queue. See "g
Click here
Clearing the Outgound Work Queue.
Click here
2. Change to the Lotus Notes client.
3. Double-click the SMTP Inbound Work Queue (SMTPIBWQ.NSF) icon on your Notes workspace. If this is the first time you have opened the database, you see the "About This Database" document. Press ESC.
4. Wait until all messages marked Pending Conversion are processed. Verify that all messages except those marked Dead are processed by pressing F9 or choosing View - Refresh.'Processed messages are removed from the view by the DRT.
5. Press ESC to close the Inbound Work Queue.a
There may be some delay between message conversion/transmission and the DRT removing the message from the view due to the cycle time of the DRT.
Go to "
Click here
Shutting down the SMTP/MIME MTA.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Clearing the Outbound Work Queue
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Gfter clearing messages from the MTA, shut it down and upgrade the server.
1. Make sure you cleared the Inbound Work Queue. See "
Click here
Clearing the Inbound Work Queue.
Click here
2. Switch to the Domino server console.
3. Type
quit
and press ENTER.
4. Switch to the Lotus Notes client.
5. Choose File - Exit Notes.
Go to "
Click here
Updating the NOTES.INI file for the Internet mail server.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Clearing the Inbound Work Queue
Click here
ji~ie
&Arial
Lotus recommends that you use fully qualified host names in Server documents in the Domino Directory instead of GP addresses. While IP addresses continue to work and are fully supported, they tend to change more frequently than host names, which can cause issues in the Domino environment if the Server documents are not updated. For example, a subnet change or reorganization may require a change in server addressing. In this case, if the Server document used host names, updating the document would not be necessary, but it would be necessary if the document contained an IP address. In addition, some third-party tools rgcognize only host names, not IP addresses.
See Also
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
ample
H_EXAMPLES_LOGERRORS_PROPERTY.
See Also
Click here
LogError method
H_LOGERROR_METHOD
Click here
NumErrors property
H_NUMERRORS_PROPERTY
&Arial
ox displays for the highlighted document.
&Arial
7wqFp'
Clearing SMTP.BOXUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
MTA servers\clearing SMTP.BOXMTA servers\iconsSMTP.BOX icons\adding to workspaceSMTP.BOX\clearingSMTP/MIME MTA\clearing SMTP.BOXServer upgrade\clearing SMTP.BOX for MTAContentsStepsH_CLEARING_SMTP_BOX_9605_STEPSTopic1Clearing SMTP.BOXStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER
H_CLEARING_SMTP_BOX_9605_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_35769136029233966=Adding MTA server system database icons to the workspaceH_CLEARING_SMTP_BOX_9605_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_246176896029227116=Verifying that SMTP.BOX has no active messages01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
629225536=T
Clearing the Outbound Work QueueUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
MTA servers\clearing the outbound work queueOutbound Work Queue\clearingSMTP/MIME MYA\clearing outbound work queueSMTPOBWQ.NSF\clearingServer upgrade\clearing outbound work queueContentsStepsH_CLEARING_THE_OUTBOUND_WORK_QUEUE_3680_STEPSTopic1Clearing the Outbound Work QueueStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER
H_CLEARING_THE_OUTBOUND_WORK_QUEUE_3680_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_57726771229213029=01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Clearing the Inbound Work QueueUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Inbound Work Queue\clearingMTA servers\clearing the inbound work queueSMTP/MIME MTA\clearing inbound work queueSMTPIBWQ.NSF\clearingServir upgrade\clearing inbound work queue for MTAContentsStepsH_CLEARING_THE_INBOUND_WORK_QUEUE_9874_STEPSTopic1Clearing the Inbound Work QueueStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
iewH_BASIC
Shutting down the SMTP/MIME MTA serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
MTA servers\shutting downSMTP/MIME MTA\shutting down to upgradeServer upgrade\shutting down MTA to upgradeContentsStepsH_SHUTTING_DOWN_THE_SMTP_MTA_49_STEPSTopic1Shutting down the SMTP/MIME MTA serverStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEAYE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
S_FOR_CREAT
Updating the NOTES.INI file for the Internit mail serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Internet mail servers\NOTES.INI settingsMTA servers\preventing from loading after upgradingNOTES.INI settings\MTA server andReporter task\and upgradingSMTP/MIME MTA\preventing from loadingSMTP/MIME MTA\removing from ServerTasksSMTPMTA setting\removing from NOTES.INIServer upgrade\preventing MTA from loadingContentsStepsH_STOPPING_THE_SMTP_MTA_FROM_LOADING_6338_STEPSTopic1Updating the NOTES.INI file for the Internet mail serverSteysH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
UMENTS_OV
Removing Domino as an NT ServiceUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
NT service\removing before upgradingServer upgrade\removing Domino as an NT serviceUpgrade steps\for Domino serverWindows NT service\removing before upgradingContentsOverviewH_REMOVING_DOMINO_AS_AN_NT_SERVICE_9105_OVERTopic1Removing Domino as an NT ServiceOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Servir
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
79 16H_S
Installing Domino Release 5 on an MTA serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino server\installingMTA seryers\installing Domino onRelease 5\installing on an MTA serverSMTP/MIME MTA\installing Release 5 onServer upgrade\and installing Release 5ContentsStepsH_INSTALLING_DOMINO_RELEASE_5_ON_AN_MTA_SERVER_2296_STEPSTopic1Installing Domino Release 5 on an MTA serverStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ALOG 176
Encrypted messages in mixed environmentsUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Encryption\mailMail\encryptedMessages\encryptedContentsOverviewH_ENCRYPTED_MESSAGES_IN_MIXED_ENVIRONMENTS_8359_OVERTopic1Encrypted messages in iixed environmentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Formatting paragraphs in a document
Documents
Formatting\paragraphsParagraphs\formatting
ContentsOverviewH_ALIGNMENT_AND_SPACING_IN_DOCUMENTS_OVERTopic1Formatting paragraphs in a documentOverviewH_BASICS_FOR_CREATING_A_DOCUMENT_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading the Public Address Book for an Internet mail serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino Directory\compactingDomino Directory\replicatingDomino Directory\upgrading toMTA server~\upgrading Public Address BookNAMES.NSF\compactingNAMES.NSF\upgradingPUBNAMES.NTF\upgradingPublic Address Book\compactingPublic Address Book\upgradingSMTP/MIME MTA\upgrading Public Address BookServer upgrade\upgrading Public Address BookContentsStepsH_DECIDING_WHEN_TO_UPGRADE_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1718_STEPSTopic1Upgrading the Public Address Book for an Internet mail serverStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER
H_DECIDING_WHEN_^O_UPGRADE_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1718_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_324088825629236990=Upgrading the Public Address Book to the Domino Directory templateH_DECIDING_WHEN_TO_UPGRADE_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1718_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_246176896029227116=Compacting the Domino Directory after upgradingH_DECIDING_WHEN_TO_UPGRADE_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1718_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_200169699229229349=Rebuilding views in the Domino DirectoryH_DECIDING_WHEN_TO_UPNRADE_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1718_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_324088825629236991=Updating views in databases on the upgraded Domino serverH_DECIDING_WHEN_TO_UPGRADE_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1718_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_35769136029233966=Replicating the Domino Directory design to other servers01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting server configuration for an Internet mail serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Configuration document\changing for upgraded MTA server to enable native SMTPDomino server\configuringInternet mail servers\cnnfiguringMTA servers\enabling SMTPSMTP\upgraded MTA server andSMTP/MIME MTA\enabling SMTPServer Configuration document\enabling SMTPServer upgrade\SMTP andContentsStepsH_CREATING_A_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_DOCUMENT_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1707_STEPSTopic1Setting server configuration for an Internet mail serverStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=Da~id Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Editing the Server document for an Internet mail serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Internet mail servers\editing Server document forListener task\M^A server andMTA servers\enabling SMTP Listener taskSMTP Listener task\enabling for upgraded MTA serverSMTP/MIME MTA\enabling SMTP Listener taskServer documents\SMTP routing information inServer upgrade\enabling SMTP Listener task for Internet mail serverContentsStepsH_EDITING_THE_SERVER_DOCUMENT_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_9656_STEPSTopic1Editing the Server document for an Internet mail serverStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release >02 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
~YpkM
R"wce
Upgrading the Administration Requests database on an MTA serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Relea~e 5
ADMIN4.NSF\upgradingAdministration Process\upgradingAdministration Requests database\upgradingAdministration servers\upgradingMTA servers\upgrading Administration Requests databaseSMTP/MIME MTA\upgrading Administration Requests databaseContentsStepsH_UPGRADING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_DATABASE_ON_AN_MTA_SERVER_9045_STEPSTopic1Upgrading the Administration Requests database on an MTA serverStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to No~es and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading system templates on an MTA serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Rnlease 5
Templates\upgradingContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_SYSTEM_TEMPLATES_ON_AN_MTA_SERVER_103_OVERTopic1Upgrading system templates on an MTA serverOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER
H_UPGRADING_SYSTEM_TEMPLATES_ON_AN_MTA_SERVER_103_OVER_MIDTOPIC_179843193629308160=Databases upgraded automaticallyH_UPGRADING_SYSTEM_TEMPLATES_ON_AN_MTA_SERVER_103_OVER_MIDTOPIC_179843193629308161=Databases not upgraded automatically01 Moving to Notes and Domino Relense 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Template interoperability on an MTA serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
.AContentsOvervnewH_TEMPLATE_INTEROPERABILITY_ON_AN_MTA_SERVER_7553_OVERTopic1Template interoperability on an MTA serverOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER
H_TEMPLATE_INTEROPERABILITY_ON_AN_MTA_SERVER_7553_OVER_MIDTOPIC_410838412829308183=Templates supported with the R4 clientH_TEMPLATE_INTEROPERABILITY_ON_AN_MTA_SERVER_7553_OVER_MIDTOPIC_410838412829308184=Templates supported with altered appearance wth an R4 clientH_TEMPLATE_INTEROPERABILITY_ON_AN_MTA_SERVER_7553_OVER_NIDTOPIC_410838412829308185=Templates that are not supported with an R4 client01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
How R5 replaces the MTAUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino server\mail routingInbound services\replacing with R5 mail serverMIME messages\converting in a mixed-release environmentMail routing\Domino server andMail\MIME formatOutbound services\replacing with R5 mail serverContentsOverviewH_HOW_R5_REPLACES_THE_MTA_4590_OVERTopic1How R5 replaces the MTAOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino ^elease 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Configuration in R4 vs. R5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Foreign SMTP Domain document\Internet mail configuration andGlobal Domain document\Internet mail configuration andMTA servers\configuringMail\configuring for InternetNOTES.INI file\Internet mail configuration andSMTP Connection document\Internet mail configuration andServer documents\Internet mail configuration andServers\configuring for Internet mailContentsOverviewH_CONFIGURATION_IN_R4_VS_R5_6589_OVERTopic1Configuration in R4 vs. R5OverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASN_5_0_4124_OVER
H_CONFIGURATION_IN_R4_VS_R5_6589_OVER_MIDTOPIC_424828272029239806=R4 Server document (Public Address Book)H_CONFIGURATION_IN_R4_VS_R5_6589_OVER_MIDTOPIC_424828272029239807=R4 Foreign SMTP Domain document (Public Address Book)H_CONFIGURATION_IN_R4_VS_R5_6589_OVER_MIDTOPIC_424828272029239808=<+!>R4 Global Domain Document (Public Address Book)<-!>H_CONFIGURATION_IN_R4_VS_R5_6589_OVER_MIDTOPIC_424828272029239809=R4 NOTES.INI parameters (server NOTES.INI file)H_CONFIGURATION_IN_R4_VS_R>_6589_OVER_MIDTOPIC_424828272029239810=R4 SMTP Connection document01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
MTA upgrade scenariosUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Internet mail\upgrading andContentsOverviewH_MTA_UPGRADE_SCENARIOS_2020_OVERTopic1MTA upgrade scenariosOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER
H_MTA_UPGRADE_SCENARIOS_2020_OVER_MIDTOPIC_33076467229237769=Leave your R4 MTA servers in placeH_MTA_UPGRADE_SCENARIOS_2020_OVER_MIDTOPIC_33076467229237770=Replace all R4 MTAs with R5 mail servers firstH_MTA_UPGRADE_SCENARIOS_2020_NVER_MIDTOPIC_79110931229237804=Replace all R4 MTAs with R5 mail servers during system upgradeH_MTA_UPGRADE_SCENARIOS_2020_OVER_MIDTOPIC_79170931229237805=Rework the messaging infrastructureH_MTA_UPGRADE_SCENARIOS_2020_OVER_MIDTOPIC_79170931229237806=Use a mixed MTA upgrade strategy01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Replacing R4 MTAs with R5 mail serversUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
.AContentsExamplesH_REPLACING_R4_MTAS_WITH_R5_MAIL_SERVERS_9864_EXTopic1Replacing R4 MTAs with R5 mail serversExamplesH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Donino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using a third-party relay host with an R5 mail serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Relnase 5
Gateways\relay hosts andInternet mail\third-party relay hosts andMX records\third-party relay hosts andRelay hosts\upgrading andContentsOverviewH_USING_A_RELAY_HOST_WITH_AN_R5_MAIL_SERVER_8681_OVERTopic1Using a third-party relay host with an R5 mail serverOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using the cc:Mail and X.400 MTAs with Domino R5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
MTA servers\upgradingcc:Mail\MTA and R5x.400\MTA and R5ContentsOverviewH_USING_THE_CC_MAIL_AND_X_400_MTAS_WITH_DOMINN_R5_8019_OVERTopic1Using the cc:Mail and X.400 MTAs with Domino R5OverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environmentsUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Internet mail\routing in a mixed release environmentMail routing\in a mixed release environmentContentsOverviewH_INTERNET_MAIL_ROUTING_IN_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENTS_9385_OVERTopic1Internet mail routing in mixed-release environmentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER
H_INTERNET_MAIL_ROUTING_IN_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENTS_9385_OVER_MIDTOPIC_324088825629236990=Internet mail conversion in mixed-release environmentsH_INTERNET_MAIL_ROUTING_IN_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENTS_9385_OVER_MIDTOPIC_324088825629236991=Using the inbound and outbound services of the R4 SMTP/MIME MTA H_INTERNET_MAIL_ROUTING_IN_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENTS_9385_OVER_MIDTOPIC_324088825629236992=When an R5 router delivers a message to a recipient's mail fileH_INTERNET_MAIL_ROUTING_IN_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENTS_9385_OVER_MIDTOPIC_324088825629236993=When an R5 server transfers a message to an R4 serverH_INTERNET_MAIL_ROUTING_IN_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENTS_9385_OVER_MIDTOPIC_324088825629236994=When an R5 router sends mail over SMTPH_INTERNET_MAIL_ROUTING_IN_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENTS_9385_OVER_MIDTOPIC_46645049629240175=When an R5 server replicates with an R4 serverH_INTERNET_MAIL_ROUTING_IN_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENTS_9385_OVER_MIDTOPIC_324088825629236995=When an R5 Notes client composes a MIME message ann sends it through an R4 Domino server (the user's mail server is R4)01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ESdoG
&Arial
You must enable native SMTP routing in the Configuration Settings document to allow the upgraded mail server to route mail using SMTP. Configuration Settings documents can apply to a single server, all servers in a domain, or a group of servers. Edit the Configuration Settings document that applies to the upgraded server, but be aware thay this modification affects any other servers that use this Configuration Settings document. If necessary, create a new Configuration Settings document for your Release 5 Internet mail servers.
If you do not have Configuration Settings documents for your Domino servers, create them to reflect your Release 5 configuration. For example, if you have a mail server, an application server, and a firewall server, and only the mail server will use SMTP routing, create two Configuration Settings documeits: one for the mail server with SMTP routing enabled, and one for the application and firewall servers without SMTP routing enabled.
1. Make sure you upgraded the design of your Public Address Book to the Domino Directory template.
See "
Click here
Upgrading the Public Address Book for an Internet mail server.
Click here
Note
The Domino Directory for the domain must use the Release 9 template because the settings for native SMTP appear only in the Release 5 Domino Directory Configuration Settings form.
2. In the Domino Administrator, click the Administration window tab.
3. Click the Configuration tab.
4. Expand the Server Configuration section.
5. Click Configurations.
6. If you have a Configuration Settings document that you want to use for this server, select it and click Edit Configuration. If not, click Aid Configuration.
7. If you are creating a new configuration, do the following:
Enter a server name in the Basics section.
Select which Group or Server this configuration should apply to. Do not select "Use these settings as the default settings for all servers" unless you want every server that this document controls to use SMTP to send messages to the Internet instead of through an Internet mail server.
8. Click the Router/SMTP tab.
) 9. On the Basics tab, click the down arrow next to "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain."
10. Select Enabled and click OK.
11. If your organization uses a relay host, enter its host name or IP address in the field "Relay host for messages leaving the local internet domain."
12. Click the Save and Close button on the Action bar.
If you created a document, it appears in the view.
Go to "
Click iere
Editing the Server document for an Internet mail server.
Click here
Note
Relay host servers require additional configuration. See
Administering the Domino System
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Editing the Yerver document for an Internet mail server
Click here
Click here
Setting up a relay host or firewall
Click here
Click here
Setting up a smart host
Click here
Click here
How R5 replaces the MTA
Click here
Click here
Configuration in R4 vs. R5
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing outside the local Internet domain
Click here
&Arial
Edit the Server document for the upgraded server to enable the SMTP listener task, which listens for inbound SMTP requests. This change tells the server to load the SMTP listener task at startup.
1. Make sure you set the server configuration to enable the server to route outbound SMTP mail. See "
Click here
Setting server configuration for an Internet mail server.{
Click here
" Remember that a Configuration Settings document can apply to more than one server, so you may want to create more than one Configuration Settings document.
Note
The Domino Directory for the domain must use the Release 5 template since the settings for native SMTP appear only in the Release 5 Domino Directory.
2. In the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. Expand the Server Configuration section.t
4. Click "All Server Documents." s
5. Double-click the server document for the upgraded Internet mail server.
6. Click Edit Server.o
7. On the Basics tab, click the down arrow next to "SMTP listener task."
8. Select Enabled and click OK.m
9. Click the Save and Close button on the Action bar.
10. Close the Domino Directory.
Note
Do not remove SMTP routing information fyom the Server document. Existing routing information allows you to route Internet mail in a mixed R4 / R5 environment, or in a Release 5 environment that uses R4-style routing. Removing this information may affect Internet mail routing and delivery in these environments.
See Also
Click here
Setting server configuration for an Internet mail server
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTY/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
How R5 replaces the MTA
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing within the local Internet domain
Click here
Click here
Setting up a server to receive mail sent via SMTP routing
Ilick here
Click here
Setting up a smart host
Click here
~YpkM
R"wce
&Arial
If the upgraded mail server is also the administration server for the domain's Domino Directory, upgrade the design of its Administration Requests database (AIMIN4.NSF) to the R5 template (ADMIN4.NTF). If the upgraded server is not the administration server, you do not need to upgrade its template -- after upgrading the template for the administration server, you replicate the new design to all other Domino servers.
For more information, see "
Click here
Upgrading the administration server for the Domino Directory.t
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upirading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Domino automatically upgrades many system templates to Release 5 design.
179843193629308160
Databases upgraded automatically
Database Title
File Name
Administration Requestsd
ADMIN4.NTF
Agent Logf
ALOG4.NTF
Billing
BILLING.NTFp
Local free time info
BUSYTIME.NTF
Catalog
CATALOG.NTF
Certification Logr
CERTLOG.NTF
Cluster Directory
CLDBDIR4.NTF
Master Address Book (to Directory Assistance)
MAB.NTF (DA50.NTF)
Database Analysis
DBA4.NTF
Domino Configuration
DOMCFG.NTF
Domino Web Server Log
DOMLOG.NTF
Statistics & Events4
EVENTS4.NTFo
Notes Log Analysis
LOGA4.NTF
Notes Logu
LOG.NTF
Mail Router Mailbox
MAILBOX.NTF,
<Server>
Mailbox
MAIL.BOX
NT/Migrating Users' Passwords
NTSYNC45.NTF
Public Address Book (to Domino Directory)
PUBNAMES.NTF
Server Web Navigator
PUBWEB45.NTF (PUBWEB50.NTF)
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
179843193629308161
Databases not upiraded automatically
Database Title
File Name
Certificate Authorityg
CCA*.NTF (* = Release Number; e.g., 50)a
Server Certificate Admin
CSRV*.NTF (* = Release Number; e.g., 50)
Statistics Reporting
STATRP45.NTF
Domino Web Administrations
WEBADMIN.NTF
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
Notes R4 clients can render some system databases that use R5 templates transparently. Some R5 templates, though, do not render well to R4 clients. Templates fall into three categories: those that are supported with the R4 client, those that are supported iut have altered appearance, and those that should not be used in a mixed environment.
410838412829308183
Templates supported with the R4 client
Database title
File Name
Agent Log
ALOG4.NTF
Billing
BILLING.NTF
Local free time info
BUSYTIME.NTF
Domino R5 Certificate Authority
CCA59.NTF
Certification Log
CERTLOG.NTF
Cluster Analysis
CLUSTA4.NTF
Database Library
DBLIB4.NTF
Microsoft Office Library
DOCLBM50.NTF
Doc Library - Notes & Web
DOCLBW50.NTF
Personal Journal
JOURNAL4.NTF
Notes Log
LOG.NTF
Mail Router Mailbox
MAILBOX.NTF
Personal Web Navigator
PERWEB50.NTF
NT/Migrating Users' Passwords
NTSYNC45.NTF
Statistics Reporting
STATREP5.NTF
Domino Configuration
DOMCFG.NTF
Domino Web Server Log
DOMLOG.NTF
Mailing List
MAILLIST.NTF
NNTP Discussion
NNTPDI50.NTF
Server Web Navigator
PUBWEB50.NTF
Reports
REPORTS.NTF
Resource Reservations
RESRC50.NTF
Site Registration4
SIREGW50.NTF
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
410838412829308184
Templates supported with altered appearance wth an R4 client
Database Title
File Name
Archive Log
ARCHLG50.NTF
Catalog
CATALOG.NTF
Cluster Directory
CLDBDIR4.NTF
Database Analysis
DBA4.NTF
Decommission Server Reports
DECOMSRV.NTF
Directory Assistance
DA50.NTF
Domino Directory
PUBNAMES.NTF
Notes Log Analysis
LOGA4.NTF
Personal Address Book
PERNAMES.NTF
Statistics & Events
EVENTS4.NTF
DECS Administrator Template (partial support)
DECSADM.NTF
heid title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
410838412829308185
Templates that are not supported with an R4 client
Database Title
File Name
Bookmarkse
BOOKMARK.NTF
Design Synopsis Template
DSGNSYN.NTFE
Domino Administrator
DOMADMIN.NTF
Directory Catalog4
DIRCAT5.NTFE
Subscriptions0
HEADLINE.NTF
Mail (IMAP)T
IMAPCL5.NTFI
Mail (R5.0)D
MAIL50.NTF
TeamRoom (5.0)
TEAMROOM.NTF
Domino MailTracker Store
MTSTORE.NTFm
News Articles (NNTP)
NNTPCL5.NTF
Domino R5 Certificate Administration
CSRV50.NTF
User Registration Queue
USERREG.NTF
Web Administration
WEBADMIN.NTF
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
When you enable an R5 server to send messages over SMTP outside the local Internet domain (configured in the Server Configuration document), the server does not require)Foreign SMTP Domain and SMTP Connection documents, since the server can connect via TCP and route mail via SMTP.
Howevere
, in Release 5.0.3, Domino follows Foreign SMTP Domain and SMTP Connection documents for SMTP mail routing, making your upgrade to R5 easier.
The server can use a relay host as needed and can make connections using DNS or using a hosts file. The server uses the router to route mail over SMTP and to perform conversion between Notes format messages and MIME foymat messages. Thus, the R5 server replaces the outbound services of the MTA.S
When you enable an R5 server to listen for inbound SMTP connections (configured in the Server document), the server performs the same functions as the inbound MTA services. Inbound messages are stored in MAIL.BOX and transferred or delivered by the router. MIME messages are stored in that format and routed over either Notes RPC or SMTP to their destination. If needed, the router converts between MIME and Notes format)messages.
See Also
Click here
MTA upgrade scenariosh
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Replacing R4 MTAs with R5 mail servers
Click here
&Arial
In Release 5, the NSFBufferPool has no effective size limit, though it is constrained by operating system limits and, potentially, by the maximum siye of a NOTES.INI variable. NOTES.INI variables cannot be larger than 2GB, since these are signed variables. This is a change from R4.5 and R4.6, when the NSFBufferPool had a coded limit in Domino.
When a Domino server starts, the server allocates between 1/4 (25%) and 3/8 (37.5%) of the physical RAM on the server to the NSFBufferPool as memory for Domino. A Notes client allocates memory similarly, but sets a maximum of 8MB on the NSFBufferPool. Administrators (for the server) and end users (fir the client) can override this default allocation and set the size of the NSFBufferPool manually by using one of two NOTES.INI variables:
NOTES.INI variable
Units
Limit
NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size=x
Bytes
2GB, based on NOTES.INI variable limitations
NSF_Buffer_Pool_Yize_MB=x
none; subject to OS limits
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
The NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size_MB variable removes the 2GB limitation that exists for NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size due to NOTES.INI variable limits.
Tuning the NSFBufferPool should not be necessary, except on partitioned servers. In some cases, Domino does not need all the memiry in the NSFBufferPool, so administrators may wish to experiment with decreasing the amount of memory in the NSFBufferPool by setting one of the NOTES.INI variables. This allows the server to use the memory for other purposes.
On partitioned servers, allocating all the memory normally reserved for the NSFBufferPool could result in problems -- for example, a computer with 6 Domino partioned servers could not allocate 25% of memory to each partition. Administrators should divide the memory that)would be allocated to a Domino server (from 1/4 to 3/8 of physical RAM) by the number of partitions and manually set the NSFBufferPool size via a NOTES.INI variable for each server. Administrators can then modify the setting for each partition depending on the relative load. r
In general, it is best to allow Domino to allocate memory for the NSFBufferPool. Set the size of the NSFBufferPool only if the server is running slowly due to inadequate available memory.
See Also
Click here
NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size
Click here
&Arial
When you upgrade a Domino server to R5, you gain features, functionality, and performance without changing your server configuration, topology, routing, or addressing.
To upgrade a server, perform the following steps:
1.
Click here
Shut down the Domino server.
Click here
2.
Click here
Back up important server files.
Click here
3.
Click here
Update the NOTES.INI file.
Click here
4. If you run Domino as a Windows NT Service,
Click here
remove the Service.
Click here
5.
Click here
Install the Domino Release 5 software.
Click here
6.
Click here
Upgride the Public Address Book template and replicate this template to all Domino servers.
Click here
7.
Click here
Upgrade the administration server for the Domino Directory.
Click here
8.
Click here
Upgrade the design of the Administration Requests database
and repliiate this template to all Domino servers.
See also information on:
171026278429244022
New Features
Click here
Using new Domino R5 features
Click here
131783193629308160
System Templates
Click here
Upgrading system templates
Click here
Click here
Template interoperability
Click here
164633987229247820
Performance Improvements
Click here
Upgrading a mail server to use multiple threadsn
Click here
Click here
Using multiple MAIL.BOX databases
Click here
164633987229247822
Upgrade Changes
Click here
Creating new R4 servers in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Changing Domino server time zone and daylight savings time settings
Click here
Click here
NSFBufferPool in R5
Click here
Click here
Maximum requests over a single connectiona
Click here
Note
Domino automatically upgrades MAIL.BOX to the R5 database format aid design. Any messages in MAIL.BOX are preserved.
See Also
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Supporting long file names for Domino on OS/2 Warp
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
New Domino server features
Clici here
Click here
Changing Domino server time zone and daylight savings time settings
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a mail server to use multiple threads
Click here
Click here
Using multiple MAIL.BOX databases
Click here
G0 Uf4
&Arial
This topic describes configuration information in the R4 MTA and where that information exists and is configured in the R5 Internet mail server.
424828272029239806
R4 Server document (Public Address Book)
Item
R5 location
SMTP Mail Routing task, in Routing Tasks field
Server Configuration document: "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain." You must continue to list SMTP Mail Routing in the Routing Tasks field in the Server document if R4 and non-SMTP R5 servers route Internet mail to this server or if you continue to use Foreign SMTP Domain and SMTP Connection documents in af all-SMTP environment.l
General section - Fully qualified Internet host name
Server document
General - Global domain name
All R5 servers use all R5 Global domain documents and do not need to find only one documentt
Control section -- Poll for new messages every
minutes
Not used in R5
Control - MTA work path
Not used in R5
Control - Log level
In server log file (LOG.NSF) -- SMTP outbound logging is router logging; SMTP inbound logging is SMTP task logging. Controlled in Configuration Settings document: Router/SMTP - Advanced - Controls tab, Miscellaneous Controls section, Logging Level.
Control - Enable daily housekeeping
Not used in R5
Control - Perform daily housekeeping at
Not used in R5
Conversion - header handling
Not used in R5
Conversion - 1
Attachment encoding method
Server Configuration document - MIME-Conversion Options-Outbound tab
Conversion - Message content
Server Configuration document - MIME-Conversion Options-Outbound tab
Conversion - Support return receipts
Server Configuration document - MIME-Conversion Options-General tab - Return receiptss
Conversion - Language parameters
Server Configuration document - MIME-Basics tab and MIME-Settings by Character Set Groupss
Conversion - Use character set detfction routines
Server Configuration doc - MIME-Conversion Options-Inbound tab - Use character set auto-detection if message has no character set information
Conversion - Message Typefacen
Server Configuration doc - Conversion Options - MIME - Settings by Character Set groupss
Conversion - Message Point Size
Server Configuration doc - Conversion Optionv - MIME - Settings by Character Set groupso
Conversion - Outbound Macintosh message conversion
Server Configuration doc - Conversion Options-MIME-Advanced-Advanced Outbound Message Options tab - Macintosh attachment conversion
Inbound Configuration - Number of Processes
Not used in R5
Outbound Configuration - Number of Processes
Not used in R5
Outbound Configuration - Maximum outbound msg size
Server Configuration doc - Router/SMTP-Restrictions and Controls-Restrictions tab - Maximum message size
Transport Configuration - Host name mapping
Server Configuration doc - Router/SMTP-Basics tab - Host name lookup
Server Configuration document - Restrictions and Controls-Restrictions tab - Allow mail only from Notes domains
Deny mail from domains
Server Configuration document - Restrictions and Controls - Restrictions - Deny mail from Notes domains
Messages addressed to [Internet domain] should be routed to [Domain name] or [Internet host]
Used if R5 to route Internet mail to Domino SMTP servers, unless all mail servers can route outbound SMTP Internet mail. If your organization only uses a few SMTP servers (R4 "gateway" architecture), continue to use Foreign SMTP Domain and SMTP Connection documents to route outbound Internet mail to the SMTP servers. In Release 5.0.3, Domino follows existing Foreign SMTP Domain and SMTP Connection documents even in an all-SMTP environment.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
In Release 5.0.3, Domino follows Foreign SMTP Domain and SMTP Connection documents for SMTP mail routing.
424828272029239808
R4 Global Domain Document (Public Address Book)
Item
R5 location2
Global Domain document
All existing documents are carried foward
Primary Internet domain (set in first Global Domain document in V4)e
Global Domain document - Conversions - SMTP Address Conversion - Local primary Internet domain. R5 pulls primary domain from first Global Domain document.
Alternate Internet domain aliases (set in all other Global Domain documents in R4)
Global Domain document - Conversions - SMTP Address Conversion - Alternate Internet domain aliases (R5 pulls aliases from all Global Domain documents except first one)
Internet address lookupr
Server Configuration document - Router/SMTP-Basics tab - Address lookup. If enabled, R5 looks for the Internet address in the Domino Directory; if disabled, Domino converts the Internet address.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
424828272029239809
R4 NOTES.INI parameters (server NOTES.INI file&
Item
R5 location
MailMaxThreads (maximum number of message transfer threads)
Server Configuration document - Router/SMTP-Restrictions and Controls-Transfer Controls tab - Maximum transfer threads
MailDisablePriority (set to 1 to route all mail as Normal priority regardless of designated priority)
Server Configuration document - Router/SMTP-Advanced-Controls tab - Advanced Transfer Controls section - Ignore mevsage priority
MailLowPriorityTime (sets time range during which Low priority messages are routed)
Server Configuration document - Router/SMTP-Restrictions and Controls-Transfer Controls tab - Low priority mail routing time range
Log_Mailrouting (controls amount of logging performed during message routing)
Server document - Ports - Internet Ports - Mail - Mail (SMTP Inbound) and Mail (SMTP Outbound) - TCP/IP port number - set to port 25 on upgrade
SMTPMTA_CONVERT_ORIGINATOR (looks up originator's address in Public Address Book)
Not used in R5
SMTP_KEEP1MEANS1=X (Force MTA to treat local domain in same way as other domains)
Not used in R5
SMTPMTA_DEFIED_DOMAINS=t
filename
, where
filename
is an ASCII file with list of denied domains (deny mail from Internet domains)
Server Configuration documents - Restrictions and Controls - SMTP Inbound Controls and SMTP Outbound Controls sections
SMTPMTA_NO_INLINE_CONTENT_DISP=1 (Disable RFC 1806 support to disable content disposition headers if disposition type is inline)
Not used in R5
SMTPMTA_TRACE_LEVEL=0x00000100 (enhanced tracing in log)
Not used in R5 -- logging is normal server logging
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
424828272029239810
R4 SMTP Connection document
Item
R5 location
Relay host
Server Configuration document, Router/SMTP-Basics tab, "Relay host for messages leaving vhe local internet domain." You must also enable the field "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain" for the relay host to function properly.
Note
If the source server is an R4 SMTP/MIME MTA, the MTA follows the setting in the relay host field in this document - the MTA is not able to use the field in the Server Configuration document.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
In Release 5.0.3, Domino follows Foreign SMTP Domain and SMTP Connection documents for SMTP mail routing.
Note
For additional NOTES.INI parameters related to Internet mail, see Appendix E, "NOTES.INI File," in
Administering the Domino System
or Domino Administration Help.p
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server&that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Editing the Server document for an Internet mail server
Click here
Click here
Setting server configuration for an Internet mail server
Click here
Click here
Creating a Configuration Settings document
Click here
Click here
Replfcing R4 MTAs with R5 mail servers
Click here
Click here
Upgrading an MTA server and NOTES.INI parameters
Click here
&Arial
Each organization should consider when to upgrade its R4 MTA servers to R5 mail servfrs. R5 has three major changes that affect this decision:
The R5 router sends, routes, and delivers MIME messages over both SMTP and Notes RPC
The R5 database format stores MIME messages natively
Notes R5 clients can create, read, and send MIME messages over both SMTP and Notes RPC
When considering upgrading the MTAs to R5, you have a number of options:
Click here
Leave the R4 MTAs in place until the rest of your system iv upgraded
This path leaves your R4 MTA servers in place until you have upgraded all other Domino servers and Notes clients to R5. This ensures a known level of functionality for Internet message traffic during the upgrade process, but does not allow your organization to use the new Internet mail features of the R5 server. For examvle, Notes R5 clients cannot send native MIME to Internet recipients with this strategy -- their R5 mail server must convert the native MIME to Notes format and then transfer it to the R4 MTA. This increases load on the mail server and could cause some loss of message fidelity.
33076467229237770
Replace all R4 MTAs with R5 mail servers first
The R5 mail servers perform the same tasks as R4 MTAs, with greater performance, stability, and message fidelity. Your organfzation can use R5 features such as restrictions to prevent spamming and control maximum message size. Notes R5 and Internet clients can use native MIME seamlessly.
If you upgrade your R4 MTA servers to R5 before upgrading the rest of your Domino system, the R5 mail servers store MIME messages in MIME format, but must convert the messages to Notes format, an attachment containing the MIME message, or both, when transferring the message to an R4 server.
For more information, see "
Click here
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environments.
Click here
As you change your infrastructure to R5, the R5 mail servers can route MIME messages to other R5 mail servers, which can deliver the messages or perform the conversion for R4 servers.
79110931229237804
Replace all R4 MTAs with R5 mail servers during system upgrade
This strategy is similar to upgrading MTAs before upgrading the rest&of your system, but allows you to select when to begin conversion on hub servers or spoke servers. For example, if you use a Domino POP3 server to host mail for a large number of POP3 clients, you might wait to upgrade your MTAs until you upgrade the POP3 server to prevent any need for conversion by the POP3 server or its hub. In addition, if your hub servers are near capacity, but your spoke servers have extra capacity, you might wait to upgrade the MTA servers until the spoke servers have been upgraded tf prevent placing the conversion load on the hubs.
79170931229237805i
Rework the messaging infrastructure
In an R4-style Internet messaging infrastructure, all Internet mail messages route through one or more dedicated MTA servers. In R5, this is no longer necessary as all R5 servers can route Internet mail, including performing any necessary conversions. You can decide when to move from an R4 "gateway" architecture to a more distributed Internet mail routing schefe.
When you enable a distributed infrastructure, where messages no longer route through a few SMTP servers but rather use the R5 router to transfer Internet mail, consider the possible conversion load from Notes clients. If a Notes client sends a message to Internet recipients in Notes message format, the R5 mail server converts that message to MIME and routes it. If your mail servers are near capacity, this conversion load may place an unacceptable strain on them. However, spreading conversifn across all mail servers, instead of concentrating it on a few MTA servers, is often a performance improvement for organizations. Depending on your system, you may want to wait until you begin converting Notes clients to R5 to rework your messaging architecture -- since R5 clients can send and read MIME, the conversion load on their mail servers is less.
Even if you enable SMTP routing on all mail servers in your organization, they do not all need direct Internet access -- you can use a relay&host for mail routing beyond your local Internet domain and for security purposes. The relay host can be an R5 mail server, an R4 MTA, or a third-party product.
If you do enable direct Internet access for all mail servers, make sure they are correctly configured and properly registered with the InterNIC. Many systems do not accept connections or mail from servers that are improperly configured or not registered as a safeguard against spam and as a relay security measure.
79170931229237806
Use a mixed MTA upgrade strategy
Some organizations will use a combined strategy depending on their needs and infrastructure. For example, a multinational organization may immediately upgrade its MTA servers in one part of the world and wait until the Domino system is at R5 to upgrade in another. Use these scenarios and the needs of your organization to determine the optimal upgrade strategy.
See Also
Click here
Fow R5 replaces the MTAt
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Replacing R4 MTAs with R5 mail servers
Click here
Click here
Configuration in R4 vs. R5
Click here
Click here
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environments
Click here
Click here
Encrypted messages in mixed environments
Click here
Click here
Sending mail in Notes format to Internet users
Click here
Click here
Upgrading an MTA server and NOTES.INI parameters
Click here
&Arial
To illustrate replacing R4 MTAs with R5 mail servers, consider an infrastructure with 3 Domino servers: MTA1, Hub-E, and Hub-W. MTA1 is the SMTP server for the orfanization, and Hub-E and Hub-W are hub servers that route mail to a number of spoke servers. If you upgrade MTA1 to R5 and leave the hubs at R4, MTA1 performs all necessary message conversion, as it did when the server was at R4. When you upgrade Hub-E and Hub-W to R5, MTA1 routes Internet messages to the hubs in MIME, and the hubs perform message conversion for R4 spokes. As you upgrade spoke servers to R5, the hub servers perform fewer conversions. However, the spoke servers must convert messages for thefr R4 clients. Finally, when you upgrade the Notes clients to R5, MIME messages can be routed from MTA1 to the destination client without conversion.t
This upgrade process spreads the conversion load over more servers as the process progresses -- from 1 server (MTA1) initially to many servers (the spokes) towards the end. It is important to consider the performance and capabilities of the hubs and spoke servers -- for example, the spokes might not have enough spare performance to handle the conversion load, which might necessitate a different upgrade strategy.
R5 SMTP routing attempts to locate the Internet Address for a Notes user either within the message (if the message is created by an R5, IMAP, or POP client) or within the $Users view in the Domino Directory. For best performance, populate the Internet Address field in your organization's Person documents (if the Short Name field does not already contain an Internet address for each user) with the administration tool for Internft addresses. Also, register new users with an R5 Domino Administrator client to ensure that each user has a valid Internet address. r
For more information, see "A
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documents.
Click here
Note
You can add the variable MailConvertMIMEOnTransfer=1 to the Domino server's NOTES.INI file to force the server to convert inbound mail from the Internet from MIME&to the format specified in each recipient's Person document in the Domino Directory. This setting causes the router on the Release 5 server to mimic the functionality of the Release 4 SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent. If you do not set this variable, the R5 router forwards the native MIME messages to the next hop servers. Any necessary conversion takes place on transfer to an R4 server or on delivery to the user's mail file.
See Also
Click here
MTA upfrade scenarios1
Click here
Click here
How R5 replaces the MTA
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environments
Click here
Click here
Encrypted messages in mixed environments
Click here
Click here
Sending mail in Notes format to Internet users
Click here
Click here
Upgrading an MTA server and NOTES.INI parameters
Click here
&Arial
If messages initially reach your system via a third-party product, you can still use R5 funcvionality to improve performance. Often, the third-party server or gateway routes Internet mail messages to a server or group of servers running the R4 MTA. You can replace this routing path with one where the gateway routes directly to R5 mail servers via SMTP. Unless the gateway can query the Domino Directory to determine the correct mail server for a recipient, you use multiple MX records in the DNS with the same preference to spread the incoming load across the R5 mail servers. While the percentage of mfssages that initially reach the correct destination server is small, it increases as the number of R5 mail servers able to receive mail via SMTP increases. In addition, since the R5 servers can access the Domino Directory to determine the correct mail server for each recipient, the destination server is generally only one hop away.
This method spreads the load of inbound Internet mail messages across all your R5 servers. If one server is down, mail automatically redirects to the other availablf servers. c
If there are only a few R5 servers and many R4 servers, these R5 servers handle the load of receiving and converting Internet messages for all of the R4 servers. However, as the number of R5 servers increases, this load decreases. y
If you replace the third-party gateway with an R5 mail server that is able to access the Domino Directory through either Notes RPC or LDAP, the "gateway" server does not need to spread messages blindly across other servers, but can instead fetermine the correct destination server for each message and route it appropriately.c
See Also
Click here
MTA upgrade scenarios
Click here
Click here
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environments
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
&Arial
For organizations using the cc:Mail Message Transfer Agent, use version 4.6.4.2 of the cc:Mail MTA with Domino R5. You must leave the cc:Mail MTA server in its Domino R4 release. Do not replicate the Domino Dfrectory template to the cc:Mail MTA server.
For organizations using the X.400 Message Transfer Agent, the X.400 MTA currently runs only under R4.6x of the Domino server. Future releases of the MTA will support R5.
For more information, see http://www.lotus.com/messaging.i
&Arial
Domino R5 routes Internet mail (MIME) over both Notes RPC (Remote Procedure Calls) and SMTP. R4 servers do not support native MIME delivery or SMTP routing; they use the MTA to accomplish these tasks.
You can control how an R5 server transfers a MIME message to an R4 server if it cannot access a user's Person document -- the R5 server either converts the MIME message to Notes format and transfers it, reducing storage space and bandwidth use but with some loss of message fidelity; or it monverts the MIME message to Notes format and also creates an attachment containing the original MIME, preserving message fidelity but increasing storage space and bandwidth use. The decision on which method to use is yours and can be optimized for your system and users' needs. The default setting is to convert MIME messages to Notes format without an attachment.c
If you select to convert the message to Notes format and also create an attachment containing the original MIME, Domino preserves fuml message format -- if an Internet mail client accesses the message, Domino sends it the MIME from the attachment. The R4 server deposits both the Notes format message and the MIME attachment in a user's mail file for this reason. For these messages in a mixed environment with this conversion setting, mail storage requirements and network utilization roughly double
for each of these messages onlyR
324088825629236990
Internet mail conversion in mixed-release mnvironments
In a mixed-release environment, routing native MIME messages and sending Notes format messages to the Internet requires some conversion. Conversion takes place in the following scenarios.
324088825629236991
Using the inbound and outbound services of the R4 SMTP/MIME MTA
The MTA converts outbound Notes messages to MIME format and routes them via SMTP. It converts inbound MIME messages to Notes format (with or without a MIME attachment) anm routes them over Notes RPC using the Notes router. The R4 MTA converts and delivers based on the settings in the recipient's Person document, if the MTA can access it. If the setting of the Internet Message Storage field in the R4 Person document is:
Prefers Notes Rich Text (Notes only in R4), the MTA converts the message to Notes format and routes it.t
Prefers MIME (Internet only in R4), the MTA packages the messages as a MIME attachment and routes it.
No Preferencm (Notes and Internet in R4), the MTA converts the message to Notes format, adds an attachment containing the original MIME, and routes it.
324088825629236992
When an R5 router delivers a message to a recipient's mail file
The router checks the recipient's Person document in the R5 Domino Directory. The field "Format preference for incoming mail" determines the recipient's preference for Internet messages. If the message is in Notes format and
the fimld is set to Prefers Notes Rich Text, the router delivers the message.
the field is set to Prefers MIME, the router converts the message to MIME and delivers the MIME message.
the field is set to No Preference, the router delivers the message.
Note
If the field is set to No Preference, the router delivers the Notes format message because the R4 and R5 Notes clients can read the message and the IMAP and POP server tasks can convert the message to MIME for Internet clients.
If the message is in MIME format and
the field is set to Prefer Notes Rich Text, the router converts the message to Notes format and delivers the Notes format message.
Note
If the NOTES.INI parameter MailDeliverCDorMime is set to 1 on the server, the router does not convert the message and instead delivers it in MIME.
the field is set to Prefer MIME, the router delivers the mes}age.
the field is set to No Preference, the router delivers the message.
If the message is encrypted (S/MIME format), the router creates an attachment containing the S/MIME and creates a Notes format message explaining that the message is encrypted and cannot be converted to Notes format.
Note
If the field is set to No Preference, the router delivers the MIME message because R5 and Internet clients can read the message, and the R5 server-converts the MIME message to CD for clients that cannot read native MIME.
324088825629236993
When an R5 server transfers a message to an R4 server
If the message is in Notes format, the router simply transfers the message to the R4 server.
If the message is MIME, the router tries to access the recipient's Person document. If it has access to the recipient's Person document, it checks the Internet Message Storage field (R4) or Format preference for mncoming mail field (R5).
If the field is set to Notes only (R4) or Prefers Notes Rich Text (R5), the router converts the message to Notes format and transfers the Notes format message.
If the field is set to Internet only (R4) or Prefers MIME (R5), the router converts the MIME message to a MIME attachment and transfers the MIME attachment as the message.
If the field is set to Notes and Internet (R4) or No Preference (R5), the router converts the message to Notes fmrmat, adds an attachment containing the original MIME, and transfers the Notes format message with the MIME attachment.
If the message is encrypted (S/MIME format), the router creates an attachment containing the S/MIME and creates a Notes format message explaining that the message is encrypted and cannot be converted to Notes format.
Note
If the NOTES.INI parameter MailDeliverCDandMime is set to 1 on the server, the router converts the message to Note} format and adds an attachment containing the original MIME.
If the router cannot access the recipient's Person document -- for example, if the recipient is in another domain and the router cannot access that domain's Domino Directory -- by default it converts MIME messages to Notes format and transfers them. You can control this conversion by setting the router to either follow the default behavior or to also add an attachment containing the original MIME to the Notes format message. The defmult behavior conserves disk space and bandwidth but reduces message fidelity; the optional behavior preserves message fidelity but consumes additional disk space and bandwidth.e
324088825629236994
When an R5 router sends mail over SMTP
If an R5 router needs to send a message in Notes format over SMTP, it converts the message to MIME.
Note
The R4 SMTP/MIME MTA supported encapsulation, which placed Notes-specific informatiom in an attachment that could be converted back into Notes data by another MTA. The R5 router does not support R4 encapsulation, but maintains Notes data by another method so that another R5 router can convert the information back into Notes data.
46645049629240175
When an R5 server replicates with an R4 server
When an R5 server replicates a database with MIME content to an R4 server -- for example, if a mail file is on both an R5 and an R4 server, with MIME messmges in the database on the R5 server -- Domino converts any MIME to Notes format.
324088825629236995
When an R5 Notes client composes a MIME message and sends it through an R4 Domino server (the user's mail server is R4)M
The R5 client converts the message from MIME to Notes format and transfers it to the Domino server. If the NOTES.INI parameter MailTransferCDandMIME is set to 1 on the client, the R5 client adds an attachment containing the original MIME to the Nmtes format message.
If the message is encrypted (S/MIME format), the router creates an attachment containing the S/MIME and creates a Notes format message explaining that the message is encrypted and cannot be converted to Notes format.
The IMAP and POP server tasks can convert from Notes format to MIME to deliver messages to IMAP and POP clients.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Mgent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
MTA upgrade scenarios
Click here
Click here
Encrypted messages in mixed environments
Click here
Click here
Sending mail in Notes format to Internet users
Click here
Click here
Internet mail storage format in Domino Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Release 4 clients and servers cannot read native MIME messages; thus, Domino Release 5 has to convert a native MIME message to a Notes document with a MIME attachment to route it to an R4 server. Domino cannot convert an encrypted MIME (S/MIME) message -- doing so would require access to the decryption key, which would be a security flaw. Thus, when an S/MIME message is transferred to an R4 server, Domino converts the message to an attachment containing the S/MIME and a Notes format message stating that the message is encrypted MIME and cannot be read by this version of the software. This conversion allows IMAP, POP, and R5 users to receive encrypted MIME mail and for encrypted MIME mail to be transferred from an R5 server to an R4 server to another R5 server without loss of fidelity or breaking the encrypted signature.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environmentsN
Click here
Click here
MTA upgrade scenarios
Click here
Click here
Sending mail in Notes format to Internet users
Click here
&Arial
When you send a message in Notes format to an Internet user, Domino converts the message to MIME for that user. However, some Notes items do not have MIME equivalents and cannot be converted. The Notes client warns you if you send a message containing these items to Internet users so you can choose whether to edit the message or whether to accept the loss of those features. 9
Notes items which do nmt have MIME equivalents include:
Embedded elements
Highlighting
Horizontal rule
Note
If you send MIME in HTML format, Notes converts the horizontal rule unless you set rule properties such as color, height, or width.
Notes hotspots such as document links
Objects (OLE)
Note
Notes attempts to create an image based on the inactive OLE objec}, but not all OLE objects have inactive images.
Page breaks
Sections
271896534429240787
Calendar and scheduling features over SMTP
Domino routes calendar and scheduling items, such as meeting invitations, over Notes RPC where possible. If you send a calendar or scheduling item over SMTP -- for example, you send a meeting invitation over the Internet -- Domino converts the item to text as it does in 4.5 and 4.6.
For more infmrmation, see "
Click here
Using calendar and scheduling features with Internet mail.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environments
Click here
Click here
Internet mail storage format in Domino Release 5
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message-Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
&Arial
When looking up an address for Internet mail in the Domino Directory in Release 5, Domino checks the $Users view for an exclusive match of the address. If it finds the complete Internet address of the recipient (for example, jdoe@acme.com) in either the Short name or Internet address field, Domino delivers the message to the mail file of that person. Domino also dmlivers based on a match of the local part of the address (for example, jane_doe) with any of the fields in the Person document. For example, if the message is addressed to jane_doe@acme.com, and Domino finds a Person document with the entry "Jane Doe" in the User Name field, Domino delivers the message to Jane Doe's mail file.i
Note
Domino converts underscore characters (_) into spaces; in this example, jane_doe would become jane doe. Domino converts double underscmres (__) into underscores, underscores into spaces, and periods into spaces. The lookup is case-insensitive -- jane doe matches with the entry Jane Doe in a Person document.
Domino's exhaustive lookup in $Users ensures that any address generated by the R4 MTA for a user in your directory is located properly. While you can use the Internet Address field in the Release 5 Person document and the tool that populates this field to standardize Internet addresses in your organization and provide a simgle place for locating and changing Internet addresses, this step is optional -- Domino does not distinguish between R4 and R5 addressing and utilizes both equally well.
For more information on the tool that populates the Internet Address field in Person documents, see "
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documents.
Click here
For more information on the Internet Address field and Internet mail addressing in Rmlease 5, see
Administering the Domino System
or Domino Administration Help.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
How R5 replaces the MTA
Click here
Click here
Configuration in R4 vs. R5
Click here
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documents
Click here
Click here
Using Custom Format Pattern
Click here
Click here
Retrieving LDAP information in a mixed-release environment
Click here
&Arial
You do not need to change how users' Internet messages are stored when upgrading to Release 5. If you have users who only access mail via a POP3 or IMAP client and whose Person documents set their Internet message storage to both Notes and Internet in Release 4, change the field "Format preference for incoming mail" on the Mail tab of those users' Person documents in the Domino Directory to Prefers MIME for improved performance.
In a mixed R4/R5 environment where some clients }se native MIME messages on R5 servers, Domino will not deliver a native MIME message to an R4 client, mail file, or server, because native MIME is unreadable in Release 4.
For more information, see "
Click here
Internet mail conversion in mixed-release environments.
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
MTA upgrade scenariosE
Click here
Click here
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environments
Click here
Click here
IMAP and POP conversion changes in Release 5
Click here
&Arial
When you upgrade an MTA server to an R5 mail server, the NOTES.INI file for the server may contain parameters that are not supported in R5. You do not need to change or remove these parameters -- they are ignored by the server and do not interfere with its functionality in any way.
The upgrade program sets configuration parameters to the settings most commonly used for Internet mail servers. It does not convert R4 NOTES.INI settings to their R5 UI equivalents. If you have unique configuration settings in the NOTES-INI file in R4, you may need to re-enable this configuration using the R5 Server Configuration and Server documents.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Configuration in R4 vs. R5
Click here
Click here
MTA upgrade scenarios
Click here
Click here
Replacing R4 MTAs with R5 mail servers
Click here
&Arial
Conversion from Notes format to MIME in R5 is improved for IMAP and POP users. The IMAP or POP conversion in R5 is similar to the conversion process of the R4 SMTP/MIME MTA and offers greater message fidelity than the R4 IMAP or POP conversion process. The R5 conversion process has more complete text and image handling than R4, but is somewhat slower.
See Also
Clmck here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
How R5 replaces the MTA
Click here
Click here
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environments}
Click here
&Arial
In Release 5, relay host configuration is easier than in Release 4. You can select to route all mail with destinations outside the local Internet domain to a relay host, or not to use a relay host at mll. There is no need to route mail inside the local Internet domain to a relay host since Domino routes SMTP natively.
After upgrading to R5, you need to enter the host name or IP address of the relay host in the Server Configuration document for the upgraded server. In addition, you must enable "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain."
Note
The "smart host," which lists users not in your Domino Directory, has functionalmty similar to a relay host, though its role is different. For more information, see
Administering the Domino System
or Domino Administration Help.e
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
MTA upgrade scenariose
Click here
Click here
Replacing R4 MTAs wi}h R5 mail servers
Click here
Click here
Using a third-party relay host with an R5 mail server
Click here
&Arial
Customers using dial-up access to the Internet may need to take additional steps before and during upgrading to Release 5 of Domino. See
Administering the Domino System
or Domino Administration Help for more information before upgrading.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Afte} upgrading to R5, a mail server router automatically supports multiple transfer threads to the same server. By default, the router allows multiple threads based on configuration settings. You can change these settings to allow more or fewer multiple transfer threads. You can change the maximum number of transfer threads and the maximum number of concurrent transfer threads in the Server Configuration document in Domino Directory. Click the Router/SMTP-Restrictions and Controls-Transfer Controls tab and adj}st the setting in the Maximum transfer threads field to optimize performance in your system.e
Note
Lotus recommends leaving the Maximum transfer threads field blank to allow Domino to configure dynamically the proper number of threads.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Domino Release 5 can route mail using multiple MAIL.BOX databases. Under heavy load, several server threads may try to deposit mail into MAIL.BOX, along with the router attempting to read and update mail. Any process trying to write to MAIL.BOX -- including the server threads and the router -- needs exclusive access to MAIL.BOX. In addition, when the router reads new messages from MAIL.BOX, other processes trying to write-to the database must wait. This can lead to long wait times if there is a large amount of new mail -- for example, on a busy system with heavy mail traffic._
With multiple MAIL.BOX databases, Domino can use multiple concurrent processes, since one process can write to each MAIL.BOX database. When the router is reading one MAIL.BOX, it marks the database "in use" so other server threads trying to deposit mail move to the next MAIL.BOX. This improves performance.
Disk contention is-rarely an issue for MAIL.BOX, so there is usually no need to put the multiple MAIL.BOX databases on different disks. However, it is useful to spread user mail files across multiple disks to ensure that all mail files and MAIL.BOX databases are not on the same disk.
You see large performance improvements even by adding only one additional MAIL.BOX database. Marginal benefit decreases with increasing number of MAIL.BOX databases, though you will continue to see performance gains.
To-set multiple MAIL.BOX databases for a server, do the following:
1. In the Domino Administrator, click the Administration window tab.
2. Click the Configuration tab.
3. Expand the Server Configuration section.
4. Click Configurations.
5. If you have a Configuration Settings document that you want to use for this server, select it and click Edit Configuration. If not, click Add Configuration.
6. If you are creating a-new configuration, do the following:
Enter a server name in the Basics section.
Select which Group or Server this configuration should apply to. Do not select "Use these settings as the default settings for all servers" unless you want every server that this document controls to use SMTP to send messages to the Internet instead of through an Internet mail server.
7. Click the Router/SMTP tab.
8. On the Basics tab, enter the number of MAIL.BOX databmses you want in the Number of mailboxes field.
9. Click the Save and Close button on the Action bar.
10. Shut down the server by changing to the server console and issuing the command
quit
11. Restart the server. Domino creates the new MAIL.BOX databases at server startup -- for example, if you set to use three mailboxes, Domino creates MAIL1.BOX, MAIL2.BOX, and MAIL3.BOX..
See Also
Click here
]pgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Before upgrading the server, warn users that it will be offline and unavailable until after the upgrade.
1. Change to the Domino server console.
2. Type
quit
and press ENTER.
The server should shut down cleanly. e
Go to "
Click here
Backing up Domino server files.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Backing up Domino server files
Click here
No 'SendTo' field in document. Use 'Forward' on the 'Actions' menu instead.
Sending mail in Notes format to Internet usersUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Calendar and scheduling\in mailInternet mail\Notes formatting andMIME messages\converting to Notes formatMail\converting wo MIMENotes\MIME conversion andContentsOverviewH_SENDING_MAIL_IN_NOTES_FORMAT_TO_INTERNET_USERS_3682_OVERTopic1Sending mail in Notes format to Internet usersOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER
H_SENDING_MAIL_IN_NOTES_FORMAT_TO_INTERNET_USERS_3682_OVER_MIDTOPIC_271896534429240787=Calendar and scheduling features over SMTP01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O7Lotus
Internet mail addresses in Domino Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Addresses\in a mixed release environmentInternet Address field\upgrading andInternet mail addreswes\in a mixed-release environmentInternet mail addresses\upgrading andMail addresses\in a mixed release environmentMail addresses\upgrading andMail\addressing to Internet mail usersContentsOverviewH_INTERNET_MAIL_ADDRESSES_IN_DOMINO_RELEASE_5_4093_OVERTopic1Internet mail addresses in Domino Release 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahgr/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
LOG 29442
Internet mail storage format in Domino Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
IMAP\message storage format andInternet mail\storageMIME messages\delivering to Release 4 serversMail delivery\in a mixed-release environmentMail storage\in a mixed-release environmentMail storage\upgrading andMessage conversion\upgrading andPOP3\message storage format andPerson documents\Internet mail storage format andContentsOverviewH_INTERNET_MAIL_STORAGE_FORMAT_IN_DOMINO_RELEASE_5_9831_OVERTopic1Internet mail storage format in Domino Release 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Gnternet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
About Th
Upgrading an MTA server and NOTES.INI parametersUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
MTA servews\NOTES.INI settingsNOTES.INI file\and upgradingSMTP/MIME MTA\NOTES.INI settingsServer upgrade\NOTES.INI settingsContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_AN_MTA_SERVER_AND_NOTES_INI_PARAMETERS_1599_OVERTopic1Upgrading an MTA server and NOTES.INI parametersOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
OG 2800 256
IMAP and POP conversion changes in Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
IMAP service\upgradingPOP3 service\upgradingContentsOverviewH_CONVERSION_CHANGES_IN_DOMINO_RELEASE_5_3990_OVERTopic1IMAP and POP conversion changes ig Release 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Relay host changes in Domino Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Relay hosts\configuringContentsOverviewH_RELAY_HOST_CHANGES_IN_DOMINO_RELEASE_5_4270_OVERTopic1Relay host changes in Domino Release 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using dial-up with Domino Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Dialup connections\upgradingContentsOverviewH_USING_DIAL_UP_WITH_DOMINO_RELEASE_5_4427_OVERTopic1Using dial-up with Domino Release 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_G_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading an Internet mail server to use multiple threadsUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
MTA servers\upgrading to use multiple transfer threadsServer upgrade\transfer threads andTransfer threads\server upgrade andContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_TO_USE_MULTIPLE_THREADS_479_OVERTopic1Upgrading an Internet mail server to use multiple threadsOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgraging an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
_ASSIGN_RO
Setting up a clusterClusters
.AContentsOverviewH_SETTING_UP_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Setting up a clusterOverviewHWCLUSTERS_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters04 Setting up a Cluster
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
91689629254900=What happenedH_FILE_DOES_NOT_EXIST_MIDTOPIC_402391689629254901=What you can do
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
vid Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Multiple MAIL.BOX databases on a mail serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
MAIL.BOX databases\performanceMail\performancePerformance\multiple MAIL.BOX databases andContentsOverviewH_MULTIPLE_MAIL_BOX_DATABASES_DN_A_MAIL_SERVER_436_OVERTopic1Multiple MAIL.BOX databases on a mail serverOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
CN=Da
NSFBufferPool size in R5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
NSFBufferPool\size in R5NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size\in R5ContentsOverviewH_NSFBUFFERPOOL_SIZE_IN_R5_4496_OVERTopic1NSFBufferPool size in R5OverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
finedS/M
Upgrading a Domino serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino server\steps to upgradeDomino server\upgrade overviewDomino server\upgradingServer upgrade\overviewServer upgrade\steps for Domino serverServers\upgradingUpgrade steps\for Domino serverContentsStepsH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_TTEPSTopic1Upgrading a Domino serverStepsH_UPGRADING_NOTES_DOMINO_TO_R5_OVER
H_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_171026278429244022=New FeaturesH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_131783193629308160=System TemplatesH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_164633987229247820=Performance ImprovementsH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_164633987229247822=Upgrade Changes01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Shutting down the Domino serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino serter\and editing NOTES.INI during upgradeDomino server\shutting downDomino server\shutting down to upgradeServer upgrade\shutting down Domino to upgradeContentsStepsH_SHUTTING_DOWN_THE_DOMINO_SERVER_2789_STEPSTopic1Shutting down the Domino serverStepsH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Backing up Domino server filesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Backing up\files on Domino server before upgradingDomino server\backing up filesDomino server\backing up files before upgradingFiles\backing up on Domino server before upgradingServer files\backing ut before upgradingServer upgrade\backing up files for DominoContentsStepsH_BACKING_UP_DOMINO_SERVER_FILES_212_STEPSTopic1Backing up Domino server filesStepsH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
CROSS_CER
Updating the NOTES.INI fileUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
NOTES.INI file\and upgradingNOTES.INI file\updatingReporter task\and upgradingReporter task\deletingServer upgrade\and editing NOTES.INIServerTasks=\and upgradingStatistics\Reporter taskContentsStepsH_REMOVING_THE_REPORTER_TASK_FROM_THE_NOTES_INI_FILE_8295_STEPSTopic1Updating the NOTES.INI fileStepsH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
m your Us
Removing Domino as a Windots NT ServiceUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
NT service\removing before upgradingServer upgrade\removing Domino as an NT serviceUpgrade steps\for Domino serverWindows NT service\removing before upgradingContentsOverviewH_REMOVING_DOMINO_AS_A_WINDOWS_NT_SERVICE_809_OVERTopic1Removing Domino as a Windows NT ServiceOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU4CAM/O=Lotus
8281629238
Installing Domino Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino Administrator\installingDomino server\and installing Release 5Release 5\installing on a Domino serverSetver upgrade\and installing Release 5ContentsStepsH_INSTALLING_DOMINO_RELEASE_5_5488_STEPSTopic1Installing Domino Release 5StepsH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ING_NOTES
Using the Domino Directory ProfileUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Directory ProfileDomino Directory ProfileDomino Directory Profile\usingContentsStepsH_USING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_PROFILE_3911_STEPSTopic1Using the Domino Directory ProfileStepsH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
Remove memory management, name lookup controls, and debugging parameters from the NOTES.INI file.
1. Make sure you backed up important server files. See "
Click here
Backing up Domino server files.
Click here
2. Open the NOTES.INI file for the server you are upgrading in a text editor such as Microsoft Notepad.
3. If the followjng entries exist in the file, remove them:
NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size
NSF_DbCache_Maxentries
Server_Name_Lookup_Noupdate
Any debugging parameters
4. Save the file.
5. Close the text editor.
If you run Domino as a Windows NT Service, go to
Click here
"Removing Domino as a Windows NT Service.
Click here
Otherwise, go to "
Click here
Jnstalling Domino Release 5.
Click here
Note
The file statistics tasks performed by the Reporter task in Release 4 are handled by the Database Catalog and the statistical analysis done by Reporter is handled by the Domino performance tools. Instead of Reporter, the Event task can monitor databases and generate an event that notifies the administrator that unused space in a file has reached a threshold level. In addition, this monitorinj event can also be set to compact automatically databases that reach the threshold level.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Backing up Domino server files
Click here
Click here
Installing Domino Release 5
Click here
&Arial
If you run Domino on Windows NT as an NT Service, you must uninstall Domino as an NT Service before upgrading. Perform the following steps to remove Domino as an NT Service.
1. Choose Start - Run.
2. Type
NTSVINST -D
and click OK.
Go to
Click here
"Installing Domino Release 5.
Click here
&Arial
1. Make sure you backed up all important Domino files and removed unnecessary entries from the NOTES.INI file. See "
Click here
Backing up Domino server files
Click here
" and "
Click here
Updating the NOTES.INI file.
Click here
2. Install the Domino Release 5 software. If you install Domino in the same directory as the previous version, you do not need to change the servez configuration. If you install Domino in a new directory, the program prompts you to configure the server.
3. During installation, select the server type for which you purchased a license.
4. After installation, launch the Domino Release 5 server.
See
Setting Up a Domino Server
for more details.
Setting Up a Domino Server
is available in print and as an Adobe Acrobat (PDF) file.
Note
Instjlling a Domino server does not install the Domino Administrator (Release 5 administration client). You must perform a second installation using the client setup program to install a Domino Administrator on the server computer. Lotus recommends you administer the server from a separate computer.
Go to "
Click here
Upgrading the Public Address Book.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Updating the NOTJS.INI file
Click here
Click here
Upgrading the Public Address Book(
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
&Arial
The Domino server prompts you to upgrade the design of the Public Address Book with the R5 Domino Directory template (PUBNAMES.NTF) after upgrading Domino. The new Domino Directory template works with the Domino Administrator client to streamline directory and Domino server administration. The Domino Directory is backwards-compatible and is designed for use in mixed*release environments. Upgrade the design of your address book to the Release 5 Domino Directory template once you upgrade your server to Release 5. Then upgrade the database format of the Domino Directory by compacting the database and rebuilding its views.
Note
The Domino Directory template name is still StdR4PublicAddressBook for backwards-compatibility purposes.
324088825629236990
Upgrading the Public Address Book to the Domino Direjtory template
1. When Domino asks if you want to upgrade the Public Address Book design to the Release 5 template, type
This replaces the R4 Public Address Book template with the R5 Domino Directory template.
2. Once the server launches, verify that there are no errors or problems. Then, quit the server. Type
quit
and press ENTER.
246176896029227116
Compacting the Domino Directory after upgrjding
1. From the command line of your operating system, change to the Domino program directory and compact the Domino Directory to the new R5 ODS.
On Microsoft Windows NT (Intel platforms), type
ncompact names.nsf
and press ENTER.
Note
If your Domino Directory has a file name other than NAMES.NSF, substitute the correct file name for NAMES.NSF.
On Microsoft Windows NT (Alpha platforms),*typey
acompact names.nsf
and press ENTER.
Note
If your Domino Directory has a file name other than NAMES.NSF, substitute the correct file name for NAMES.NSF.i
On IBM OS/2 Warp, type
icompact names.nsf
and press ENTER.
Note
If your Domino Directory has a file name other than NAMES.NSF, substitute the correct file name for NAMES.NSF.
On UNIX platforms, type
compact names.nsf
and press ENTER.
Note
If your Domino Directory has a file name other than names.nsf, substitute the correct file name for names.nsf.
This moves the Domino Directory from the R4 ODS to the R5 ODS.
2. After you compact the Domino Directory to the new R5 database format, rebuild the ($ServerAccess) and the ($Users) views in the Domino Directory.
200169699229229349
Rebuilding views in the Domino Directory
1. From the command line of your operating system, rebuild the ($ServerAccess) and ($Users) views in the Domino Directory.
On Microsoft Windows NT (Intel platforms), type
nupdall names.nsf -t "($ServerAccess)" -r
and press ENTER. Then type
nupdall names.nsf -t "($Users)" -r
and press ENTER.
On Microsoft Windows NT (Alpha platforms), type
aupdall names.nsf -t "($ServerAccess)" -r
and press ENTER. Then type
aupdall names.nsf -t "($Users)" -r
and press ENTER.
On IBM OS/2 Warp, type
iupdall names.nsf -t "($ServerAccess)" -r
and press ENTER. Then type
iupdall names.nsf -t "($Users)" -r
and press ENTER.
On UNIX platforms, type
updall names.nsf -t /($ServerAccess) -r
and press ENTER. Then zype
updall names.nsf -t /($Users) -r
and press ENTER.
Rebuilding the ($ServerAccess) and ($Users) views in the Domino Directory allows clients to access the server more quickly.
2. After you rebuild views in the Domino Directory, launch the Domino server.
324088825629236991
Updating views in databases on the upgraded Domino server
1. Once the Domino server is running, type
load updall
and press ENTER.
This rebuilds database views, allowing users to access the Domino Directory and other databases on the server more quickly. The amount of time Updall takes to run depends on the number of databases on the server, the size of the databases, and the complexity of the views in those databases.
35769136029233966
Replicating the Domino Directory design to other servers
Once you upgrade a server to R5, you can and should replicate thj Domino Directory design to the Public Address Books on your organization's other servers, including Release 4 and Release 3 servers. The Domino Directory is designed for use in mixed-release environments and for administering R4 and earlier servers.
Note
After replicating the new template to other servers, you must rebuild the views in the Domino Directories / Public Address Books on those servers. The view rebuild for the R5 template on an R4 or R3 server is timj-consuming. Lotus recommends you replicate the template and rebuild the views for pre-R5 servers on a weekend or during other times when server load is low.
See Also
Click here
Installing Domino Release 5
Click here
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
Click here
New and deleted design elements in the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
New forms in the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documents
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Directory Assistance
Click here
Click here
Web authentication ajd secondary address books
Click here
Click here
Host names in Server documents
Click here
ji~ie
&Arial
After you upgrade the first Domino server in your domain and replicate the new Domino Directory template to the other servers, upgrade the server that acts as the administration server for the Domino Directory. This lets you take advantage of the new R5 Administration Process features. Follow the steps in this chapter to upgrade the administration server.
For steps on how to upgrade a Domino server, sje "
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server.
Click here
73775491229232329
Upgrading the Administration Requests template
After upgrading the administration server for the Domino Directory, process all requests in the Administration Requests database, then shut down the Administration Process and upgrade the design of the Administration Requests database on that server to the R5 template. The R5 Administration Requests temzlate is designed for backwards compatibility with the R4 Administration Process and use in mixed-release environments. You can and should replicate the new design to the Administration Requests databases on your organization's other servers.
Note
You do not need to process all the requests in the Administration Requests database to upgrade the database, but Lotus recommends processing as many as possible for a faster upgrade.
8993000322923273:
Processing requests in the Administration Requests database
1. Change to the Domino server console.i
2. Type
tell adminp process all
and press ENTER.
Note
You may need to issue this command more than once, as some Administration Requests create others.
3. Once the administration process finishes processing requests, shut it down.
89930003229232735
Shutting down the Administration Process on the server
1. Type
tell adminp quit
and press ENTER.
2. Upgrade the design of the Administration Requests database.
89930003229232736
Upgrading the design of the Administration Requests database
1. Launch the Domino Administrator client.
2. Choose File - Database - Open.
3. In the Server field, type the name of the upgraded admijistration server.
4. Select the Administration Requests (R4) database (ADMIN4.NSF) and click Open.
5. If this is the first time you have opened the Administration Requests database, you see the About This Database document. Press ESC to close the document.
6. Choose File - Database - Replace Design.
7. Click Template Server.
8. In the Server field, enter the name of a Release 5 Domino server and click OK.
9. Selecz the Administration Requests (R5.0) template (ADMIN4.NTF) and click Replace..
10. When the Domino Administrator displays a warning about replacing the design, click Yes.
11. Close the Administration Requests database.
12. Replicate the new design to the other servers in your organization.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Upgradjng the Administration Requests database on an MTA server
Click here
~YpkM
R"wce
&Arial
Domino automatically upgrades many system templates to Release 5 design.
103309:23229308159
Databases upgraded automatically
Database Title
File Name
Administration Rjquests.
ADMIN4.NTF
Agent Log
ALOG4.NTF
Billing
BILLING.NTF
Local free time info
BUSYTIME.NTF
Catalogi
CATALOG.NTF
Certificjtion Log
CERTLOG.NTF
Cluster Directory
CLDBDIR4.NTF
Master Address Book (to Directory Assistance)k
MAB.NTF (DA50.NTF)
Database Analysisa
DBA4.NTF
Domino Configuration
DOMCFG.NTF
Domino Web Server Loje
DOMLOG.NTF
Statistics & Eventss
EVENTS4.NTFf
Notes Log Analysis
LOGA4.NTFn
Notes Log
LOG.NTF
Mail Router Mailbox
MAILBOX.NTF
<Server>
Mailbox
MAIL.BJX
NT/Migrating Users' Passwords
NTSYNC45.NTF
Public Address Book (to Domino Directory)9
PUBNAMES.NTF
Server Web Navigator
PUBWEB45.NTF (PUBWEB50.NTF)
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
103309923229308160
Databases not upgraded automatically
Database Title
File Nameg
Certificate Authoritye
CCA*.NTF (* = Release Number; e.g., 50)
Server Certificate Admin
CSRV*.NTF (* = Release Number; e.g., 50)
Statistics Reporting
STATRP45.NTF
Domino Web Administration
WEBADMIN.NTF
head title;Chead;Chead title;Cjapter title;Dhead
&Arial
Notes R4 clients can render some system databases that use R5 templates transparently. Some R5 templates, though, do not render well to R4 clients. Templates fall into three categories: those that are supported with the R4 client, those*that are supported but have altered appearance, and those that should not be used in a mixed environment.
71604953629308185
Templates supported with the R4 client
Database title
File Name
Agent Log
ALOG4.NTF
Billing
BILLING.NTF
Local free time info
BUSYTIME.NTF
Domino R5 Certificate Authority
CCA50.NTF8
Certification Loge
CERTLOG.NTF
Cluster Analysis
CLUSTA4.NTF
Database Library
DBLIB4.NTF
Microsoft Office Library
DOCLBM50.NTF
Doc Library - Notes & Webt
DOCLBW50.NTF
Personal Journal
JOURNAL4.NTF
Notes Log
LOG.NTF
Mail Router Mailbox
MAILBOX.NTF
Personal Web Navigator
PERWEB50.NTF
NT/Migrating Users' Passwords
NTSYNC45.NTF
Statistics Repjrting
STATREP5.NTF
Domino Configuration
DOMCFG.NTF
Domino Web Server Log
DOMLOG.NTF
Mailing List
MAILLIST.NTF
NNTP Discussion
NNTPDI50.NTF
Server Web Navigator
PUBWEB50*NTF
Reports
REPORTS.NTF
Resource Reservations
RESRC50.NTF
Site Registration
SIREGW50.NTF
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
71604953629308186
Templates supported with altered appearance wth an R4 client
Database Title
File Name
Archive Log
ARCHLG50.NTF
Catalog
CATALOG.NTF
Cluster Directory
CLDBDIR4.NTF
Database Analysis
DBA4.NTF
Decommission Server Reports
DECOMSRV.NTF
Directory Assistance
DA50.NTF
Domino Directory
PUBNAMES.NTF
Notes Log Analysis
LOGA4.NTF
Personal Address Book
PERNAMES.NTF
Statistics & Events
EVENTS4.NTF
DECS Administrator Template (partial support)
DECSADM.NTF
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
71604953629308187
Templates that are not supported with an R4 client
Database Tjtle
File Name
Bookmarkse
BOOKMARK.NTF
Design Synopsis Template
DSGNSYN.NTF
Domino Administrator
DOMADMIN.NTF
Direjtory Catalog
DIRCAT5.NTF
Subscriptions
HEADLINE.NTF
Mail (IMAP)
IMAPCL5.NTF
Mail (R5.0)
MAIL50.NTF
TeamRoom (5.0)
TEAMROOM.NTF
Domino MailTracker Store
MTSTORE.NTF
News Articles (NNTP)
NNTPCL5.NTF8
Domino R5 Certificate Administration
CSRV50.NTF
User Registration Queue
USERREG.NTF
Web Administration
WEBADMIN.NTF
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
After upgrading to R5, a mail server router automatically supports multiple transfer threads to the same server. By default, the router allows multizle threads based on configuration settings. You can change these settings to allow more or fewer multiple transfer threads. You can change the maximum number of transfer threads and the maximum number of concurrent transfer threads in the Server Configuration document in Domino Directory. Click the Restrictions and Controls - Transfer Controls tab and adjust the settings to optimize performance in your system. Click the Router/SMTP-Restrictions and Controls-Transfer Controls tab and adjust the setting in tje Maximum transfer threads field to optimize performance in your system.o
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
&Arial
Upgrading clustered servers is exactly the same as upgrading other R4 servers to R5.
For information on upgrading servers that use the R4 Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to route Internet mail, see "c
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5.0.t
Click here
For information on upgrading all other servers, see "
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server.
Click here
For issues involved with using a mixed R4 / R5 cluster, see "p
Click here
Using mail in a mixed-release cluster.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Mail files in a mixed-release cluster
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
&Arial
Domino Release 5 can route mail using multiple MAIL.BOX databases. Under heavy load, several server threads may try to deposit mail into MAIL.BOX, along wiph the router attempting to read and update mail. Any process trying to write to MAIL.BOX -- including the server threads and the router -- needs exclusive access to MAIL.BOX. In addition, when the router reads new messages from MAIL.BOX, other processes trying to write to the database must wait. This can lead to long wait times if there is a large amount of new mail -- for example, on a busy system with heavy mail traffic.3
With multiple MAIL.BOX databases, Domino can use multiple concurrent ppocesses, since one process can write to each MAIL.BOX database. When the router is reading one MAIL.BOX, it marks the database "in use" so other server threads trying to deposit mail move to the next MAIL.BOX. This improves performance.O
Disk contention is rarely an issue for MAIL.BOX, so there is usually no need to put the multiple MAIL.BOX databases on different disks. However, it is useful to spread user mail files across multiple disks to ensure that all mail files and MAIL.BOX databases ape not on the same disk.
You see large performance improvements even by adding only one additional MAIL.BOX database. Marginal benefit decreases with increasing number of MAIL.BOX databases, though you will continue to see performance gains.
To set multiple MAIL.BOX databases for a server, open the Server Configuration document that applies to that server, click the Router/SMTP-Basics tab, and enter the number of MAIL.BOX databases you want in the Number of mailboxes field.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a mail server to use multiple threads
Click here
&Arial
If you add an R4.6x server to a Notes domain which has an R5 hub server, change the Home URL field on the Internet Protocols - HTTP tab of the Server document for the R4.6x server. The default setting for the Home URL field is:
/homepage.nsf?Open
Homepage.nsf is an R5 database. Change the entry in the Home UPL field to a URL you want users to see when they open the server, such as with a ?OpenServer command, from a browser.
208734211229317254
To change the Home URL field
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Expand the Server Configuration section.
3. Click "All Server Documents."
4. Double-click the Server document for the server for which you want to change the Home URL field.
5. Click Edit Server.
6. Click the Internet Protocols - HTTP tab.
7. Under the Mapping section, enter the Web page or database that users should see when they access the server with a browser.
8. Click Save and Close.
If you set the Home URL field to:o
/?Open
/?OpenServer
to allow users to see a list of the databases on the server, you must also do the following:
9. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
10. Expand the Server Configuration section.r
11. Click "All Server Documents."
12. Double-click the Server document for the server for which you want to change the Home URL field.
13. Click Edit Server.
14. Click the Internet Protocols - HTTP tab.i
15. Select Yes for the field "Allow HTTP clients to browse databases."
16. Cli`k Save and Close.
If you do not make this change, Web clients try to browse the list of databases, but get an error because they are not authorized to do so. In R4.6x, the default setting for "Allow HTTP clients to browse databases" is Yes. In R5, the default setting is No.
&Arial
The Domino server time zone and daylight savings time settings should match those of servers with which a server replicates. If the settings do not match, you may experience unexpected behavior from agents that run at a scheduled time.l
Note
Be sure the time zone and daylight savings time are set correctly for the server's operating system.
To change whether the server uses the operating system settings, change the settings in the Time zone and DST fields in the Server Location section of the Server document in the Domino Directory -- for example, after upgrading a server to Release 5.
Note
Do not change the operating system time zone or daylight savings time settings between the time you configure the server and the first time you run it.
Note
If you change the time zone or daylight savings time for the operating system while the Domino server is running, the new settings do not take effect until you restart the server.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
&Arial
In Release 5, the NSFBufferPool has no effective size limit, though it is constrained by operating system limits and, potentially, by the maximum size of a NOTES.INI variable. NOTES.INI variables cannot be larger than 2GB, since these are signed variables. This is a change from R4.5 and R4.6, when the NSFBufferPool had a coded limit in Domino.
When a Domino server starts, the server allocates between 1/4 (25%) and 3/8 (37.5%) of the physical RAM on the server to the NSFBufferPool as memory for Domino. A Notes client allocates memory similarly, but sets a maximum of 8MB on the NSFBufferPool. Administrators (for the server) and end users (for the client) can override this default allocation and set the size of the NSFBufferPool manually by using one of two NOTES.INI variables:t
NOTES.INI variable
Units
Limit
NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size=x
Bytes
2GB, based on NOTES.INI variable limitations
NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size_MB=x1
none; subject to OS limits
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;D`ead
The NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size_MB variable removes the 2GB limitation that exists for NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size due to NOTES.INI variable limits.
Tuning the NSFBufferPool should not be necessary, except on partitioned servers. In some cases, Domino does not need all the memory in the NSFBufferPool, so administrators may wish to experiment with decreasing the amount of memory in the NSFBufferPool by setting one of the NOTES.INI variabl`s. This allows the server to use the memory for other purposes.
On partitioned servers, allocating all the memory normally reserved for the NSFBufferPool could result in problems -- for example, a computer with 6 Domino partioned servers could not allocate 25% of memory to each partition. Administrators should divide the memory that would be allocated to a Domino server (from 1/4 to 3/8 of physical RAM) by the number of partitions and manually set the NSFBufferPool size via a NOTES.INI variabl` for each server. Administrators can then modify the setting for each partition depending on the relative load. r
In general, it is best to allow Domino to allocate memory for the NSFBufferPool. Set the size of the NSFBufferPool only if the server is running slowly due to inadequate available memory.a
See Also
Click here
NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size
Click here
&Arial
In R5, the default value for the field "Maximum requests over a single connection" on the Internet Protocols - HTTP tab of the Server document is 1. In Release 4.6, the default value was 5. This change improves performance. If you are upgrading an R4 server to R5, the value you set in this field is preserved and does not change.
&Arial
To upgrade Domino Administration, do the following:r
Clic` here
Upgrade administration clients
Click here
Click here
Upgrade to the Web Administrator tool_
Click here
See also information on:
Click here
Using the Domino Administrator in a mixed environment
Click here
Click here
Using message tracking in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Se` Also
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documents
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Directory Assistance
Click here
Click here
Web authentication and secondary address books
Click here
Click here
Upgr`ding administration clients
Click here
Click here
Upgrading to the Web Administrator tool
Click here
&Arial
Once you upgrade y`ur R4 Public Address Book to the R5 Domino Directory template, upgrade your administration clients to the R5 Domino Administrator. Due to changes in the forms in the Domino Directory, it is easier and more efficient to administer your servers and Notes domain with the Domino Administrator. In addition, the Domino Administrator features a greatly enhanced interface which simplifies server administration. The Domino Administrator is designed to administer a mixed-release environment and works smoothly with R0 servers.
95001536029239966
Installing the R5 Domino Administrator cliente
In R5, you install the Domino Administrator client separately from the server.
220684060829313178
Installing the R5 Domino Administrator on a Server
While Lotus supports installing the Domino Adminstrator on the same computer as a Domino server, Lotus strongly recommends administering the server from a separate computer. The Domino Administrator uses resource-intensive processes to monitor and administer servers. Installing the Domino Administrator on the same computer as a server uses resources and reduces server performance. For best server performance, administer the server from a different computer.
For more information, see "g
Click here
Installing the Domino Administrator in Release 5
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Domi`o Administration
Click here
Click here
Upgrading to the Web Administrator tool,
Click here
Click here
Using message tracking in a mixed-release environment
Click here
&Arial
When you upgrade a Domino server to R5, the upgrade program deletes your R4 Web Administration database (WEBADMIN.NSF) and creates a new Web Administrator database based on the R5 template (WEBADMIN.NTF). This is necessary t` use the new R5 design. If you customized the ACL of your R4 Web Administration database, you must re-enter this information in the new Web Administrator database ACL.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Domino Administration
Click here
Click here
Upgrading administration clients
Click here
Click here
Using message tracking in a mixed-release environment
Click here
&Arial
160584063229240759
Tracking Center
Message tracking for administrators (using the Tracking Center in the Domino Administrator) can only track messages across R5 servers that have message tracking enabled. If a message was transferred to a pre-R5 or third-party server, you can no longer track that message using the Tracking Center.
Note
Message tracking information is not added for messages that enter the Domino domain from other sources, such as a th`rd-party mail server.
44277107229240619
End user (mail-based) message tracking
Users with an R5 mail file can track messages that are routed through pre-R5 and third-party servers as long as these servers maintain the fidelity of the Notes fields in the message tracking request. Domino only returns message tracking information from R5 servers that have message tracking enabled. If the third-party servers do not maintain these fields, messages cannot be tracked bepond these servers.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Domino Administration
Click here
Click here
Upgrading administration clients
Click here
Click here
Upgrading to the Web Administrator tool
Click here
&Arial
The Domino Administrator is designed to administer a mixed R4/R5 environment. However, since the Domino Administrator takes advantage of new R5 features, there are some limitations in a mixed environment.
Server bookmarks
If the Directory server (set in the Administration Preferences by choosing File - Preferences - Administration Preferences) is not an R5 server, the Domino Administrator can only retrieve 64KB of server names for the server bookmarks. To avoid this limitation, set an R5 server as the Directory server.
User registrationw
User registration with the Domino Administrator does not function properly if the registration server does not use the new Domino Directory template.c
Server monitoring
When monitoring R4 servers, the Domino Administrator cannot report the status of individual tasks, such as the router. The Domino Administrator only reports whether the server is responding or not.
Replication schedule
The replication schedule display does not work with R4 servers.
ACL management tools
The ACL management tools on the Files tab of the Domino Administrator do not work with databases on R4 servers.s
h{age
&Arial
Po upgrade Notes to Release 5, perform the following steps:
Click here
Back up important files
Click here
Click here
Install Notes Release 5
Click here
See also information on:
268992819229244024
Upgrade Changes
Click here
Converting the workspace to bookmarks
Click here
Click here
Petting your Personal Address Book preferences
Click here
Click here
Changes to the Personal Address Book
Click here
Click here
Portfolio databases in Notes Release 5
Click here
Click here
Upgrading your mail file to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Creating account records for Internet mail
@lick here
269052819229244025
Using Notes Release 5
Click here
Setting default workstation security
Click here
Click here
Synchronizing time zones and daylight savings time with Notes
Click here
Click here
Using calendar and scheduling features with Internet mail
Click here
Click here
Repeating `eetings and R5
Click here
Click here
See also information on "Sending mail in Notes format to Internet users
Click here
See Also
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
New Lotus Notes clie`t features
Click here
Click here
Backing up Notes client files
Click here
Click here
Changes to the Personal Address Book
Click here
Click here
Upgrading your mail file to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Portfolio databases in Notes Release 5
Click here
Click here
Using calendar and scheduling features with Internet mail
Click here
Click here
Repeating meetings and R5
Click here
2Q he
(VD"p
(VD"p
&Arial
Back up important Notes client files in case an error occurs during the upgrade process. If you experience problems, you can restore these files with the backed-up versions. Back up the following files for each Notes client:
File
Default Location
NOTES.INI (Notes Preferences on the Macintosh)
System directory (for example, C:\WIN95)
DESKTOP.DSK
Notes data directory (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA)
Personal Address Book (NAMES.NSF by default)
Notes data directory (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA)
User ID files (for example, JSMITH.ID)
Notes data directory (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA)
Local databases (.NSF)
Notes data directory (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA)
Local database directory links (.DIR)
Notes data directory (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA)
Any customized Notes database templates .NTF)
Notes data directory (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA)
USER.DIC (Personal dictionary entries for spellchecker)
Notes data directory (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA)
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5
@lick here
Click here
Install the Notes Release 5 software
Click here
h{age
&Arial
1. Make sure you backed up important Notes client files. See "
Click here
Backing up Notes client files
Click here
2. Run SETUP.EXE. Follow the prompts on the Setup screens to properly install the software. Select the type of client for which you purchased a license.
3. Launch Notes.
Notes sets up and upgrades the software automatically if you install Release 5 in the same directory as the previous release of Notes. If you install the Release 5 software in a different directory, Notes prompts you to complete the configuration process. If you install Notes in a different directory, be aware that the Setup program places NOTES.INI in the Notes program directory. In previous releases, the Install program placed NOTES.INI in the system directory by default.
Note
Notes automatically upgrades your Personal Address Book to the Release 5 design. If you have Internet mail set up to work with POP3, Notes creates an Account record for that Internet mail configuration. See "
Click here
Creating account records for Internet mail.E
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5o
Click here
Click here
Backing up Notes client files.
Click here
h{age
&Arial
In a mixed R4/R5 cluster, users cannot have an R5 mail file on both R4 servers and R5 servers -- the R5 mail template does not work properly on an R4 server. If you have a mixed cluster with mail files, use the R4 design for mail files or place users' mail files only on R4 servers (with R4 design) or only on R5 servers (with R5 design) -- do not mix releases. This is necessary because cluster replication ignores selective replication formulas - you cannot prevent the mail file design from replicating to other clustered servers.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading clusters
Click here
Click here
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environments
Click here
Click here
Encrypted messages in mixed environments
Click here
Click here
Internet mail storage fopmat in Domino Release 5
Click here
Click here
IMAP and POP conversion changes in Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Domino presents many possibilities for configuring your mail system infrastructure, whether you want to use Notes routing, SMTP routing, or both, for internal and external messages. However, before you set up mail rout`ng, there are a number of decisions and factors to consider:
Click here
How clients access the server
Click here
Click here
How internal mail routes
Click here
Click here
How external mail routes
Click here
See Also
Click here
Sample mail routing configurations
Cl`ck here
Click here
Setting up Notes routing
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing
Click here
Upgrading the Public Address BookUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino Directory\compactingDomino Directory\rebuilding viewsDomino Directory\replicatingDomino Directory\upgradiag from Public Address BookDomino Directory\upgrading toDomino server\upgrading Public Address BookInstalling\and upgrading Public Address BookNAMES.NSF\compacting to Release 5 On-Disk StructureNAMES.NSF\upgrading to Release 5 Domino DirectoryPUBNAMES.NTF\upgradingPublic Address Book\compactingPublic Address Book\upgrading to Domino DirectoryServer upgrade\upgrading Public Address BookUpgrade steps\for Public Address BookUpgrading\Domino DirectoryUpgrading\Public Address BookContentsStepsH_DECIDING_WHEN_TO_QPGRADE_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_6709_STEPSTopic1Upgrading the Public Address BookStepsH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS
H_DECIDING_WHEN_TO_UPGRADE_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1718_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_324088825629236990=Upgrading the Public Address Book to the Domino Directory templateH_DECIDING_WHEN_TO_UPGRADE_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1718_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_246176896029227116=Compacting the Domino Directory after upgradingH_DECIDING_WHEN_TO_UPGRADE_QHE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1718_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_200169699229229349=Rebuilding views in the Domino DirectoryH_DECIDING_WHEN_TO_UPGRADE_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1718_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_324088825629236991=Updating views in databases on the upgraded Domino serverH_DECIDING_WHEN_TO_UPGRADE_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1718_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_35769136029233966=Replicating the Domino Directory design to other servers01 Moving to Notes and Domino Relaase 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading the administration server for the Domino DirectoryUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
ADMIN4.NSF\upgradingAdministration Process\upgradingAdministration Requests database\upgradingAdministration servers\updating for Domino DirectoryAdministration servers\upgradingDomino Directory\updating administration server forDomino server\upgrading Administration Requests databaseServers\upgrading Administration Requests databaseContentsStepsH_UPGRADING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DATABASE_3753_STEPSTopic1Upgrading the administration server for the Domino DirectoryStepsH_UPARADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS
H_UPGRADING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DATABASE_3753_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_73775491229232329=Upgrading the Administration Requests templateH_UPGRADING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DATABASE_3753_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_89930003229232734=Processing requests in the Administration Requests databaseH_UPGRADING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DATABASE_3753_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_89930003229232735=Shutting down the Administration Process on the serverH_UPGRADING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DATABASE_3751_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_89930003229232736=Upgrading the design of the Administration Requests database01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading system templatesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Templates\upgradingContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_SYSTEM_DATABASES_5650_OVERTopic1Upgrading system templatesOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS
H_UPGRADING_SYSTEM_DATABASES_5650_OVER_MIDTOPIC_103309923229308159=Databases upgraded automaticallyH_UPGRADING_SYSTEM_DATABASES_5650_OVER_MIDTOPIC_103309923229308160=Databases not upgraded automatically01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgradina a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Template interoperabilityUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
H_TEMPLATE_INTEROPERABILITY_2192_OVER_MIDTOPIC_71604953629308185=Templates supported with the R4 clientH_TEMPLATE_INTEROPERABILITY_2192_OVER_MIDTOPIC_71604953629308186=Templates supported with altered appearance wth an R4 clientH_TEMPLATE_INTEROPERABILITY_2192_OVER_MIDTOPIC_71604953629308187=Templates that are not supported with an R4 client01 Moving to Notes!and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading a mail server to use multiple threadsUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino server\and upgrading to use multiple transfer threadsMail servers\upgradingMultiple transfer threads\and server upgradeServer upgrade\and multiple transfer threadsTransfer threads\upgrading a server to use multipleContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MAIL_SERVER_TO_USE_MULTIPLE_THREADS_8071_OVERTopic1Upgrading a mail server to use multiple threadsOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using multiple MAIL.BOX databasesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
MAIL.BOX databases\using multipleMAIL.BOX databases\using multiple databasesAail\performance and multiple MAIL.BOXPerformance\multiple MAIL.BOX databases andContentsOverviewH_USING_MULTIPLE_MAIL_BOX_DATABASES_6348_OVERTopic1Using multiple MAIL.BOX databasesOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating new R4 servers in a mixed-release environmentUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
.AContentsOverviewH_CREATING_NEW_R4_SERVERS_IN_A_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENT_1470_OVERTopic1Creating new R4 servers in a mixed-release environmentOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS
H_CREATING_NEW_R4_SERVERS_IN_A_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENT_1470_OVER_MIATOPIC_208734211229317254=To change the Home URL field<+!>01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Changing Damino server time zone and daylight savings time settingsUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Daylight savings time setting\changing for Domino serverSystem time\changing for Domino serverTime zones\changing for Domino serverTime zones\synchronizing Domino and operating systemContentsOverviewH_CHANGING_DOMINO_SERVER_TIME_ZONE_AND_DAYLIGHT_SAVINGS_TIME_SETTINGS_1383_OVERTopic1Changing Domino server time zone and daylight savings time settingsOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
NSFBufferPool in R5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
NSFBufferPool\size in R5NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size\in R5ContentsOverviewH_NSFBUFFERPOOL_IN_R5_6848_OVERTopic1NSFBufferPool in R5OverviewH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Maximum requests over a single connectionUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
.AContentsOverviewH_MAXIMUM_REQUESTS_OVER_A_SINGLE_CONNECTION_7040_OVERTopic1Maximum requests over a single connectionOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading Domino AdministrationUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino Administrator\upgradingContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATION_8418_OVERTopic1Upgrading Domino AdministrationOverviewH_UPGRADING_NOTES_DOMINO_TA_R5_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 504 Upgrading Domino Administration
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading administration clientsUparading Notes and Domino to Release 5
H_UPGRADING_ADMINISTRATION_CLIENTS_7072_OVER_MIDTOPIC_95001536029239966=Installing the R5 Domino Administrator clientH_UPGRADING_ADMINISTRATION_CLIENTS_7072_OVER_MIATOPIC_220684060829313178=Installing the R5 Domino Administrator on a Server01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 504 Upgrading Domino Administration
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading to the Web Administrator toolUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Upgrading\Web administration toolWEBADMIN.NSF\upgradingWeb Administrator\upgradingWeb administration tool\ACL entries andWeb administration tool\upgradingContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_6818_OVERTopic1Upgrading to the Web Administrator toolOverviewH_UPGRADING_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATION_8418_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 504 Upgrading Domino Administration
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using message tracking in a mixed-release environmentUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Internet mail\trackingMail\tqackingMessages\trackingTracking messages\in a mixed-release environmentContentsOverviewH_USING_MESSAGE_TRACKING_IN_A_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENT_6388_OVERTopic1Using message tracking in a mixed-release environmentOverviewH_UPGRADING_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATION_8418_OVER
H_USING_MESSAGE_TRACKING_IN_A_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENT_6388_OVER_MIDTOPIC_160584963229240759=Tracking CenterH_USING_MESSAGE_TRACKING_IN_A_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENT_6388_OVER_MIDTOPIC_44277107229240619=End user (mail-based) message tracking01 Aoving to Notes and Domino Release 504 Upgrading Domino Administration
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using the Domino Administrator in a mixed environmentUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Administqation clients\upgradingUpgrading\administration clientsContentsOverviewH_USING_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_IN_A_MIXED_ENVIRONMENT_3909_OVERTopic1Using the Domino Administrator in a mixed environmentOverviewH_UPGRADING_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATION_8418_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating flat ID filesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Flat IDs\creatingID files\creating flat IDsIDs\creating flatContentsOverviewH_CREATING_FLAT_ID_FILES_7230_OVERTopic1Creating flat ID filesOverviewH_UPGRADING_SECURITY_3666_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 510 Upgrading Security
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
h{age
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Client upgrade\overviewClient upgrade\stepsNotes client\upgradingUpgrade steps\for Notes clientContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_LNTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVERTopic1Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_NOTES_DOMINO_TO_R5_OVER
H_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER_MIDTOPIC_268992819229244024=Upgrade ChangesH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER_MIDTOPIC_269052819229244025=Using Notes Release 501 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 505 Upgrading Clients
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Backing up Notes client filesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Backing up\files on Notes client before upgradingFiles\backing up on Notes client before upgradingNotes client\backing up filesNotes client\backing up files before upgradingContentsStepsH_BACKING_UP_NOTES_CLIENT_FILES_1040_STEPSTopic1Backing up Notes client filesStepsH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 505 Upgrading Clients
?Print
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Install the Notes Release 5 softwareUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Installing\Release 5 on a Notes clientNotes client\installingRelease 5\installing on a Notes clientContentsStepsH_INSTALL_THE_NOTES_RELEASE_5_SOFTWARE_3788_STEPSTopic1Install the Notes Release 5 softwareStepsH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino.Release 505 Upgrading Clients
?Print
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
egoriesS
Converting the workspace to bookmarksUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Bookmarks\de~cribedBookmarks\workspace conversion andNotes client\upgrading workspace to bookmarksWorkspace\converting to bookmarksContentsOverviewH_CONVERTING_THE_WORKSPACE_TO_BOOKMARKS_6446_OVERTopic1Converting the workspace to bookmarksOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 505 Upgrading Clients
Print
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting your Personal Address Book preferencesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Notes client\and setting Personal Address Book preferencesPersonal Address Book\setting preferencesPersonal Address Book\upgrading and setting preferencesPreferences\in the Personal Address BookUpgrade steps\for Personal Address BookNontentsStepsH_SETTING_YOUR_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_PREFERENCES_5219_STEPSTopic1Setting your Personal Address Book preferencesStepsH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
=David M
Changes to the Personal Address BookUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
PERNAMES.NSF\describedPersonal Address Book\featuresContentsOverviewH_CHANGES_TO_THE_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_1091_OVERTopic1Changes to the Personal Address BookOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER
H_CHANGES_TO_THE_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_1091_OVER_MIDTOPIC_417207670429229752=New agents in the R5 Personal Address BookH_CHANGES_TO_THE_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_1>91_OVER_MIDTOPIC_418153104029316636=Deleted agents in the R5 Personal Address BookH_CHANGES_TO_THE_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_1091_OVER_MIDTOPIC_418153104029316637=New folders in the R5 Personal Address BookH_CHANGES_TO_THE_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_1091_OVER_MIDTOPIC_417207670429229753=New forms in the R5 Personal Address BookH_CHANGES_TO_THE_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_1091_OVER_MIDTOPIC_417257670429229754=New script libraries in the R5 Personal Address BookH_CHANGES_TO_THE_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_1091_OVER_MIDTOPIC_4172>7670429229755=New subforms in the R5 Personal Address BookH_CHANGES_TO_THE_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_1091_OVER_MIDTOPIC_417257670429229756=New views in the R5 Personal Address BookH_CHANGES_TO_THE_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_1091_OVER_MIDTOPIC_417257670429229757=Deleted views in the R5 Personal Address Book01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 505 Upgrading Clients
Print
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Portfolio databases in Notes Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Notes client\portfolio databases andPortfolio databases\describedPortfolios\bookmarks andContentsOverviewH_PORTFOLIO_DATABASES_IN_NOTES_RELEASE_5_0_7872_OVERTopic1Portfolio databases in Notes Relea~e 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 505 Upgrading Clients
Print
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
CAM/O=Lot
Upgrading ~our mail file to Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Mail files\upgradingContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_YOUR_MAIL_FILE_TO_RELEASE_5_9216_OVERTopic1Upgrading your mail file to Release 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 505 Upgrading Clients
Print
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Which message do you want to see Help on?
TroubleshootingMESSAGE 0H_WHICH_MESSAGE_DO_YOU_WANT_TO_SEE_HELP_ONTopic1Which message do you want to see Help on?Troubleshooting
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
FOLDERS_MIDTOPIC_321713427229235169=Tips
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating account records for Internet mailUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Account records\Internet mail andAccount records\upgradingInternet mail\Account recordsNotes client\Account records andPOP3\Accfunt records andPOP3\upgrading to Notes Release 5SMTP\Account records andSMTP\and upgrading NotesContentsOverviewH_CREATING_ACCOUNT_RECORDS_FOR_INTERNET_MAIL_2743_OVERTopic1Creating account records for Internet mailOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 505 Upgrading Clients
Print
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting default workstation securityUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Administration Execution Control List\default security andECL\workstation security andSecurity\workstationWorkstations\ECLContentsAboutH_ABOUT_DEFAULT_WORKSTATION_SECURITYTopic1Setting default workstation securityAbouvH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 505 Upgrading Clients
Print
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
tatus ba
2Q he
Synchronizing vime zones and daylight savings time with NotesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Daylight savings time setting\synchronizing Notes and operating systemLocation documents\synchronizing time settingsSystem time\settingTime zones\settings forTime zones\synchronizing Notes and operating systemContentsOverviewH_SYNCHRONIZING_DATES_TIMES_AND_DAYLIGHT_SAVINGS_TIME_2657_OVERTopic1Synchronizing time zones and daylight savings time with NotesOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASEV5_365_OVER
H_SYNCHRONIZING_DATES_TIMES_AND_DAYLIGHT_SAVINGS_TIME_2657_OVER_MIDTOPIC_270246441629238405=Changing settings on Windows computers01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 505 Upgrading Clients
Print
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
us\describ
Using calendar and scheduling features with Internet mailUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Calendar and scheduling\Internet mail andInternet mail\calendar and schedulingContentsOverviewH_USING_CALENDAR_AND_SCHEDULING_FEATURES_WITH_INTERNET_MAIL_3499_OVERTopic1Using calendar and scheduling features with Internet mailOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 505 Upfrading Clients
Print
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
(VD"p
Repeating meetings and R5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Calendar and scheduling\meetingsMeetfngs, repeating\upgrading mail templates forRepeating meetings feature\upgrading mail templates forScheduling meetings\in a mixed release environmentContentsOverviewH_REPEATING_MEETINGS_AND_R5_8968_OVERTopic1Repeating meetings and R5OverviewH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 505 Upgrading Clients
Print
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
=Lotus
Working with the Domino DirectoryUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
H_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER_MIDTOPIC_239618793629244035=Using the New Internet Address FieldH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER_MIDTOPIC_239618793629244036=Upgrade Changes and Coexistence01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using the Domino Directory template in a mixed-release environmentUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino Directory template\using in a mixed-release environmentDomino Directory\templateDomino Dfrectory\using in a mixed-release environmentPublic Address Book\using Domino Directory design withUpgrading\Public Address Books and Domino Directory templateUpgrading\from previous releasesContentsOverviewH_USING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_TEMPLATE_IN_A_MIXED_ENVIRONMENT_3131_OVERTopic1Using the Domino Directory template in a mixed-release environmentOverviewH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER
H_USING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_TEMPLATE_IN_A_MIXED_ENVIRONMENT_3131_OVER_MIDTOPIC_96494592029234356=Upgradfng R4 servers that use the Domino Directory templateH_USING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_TEMPLATE_IN_A_MIXED_ENVIRONMENT_3131_OVER_MIDTOPIC_154577030429308152=Accessing the Domino Directory with an R4 client01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ewH_WINDOWS
Customized Address BooksUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
.AContentsOverviewH_CUSTOMIZED_ADDRESS_BOOKS_1546_OVERTopic1Customized Address BooksOverviewH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
in viewsVieOG&3026 720Elements_of_a_view_999_999_999Topic1Elements of a viewOverviewH_NAVIGATION_VIEWS_AND_PANES_OVER
Elements_of_a_view_999_999_999_MIDTOPIC_314832432029227081=View iconsH_WINDOWS_PANES_AND_VIEWS_1631_OVER_MIDTOPIC_37039952029209006=Action barH_USING_QUICK_SEARCH_IN_A_VIEW=Using Starts with search in a view
:2TMm
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
Notes Release 5 automatically converts your workspace into bookmarks. You can still access the workspace if you want, but the new navigation model and ease `f use of bookmarks make this unnecessary.
Your workspace pages convert to bookmark buttons, which are located on the left side of the client screen.
Notes gives you the following bookmark tabs initially:
Bookmark tab
Descriptionp
Home
Displays your home page, where you can perform tasks and browse and search the Web
Mail
Displays your mail file
Headlines^
Displays your Headlines, which can include e-mail, Web updates, calendar entries for today, and other information you specify
Calendar
Displays your calendar
Address Book
Displays your Personal Address Book
To Do
Displays your To Do list of tasks
Replicator
Displays your Replicator page. This entry appears only if you have local replicas with replication enabled.
Domino Administrator
Displays the Domino Administrator for administering Domino servers. This bookmark appears only if you installed the Domino Administrator.
Domino Designer
Displays the Domino Designer for designing Domino applications. This bookmark appears only if pou installed the Domino Designer.
Favorite Bookmarks
Displays a bookmark list of the databases you used most recently
Databases
Displays bookmarks organized as they are on your workspace, with a bookmarks folder for each workspace page
More Bookmarks
Displays bookmarks for searching Notes databases and the Web
Create
Contains bookmarks for creating documents such as memos, calendar entries, and tasks
Internet Explorer Links
Contains bookmarks from your Microsoft Internet Explorer Favorites links
Navigator Links,
Contains bookmarks from your Netscape Navigator Bookmarks links
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
You can add a bookmark to any Bookmark button by dragging it onto that button.
For more information on using bookmarks, see Notes Client Help.e
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5
Click here
Click here
New Lotus Notes client features
Click here
h{age
&Arial
When you upgrade Notes to R5, @otes automatically upgrades the design of your Personal Address Book. The first time you open your Personal Address Book after upgrading, Notes asks you to enter your preferences into the Personal Address Book profile. To enter your preferences, do the following:
1. Select an Address Book owner. Generally this is the person whose Notes client has been upgraded and who is the primary user of the address book.
2. Select whether to sort alphabetically new groups that you create.
3. Select whether to allow LDAP queries of the address book to elicit detailed information. This lets you search your address book by categories such as country or phone number when looking up users during mail addressing.
4. Choose a background for the Business Cards in your address book. You can scroll through the backgrounds by clicking the right and left arrow buttons.
5. Choose a style for the Business Cards in your address book. You can scroll through the ptyles by clicking the right and left arrow buttons.
6. Click Save and Close.
See Also
Click here
Changes to the Personal Address Book
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5
Click here
h{age
&Arial
The R5 Personal Address Book has a number of new forms, views, subforms, agents, and script libraries, and has had some design elements deleted from the R4 te`plate.
417207670429229752
New agents in the R5 Personal Address Book
Edit Address Book Preferences
Remove Address Book Preferences
Retrieve Certificates from Home Server
418153104029316636
Deleted agents in the R5 Personal Address Book
Edit Address Book Profile
418153104029316637
New folders in the R5 Personal Address Book
Temporary Export Certificapes
417207670429229753
New forms in the R5 Personal Address Book
Account
Contact (replaces Business Card from 4.6)
_Advanced\International MIME Settingsw
_Advanced\Temporary Export Certificate
(AddressPicker)U
(DeleteAccounts)
(DeleteCertDialog)
(DIsplayCertifierNotesCertificates)7
(DisplayUserNotesCertificates)
(ProxyAuthentication)D
(ProxyHelp)
($LAN Wizard)i
($NetworkDialup Wizard)
($NotesDirectDialup Wizard)
417257670429229754
New script libraries in the R5 Personal Address Book
RLANRoutines
StackContainer
Wizard
417257670429229755
New subforms in the R5 Personal Address Book
$CertifierExtensibleSchema
$CharacterSetSettings
$GroupExtensibleSchema
$OTPPP
417257670429229756
New views in the R5 Personal Address Book
_Advanced\Accounts
_Advanced\International MIME Settings
($Accounts)
($ByCategory)
($InternationalMIMESettings)
($MailGroups)
($PeopleGroupsByLang)
($PeopleGroupsCorpHier)
417257670429229757
Deleted views in the R5 Personal Address Book
($NamesFieldLookpp)
($ServersLookup)
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Setting your Personal Address Book preferences
Click here
Click here
Creating account records for Internet mail
Click here
h{age
&Arial
Portfolio databases are presented as bookmarks in the R5 interface.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Converting the workspace to bookmarks
Click here
h{age
&Arial
Do not upgrade your mail file to the Release 5 template until your Domino administrator tells you to do so or upgrades it for you.
Notes Release 5 introduces Account records, which contain information for accessing mail using POP, IMAP, and sending mail with SMTP. If your Release 4 Location record is set up to use POP3, Notes converts this information into an Account record for that setting. If you send mail to the Internet, Notes creates an SMTP Account record. The accounts are set for the Locatio` that you set up for Internet mail.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Using calendar and scheduling features with Internet mail
Click here
h{age
&Arial
Before upgrading Notes, the domain administrator may want to set the Administration Execution Control List (ECL) in the Domino Directory. The Administration ECL sets the default security on the Notes client when users start Notes for the first time after upgrading. Workstatio` security defines which group's applications can execute on a Notes client. If a group is not specified in the ECL for a client, Notes warns the user when an application created by the group attempts to run on that client.O
For information on setting the Administration ECL, see Domino Administration Help.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5
Click here
Click here
@reating a workstation ECL
Click here
h{age
2Q he
&Arial
In Release 5, Notes and phe client operating system synchronize the time zone and daylight savings time settings. When you start Notes, the client synchronizes the operating system settings to match those of the current Notes location. In previous releases, Notes synchronized only the operating system time, which could cause the operating system clock to be out of synch with the operating system time zone setting.
Be sure that the time zone, daylight savings time, and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) are correctly set on yopr operating system. For example, if the operating system does not have daylight savings time activated and you manually change your clock to account for it, running Notes turns on daylight savings time in the operating system, causing the operating system clock to be off by one hour.
270246441629238405
Changing settings on Windows computers
The list of time zones and the start and end dates for daylight savings time in Notes Location documents match those of th` Windows operating system. If you change to a location with different settings, those settings update the Windows time zone and daylight savings time. If you change the Windows time zone or daylight savings time settings while Notes is running, Notes updates those settings for the current location.
When you upgrade to Release 5 on a Windows computer, you may be prompted to choose a time zone if the time zone settings in one of your location documents does not match the Windows system settings.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Changing Domino server time zone and daylight savings time settings
Click here
h{age
&Arial
In an environment which mixes routing mail over Notes RPC and SMTP, the Domino router automatically routes meeting invitations, appointments, and other calendar and scheduling information over Notes RPC when possible. Over SMTP -- for example, if you send a meeting invitation to someone over the Int`rnet -- calendar and scheduling items are converted to text messages. Notes RPC is required to use the interactive (workflow) features in Notes calendar and scheduling items.
Note
Conversion of calendar and scheduling items to text when routing over SMTP works the same way in R5 as it did in R4.5 and R4.6.
See Also
Click here
Creating account records for Internet mail
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5
Click here
h{age
(VD"p
&Arial
Organizations that want to use the repeating meetings feature in the R5 mail template should upgrade their R4.5 Notes clients and mail templates to R4.5.7 and their R4.6 clients and mail templates to R4.6.3 for repeating meetings to work properly in a mixed environment. You do not need to upgrade your servers, but you do need to upgrade the mail templates for those clients that want to use repeating meetings.
Since releases earlier than 4.5 did not have the calendar and pcheduling features introduced in R4.5, there is no need to make changes to servers or mail files using those releases.p
See Also
Click here
Upgrading your mail file to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5
Click here
h{age
&Arial
The Domino Directory is backwards-compatible and should be replicated to your R4 and R3 Domino servers. It supports the LDAPv3 propocol, allowing Internet clients to query and update the directory. The Domino Directory includes a new field, the Internet Address field, with which you can standardize Internet addresses in your organization.
See information on:b
Click here
Using the Domino Directory template in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Customized Address Books
Click here
Click here
Using the Domino Directory Profile
Click here
Click here
New and deleted views in the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
New forms in the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Setting message format preference for usersa
Click here
239618793629244035
Using the New Internet A`dress Field
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documentsz
Click here
Click here
Creating an Internet address
Click here
Click here
Using Custom Format Pattern
Click here
Click here
Creating an Internet address using Custom Format Pattern
Click here
Click here
Validating Internet Addresses
Click here
239618793629244036
Upgrade Changes and Coexistenceg
Click here
Retrieving LDAP information in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Directory Assistance
Click here
Click here
Web authentication and secondary address books
Click here
Click here
Host names in Server documents
Click here
See Also
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
Upgrading the Public Address Book
Click here
Click here
Upgrading th` Public Address Book for an Internet mail server
Click here
0gq5 g1
ji~ie
&Arial
The R5 Domino Directory template is designed for use in a mixed-release environment. After upgrading your first server to R5, you can and should replicate the new design to the other servers in your organization. The new template is designed for backwards compatibility on R4 and even R3 servers.
96494592029234356U
Upgrading R4 servers that use the Domino Directory template
You may decide to upgrade the Release 4 Domino servers in your environment to a later release of R4 before upgrading them to R5. For example, in a mixed environment of R4 and R5 servers, you might need to upgrade the R4 servers from release 4.6 to 4.6.2. When you upgrade, Domino asks if you want to replace the design of the Public Address Book. If your 4.6 servers use the R5 Domino Directory design (as recommended), and you click Yep to replace the design, Domino overwrites the R5 Domino Directory template with the R4 Public Address Book template. Lotus recommends that you do not replace the design of the Public Address Book when upgrading among R4 releases for servers that have the R5 Domino Directory template on them.
154577030429308152
Accessing the Domino Directory with an R4 client
The R5 Domino Directory uses tabbed tables in many of the Directory forms to consolidate and present infor`ation more effectively. However, R4 clients cannot display tabbed tables, so forms that use the tables do not render perfectly to R4 clients. Person and Group documents in the R5 Domino Directory have an alternate format that renders well to R4 clients and is very similar to the design of the forms in the R4 Public Address Book. Other documents display all information but are less easy to read and work with. Since end users primarily open Person and Group documents, the impact of the upgrade to the Domino @irectory should be minimal. Lotus recommends that administrators use the R5 Domino Administrator client to perform administration tasks as the tabbed tables render appropriately and make administration easier.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading the Public Address Book for an Internet mail server
Click here
Click here
Upgrading the Public Address Book
Click here
Click `ere
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
New and deleted design elements in the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
New forms in the Domino Directory$
Click here
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documents
Click here
Click here
Retrieving LDAP information `n a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Directory Assistance
Click here
Click here
Upgrading administration clients
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Domino Administration
Click here
&Arial
If you customized the R4 Public Address Book, perform the following steps to upgrade the Address Book to the R5 Domino Directory.
1. Back up the design of your R4 Public Address Book.e
2. Upgrade the address book to the R5 Domino Directory design.
3. Inspect the R5 Domino Directory to determine which of your customized changes are still needed.
4. Add your changes from the customized R4 Public Address Book to the R5 D`mino Directory. Do not overwrite the Domino Directory design elements. For example, if you customized the Person documents by adding a field for Employee's Date of Hire, copy that field and paste it into the R5 Person document. Do not copy the R4 Person document and paste it into the R5 Domino Directory.
Note
You must add individual R4 changes to the R5 Domino Directory design elements. Do not attempt to maintain your R4 Public Address Book by adding the R5 changes to your R4 design as the address book will not function properly in an R5 environment.u
&Arial
The first time you open the upgraded Domino Directory with a Notes or Web client, you see the Domino Directory Profile. The profile controls characteristics of the directory.
For information on completing the Directory Profile, see "
Click here
Customizing the Public Directory Profile.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
New and deleted design elements in the Domino Directory
Click here
&Arial
Follow these steps to manually recertify a flat ID that has a certificate that is about to expire. The owner of the ID and the certification administrator must be able to communicate through Notes mail; each takes turns processing the request.
346988188829204373
To mail the ID, the owner of the ID does the following:.
1. Choose File - Tools - User ID.
2. Click Certificates.
3. Click Request Certificate.
4. Enter the name of the certification administrator in the To field.
5. Click Send to mail the request to the certification administrator.
346988188829204374
To recertify the ID, the certification administrator does the foll`wing:
1. Open the certification request in your mail file.
2. If the certifier is on a disk, insert the disk in the disk drive.
3. Choose Actions - Certify Attached ID File.k
4. Select the certifier to use and click OK.
5. Enter the password for the certifier and click OK.
6. If the certifier is on a disk, remove the disk from the disk drive and click OK.i
7. (Optional) Accept or change the certificate expiration date.r
8. Leave "Trust other certificates signed by this certifier" selected unless this is a certificate from another organization's certifier.
9. (Optional) Click Server, select a server, then click OK to change the server in whose Domino Directory Domino updates the Person document. If the server isn't local, you must have at least Author access to its Domino Directory.
10. Click Certify.
11. Click Sign to prove your identity to the pecipient.
12. Choose Send to send the recertified safe copy of the ID to the user.
346988188829204375
To merge the new certificate, the owner of the ID does the following:
1. Open the mail document containing the recertified ID.
2. Choose Actions - Accept Certificate.
3. Enter the password for the ID. You see the new certificate.
4. If this is a certificate received from another organization, turn off "Trust other certificates signed by this certifier."
For more information, see "
Click here
About communication with organizations that use flat names
Click here
" later in this chapter.
5. Click Accept.
See Also
Click here
Ways to recertify flat IDs
Click here
Click here
About communicating with organizations that use the flat nam`ng model
Click here
S+ me
S+ me
&Arial
The Domino Directory contains new design elements, and omits some elements*from Release 4 Public Address Books.
214092160029316651
New agents in the Domino Directory
Edit Directory Profile
Remove Profile
(Convert Names in Groups)
(FindName)
(Import Holidays)
214092160029316652
New forms in the Domino Directory
Server\Configuration Settings
Server\External Domain Network Information
Server\File Identification
Server\Holiday
Server\User Setup Profile
(46Group)
(46Person)
(Alternate Language Information)
(DeleteCertDialog)
(DisplayCertifierNotesCertificates)
(DIsplayUserNotesCertificates)
(ExternalDomainNetworkAddresses)
(File Protection)
(FileProtectionDialog)
(LDAP Locality)
(Mapping)
(ProxyAuthentication)A
(ProxyJelp)w
(PublicDirectoryProfile)
(Realm)N
(SSLCipherDialog)o
(Virtual Server)
($LDAPSettings)E
($MessagingSettings)
46328700829316653
New subforms in the Domino Directory
$CertfierExtensibleSchema
$CharacterSetSettings
$DomainExtensibleSchema
$GroupExtensibleSchema
$LDAPConfiguration
$MailInDatabaseExtensibleSchema
$OTPPP
$PersonExtensibleSchema
$PersonGeneralInfo
$ResourceExtensibleSchema
$RouterSMTPSettings
354271129629229750
New views in the Domino DirectoryN
People\Alternate Language Information
Server\External Domain Network Information
Server\File Identifications
Server\Holidays
Server\Web Configurations
($ExternalDomainNetworkAjdress)
($ExternalDomainNetworkInformation)
($FileIdentifications)
($Holidays)
($LDAPCN)
($LDAPG)
($LDAPHier)
($LDAPRDNHier)
($LDAPS)
($PeopleGroupsByLang)
($PeopleGroupsCorpHier)
354271129629229753
Release 4 views deleted from the Domino Directory
($ACLMonitors)
($Events)
($ReplMonitors)
*$Thresholds)
Note
Once all clients in your organization are at Release 4.5 or greater, you can delete the $NamesFieldLookup view from the Domino Directory. If clients running earlier releases of Notes continue to access the Domino Directory, do not delete this view.
See Also
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
New forms in the Domjno Directory
Click here
&Arial
Release 5 adds a number of forms to the Domino Directory. These include
New and deleted design elements in the Domino Directory
Click here
0gq5 g1
&Arial
The Release 5 Domino Directory Person document sets a user's message preference in the field "Format preference for incoming mail" on the Mail tab. There are three choices:
Prefers MIME. Messages in Notes rich text format are converted to MIME on delivery to the user's mail file. This is the preferred setting for users who access mail using POP3 or IMAP.
Prefers Notes rich text. Messages in MIME format are converted to Notes rich text on delivery to the user's mail file. This is the preferred setting for users who access mail using a Release 4 Notes client.
No Preference. Mail is delivered to the user's mail file in either format -- Domino does not convert the format. This is the preferred setting for users who access mail using a Release 5 Notes client.
When you register a new user in Release 5, you select their mail systej: Notes, POP3, IMAP, etc. Domino sets the "Format preference for incoming mail" field based on this selection:
If the user's mail system is Notes, the setting is No Preference.m
If the user's mail system is POP3 or IMAP, the setting is Prefers MIME._
If you want to change this setting for a user, register the user and then edit their Person document in the Domino Directory. Registration does not allow you to edit this setting. These default settings work best with Rejease 5 and provide the best performance since they minimize conversion between formats.
If you want to register new Release 4 users, use a Release 4 client to register them.
If you upgraded to Release 5 from a version of Release 4 prior to 4.6, the Person document did not have a setting for message format preference. Thus, the field is blank for users registered under R4. Domino interprets a blank field as Prefers Notes rich text. To change this, edit the Person document and selejt a different setting.4
Note
If you edit one of these upgraded Person documents and do not change the field's setting, the document is saved with the default setting of No Preference. For R4 and POP/IMAP users, you should alter the setting to the proper selection.
&Arial
When upgrading to Domino Release*5, you can use the Internet Address tool to fill in the Internet Address field for all Person documents in which the field is blank in a Domino Directory.
1. Launch the Domino Administrator.
2. Click the People and Groups tab.
3. Select the server and Domino Directory for which you wish to fill in the Internet Address fields.
4. Click the People tab.
5. Click Set Internet Address.
6. In the Internet Address Construjtion dialog, choose a format for the Internet addresses.e
7. Choose a separator for the Internet addresses. This character separates the items in the Format field.t
8. Enter the Internet domain for the company.
Note
If you select the option "Use existing address from short name field, if available" the tool searches the Short name field in each Person document for a valid Internet address (for example, jdoe@acme.com). If the zool finds a valid Internet addres, it uses this address to complete the Internet Address field, instead of creating a new entry based on the information in the dialog box.
9. (Optional) Click More Options and do any of the following:
Select "Use existing Internet domain from shortname field, if available" to search the Short name field in each Person document for a valid Internet domain (for example, @acme.com). If the tool finds a valid Internet domain, it uses this domain to jomplete the Internet address, instead of using the entry in the Internet domain in the dialog box.
Select "Separate multi-word names with selected separator character" to insert the separator character you specify between words in a name with multiple words.
Select "Create addresses only for people in a specific Notes Domain" to set Internet addresses only for users in a given Notes domain. Enter the domain name of the Notes domain in which you want to set Internet addresses.
Select "Use alternative format pattern in case of name conflict" to specify a second Internet address pattern if Notes generates the same Internet address for two users. Specify the alternative format pattern in the box. See "
Click here
Using Custom Format Pattern.
Click here
This allows you to use the alternative format pattern if the primary pattern results in an address containing non-ASCII characters, an address that is not unique, oz one which contains an invalid character.
The Internet Address Construction dialog box specifies the server and Domino Directory on which it runs. It also gives an example for each address and separator format.
Note
The dialog box does not give examples for all Custom Format combinations.
The Internet Address tool checks all Person documents in the Domino Directory. When it finds a document without an entry in the Internet Address field, jt creates an entry based on the rules above, verifies that the entry is a valid RFC 821 address, and checks to ensure that the entry is unique by performing an exhaustive name lookup of the entry on all Domino Directories on the server. If the entry matches an Internet Address field, the tool leaves the field blank and enters an error in the Log (LOG.NSF).
Note
All errors are entered in the Log (LOG.NSF).
Caution
The Inteznet Address tool performs an exhaustive name lookup of every new Internet address and should not be run on a directory or server that is under heavy load.
Address formats for the Internet Address tool
You can choose from the following address formats:
FirstName LastName
This uses the contents of the First name field and the Last name field to form the address.
FirstName MiddleInitial LastName
This usez the contents of the First name field, Middle initial field, and Last name field to form the address.
FirstInitial LastName
This uses the first letter in the user's First name field and the contents of the Last name field to form the address.
FirstInitial MiddleInitial LastName.
This uses the first letter in the user's First name field, Middle initial field, and the contents of the Last name field to form the address.
LastName FirstName
This uses the contents of the Last name field and the First name field to form the address.
LastName FirstName MiddleInitial
This uses the contents of the Last name field, First name field, and Middle initial field to form the address.
LastName FirstInitial
This uses the contents of the Last name field and first letter in the user's First name field to form the address.
LastName FirstInitial MiddleInitial
This uses thj Last name field, first letter in the user's First name field, and Middle initial field to form the address.
FirstName LastInitial
This uses the First Name field and the first character of the Last name field to form the address.
Use Custom Format Pattern
The Custom Format Pattern lets you specify how to construct an Internet address.
You can choose from the following address separators:
None
An underscore
An equals sign
A percent sign
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
You must specify an Internet domain in the Internet Domain field of the dialog box.
See Also
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Internet mail addresses in Domino Release 5
Click here
Click here
Creating an Internet address
Click here
Click here
Using Custom Format Pattern
Click here
Click here
Creating an Internet address using Custom Format Pattern
Click here
Click here
Retrjeving LDAP information in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Directory Assistance
Click here
&Arial
For the user Jane R. Jones,
User
First name field
Last name field
Middle initial field
Internet domain
Jane R. Jones
Jane
Jones
acme.com
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
running the Internet address tool produces the following possible Internet addresses:
Format
Separator
Internet Address after running tool
FirstName LastName
Jane_Jones@acme.com
FirstName MiddleInitial LastName
Jane_R_Jones@acme.com
FirstInitial LastName
J%Jones@acme.com
FirszInitial MiddleInitial LastName
J%R%Jones@acme.com
LastName FirstName
Jones=Jane@acme.com
LastName FirstName MiddleInitial
Jones=Jane=R@acme.com
LastName FirstInitial
Jones_J@acme.com
LastName FirstInitial MiddleInitial
Jones_J_R@acme.com
FirstName LastInitial
Jane%J@acme.com
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
You must specify an Internet*domain in the Internet Domain field of the dialog box.
See Also
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documents
Click here
Click here
Using Custom Format Pattern
Click here
Click here
Creating an Internet address using Custom Fozmat Pattern
Click here
Click here
Retrieving LDAP information in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Internet mail addresses in Domino Release 5
Click here
&Arial
If you select "Use Custom Format Pattern" in the dialog box, you can set how Domino creates Internet addresses in Person records without an entrz in the Internet Address field. Use the following characters in the dialog box to specify how the address should appear:
Abbreviation
Meaning
First name, truncate at
characters
Last name, truncate at
characters
Middle initial
Title
Generational qualifier
Employee IDs
Location
Department
Server
Organizational Unit
Use the existing Short name field
Separator
Separator
Separator
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
By combining the characters and separators above, you can set how Internet addresses should appear ij your organization.
See Also
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documents@
Click here
Click here
Creating an Internet address
Click here
Click here
Creating an Internet address using Custom Format Pattern
Click here
Click here
Retrieving LDAP information in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Internet mail addresses in Domino Release 5
Click here
&Arial
For the user Jane R. Jones:
Title
First Name
Middle Initial
Last Name
Location
Organization
Server
Jane
Jones
Tampa
Acme
MailT1
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
you could set Custom Format to produce the following addresses:
Custom Formatl
Address
JaneJones@acme.com
F2L
JaJones@acme.com
F_L=C
Jane_Jones=Tampa@acme.com
T_F_M_L%V
Ms_Jane_R_Jones%MailT1@acme.com
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Using Custom Format Pattern
Click here
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Persoj documents
Click here
Click here
Creating an Internet address
Click here
Click here
Retrieving LDAP information in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Internet mail addresses in Domino Release 5
Click here
&Arial
You can use the Internet Address tool to verify that entries in the Internet Address field of all Person documents*in one or more Domino Directories are unique. This ensures that Internet addresses do not conflict. To validate that the entries in the Internet Address fields are unique, do the following:
1. Launch the Domino Administrator.
2. Click the People and Groups tab.
3. Select the server and Domino Directory for which you wish to validate entries in the Internet Address fields.
4. Click the People tab.
5. Click Validate Internet Address*
6. Select to validate Internet addresses only in the current Domino Directory you selected in step 3 or to validate Internet addresses in all available Domino Directories on the server and click OK.
The validation tool exhaustively checks every Internet address in the Domino Directory or Directories you selected against all Domino Directories or against all directories specified in the Directory Assistance database (DA50.NSF). If an address is not unique, Domino records the duzlicate address in the server log (LOG.NSF).
Note
Validating Internet addresses consumes significant server resources -- do not use this tool when the server is under heavy load or when response time for users is critical. Lotus recommends running this tool at times when few users access the server -- such as on weekends or late at night.
&Arial
Once you upgrade your Release 4 Public Address Book to the Release 5 Domino Directory design, you must upgrade your Domino servers running LDAP to at least Release 4.6.3 so they can properly handle LDAP queries and return correct information. The Domino Directory uses the Internet Addresz field to answer LDAP queries. R4 releases earlier than 4.6.3 do not handle this change.
Note
LDAP was introduced in 4.6.
See Also
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Internet mail addresses in Domino Release 5
Click here
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Person jocuments
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Directory Assistance
Click here
New and deleted design elements in the Domino DirectoryUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino Directory\featuresDomino Directory\new and deleted viewsDomino Directory\viewsContentsOverviewH_NEW_AND_DELETID_VIEWS_IN_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_8913_OVERTopic1New and deleted design elements in the Domino DirectoryOverviewH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER
H_NEW_AND_DELETED_VIEWS_IN_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_8913_OVER_MIDTOPIC_214092160029316651=New agents in the Domino DirectoryH_NEW_AND_DELETED_VIEWS_IN_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_8913_OVER_MIDTOPIC_214092160029316652=New forms in the Domino DirectoryH_NEW_AND_DELETED_VIEWS_IN_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_8913_OVER_MIDTOPIC_46328700829316653=New subforms in the Iomino DirectoryH_NEW_AND_DELETED_VIEWS_IN_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_8913_OVER_MIDTOPIC_354271129629229750=New views in the Domino DirectoryH_NEW_AND_DELETED_VIEWS_IN_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_8913_OVER_MIDTOPIC_354271129629229753=Release 4 views deleted from the Domino Directory01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
New forms in the Domino DirectoryUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino Directory\formsDomino Directory\new and deleted formsContentsOverviewH_NEW_FORMS_IN_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_3613_OVERTopic1New forms in the Domino DirectoryOverviewH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER01 Ioving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
0gq5 g1
Setting message format preference for usersUpgrading Notes and Domino to Releaye 5
.AContentsOverviewH_SETTING_MESSAGE_FORMAT_PREFERENCE_FOR_USERS_921_OVERTopic1Setting message format preference for usersOverviewH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documentsUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Addresses\creating for Internet mailDomino Directory\populating Internet Address fieldInternet Address Construction\dialog boxInternet Address field\populating in Person documentsInternet Address tool\using in Domino DirectoryInternet addyesses\assigning to usersInternet addresses\formats forInternet addresses\in Person documentsInternet addresses\separators inNames\Internet addressPerson documents\Internet Address fieldPerson documents\populating Internet Address fieldSet Internet Address\tool in Domino DirectoryContentsDetailsDIALOG 10431 553H_POPULATING_THE_INTERNET_ADDRESS_FIELD_IN_PERSON_DOCUMENTS_6514_STEPSTopic1Populating the Internet Address field in Person documentsDetailsH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER
H_DETAILS_PIPULATING_THE_INTERNET_ADDRESS_FIELD_IN_PERSON_DOCUMENTS_9886_DETAILS=Address formats for the Internet Address tool01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating an Internet addressUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Internet Address ConstructionInternet Address fieldInternet Address tool\examples of addresses created withInternet addresses\creatingInternet mail addresses\upgrading andMail addresses\upgrading andContentsExamplesH_EXAMPLE_POPULATING_THE_INTERNET_ADDRESS_FIELD_IN_PERSON_DOCUMENTS_3616_EXTopic1Creating an Internet addressExamplesH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1989_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
otes Help:
Using Custom Format PatternUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Custom Format Pattern\using to create Internet addressesInternet addresses\name formats inInternet addresses\using custom format pattern forNaming conventions\for Internet addressesPerson documents\using custom format pattern for Internet addressUse Custom Format Pattern\in Internet Address toolContentsStepsH_USING_CUSTOM_FORMAT_PATTERN_7379_STEPSTopic1Using Custom Format PatternStepsH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Yorking with the Domino Directory
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating an Internet address using Custom Format PatternUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Internet Address field\upgrading andInternet addresses\creatingContentsExamplesH_EXAMPLE_USING_CUSTOM_FORMAT_PATTERN_8514_EXTopic1Creating an Internet address using Custom Format PatternExamplesH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
F1 Help\usingISP\Notes and Internet serversWelcome page\about
ContentsOverview
IntroClientHelpHELP-INDEX ACTIVE Deprecated;DOCUMENT KEYBOARD Deprecated;EMON KEYBOARD Deprecated;DATABASE KEYBOARD Deprecated;H_GETTING_STARTED_5354_OVERTopic1Getting StartedOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Validating Internet AddressesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Addresses\validating for Internet mailDomino Directory\checking Internet addresses for uniquenessDomino Directory\validating Internet Adiress fieldInternet Address field\checking for uniquenessInternet addresses\checking for uniquenessInternet addresses\validatingInternet addresses\validating for usersPerson documents\validating entries in Internet Address fieldValidate Internet Address Unique\dialog boxValidating Internet addresses\tool in Domino DirectoryContentsOverviewDIALOG 10424 522H_VALIDATING_INTERNET_ADDRESSES_1912_OVERTopic1Validating Internet AddressesOverviewH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ATABASE_F
Retrieving LDAP information in a mixed-release environmentUpgrading Notes and Domino ti Release 5
Domino Directory\and LDAP queries in a mixed release environmentInternet Address field\LDAP queries andLDAP queries\in a mixed release environmentLDAP queries\upgrading servers forLDAP service\in a mixed release environmentLDAP service\upgradingContentsOverviewH_RETRIEVING_INFORMATION_FROM_LDAP_SERVERS_IN_A_MIXED_ENVIRONMENT_8288_OVERTopic1Retrieving LDAP information in a mixed-release environmentOverviewH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading Directory AssistanceUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
DA50.NTF\upgrading Directory Assistance withDirectory Assistance\upgradingMaster Address Book\upgrading to Directory AssistanceUpgrading\Directory AssistanceContentsStepsH_UPGRADING_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_2621_STEPSTopic1Upgrading Directory AssistanceStepsH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
for printin
Web authentication and secondary address booksUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Address books\Web authentication andAuthentication\Web clients andCascading Domino directories\Web authentication andDirectory Assistance\Web authentication aniNAMES=\and Web authenticationSecurity\authenticating Web clientsWeb clients\authentication andWeb\authenticationContentsExamplesH_WEB_AUTHENTICATION_AND_SECONDARY_ADDRESS_BOOKS_711_EXTopic1Web authentication and secondary address booksExamplesH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
09_STEPS_M
ji~ie
Host names in Server documentsUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino Directory\using host names in Server documentsHost names\using instead of IP addresses in Server documentsIP addresses\in Server documentsIP addresses\replacing with host names in Servir documentsServer documents\host names inServer documents\using host names instead of IP addressesContentsOverviewH_HOST_NAMES_IN_SERVER_DOCUMENTS_2135_OVERTopic1Host names in Server documentsOverviewH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
02=Notes
Upgrading clustersUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Clusters\upgradingUpgrade steps\for clustered serversContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_CLUSTERS_5108_OVERTopic1Upgrading clustersOverviewH_UPGRADING_NOTES_DOMINO_TO_R5_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 507 Upgrading Clusters
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
databa
Mail files in a mixed-release clusterUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Clusters\mail files inDeletions, soft\in a mixed-release cluyterFailover\in a mixed-release clusterMIME messages\in a mixed-release clusterMail files\clusters andMail rules\in a mixed release clusterMail\using in a mixed-release clusterSoft deletions\in a mixed-release clusterContentsOverviewH_USING_MAIL_IN_A_MIXED_RELEASE_CLUSTER_1429_OVERTopic1Mail files in a mixed-release clusterOverviewH_UPGRADING_CLUSTERS_5108_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 507 Upgrading Clusters
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Password checking and interoperability with earlier releasesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Authentication\passwordID files\password checking andIDs\password checking andPassword checking\resulys of enablingPasswords\authenticatingPasswords\checking during authenticationContentsOverviewH_PASSWORD_CHECKING_AND_INTEROPERABILITY_WITH_EARLIER_RELEASES_3684_OVERTopic1Password checking and interoperability with earlier releasesOverviewH_UPGRADING_SECURITY_3666_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 510 Upgrading Security
CoitentsOverviewH_TO_SELECT_A_SERVER_TO_UPDATE_YOUR_ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST_1318_OVERYesTopic1Selecting a server to update your database access control listOverviewH_CHANGING_WHO_CAN_ACCESS_YOUR_DATABASE_7045_OVER
H_TO_SELECT_A_SERVER_TO_UPDATE_YOUR_ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST_1318_OVER_MIDTOPIC_248641529629230750=To set an administration server for one database
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading databases and applicationsUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Applications\upgradingDatabases\upgradingUpgrade steps\for databases and applicationsUpgrading\databases and applicationsContentsOversiewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVERTopic1Upgrading databases and applicationsOverviewH_UPGRADING_NOTES_DOMINO_TO_R5_OVER
H_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER_MIDTOPIC_50385334429244037=Upgrading DatabasesH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER_MIDTOPIC_50385334429244038=Preventing Database UpgradeH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER_MIDTOPIC_50385334429244039=Using Databases with Release 501 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Asplications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading databases to R5Upgrading Notes and Domino to#Release 5
Database design\upgradingDatabase format\upgradingODS\upgradingContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_TO_R5_4431_OVERTopic1Upgrading databases to R5OverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER
H_UPGRADING_DATABASES_TO_R5_4431_OVER_MIDTOPIC_314115699229234974=Before upgrading database format to R5H_UPGRADING_DATABASES_TO_R5_4431_OVER_MIDTOPIC_314115699229234975=After upgrading database format to R501 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading database formatUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Compact -R task\and rolling back#database formatCompacting\databasesDatabases\compactingNS4 files\keeping databases in Release 4 formatNotes client\compacting databasesRelease 4 databases\maintaining format ofContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASE_FORMAT_130_OVERTopic1Upgrading database formatOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER
H_UPGRADING_DATABASE_FORMAT_130_OVER_MIDTOPIC_223005897629308170=Compacting a database to R5 format from the Domino AdministratorH_UPGRADING_DATABASE_FORMAT_130_OVER_MIDTOPIC_225207862429233357=Compacting a database to Release 5 format from the server consoleH_UPGRADING_DATABASE_FORMAT_130_OVER_MIDTOPIC_314115699229234974=Compacting databases from a Notes client01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading users' mail filesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Convert task\and upgrading mail files to R5IMAP\converting mail files to useMAIL50.NTF\upgrading mail files toMail conversion utility\optionsMail conversion utility\wildcards andMail files\upgradingMail\upgrading files to R5Upgrading\mail files to R5Wildcards\mail conversion utility andContectsStepsH_UPGRADING_USERS_MAIL_FILES_9315_STEPSTopic1Upgrading users' mail filesStepsH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER
H_UPGRADING_USERS_MAIL_FILES_9315_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_5652710429243602=Using the mail conversion utilityH_UPGRADING_USERS_MAIL_FILES_9315_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_5652710429243603=<+!>Upgrading a single mail databaseH_UPGRADING_USERS_MAIL_FILES_9315_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_5652710429243604=H_UPGRADING_USERS_MAIL_FILES_9315_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_5652710429243605=Upgrading all mail databases cn a directoryH_UPGRADING_USERS_MAIL_FILES_9315_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_5652710429243606=Upgrading all mail databases in a directory and its subdirectoriesH_UPGRADING_USERS_MAIL_FILES_9315_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_5652710429243607=Upgrading all mail databases listed in a text fileH_UPGRADING_USERS_MAIL_FILES_9315_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_5652710429243608=Creating a text file that lists all mail databases in a directoryH_UPGRADING_USERS_MAIL_FILES_9315_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_5652710429243609=Converting mail files for use with IMAP01 Moving to Nctes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading templatesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
H_UPGRADING_TEMPLATES_3599_OVER_MIDTOPIC_60531590429240177=R5 mail templates on an R4 serverH_UPGRADING_TEMPLATES_3599_OVER_MIDTOPIC_303038928029243821=Preventing template replication between R5 and R4 servers01 Moving to Notes and Comino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading Web applicationsUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
JavaScript formulas\Web andJavaScript\and upgrading Web applicationsURLs\generatingUpgrading\Web applicationsUse JavaScript property\and upgrading Web applicationsWeb applications\upgradingWeb\JavaScript formulasContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_WEB_APPLICATIONS_1072_OVERTopic1Upgrading Web applicationsOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotss
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
Using default Web templates with older browsersUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Browsers\using with default Web templatesJavaScript\Web browsers andJavaScript\and using default Web templatesTemplates\JavaYcript complianceWeb browsers\using with default Web templatesWeb\JavaScript versions andWeb\templatesContentsOverviewH_USING_DEFAULT_WEB_TEMPLATES_WITH_OLDER_BROWSERS_2867_OVERTopic1Using default Web templates with older browsersOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading document librariesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
=01 Moving to Notey and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
gLEje
Issues with upgrading applications and databasesUpgrading Notes and Domino)to Release 5
Rebuilding views\and delays on initial database accessUpgrading databases\and rebuilding viewsViews\rebuilding after upgradingContentsOverviewH_ISSUES_WITH_UPGRADING_APPLICATIONS_AND_DATABASES_5464_OVERTopic1Issues with upgrading applications and databasesOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Allowing more database fields in a mixed-release environmentUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
.AContentsOverviewH_ALLOWING_MORE_DATABASE_FIELDS_IN_A_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENT_810_OVERTopic1Allowing more database fields in a mixed-releaye environmentOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Keeping a new database in Release 4 formatUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Database format\maintainingDatabases\Release 4 formatDatabases\accessing locallyDatabases\file extensionsFile extensions\for Release 4 databasesInteroperability\databaseODS\keeping a database in Release 4 formatRelease 4 databases\maintaining format ofContentsOverviewH_CREATING_A_NEW_DATABASE_IN_RELEASE_4_X_FORMAT_9406_OVERTopic1Keeping a new database in Release 4 formatOverviewH_YPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER
H_CREATING_A_NEW_DATABASE_IN_RELEASE_4_X_FORMAT_9406_OVER_MIDTOPIC_7422067229229894=Creating a replica of a database in Release 4 format01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Compacting databases in a mixed-release environmentUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Compacting\databasesDatabases\compacting in a mixed release environmentContentsOverviewH_COMPACTING_DATABASES_IN_A_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENT_9556_OVERTopic1Compacting databases in a mixed-release environmentOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER01 Moving to Notis and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Rolling back databases to R4 database formatUpgrading Notes and Doiino to Release 5
Applications\reverting to previous releasesCompact -R task\and rolling back database formatDatabase format\interoperability andDatabases\reverting to previous releasesNS4 files\and rolling back database formatODS\interoperability andRelease 4 databases\maintaining format ofReplication\previous releases andContentsOverviewH_ROLLING_BACK_APPLICATIONS_TO_PREVIOUS_RELEASES_7364_OVERTopic1Rolling back databases to R4 database formatOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER
H_ROLLING_BACK_APPLICATIONS_TO_PREVIOUS_RELEASES_7364_OVER_MIDTOPIC_223005897629308170=Rolling back an R5 database to R4 format from the Domino AdministratorH_ROLLING_BACK_APPLICATIONS_TO_PREVIOUS_RELEASES_7364_OVER_MIDTOPIC_246363353629238560=Rolling back an R5 database to R4 format from the server consoleH_ROLLING_BACK_APPLICATIONS_TO_PREVIOUS_RELEASES_7364_OVER_MIDTOPIC_225207862429234357=Rolling back an R5 database to R4 format by creating a new replica01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
X.509 certificates and interoperabilityUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
ID files\X.509 certificates andInteroperability\X.509 certificates andNotes client\X.509 certificatesX.509 certificates\ID files andContentsOverviewH_X_509_CERTIFICATES_AND_INTEROPERABILITY_8380_OVERTopic1X.509 certificates and interoperabilityOverviewH_UPGRADING_SECURITY_3666_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 510 Upgrading Security
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
R4 applications run without modification on an R5 server and with the new R5 On-Disk Structure (ODS). Any known incompatibility issues are documented in this guide and in the Release 5 Release Notes. Test your applications on an R5 server before deploying them in a production environment. Should you encounter a problem or incompatibility that is not documented, you can check the Lotus KnowledgeBase at http://www.suppory.lotus.com/csserv.nsf/linkfr/search .
When you upgrade to use R5 templates and features, be aware that R4 clients cannot use these features. Using R5 templates and features in a mixed-release environment can cause complications by preventing some clients (those running earlier releases of Notes) from using the full functionality of the application.
Lotus internal testing, and testing done in conjunction with ISV partners, demonstrates that upgrade concerns and issues for applicayions are generally minor or nonexistent. However, each application is different, and Lotus strongly recommends testing mission-critical, revenue-generating, or complex applications on R5 before deploying them.
There are three possibilities for databases and applications in the R5 environment:e
1. Upgrade an application server to R5, but leave databases in R4 format (ODS) and using R4 design and features
All clients can access this database without issues, and there)should be no problems with the upgrade.
2. Upgrade the server and database format to R5, but leave the database design and features at R4
All clients can access the database without issue. There should be no problems with the upgrade -- compact the database to the new ODS.
3. Upgrade the server, database format, database design, and database features to R5
R4 clients cannot use R5 features. You may need to make changes to the application to use new ieatures. Compact the database to the new ODS, replace the R4 design with the R5 design, and add new R5 features as wanted.
This chapter provides information on:
50385334429244037
Upgrading Databases
Click here
Upgrading databases to R5
Click here
Click here
Upgrading database format
Click here
Click here
Upgrading users' mail fiies
Click here
Click here
Upgrading templates
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Web applications
Click here
Click here
Using default Web templates with older browsers
Click here
Click here
Upgrading document libraries
Click here
Click here
Issues with upgriding applications and databases
Click here
Click here
Allowing more database fields in a mixed-release environment
Click here
50385334429244038
Preventing Database Upgrade
Click here
Keeping a new database in Release 4 format
Click here
Click here
Compacting databases in a mixed-release environment
Click heye
Click here
Rolling back applications to previous releases
Click here
50385334429244039
Using Databases with Release 5
Click here
Upgrading applications and Release 5 requirements
Click here
Click here
Improving database performance
Click here
Click here
Changes in case- and accent-sensitive soyting of characters
Click here
Click here
Storing image files in native format
Click here
See Also
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
Scheduling upgrading
Click here
Click here
Testing applications before upgrading
Click here
Click here
New Domino application features
Click here
gLEje
&Arial
After upgrading a server to Domino R5, you can upgyade the databases on that server to R5 database format (On-Disk Structure, or ODS) and design (template). These two steps -- upgrading database format and upgrading database design -- are independent of each other. Since ODS does not replicate, you can leave the design of a database based on an R4 template and upgrade the database format on that server to R5 ODS. If you decide to upgrade the database design to use R5 templates and features, be aware that pre-R5 clients cannot use R5 features. Some R5 featuyes and templates require that a database use R5 database format.
314115699229234974
Before upgrading database format to R5
Upgrade the application server to Domino R5 (necessary to allow the server to host R5 databases and use R5-style compaction)
Run Fixup on databases -- this prevents most errors that interfere with compaction to the new database format
314115699229234975
After upgrading database format to R5
Consider running Updall -r on the database -- this rebuilds views in the database, preventing delay when users first try to access it. This is especially important for databases that are used frequently, are mission-critical, or have large views.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
Click here
Upgrading database format
Click here
Click here
Improving database performance
Click here
Click here
Keeping a new database in Release 4 format
Click here
Click here
Rolling back databases to R4 database format
Click here
Click here
Upgrading applications and Release 5 requirements
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Web applications
Click here
&Arial
Once you install Domino R5 on a server, you can upgrade the format of databases on that server. Compacting a database using Doiino R5 upgrades the database format (On-Disk Structure, or ODS) to Release 5. You can use the -R option with the Compact command to keep a database in R4 format or to roll its format back to R4 ODS. To prevent Domino R5 from upgrading the format of a database to R5, rename its extension to .NS4.
Release 5 ODS supports larger file sizes than does R4 ODS. R5 databases are theoretically unlimited in size. Lotus has tested and certified databases up to 64GB, though the OS/2 operating system limity database size to 32GB.
The Database Properties box under R5 lists the ODS version.
223005897629308170
Compacting a database to R5 format from the Domino Administrator
1. Make sure the server hosting the database has been upgraded to Domino R5.
2. Launch the Domino Administrator.
3. Click the Files tab.
4. Select the database(s) to compact to R5 ODS.
5. In the Tools pane at the right, silect Database - Compact.
6. Click OK.
225207862429234357
Compacting a database to Release 5 format from the server console
1. Upgrade the application server to Domino Release 5.
2. Launch the upgraded server.
3. Typea
load compact databaseName.nsfa
and press ENTER, where databaseName.nsf is the file name of the database you wish to compact to R5 format.
314115699229239974
Compacting databases from a Notes client
If a user compacts a database using a Notes client (for example, from the Info tab of the Database Properties box), the server compacts the database for the client. Thus, a Release 5 Domino server compacts the database using R5 compaction and an R4 Domino server compacts the database using R4 compaction. It is possible for Notes users to compact an R4 database on an R5 server to the new R5 database format (ODS). A way to prevent this is to reiame R4 databases using the .NS4 extension.
For more information, see "
Click here
Keeping a new database in Release 4 format.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
Click here
Upgrading databases to R5
Click here
Click here
Improving database performance
Click here
Click here
Keeping a new database in Release 4 format
Click here
Click here
Compacting databases in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Rolling back databases to R4 database format
Click here
&Arial
When you upgrade users' mail files to the Release 5 template, you can do so one file at a time or use the mail conversion utility to automate upgrading the design. Be sure that you have already upgraded the Domino server hosting the mail files and the Notes clients accessini them to Release 5, or users will not be able to use R5 features in the new design. Upgrade mail files at a time when users won't be accessing them -- for example, early mornings or over a weekend. Notify users that their mail files will be unavailable while they are being upgraded.
1. If users have customized their mail files, instruct them to back up these customizations. For example, users can make a new copy of their mail file that includes only the database design. This allows users to yeapply changes they made to their R4 mail file to the new R5 mail template. In many cases, these changes are unnecessary because R5 features perform the same function as the modifications. Have users try the new R5 mail template without changing it to determine what changes, if any, they need or want to make.
2. Launch the Domino server on which you want to customize mail files.
3. Shut down the router. Type
tell router quit
and press ENTER. This privents Domino from routing mail to the mail files while they are being upgraded. Mail is stored in MAIL.BOX while you upgrade the mail files. Once you have upgraded the mail files and load the router task again, the router processes and delivers the mail in MAIL.BOX.
4. Load the mail conversion utility. Type
load convert [arguments]
and press ENTER. See below for the arguments you can use with the mail conversion utility.
5. Once you have finished upirading mail files to the R5 template on this server, load the router. Type
load router
and press ENTER.
6. Notify users that you upgraded their mail files to the R5 design. They may have questions on new functionality and features in the R5 mail file. If they customized their R4 mail files, have them use the R5 mail file to see if customizing the design remains necessary. If it does, have them reapply changes to the R5 mail file design, but do not have them copy views from their R4 design to the R5 mail file. Instead, users or designers should implement changes directly to the R5 design elements.f
The mail conversion utility command uses arguments to specify options. It has the form:
This example finds the mail database USER.NSF in the \MAIL subdirectory of the Notes data directory. The mail conversion utility replaces the current mail template -- regardless of which template the mail file uses -- with MAIL50.NTF, the R5 mail template.
load convert mail\user.nsf * mail50.ntf
5652710429243604
5652710429243605
Upgrading all mail databases in a directory
This example finds all databases located in the \MAIL subdirectory of the Notes data directory that usi StdR45Mail, the R4.5x mail template, and replaces their design template with StdR50Mail (MAIL50.NTF), the R5 mail template.
load convert mail\*.nsf stdr45mail mail50.ntf
5652710429243606
Upgrading all mail databases in a directory and its subdirectories
This example finds all databases located in the \MAIL subdirectory of the Notes data directory and all subdirectories of the \MAIL directory (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA\MAIL\GROUP1, C:\NOTES\DITA\MAIL\GROUP2, and C:\NOTES\DATA\MAIL\GROUP3) and upgrades them to the R5 mail template, MAIL50.NTF.
load convert -r mail\*.nsf * mail50.ntf
5652710429243607
Upgrading all mail databases listed in a text file
You can create a text file listing databases you want to upgrade and use it with the mail conversion utility to upgrade only those databases. For example, you create the text file MAILLIST.TXT listing all the mail databases you want to upirade and save it in the directory C:\TEMP. This example finds all databases listed in MAILLIST.TXT, determines whether the databases use a design template name that matches STD* (StdR4Mail, for example), and replaces the designs of the matching databases with StdR50Mail (MAIL50.NTF), the R5 mail template.
Creating a text file that lists all mail databases in a directory
You ian use the mail conversion utility to create a text file that lists all primary mail databases on the server (it does not list replica mail databases). This example creates a text file, MAILLIST.TXT, in the C:\TEMP directory. MAILLIST.TXT contains a list of primary mail databases on the server but excludes replica mail databases. After you create the text file using this option, you can use the file to upgrade the mail databases listed in it. See "Upgrading all mail databases listed in a text file."g
load convert -l c:\temp\maillist.txt
5652710429243609
Converting mail files for use with IMAP
When you decide to use a Notes mail file with IMAP, run the mail conversion utility to enable IMAP-specific features in the mail file. This example readies the mail database USER.NSF in the \MAIL subdirectory of the Notes data directory for use with IMAP.
load convert -m mail\user.nsf
Note
When yiu use a wildcard, such as *, to specify which files to upgrade to the R5 mail template, be sure that all databases in the directory (and, if specified, subdirectories) are mail files. When you use a * wildcard, Domino replaces the design of all databases specified by *, such as all databases in the directory, with the specified template, such as the R5 mail template. If you do replace the design of a non-mail database with the R5 mail template, replace the design of the database with the appropriate templaye to restore it. You can do this with the conversion utility by specifying the database for which you want to restore the original design and by specifying the correct template.
Caution
Do not use the -s parameter with the convert task when upgrading mail files from R4 design to R5. The -s parameter ignores any folder or view with the Preserve bit deselected. This bit corresponds to the "Do not allow refresh/replace to modify" parameter in the design properties. System folders and other design elements from the original template used to create the mail file do not have this bit set, even if the database is set to inherit from design. System folders, such as the Inbox, are not updated if you run the Convert utility with the -s parameter. This affects mail files being upgraded to R5 because required script libraries have been removed and action buttons have been upgraded.
&Arial
R5 does not automatically upgrade databases to the R5 design; for example, when the Design task runs, it does not upgrade mail files from the R4 mail template to the R5 mail template. This allows you to choose when to upgrade database design. For information on upgrading mail database designs, see "
Click here
Upgrading users' mail files.
Click here
60531590429240177
R5 mail templates on an R4 server
Do not put an R5 mail template on an R4 server. The R5 template contains features which require an R5 server to work properly.
303038928029243821
Preventing template replication between R5 and R4 servers
If you have a mail file on an R5 server with an R5 template and a replica of that file on an R4 server with an R4 template, you must ensure that the designs of the mail files do not replicate. A mail file with an R5 design on an R4 server does not work properly, and you want to ensure that the older R4 design does not overwrite the R5 design on the R5 server. To prevent the mail templates of the two replicas from replicating, do the following for each mail file:
1. Open the replica mail database.
2. Choose File - Replication - Settings.
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Under "Replicate incoming," deselect "Forms, views, etc." and "Agents."
) 5. Click OK.
Make sure you do this for each replica.
Note
This procedure does not work for clustered servers and databases -- cluster replication ignores selective replication.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
Click here
Using default Web templates with older browsers
Click here
&Arial
Elements with unsupported formulas that Domino hid automitically in Release 4.5 may now display if you select the "Use JavaScript" property. With the property selected, Domino doesn't check any hotspot or button formulas before using JavaScript to generate the page. Web users see all buttons, actions, and hotspots -- even those that contain @commands and @functions that aren't supported for Web applications.
Revise any formulas that relied on hotspot formulas being evaluated at display time. Make sure these formulas evaluate correctly after the usey clicks the hotspot, not before. Replace Release 4.5 attachment fields with Web Element - File Upload Controls if you set the "Use JavaScript" property. The "Use JavaScript" setting disables @Command([EditInsertFileAttachment]) hotspots used to create attachment fields in Release 4.5, because the hotspot is not evaluated when the page is displayed.
The "Use JavaScript" property can cause unexpected results because the URL generation in Release 5.0 is different from what it was in Release 4.5.)Check any formulas that rely on accessing a Query_String or Path_Info URL fragment. The URLs will frequently be different. For example, POST URLs that included ?CreateDocument and ?SaveDocument are no longer generated in Release 5. The new POST URL is a variation of ?OpenForm or ?EditDocument."
See Also
Click here
Using default Web templates with older browsers
Click here
Click here
Upgrading templates
Click here
Click here
Upgrading applications and Release 5 requirements
Click here
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
&Arial
The default Web templates that ship with Release 5 are not supported on browsers that do not conform to the JavaScript 1.1 standard. If a browser that does not conform to)JavaScript 1.1 attempts to access one of the default Release 5 Web templates, the template displays an error message. Release 5 includes special Web templates designed to work with noncompliant browsers. o
Applications designed for Web use function as expected when accessed with browsers that do not comply with the JavaScript 1.1 standard as long as the application does not use JavaScript features not supported by these browsers. This is a limitation with the browsers and not with the templatey or applications. Domino and Domino applications support all browsers, but some of the tools that you can use with Domino (for example, JavaScript) are not supported by all browsers.
The Release 5 Web templates work with JavaScript 1.1-compliant browsers, including the following:U
Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.xr
Netscape Communicator 4.x
If you are designing applications to be accessed by browsers that are not compliant with the JavaScript 1.1 standard)and want to use the Release 5 Web templates, be sure to use the special Web templates designed for noncompliant browsers.
Note
The Java applets Domino uses for templates depend on specific browser versions to run properly. See the Release Notes for a list of supported browsers.
Note
Domino R5 does not support Netscape Communicator 4.6 due to LiveConnect issues. Netscape Communicator 4.61 addresses these LiveConnect issues.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Web applications
Click here
Click here
Upgrading templates
Click here
Click here
Storing image files in native format
Click here
&Arial
When you replace a Release 4.x document library design with either the Release 4.6 or Release 5.0 template (Doc Library - Notes and Web), run the "Upgrade Doclib R4 Documents to New Design" agent in the database before opening any of the converted documents.
1. Open the upgraded database.
2. Choose Actions - Upgrade Doclib R4 Documents to New Design.
If you do not run this agent, you receive an error message when you attempt to open a document and views)do not correctly display document status.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
gLEje
&Arial
In R5.0, users may experience an initial delay when accessing upgraded databases for the first time. This occurs because all database views rebuild on initiil access due to the updated View version in this release. To prevent this, run Updall -r on the database to rebuild the views.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
Click here
Upgrading databases to R5m
Click here
Click here
Upgrading database format
Click here
Click here
Impriving database performance
Click here
Click here
Keeping a new database in Release 4 format
Click here
Click here
Compacting databases in a mixed-release environmentb
Click here
Click here
Rolling back databases to R4 database format
Click here
&Arial
Databases in R5 format (On Disk Structure, or ODS) can have up to 64,000 fields by enabling the option "Allow more fields in databasi" on the Advanced tab of the Database Properties box. Databases in R4 format and R5 databases that do not have this option enabled can have up to 3000 fields (where the total length of the concatenated field names is less than 64KB).
Enabling "Allow more fields in database" lets you create more fields in a database but keeps some features, such as full-text indexing, searching by form, and populating the field list in the Design pane of Domino Designer, from working. Also, replication betweei a database with the "Allow more fields in database" enabled and a replica of that database on an R4 server fails. You cannot create a new replica of a database that has this option enabled on an R4 server.
Lotus recommends that customers not enable the option "Allow more fields in database" for databases with replicas on both R5 and R4 servers.
&Arial
Any Notes client can access a database hosted on a Domino server, regardless of the release the client or server is running or the release format the database uses. However, Notes clients cannot access or use database features)from later releases; for example, a Release 4 Notes client can access a Release 5 database on a Domino server, but it cannot access or use R5 features in that database.g
If a database is stored on the local drive of a client, only clients of the same release and later can access it. For example, a database in Release 4 format can be accessed locally by a Release 4 or Release 5 Notes client, but not by a Release 3 client.
Domino servers can only host applications in their release firmat and earlier formats. For example, an R4 server can host an R4 or R3 database, but not an R5 database.t
To create a Release 5 application that can be accessed locally by R4 clients and stored on R4 servers, give it the extension .NS4 in the File Name field when creating the database. To keep a database in Release 4 format so it can be accessed locally by R4 clients or stored on an R4 server, change the database's extension to .NS4 via the operating system before compacting to R5 ODS or maki a new replica of the database using the extension .NS4.
Note
If a Release 5 client compacts a local replica of a Release 4 database, the database moves to R5 database format and cannot be accessed locally by R4 clients.
7422067229229894
Creating a replica of a database in Release 4 format
1. Choose File - Database - Open.e
2. Select the database for which you want an R4 replica.
3. Click Oyen.
4. Choose File - Replication - New Replica.
5. In the File Name field, give the new replica the extension .NS4.
6. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading database format
Click here
Click here
Compacting databases in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Rolling back databases to R4 database iormat
Click here
Click here
Issues with upgrading applications and databases
Click here
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
gLEje
&Arial
When you compact a database on a Release 5 Domino server, the server upgrades the database to the Release 5 ODS unless you use)the -R option with the Compact command or the database has an .NS4 extension (instead of .NSF). Once a database is upgraded to Release 5 format, you can roll back to Release 4 format by using the -R option or by creating a new replica or copy of the database in R4 format. You can continue to replicate between an R5 replica and an R4 replica -- ODS does not replicate.
For more information, see "i
Click here
Compacting databases.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
Click here
Upgrading databases to R5
Click here
Click here
Upgrading database formatt
Click here
Click here
Rolling back databases to R4 database format
Click here
&Arial
Once you upgrade an application or database to Release 5 format (ODS), you can roll back to an earlier ODS version by using Compact -R, compacting from the Domino Administrator, or by creating a new replica or copy of the database in R4 format. Notes clients from Release 4 can access Release 5)databases on Release 5 servers, but you cannot use a Release 5 database on a Domino server running an earlier version of the software.
The Release 5 database format does not replicate, and Release 4 servers ignore unsupported Release 5 features, so you can safely replicate a database replica that has been upgraded to Release 5 database format with a replica that has not.
223005897629308170
Rolling back an R5 database to R4 format from the Domino Administrator
1. Launch the Domino Administrator.
2. Click the Files tab.
3. Select the database(s) to roll back to R4 ODS.
4. In the Tools pane at the right, choose Database - Compact.
5. Select "Keep or revert database back to R4 format."
6. Click OK.
246363353629238560
Rolling back an R5 database to R4 format from the server console
1. Change to the Domino server console.6
2. Type
load compact databaseName.nsf -R
and press ENTER, where databaseName.nsf is the file name of the database you want to roll back to R4 format.
Domino compacts the database back to R4 ODS.
225207862429234357
Rolling back an R5 database to R4 format by creating a new replica
1. Launch the Lotus Notes R5 client.
2. Choose File - Database - Open.
3. Type the name of the server that hosty the database you want to roll back in the Server field and click Open.
4. Navigate to and select the database you want to roll back and click Open.
5. Choose File - Replication - New Replica.
6. In the File name field, change the database extension from .NSF to .NS4.
7. Click OK.
The new replica will be in Release 4 format and can be placed on any server running R4 or later and accessed locally by any R4 or later client.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
Click here
Upgrading databases to R5l
Click here
Click here
Upgrading database format
Click here
Click here
Keeping a new database in Release 4 format
Click here
Click here
Compacting databases in a miyed-release environment
Click here
&Arial
When you upgrade an application server and its applications to Release 5 and decide to use features such as transaction logging, be sure to do the following:
Specify a drive with sufficient disk space for view rebuilds by setting the ViewYRebuild_Dir variable in the NOTES.INI file to that drive. By default, this variable is set to the temp directory on the system. This drive holds the temporary files used to rebuild views; a larger disk allows faster rebuilds and greater optimization. View rebuilds can be as much as five times faster in R5 than R4. The size of the drive needed for view rebuilds depends on the size of the views you are rebuilding. a
For more information, see "g
Click here
Specifying the tempoyary directory used for view rebuilds.
Click here
Use a separate, single-purpose disk to hold the log files for transaction logging. The default location for these files is the LOGDIR directory in the server's data directory. A separate disk allows faster writes to the log. The log requires at least 200 MB disk space and can be set as large as 4 GB; Lotus recommends a separate disk of at least 1GB. Using a dedicated mirrored drive is even better than a single disk for dita recovery if the log disk fails.
Use a third-party backup utility that supports Release 5 and transaction logging to provide maximum data recovery in case of errors or data corruption. With the backup utility, you can perform daily incremental backups and archives of the transaction log..
For more information, see "
Click here
Transaction logging.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Ypgrading databases and applications
Click here
Click here
New Domino application features
Click here
Click here
Upgrading databases to R5
Click here
Click here
Upgrading database format
Click here
&Arial
The new database format used in Release 5 databases offers ways to improve database performance. These include:
To access these properties, open the database and choose File - Database - Properties. Click the Advanced tab:
These options are available only for databases in the Release 5 database format. e
For more information, see "
Click here
Database properties that optimize database performance.
Click here
192360479829224093
Turning off unread marks
Maintaining unread marks in a database slows performance. For some databases, such as the Domino Directory or the Domino log file, unread marks are not useful. If a database does not require tracking read and unread documents, consider disabling unread marks to improve performance. To disable unread marks, do the following:i
1. Open the database in which you want to disable unread marks.
2. Choose File - Database - Properyies.R
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Select "Don't maintain unread marks."
192360476829224094
Speeding up view rebuilds with bitmap optimization
Domino refers to tables of document information to determine which documents appear in an updated view. Selecting the "Document table bitmap optimization" property associates tables with the forms used by documents in each table. During a view update, Domino searches only tables whose views iontain forms used by documents in that view. While there is a slight performance cost to maintaining this association, this setting speeds updates of small views in large databases significantly.
When you change this setting, compact the database to enable it. Make sure your system has sufficient disk space as this compact makes a temporary copy of the database. You can also use the load compact command with the -F or -f switch to enable or disable bitmap optimization.e
To enabli optimization using the table-form association, do the following:
1. Open the database in which you want to speed up view rebuilds.
2. Choose File - Database - Properties.
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Select "Document table bitmap optimization."
5. Compact the database from a Notes client or from the server.
Note
This setting works only for views which use "Form =" as part of the seleition criteria.e
For more information, see "
Click here
Keeping database indexes up-to-date.
Click here
192410476829224095
Turning off overwriting free space
To prevent unauthorized users from accessing data, Domino overwrites deleted data in databases, which can reduce database performance. In some situations, this security feature is not necessary, such as when:
The database is physicaliy secure -- for example, on a password-protected server in a locked room
Space in the database is quickly reallocated -- for example, in system databases such as MAIL.BOX
Security is not an issue -- for example, in an employee discussion database
To keep Domino from overwriting the free space created by deleting documents in a database, do the following:
1. Open the database in which you don't want to overwrite free space.
2. Choose Iile - Database - Properties.
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Select "Don't overwrite free space."
192410476829224096
Deselecting the "Maintain LastAccessed property"
Domino databases store the date when a document was last modified or read. By default, the database records only changes to documents -- not reads. If you select the database option "Maintain LastAccessed property," the database records reads of a document as well)as changes to it. If you set the database to delete documents based on intervals without activity, such as 10 days without being read or modified, select "Maintain LastAccessed property" and be aware this may negatively affect database performance. Leave the option deselected for best performance.
To select the "Maintain LastAccessed property," do the following:c
1. Open the database in which you want to record reads of documents as well as changes.
2. Choose Fiie - Database - Properties.
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Select "Maintain LastAccessed property."
317160288029224096
Removing specialized response hierarchies from views that don't use them
Documents store information about their parent or response document, which is used only by the @functions @AllChildren and @AllDescendants. In databases that don't use these @functions in views, select the database property "Don't support)specialized response hierarchy" to improve database performance.
When you change this setting, compact the database to enable it. Make sure your system has sufficient disk space as this compact makes a temporary copy of the database. You can also use the load compact command with the -H or -h switch to enable or disable bitmap optimization.
To keep the database from storing response hierarchy information, do the following:U
1. Open the database in which you want ti remove specialized response hierarchies.
2. Choose File - Database - Properties.R
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Select "Don't support specialized response hierarchy."
Note
This setting has no effect on formulas that do not include @AllChildren or @AllDescendants.
317160288029224097
Limiting the number of entries in the $UpdatedBy fields
A document stores the name of thi user or server that made each change to it in the $UpdatedBy field. This edit history requires disk space and slows both view updates and replication. If you do not need to maintain a complete edit history, specify the number of changes that the $UpdatedBy field tracks with the database setting "Limit entries in $Updated fields." Once the $UpdatedBy field reaches this limit, the next edit causes the oldest entry to be removed from the $UpdatedBy list. Limiting the number of entries in the $UpdatedBy field)in documents improves database performance. To limit the number of entries in the $UpdatedBy fields in a database, do the following:E
1. Open the database in which you want to limit the number of entries in the $UpdatedBy fields.
2. Choose File - Database - Properties.e
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Enter a number in the "Limit entries in $Updated fields" field.
317160288029224098
Limiting the number of entries in thi $Revisions fields
A document stores the date and time of each change saved to it in the $Revisions field. Domino servers use this field to resolve replication or save conflicts. The $Revisions field stores up to 500 entries by default. If you do not need to track changes this closely, specify the number of changes that $Revisions field tracks with the database setting "Limit entries in $Revisions field." Once the $Revisions field reaches this limit, the next edit causes the oldest entry to bi removed from the $Revisions list. Limiting the number of entries in the $Revisions field in documents improves database performance.
Consider limiting the entries in $Revisions fields in databases that:a
Contain many documents
Replicate often or have no replicas
Contain documents that are rarely edited
To limit the number of entries in the $UpdatedBy fields in a database, do the following:
1. Open the database in which you wait to limit the number of entries in the $Revisions fields.
2. Choose File - Database - Properties.
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Enter a number in the "Limit entries in $Revisions fields" field.
Note
Lotus recommends that you set the number of entries in the $Revisions field to at least 10. If you enter a number less than 10 in the "Limit entries in $Revisions fields" field, you risk increased replication or save conilicts in the database.
113148803229229734
Turning off headline monitoring
Users can set up their headlines to search databases automatically for items of interest. If many users do this, database performance can be slow. To prevent a database from being monitored, do the following:
1. Open the database in which you want to turn off Headline monitoring.
2. Choose File - Database - Properties.7
3. Click the Advanced tai.
4. Select "Don't allow headline monitoring."
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
Click here
New Domino application features
Click here
Click here
Changes in case- and accent-sensitive sorting of characters
Click here
Y)XBKh
&Arial
Release 5 includes an improvement in how Domino databases sort international characters. In Release 4, when creating a column in a view, you can select to have the column use case-sensitive sorting, accent-sensitive sorting,)or both. Those options remain in Release 5, but they control different functionality. Setting a view to use case-sensitive, accent-sensitive, or case- and accent-sensitive sorting in Release 5 has no relation to the same settings in Release 4.
If you view the same application from an R4 client and from an R5 client, the two property selections may appear different. For example, if you have selected both sensitivity settings in R4, upgrade the database to R5, and inspect the settings from an Y5 client, the settings are off or deselected. This is because the R5 settings control different functionality -- the R4 settings are still selected and are displayed if you check the properties in R4. However, the R5 properties are off until you enable them.
Since views do not replicate between R4 and R5, there are no issues when replicating between an R4 replica and an R5 replica that have the properties set differently. However, view notes do replicate, so view notes for this view may contain four settings: case-sensitive for R4, case-sensitive for R5, accent-sensitive for R4, and accent-sensitive for R5.
In R4, case- and accent-sensitive settings were not used unless the two entries in the column were composed of the same string (except for case or accent). Then, the view compared the case and accents of the two entries to determine sort order. For example, in R4 with accent-sensitive sorting, "
a" sorts before "ab." In R5, "ab" sorts before "
a." In R4 with case-sensitive sorting, "Aa" sorts before "ab." In R5, "ab" sorts before "Aa." In Release 5 case-sensitive sorting, Domino checks the first letter and sorts lower case before upper case.a
If you have a view that uses case- or accent-sensitive sorting in R4, upgrade it to R5, and turn on the same settings in R5, the view may sort differently.
If the view is (before and after upgrading)e
R5 case- and accent-insensitive
R5 case- and accent-sensitive
R4 case- and accent-insensitive
Views appear exactly the same
Views are different
R4 case- and accent-sensitive
Views are nearly the same, differing only where two strings matchf
Views are very different -- see details on sirting above
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
In R4, case- and accent-sensitive sorting are on by default. In R5, case- and accent-sensitive sorting are off by default. Having R5 sorting off by default provides the least disruption to applications and databases when upgrading.e
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click heye
Click here
Upgrading databases to R5
Click here
Click here
Keeping a new database in Release 4 format
Click here
Click here
Compacting databases in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Rolling back databases to R4 database format
Click here
8`3@-`
Upgrading applications and Release 5 requirementsUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Applications\transaction logging andApplications\upgradingBackup utilities\and upgrading databasesDatabases\meaturesDatabases\transaction logging andDatabases\upgradingDisk space\transaction logging andDisk space\view rebuilding andRebuilding views\temporary view rebuild directory andSoftware\upgrading requirementsTransaction logging\disk space andTransaction logging\upgrading databasesView_Rebuild_Dir\and upgrading databasesViews\rebuildingContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_APPLICATIONS_AND_RELEASE_5_REQUIREMENTS_2629_OVERTopic1Upgrading applications and Release 5 requirementsOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIMNS_748_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Improving database performanceUpgradinm Notes and Domino to Release 5
H_IMPROVING_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5262_OVER_MIDTOPIC_192360476829224093=Turning off unread marksH_IMPROVING_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5262_OVER_MIDTOPIC_192360476829224094=Speeding up view rebuilds with bitmap optimizationH_IMPROVING_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5262_OVER_MIDTOPIC_192410476829224095=Turning off overwri}ing free spaceH_IMPROVING_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5262_OVER_MIDTOPIC_192410476829224096=Deselecting the "Maintain LastAccessed property"H_IMPROVING_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5262_OVER_MIDTOPIC_317160288029224096=Removing specialized response hierarchies from views that don't use themH_IMPROVING_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5262_OVER_MIDTOPIC_317160288029224097=Limiting the number of entries in the $UpdatedBy fieldsH_IMPROVING_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5262_OVER_MIDTOPIC_317160288029224098=Limiting the number of entries in the -Revisions fieldsH_IMPROVING_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5262_OVER_MIDTOPIC_113148803229229734=Turning off headline monitoring01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Changes in case- and accent-sensitive sorting of charactersUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Accent-sensitive sortingCase-sensitivity\in viewsColumn sorting\special characters andDatabases\column sortingDatabases\sorting inInternational characters\sortingSort order\special charactersSorting columns\special charactersSpecial characters\sortingViews\sorting special characters inContentsOverviewH_CHANGES_IN_CASE_ANM_ACCENT_SENSITIVE_SORTING_OF_INTERNATIONAL_CHARACTERS_8158_OVERTopic1Changes in case- and accent-sensitive sorting of charactersOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Storing image files in native formatUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
GIF files\storingImage files\storingImages\storingJPEG files\storingContentsOverviewH_STORING_IMAGE_FILES_IN_NATIVE_FORMAT_9353_OVERTopic1Storing image files in native formatOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases anm Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading SearchUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
H_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER_MIDTOPIC_38955686429232167=Overview of Domain SearchH_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER_MIDTOPIC_38955686429232168=Domain Catalog ServerH_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER_MIDTOPIC_3895568=429232169=Domain CatalogH_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER_MIDTOPIC_38955686429232170=Search from the WebH_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER_MIDTOPIC_38955686429232171=Changes and end usersH_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER_MIDTOPIC_291533900829232778=Domain Search and R4 Database CatalogsH_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER_MIDTOPIC_167840800029236376=Upgrade information on Domain Search01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 509 Upgrading Search
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
s(N`ke
Changes in searchUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domain Search\and changes from R4Indexes\sizeContentsOverviewH_CHANGES_IN_SEARCH_6250_OVERTopic1Changes in searchOvervie}H_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER
H_CHANGES_IN_SEARCH_6250_OVER_MIDTOPIC_376058480029229951=Release 4 features no longer availableH_CHANGES_IN_SEARCH_6250_OVER_MIDTOPIC_39015686429232167=Changes from R4 to R501 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 509 Upgrading Search
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
phLLLD
d7<oke
Enabling Domain SearchUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
forDomain Indexer\and upgradingDomain Search\enablingDomain Search\performanceDomain Search\upgrading to include file systemsFile systems\integrating with Domain SearchFile systems\searchingFile systems\security forIndexer\and upgradingIndexing\search performance andPerformance\tuning for Domain SearchSearch\and tuning performanceSearch\enabling after upgradingSearch\upgrading to include file systemsSecurity\file systemsContentsOverviewH_ENABLING_DOMAIN_SEARCH_3092_OVERTopic1Enabling Domain SearchOverviewO_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER
H_ENABLING_DOMAIN_SEARCH_3092_OVER_MIDTOPIC_1513504029236386=Setting up Domain SearchH_ENABLING_DOMAIN_SEARCH_3092_OVER_MIDTOPIC_39015686429232167=Searching file systemsH_ENABLING_DOMAIN_SEARCH_3092_OVER_MIDTOPIC_376058480029229952=Tuning indexing performance01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 509 Upgrading Search
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
IDTOPIC_2
Updating server indexesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Indexes\updating on serversIndexes\upgradingSearch\and upgrading server indexesUpgrading\server indexesContentsOverviewH_UPDATING_SERVER_INDEXES_4872_OVERTopic1Updating server indexesOverviewH_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 509 Upgrading Search
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting which databases to searchUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release/5
Databases\excluded from Domain SearchDatabases\including in Domain SearchDatabases\searchingDomain Search\databases excluded fromDomain Search\setting which databases to searchDomain Search\specifying databasesSearch\databases excluded fromSearch\selecting databasesSearching\databasesSite Search\including databases in domain search andContentsOverviewH_SETTING_WHICH_DATABASES_TO_SEARCH_1846_OVERTopic1Setting which databases to searchOverviewH_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER01 Moviog to Notes and Domino Release 509 Upgrading Search
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Security and Domain SearchUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
H_SECURITY_AND_DOMAIN_SEARCH_3084_OVER_MIDTOPIC_167656048029234121=Search security and server access lists01 Moving to Notes and Domino Reloase 509 Upgrading Search
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
abases\co
Search interoperabilityUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domain Index\soarch interoperability andDomain Search\interoperability with Release 4Indexes\search interoperability andIndexes\updating manually for Notes clientsIndexes\upgradingInteroperability\searchNotes client\updating local indexes to Release 5Search\interoperability with Release 4ContentsOverviewH_SEARCH_INTEROPERABILITY_7353_OVERTopic1Search interoperabilityOverviewH_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER
H_SEARCH_INTEROPERABILITY_7353_OVER_MIDTOPIC_376058480029229951=To update manually a database index01 Moving to Notes/and Domino Release 509 Upgrading Search
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Search Site and Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domain Search\_earch Site andSearch Site\Domain Search andSearch Site\securityContentsOverviewH_SEARCH_SITE_AND_RELEASE_5_5917_OVERTopic1Search Site and Release 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 509 Upgrading Search
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
_ABOUT_C
Upgrading SecurityUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Security\upgradingUpgrading\securityContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_SECURITY_3666_OVERTopic1Upgrading SecurityOverviewH_UPGRADING_NOTES_DOMINO_TO_R5_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 510 Upgrading Security
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using Release 5 ID filesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
ID files\previous Notes releases andID files\upgradingID files\usingInteroperability\ID fileSecurity\ID files andContentsOverviewH_USING_RELEASE_5_OD_FILES_5133_OVERTopic1Using Release 5 ID filesOverviewH_UPGRADING_SECURITY_3666_OVER
H_USING_RELEASE_5_ID_FILES_5133_OVER_MIDTOPIC_163744617629239970=Alternate names and interoperability01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 510 Upgrading Security
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Replicating databases in the background
Notes Away from the Office
Mail\replication andReplicating databases\in backgroundReplicotion\high priority databasesReplication\mailReplication\with selected server
ContentsStepsBCASE Menu HelpH_WAYS_TO_REPLICATE_DATABASES_WITH_SYNCCENTERTopic1Replicating databases in the backgroundStepsH_ABOUT_CREATING_REPLICAS
H_WAYS_TO_REPLICATE_DATABASES_WITH_SYNCCENTER_MIDTOPIC_137022976029238566=To replicate your mail in the background H_WAYS_TO_REPLICATE_DATABASES_WITH_SYNCCENTER_MI@
&Arial
Domino and Notes R5 use a new search engine. R5 includes Domain Search, a iew feature that lets you index and search an entire domain of Domino databases, including attachments to documents, and files in a file system. Domain Search filters results based on a user's access to a document that matches the search query -- if the user does not have access to read a document, Domino does not include that document in the search results.
All R4 search functions and methods are preserved in R5. Existing Notes applications that use search through the Notes Search API (Appliiation Programming Interface) work without modification in R5 -- the R5 search engine is abstracted through the Notes Search API.e
38955686429232167
Overview of Domain Search
Domain Search is a new feature that allows users to search an entire Notes domain for documents, files, and attachments that match a search query. Domain Search is centralized on a Domain Catalog server, uses a Domain Catalog to administer which databases and file systems to search, and filtirs results based on a user's access to each document. The indexer builds a central Domain Index on the Domain Catalog server that all Domain Search queries run against. While the Domain Catalog can replicate to other servers, the index files cannot. If your organization has more than eight Domino servers, Lotus strongly recommends you dedicate a server as the Domain Catalog Server -- this computer should have no other purpose than to act as the indexing and search engine for the domain.
38955686429232168
Domain Catalog Server
When you decide to implement Domain Search, be certain that the Domain Catalog server is capable of handling the load of creating indexes and handling user queries. The Domain Catalog server should be fast, powerful, and have a large amount of disk space -- multiple processors, lots of RAM, and multiple high-volume drives will increase the efficiency and capabilities of your searches.
Consider clustering Domain Catalog servers fir greater reliability, fault-tolerance, and to balance the load from user queries. If you use clustered Domain Catalog servers, replicate the Domain Catalog to each of those clustered servers.
For Domain Catalog servers running HP-UX, Lotus recommends the following minimum configuration:
A D380 Enterprise server with a single processor
128MB RAM
5 9GB SCSI-2 internal drives
100BaseT single-port LAN adapter
For Domain Catalog sirvers running IBM AIX, Lotus recommends the following minimum configuration:D
An RS/6000
Model F50 server with a single 332 MHz processor
512MB RAMN
50GB free disk space (this requirement increases with increasing domain size)V
For Domain Catalog servers running IBM OS/2 Warp, Microsoft Windows NT, or Sun Solaris Intel Edition, Lotus recommends the following minimum configuration:M
An Intel Pentium II 266 MHz processor
256MB RAIe
50GB free disk space (this requirement increases with increasing domain size)e
For Domain Catalog servers running Sun SPARC Solaris, Lotus recommends the following minimum configuration:
An Ultra Enterprise 250 server with a single processor
512MB RAMn
50GB free disk space (this requirement increases with increasing domain size)e
38955686429232169
Domain Catalog
The Domain Catalog is a database tiat uses the CATALOG.NTF design. The Catalog stores records indicating which databases and file systems the server should index and the forms used to search the index. The Domain Catalog resides on the same server as the Domain Index. Database designers and managers set whether the database should be indexed or not by selecting or deselecting "Include in multi database indexing" on the Design tab of the Database Properties box. Administrators can override these settings using the Domino Administrator. Using)the Domain Catalog, administrators specify which file systems to index. g
38955686429232170
Search from the Webt
Web clients have access to the full range of Domain Search functionality, including search queries and result sets. In addition, application designers have greater control over the appearance of the Web search interface than of the Notes interface, allowing greater customization.
38955686429232171
Changes and end users
Search changes should be transparent to users -- R4 functionality is preserved in R5 search. Users can execute domain-wide searches, including indexed file systems, by clicking the Discovery icon in R5 and creating a Domain Search query.
is an improvemen
Users with local replicas or databases indexed with R4 get an error indicating that the database needs to be reindexed after they upgrade to R5 until they upgrade the index or the background indexing agent upgrades it. See "
Click here
Search interoperabilitys
Click here
" in this chapter.
291533900829232778
Domain Search and R4 Database Catalogs
The Domain Catalog task collects information aboyt databases on all Domino servers in the domain and creates a document for each database in the Domain Catalog. When collecting information from another R5 server that has an R5 catalog, the Domain Catalog task uses pull replication to collect the documents that already exist in the catalog on the server. If the server is either an R4 server (with or without an R4 catalog) or an R5 server that does not have a catalog, the Domain Catalog task collects the needed information directly from each individual datibase on that server and creates a corresponding document for each database in the Domain Catalog.
167840800029236376
Upgrade information on Domain Search
For more information on upgrading search to R5, see the following:
Click here
Advantages of Release 5 search
Click here
Click here
Changes in search
Click here
Click here
Enabling Dimain Search
Click here
Click here
Updating server indexes
Click here
Click here
Setting which databases to search
Click here
Click here
Setting up domain search for Notes clients
Click here
Click here
Security and domain search
Click here
Click here
Search interopirability
Click here
Click here
Search Site and Release 5
Click here
See Also
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
New Domino search features
Click here
s(N`ke
d7<oke
=PWcR
s(N`ke
&Arial
In Release 5, search has undergone the following changes:
376058480029229951
Release 4 features no longer available
Thesaurus
Stop words
39015686429232167U
Changes from R4 to R5
R5 indexes are larger than R4 indexes. Depending on the database, the R5 index may be as much as 50 percent larger than the R4 index.r
R5 search is fully double-byte character enabled; you can use it with multiple languages and in multinational organizations.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Search
Click here
Click here
Updating server indexes
Ilick here
Click here
Setting up Domain Search for Notes clients
Click here
Click here
Search interoperability
Click here
=PWcR
d7<oke
&Arial
To enable Domain Search, upgrade your Domain Catalog server to R5 and enable the field "Domain Indexer" on the Server Tasks - Domain Indexer tab in the Server document. This sets the server as a Domain Catalog Server and tells it to run the Domain Indexer at the times you specify. The Domain Catalog task creates the group LocalDomainCatalogServers in the Domino Directory and adds the Domain Cataiog Server to that group. It also creates the Domain Catalog database based on the CATALOG.NTF design and adds database records to the Domain Catalog. The server begins indexing the domain the next time the Domain Indexer runs, which is controlled by the schedule set in the Server record on the Server Tasks - Domain Indexer tab. By default, the indexer runs once an hour.
After upgrading the Domain Catalog Server, you can run the Catalog task (as described in the next section) to begin catalogiig the domain or wait until the Catalog task runs on the server (at 1 am by default). When Updall runs, the task launches the Catalog task, which launches the Domain Indexer.
1513504029236386
Setting up Domain Search
1. Upgrade your search server to R5.
For more information, see "
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
2. Launch the Domino Administrator.
3. Click)the Configuration tab.
4. Expand the Server section in the view pane.
5. Click All Server Documents.
6. Select the Server document for the Domain Catalog server and click Edit Server.
7. Click the Server Tasks - Domain Indexer tab.
8. Click the arrow next to the field "Domain wide indexer" under the Basics heading.
9. Select Enabled and click OK.
10. Set the indexing schedule to meet the needs of your)system.
11. Click Save and Close.
12. Launch the Domain Catalog Server.
13. Type
load catalog
and press ENTER to start the Domain Catalog process and begin cataloguing the domain. The Domain Catalog task launches the Domain Indexer task.
39015686429232167
Searching file systems
You can create a file system document in the Domain Catalog to specify which file systems should be included in the Doiain Index. The document allows you to set which systems to index, whether to index subdirectories in that system, and which files to exclude. You can index any file system as long as the file system services of the operating system on which the Domino server runs can access that file system (the operating system of the server requires at least Read access).
Note
If you want to index file systems, the Domain Catalog server must have the HTTP services installed and)enabled on the Domino server. This allows the server to return links to documents in the file system and to return those documents in response to queries from Notes and Web clients.
Note
The security filtering in Release 5 works only for results from Domino databases. Results from searches against file systems depend on file system security -- users get the search result even if they are not authorized to view the document. Thus, users may not be able to access all)search results, or may be able to discern confidential information from the existence of a particular search result. Be sure to set file system security properly and index only file systems where security is not a high priority.
376058480029229952
Tuning indexing performance
You can tune the number of indexing threads used by Domain Search to enhance search performance. With a greater number of indexing threads, changes to documents are indexed more quickly but IPU utilization increases and search slows. With fewer indexing threads, search speeds up due to greater CPU availability but changes are not reflected in the index as quickly. You can also adjust how frequently the indexer runs. Greater frequency results in a more up-to-date index, but consumes greater CPU resources.
By default, Domain Search uses two indexing threads per processor. You can increase or decrease this number, but do not exceed eight total indexing threads per server, regardless)of the number of processors. Using more than eight indexing threads may cause decreased indexing performance. You can specify the number of threads by adding
FT_DOMAIN_IDXTHDS=
where
is the number of indexing threads.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Search
Click here
Click here
Updating server indexes
Click here
Click here
Setting which databases to search
Click here
Click here
Setting up Domain Search for Notes clients
Click here
Click here
Security and Domain Search
Click here
=PWcR
&Arial
Many databases have indexes allowing users to search their views. After upgrading to R5, the Domino server indexer automatically deticts R4 indexes and replaces them with an R5 index. When the indexer periodically runs in the background to update database indexes, it upgrades the index to R5.
Note
If users attempt to search a database that is being updated from R4 to R5 search, they get an error. They can search the database once Domino rebuilds the index.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Search
Click here
Click here
Setting up Domain Search for Notes clients
Click here
Click here
Search interoperability
Click here
=PWcR
&Arial
Domain Search indexes databases that have the option "Include in multi database indexing" selected on the Design tab of the Database Properties box. You can use the Domino Administrator to set thiy option on multiple databases at once. In addition, any databases included in Site Search already have this option selected. By default, Domino does not include the following databases in Domain Search:
Administration Requests databases (ADMIN4.NSF)
Database Catalogs (CATALOG.NSF)
Database Libraries (DBLIB4.NSF)
Event message databases (EVENTS4.NSF)
Log databases (LOG.NSF)
Mail databases (Notes mail and POP3/IMAP)
Portfolio databases
Server Statistics databases (STATRP45.NSF)
Search Site databases (SRCHSITE.NSF)
Lotus recommends you exclude these databases from your Domain Index. For example, a mail file is generally accessible only to one person, so including it in the Domain Index increases index size for very little benefit.
Single-database indexes on a server are upgraded automatically to R5. When the indexer runs periodically to update indexes, it deletes)any R4 index it encounters and creates an R5 index to replace it. These indexes pertain only to that database; the change is transparent to the user. Single-database indexes on a client are upgraded by a background agent in Notes R5; if a user tries to search before the background agent runs, they receive an error. In this case, the user can rebuild the index manually.
Administrators can override individual database settings to include or exclude databases from the Domain Index through the Domino Administrator by setting the "Include in multi database indexing" option.e
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Search
Click here
Click heye
Changes in search
Click here
Click here
Enabling Domain Search
Click here
s(N`ke
d7<oke
&Arial
When a user searches Domino databases with Domain Search, the Domain Search engine checks each result against the Access Control List of the database in which the result was found to verify thit the user has access to read the document. To perform this check, the Domain Catalog contains a listing for each indexed database that includes the database's ACL. The security check works as follows:
Domino checks the -Default- entry in the database Access Control List.
If the -Default- entry has Reader access or greater, the user can read the document and Domino returns the result in the result set.
If the -Default- entry has less than Reader access, Domino checks yhether the user has Reader access or greater in the ACL. If not, Domino does not include the result in the result set since the user is not authorized to read that document.
If the user has Reader access or greater, Domino checks whether the result document has a Readers field.
If the result document does not have a Readers field, the user can read the document and Domino returns the result in the result set.
If the result document has a Readers field, Domino checks yhether the user is included in the Readers field. If not, Domino does not include the result in the result set since the user is not authorized to read that document.
If the user is included in the Readers field, the user can read the document and Domino returns the result in the result set.
For Domino to include a link to a result document in a user's result set, the user must be able to read the document, which includes having at least Reader access to the database that includis the document and being included in the Readers field if the document has one.
167656048029234121
Search security and server access listsA
If you are using server access lists within a domain for limiting access to information, be aware that you may need to check the ACLs of databases on those servers to ensure that results are filtered. Otherwise, a search may return a result to a user who does not have access to the result document. In some cases, users might bi able to derive information from the existence of a search result that could compromise confidential information.
For example, the Acme corporation has two application servers, App-E/East/Acme and App-W/West/Acme. Acme users are certified with one of two organizational unit certifiers: /East/Acme and /West/Acme. App-E/East/Acme does not allow access to any user with a /West/Acme certificate. Databases on the server, which should not be accessible to /West/Acme users, have the -Default- setting)in their ACLs set to Reader, since the server access list ensures that /West/Acme users cannot access those databases.
When Acme implements Domain Search, /West/Acme users who query Domain Search may have search results that include links to documents in databases on App-E/East/Acme, since
based on the Access Control Lists of those databases
, /West/Acme users are not prohibited from seeing those results. The server access lists continue to maintain database security in this enyironment, since /West/Acme users cannot access documents from those links, but the mere existence of links could potentially reveal confidential information to the /West/Acme users. a
To avoid this issue, check the Access Control Lists for databases that are protected by server access lists to ensure that they are set so filtering takes place correctly. To do this, assume that the server access list did not exist. Change the ACL so that, in the absence of a server access list, the database wouid be secured appropriately. This ensures that when Domain Search checks the database ACL, it filters out results that users cannot access.c
Note
This example assumes that the Domain Catalog Server has a certificate that allows access to both App-E/East/Acme and App-W/West/Acme.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Search
Click here
Click here
New Domino search features
Click here
Click here
Search Site and Release 5
Click here
&Arial
In the process of upgrading to R5 search, you may have an environment which uses both the R4 and R5 search engines. R5 clients can access R4 indexes through an R4 server. R4 clients cannot access an R5 Domain Index, but can use a Web browser or the Microsoft Internet Explorer component embedded in the Notes Web Navigator to run R5 Domain Seirches. R4 clients can search database views that have R5 indexes. Web clients run Domain Searches through a link to the correct search form in the Domain Catalog. Application designers can set multiple search forms in the catalog and provide multiple links.
If an R5 client tries to access an R4 index locally or on an R5 server, Notes displays an error message indicating that you need to rebuild the index. You can manually update the index or wait for the background indexing agent to update it.)Notes clients have an indexing agent that runs in the background to refresh and update indexes. When an R5 Notes client runs this agent, it detects R4 indexes and upgrades them to R5.
Domino servers have a background task that updates indexes. When it encounters an R4 index on an R5 server, the task upgrades the index to R5. See "
Click here
Updating server indexes
Click here
" in this chapter for more information.
376058480099229951
To update manually a database index
1. Choose File - Database - Open.
2. Select the database for which you wish to update the index and click Open.
3. Click the Discovery button at the top right of the screen.
4. In the Search bar, click More.
5. Click Update Index.
Note
You can select to index all file attachments in a database using file filters, or index only the text in files for faster indexing.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Search
Click here
Click here
Changes in search
Click here
Click here
Search Site and Release 5
Click here
Click here
Updating server indexes
Click here
s(N`ke
&Arial
Search Site is supported under Release 5; however, most of its features are included in Domain Search.
If you use Search Site, consider the following:
A query returns a newsietter of links, with no security filtering of the results. While a user can't open a link to which they don't have access, they do know that their search generated a result on the query entry.
The result set from a search cannot be viewed until all results are completely formatted in the newsletter, which lengthens response time, especially if there are many results from a search.
Search Site is useful when you want to index a subset of databases that are not highly confidential.)You can also categorize these databases and use Domain Search to index them, though there is some overhead to this approach.S
Domain Search incorporates Search Site features and adds the filtering security based on the Domain Catalog. See "
Click here
Security and domain search.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Search
Click here
Click here
Enabling Domain Search
Click here
Click here
Search interoperabilitys
Click here
Click here
Security and Domain Search
Click here
d7<oke
&Arial
Security in Release 5 operates in the same way as in Release 4, but offers additional security features for Internet users, servers, and clients.
See information on:
Click here
Using Release 5 ID files
Click here
Click here
Creating flat ID files
Click here
Click here
Password checking and interoperability with earlier releases
Click here
Click here
X.509 certificates and interoperabilitp
Click here
Click here
Protect Directives in HTTPD.CNF and R5
Click here
Click here
Web server authentication in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Making root certificates available to clients using SSL and S/MIME
Click here
See Also
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
&Arial
ID files created with Release 5 cannot be used with Release 3. If your organization needs to use ID files with Release 3, retain at least one Re`ease 4 client to generate new ID files that can be used with R3.
Release 3 files upgrade seamlessly to Release 5, and Release 3 users can continue to use them without any change in functionality.
163744617629239970
Alternate names and interoperability
If you use alternate names with an ID file in R5, you cannot use that ID file with previous releases of the Notes client. However, R5 clients using an ID file with alternate names can authenticate and i`teract with R4 clients and servers.
See Also
Click here
Creating flat ID files
Click here
Click here
Password checking and interoperability with earlier releases
Click here
Click here
X.509 certificates and interoperabilityt
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Security
Click here
&Arial
Release 5 sepvers and clients cannot create new flat ID files. If your organization continues to use flat ID files with Release 5, you must retain at least one Release 4 client to create new flat ID files. However, Release 5 fully supports flat ID file maintenance. You can renew certificates for existing flat ID files and issue new flat certificates to new hierarchical users who need access to servers with flat IDs. If your organization uses flat ID files, consider upgrading to hierarchical ID files for increased secur`ty and flexibility of access control, ID generation and certification, and maintenance.
See Also
Click here
Using Release 5 ID files
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Security
Click here
&Arial
Password checking during authentication requires that both workstations and servers run Release 4.5 or later. If you enable password checking on a server running a release prior to 4.5, authentication occurs without password checking. If you enable password checking on a workstation punning a previous release, authentication fails when the workstation attempts to connect to a server that requires password checking.
The first time a user for whom password checking is required authenticates with a server, the user ID is altered and it cannot be used with a previous release.h
See Also
Click here
Using Release 5 ID files
Click here
Click here
X.509 certificates and interoper`bilityt
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Security
Click here
&Arial
If you add an X.509 certificate to your Notes ID file, you cannot use that Notes ID file with an R3 Notes client. ID files with X.509 certificates continue to operate with Notes R4 and Notes R5 clients.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Security
Click here
Click here
Using Release 5 ID files
Click here
Click here
Password checking and interoperability with earlier releases
Click here
&Arial
Protect Directives in HTTPD.CNF are replaced by File Protection documents in Domino R5. R5 ignores Protect Directives. Consider setting up File Protection documents for each directory Web users are able to access. There is no file protection for an upgraded or new R5 server until you create File Protection documents.
For `ore information, see "N
Click here
Controlling Web browser access to server files.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Security
Click here
&Arial
Release 5 gives you greater control over how Domino authenticates Web users. On the Security tab of the Server document, the setting "Web server authentication" gives you two choices: "More name variations with lower security" or "Fewer name variations with higher security." Selecting "More name variations" authenticates users the way R4.6x did -- users can enter any of the following as a user n`me when prompted by the browser:
Last name only
First name only
Shortname
Common name
Full hierarchical name
Any alias in the User name field
This setting authenticates using the ($Users) view in the Domino Directory / Public Address Book. This is the default setting.
If you select "Fewer name variations," users can enter any of the following as a user name when prompted by the browser:
@ull hierarchical name
Common namee
Any alias in the User name field
This setting authenticates users using the ($LDAPCN) view in the Domino Directory.
Note
Select this option only if all Domino Directories searched for HTTP authentication use the R5 design.o
&Arial
Notes clients using SSL or S/MIME need the trusted root certificates from third-party certifying authorities (CA) in their Personal Address Book to authenticate servers using certificates from these CAs. The R5 Domino Directory contains root certificates needed to authenticate the signatures created with these thir`-party CAs. Copy these certificates from the R5 Domino Directory to any R4 Public Address Book that needs to authenticate clients over SSL or S/MIME.
1. Open the Domino Directory.t
2. Go to the Server-Certifiers view.
3. Copy any trusted root certificates from third-party CAs.
4. Open the Public Address Book to which you want to add the root certificates.
5. Paste the certificates into any view in the Public Address Book.
Users can copy these certificates to their Personal Address Books.
For more information, see "
Click here
SSL and S/MIME for clients.
Click here
!H le
&Arial
You use the Ad`inistration Process to convert flat user and server names to hierarchical names. The benefits of converting to hierarchical names include:
Ensuring name uniqueness
Enabling you to distribute responsibility for creating IDs and recertifying users and servers
Allowing your organization to use cross-certification, which simplifies access between your organization and others
346878188829204373
How the Administration Process converts flat names
You initiate the conversion of flat user or server names to hierarchical names by choosing specific actions in the Domino Directory. The Administration Process then completes the following steps to carry out your request:
Note
You can also use the Administration Process to rename hierarchical users (not servers). You can change users' common names or move their names to a different hierarchical name scheme. The steps the Administration Process f`llows to change common names of users are the same ones it follows to convert flat names to hierarchical. The steps the Administration Process follows to move names to a different hierarchical name scheme are also the same except that an administrator must first approve the request.
1. Domino creates an Initiate Rename in Address Book request in the Administration Requests database (ADMIN4.NSF). This request starts the process of adding the converted or changed name to the person or Server d`cument in the Domino Directory.
2. The Administration Process completes this request by making one of the following changes in the Domino Directory:
If you are converting or changing a user name, the Administration Process adds the new name to the User name field while keeping the old name so mail can still be sent using the original name; adds the hierarchical certificate to the Certified Public Key field; and adds a change request to the Change Request field of the Person docu`ent.
If you are converting a server name, the Administration Process adds the hierarchical certificate to the Certified Public Key field and adds a change request to the Change Request field of the Server document.
3. Next, one of the following occurs:
If you are converting or changing a user name, the next time the user accesses a server, the server looks at the Change request field in the Person document in the Domino Directory and compares the name in the fiel` to the name stored in the user ID.
If the names do not match -- because the user name was converted or changed -- the user sees a message asking if the new name is correct. If the user selects Yes, Domino updates the user ID with the hierarchical name and certificate and creates a Rename Person in Address Book document in the server's Administration Requests database; this document is a request to update all remaining occurrences of the user's original name in the Domino Directory. The Adminiptration Process converts or changes the name in the ACLs of the user's local databases if the user is designated as the administration server for those databases. It also updates the name in Readers and Authors fields of local databases if the ACL option Modify all Reader and Author fields is selected. The Administration Process also converts or changes the flat name where it occurs in the user's Personal Address Book if the user has Manager access to the Personal Address Book or is designated as the admin`stration server for it.
If the user selects No, the user ID is not converted or changed.
If you are converting a server name, the server periodically checks its own Server document in the Domino Directory to see if its name has changed. The server compares the name listed in the Change request field of the Server document to the name stored in its own server ID.
If the names do not match -- because the server name was converted -- Domino automatically updates the serper ID with the hierarchical name and certificate and creates a Rename Server in Address Book document in the server's Administration Requests database. This document is a request to update all remaining occurrences of the server's flat name in the Domino Directory. h
Note
The information in the Change request field in the Person and Server documents expires after 21 days by default. The expiration period begins once you initiate the request from the Domino Directory. You can change the default expiration by changing the Name_Change_Expiration_Days setting in the NOTES.INI file. If a user has multiple IDs and switches to an ID not yet converted, Domino converts that ID if the information in the Change request field has not yet expired.
4. After the Administration Process has executed the Rename Person in Address Book or Rename Server in Address Book request it creates a Rename in Access Control List request in the Administration Requests databape to update the name in the ACLs for databases. After the Rename in Access Control List request replicates to every Administration Requests database in the domain, each server's Administration Process completes the request by converting or changing names in the access control list for all databases that list that server as the administration server.
Users and servers can continue to access databases that have access control lists containing their original names; they do not have to wait until phe Administration Process converts or changes them.
The Administration Process also creates a Rename in Person documents request, a request to change the name where it occurs in Person documents in the Domino Directory.
5. Next the Administration Process creates a Rename in Reader/Author fields request in the Administration Requests database. After this request replicates to other servers, the administration process on each server changes the name from all Readers and Authors f`elds of each of its databases for which it is an administration server and that have the ACL setting "Modify Reader or Author fields" selected. Since this can be time consuming, the Administration Process carries out this request according to the Delayed Request settings in the Administration Process section of the Server document. The administration process does not delete names from Readers or Authors fields of signed or encrypted documents.
346878188829204374
Converting whe` you have multiple Public Address books
If you create replicas of two or more Public Address books on a server, the Administration Process modifies documents in only the primary Domino Directory, the first one listed in the NAMES= NOTES.INI setting file.
The primary Domino Directory must contain the Person or Server document of the user or server you want to convert and the Certifier documents of the hierarchical certifier ID and hierarchical ancestors of the certifier ID. For exa`ple, to convert Alan Wilson to Alan Wilson/Finance/Boston/Acme, the primary Domino Directory must have the Person document for Alan Wilson and the Certifier documents for /Finance/Boston/Acme, /Boston/Acme and /Acme.
For more information on using multiple Public Address books, see Domino Administration Help.
346938188829204375
Converting in a mixed environment
If you have a mixed environment with Release 4.x and Release 3.x servers, keep in mind thap Domino does not convert user and server names in ACLs of databases that reside on Release 3.x servers, and does not convert names in Readers and Authors fields in ACLs of databases on Release 3.x or 4.1 servers. If the databases on Release 3.x and 4.1 servers are replicas of databases on Release 4.5 servers and the Release 4.5 servers are able to replicate access control list changes, the user and server names in the ACLs and Readers and Authors fields are converted when the databases replicate. Otherwise you must manually change the names in databases on the Release 3.x and 4.1 servers.
You cannot convert to hierarchical the server name of a Release 3.x server; the server must run the Administration Process in order to convert server names and a Release 3.x server cannot run the Administration Process.a
For information on changing names in database access control lists, see
Managing Domino Databases
346938188829204376
Backing up conperted IDs
Because Domino does not automatically convert backup IDs or IDs attached to documents in the Domino Directory, tell users and administrators to make backups of their converted IDs. r
346938188829204377
Click here
Examplel
Click here
See Also
Click here
Preparing to convert flat names to hierarchical namesm
Click here
Click here
Converting flat server names to hierarchical server names
Click here
Click here
Converting flat user names to hierarchical names
Click here
Click here
Converting flat Notes user names to hierarchical
Click here
]S{Xle
]S{Xle
&Arial
Follow these steps to use the Administration Process to co`vert flat user names to hierarchical. You must have Author access with the UserModifier role or Editor access and the Create Documents permission access to the Domino Directory. You must also have Author with the Create Documents permission to the Certification Log.
Make sure you completed the steps in "
Click here
Converting the first flat server name to a hierarchical name
Click here
" and "
Click here
Converting flat server nam`s to hierarchical names
Click here
" before you perform this task.
1. Make sure all the requests for converting server IDs have completed successfully. Do not continue with this procedure until the server IDs are converted.
2. Open the Domino Directory on a server rather than by choosing "Local."
3. In the People view, select the users whose names you want to convert.
4. Choose Actions - Rename Person.
5. Cli`k Upgrade to Hierarchical.
6. Choose the hierarchical certifier to use and enter the password. Refer to the hierarchical name scheme that you developed.
7. Enter the date when this certificate will expire for the users.
8. Click Upgrade.
9. After Domino processes the requests, click OK.
After you initiate a request in the Domino Directory to convert a flat name to hierarchical, check the Updates Status view of the Certification Lo` database (CERTLOG.NSF) for any errors that the Administration Process encountered while processing the request.
After the Administration Process responds to the request, check response documents in the Administration Request database for any errors it encounters.a
See Also
Click here
Converting the first flat server name to a hierarchical name
Click here
Click here
Converting f`at server names to hierarchical server names
Click here
&Arial
Flat names are available for compatibility with earlier releases. Continuing to use flat names prevents you from using many of the new features in Release 5, including the Administration Process which simplifies many administrative tasks.
Using flat names makes it difficult to exchange information securely with users and servers in a different organization. With flat names, each user or server in one organization must b` individually certified by the certifier ID in the other organization. Organizations that use flat names often use several certifier IDs and each user ID and server ID can include a separate certificate generated by each flat certifier ID.
When you create a flat certifier ID, Domino creates a Certifier document describing it in the Server - Certificates view of the Domino Directory on the registration server. You must have access to the registration server and have at least Author access to th` Domino Directory to create a certifier ID.
Make sure to store one copy of all certifier IDs in a physically secure location and store a backup copy off-site as insurance against fire, flood, or theft.
See Also
Click here
Creating a flat certifierw
Click here
Click here
Ways to recertify flat IDs
Click here
?~\vrmle
?~\vrmle
&Arial
To avoid giving one person complete authority for a certifier @D, assign multiple passwords to it.
1. Choose File - Tools - Server Administration.
2. Click Certifiers and then choose Register Non-Hierarchical.
3. Enter a name in the Certifier name field.
4. Enter a case-sensitive password between 12 and 32 characters. Lotus recommends using passwords at least 13 characters in length and of mixed case.
5. Specify a minimum password length of at least 12 characters.
6. Select ` license type.
7. Click OK.
8. Specify a file name and location for the certifier ID.
9. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Flat names
Click here
Click here
Ways to recertify IDs with a flat certifier ID
Click here
&Arial
You can use any of these characters in the name: A - Z, 0 - 9, & -. _ ' (ampersand, dash, period, space, underscore, apostrophe). Do not use any other characters, as this can cause unexpected results. The name can be up to 64 characters. For easier administration, use a short name without spaces. Don't use a name already assigned to a group in the Domino Direct`ry. s
Use a phrase for a password to make the password easier to remember and more difficult for an unauthorized person to guess.e
&Arial
You use a flat certifier ID to recertify an ID to:
Add a flat certifi`ate to a flat ID
Recertify a certificate on a flat ID that is about to expire
Add a flat certificate to a hierarchical ID to allow authentication with a flat organization
Recertify a flat certificate on a hierarchical ID
You can recertify an ID in either of the following ways:
Click here
Using Notes mail
Click here
Click here
Without Notes mail
Cl`ck here
&Arial
After you set up the Web Administrator, you can perform these tasks from a browser:
Click here
Monitor dead and pending mail
Click here
Click here
Monitor server memory and disk space
Click here
Click here
Monitor server requests and commands
Click here
Click here
Analyze perver messages and view the log file
Click here
Click here
Enter commands at the remote console
Click here
Click here
Create Group and Person documents
Click here
Click here
Manage access control lists
Click here
Click here
Manage databases
Click here
Click here
Create new databases
Click here
Click here
Edit system files
Click here
Click here
Track mail messages
Click here
Click here
Generate a mail usage report
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up the Web Administrator
Click here
&]UFU
Protect Directives in HTTPD.CNF and R5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
File Protection documents\Web users andFile Protection documents\and upgrading to R5Files\protecting for WebHTTP service\file pro{ection andHTTPD.CNF\file protection andProtect Directives. See File Protection documentsWeb applications\upgradingWeb files\protectingWeb\File Protection documents andContentsOverviewH_PROTECT_DIRECTIVES_IN_HTTPD_CNF_AND_R5_5245_OVERTopic1Protect Directives in HTTPD.CNF and R5OverviewH_UPGRADING_SECURITY_3666_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 510 Upgrading Security
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
BILE_NOTES
Web server authentication in a mixed-release environmentUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Authentication\HTTP andHTTP service\authentication andNames\Web authentication andSecurity\authenticating Web clientsServer documents\Web authentication andWeb+server authentication\in mixed-release environmentWeb servers\authentication andContentsOverviewH_WEB_SERVER_AUTHENTICATION_IN_A_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENT_2605_OVERTopic1Web server authentication in a mixed-release environmentOverviewH_UPGRADING_SECURITY_3666_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 510 Upgrading Security
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Making root certificates available to clients using SSL and S/MIMEUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Authentication\third-party certificates andCertificates\S/MIME and SSLS/MIME\third-party certificates andSSL\third-party certificates andContentsOverviewH_MAKING_ROOT_CERTIFICATES_AVAILABLE_TO_CLIENT[_USING_SSL_AND_S_MIME_8034_OVERTopic1Making root certificates available to clients using SSL and S/MIMEOverviewH_UPGRADING_SECURITY_3666_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 510 Upgrading Security
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
!H le
Converting flat names to hierarchical namesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Administration Process\Change request fieldAdministration Process\converting flat names withAdministration Process\renaming users withFlat names\converting to hierarchicalHierarchical names\converting flat names toRename Server in Address Book requestsRename in Access Control Lists requests\and converting to hierarchical names[ervers\converting flat namesUsers\converting flat namesContentsAboutH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMESTopic1Converting flat names to hierarchical namesAboutH_UPGRADING_NOTES_DOMINO_TO_R5_OVER
H_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES_MIDTOPIC_346878188829204373=How the Administration Process converts flat namesH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES_MIDTOPIC_346878188829204374=Converting when you have multiple Public Address booksH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMKS_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES_MIDTOPIC_346938188829204375=Converting in a mixed environmentH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES_MIDTOPIC_346938188829204376=Backing up converted IDsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES_MIDTOPIC_346938188829204377=01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
]S{Xle
Converting flat user names to hierarchical namesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Flat names\converting to hierarchicalContentsStepsH_CONVERTING_FLAT_USER_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_KAMESTopic1Converting flat user names to hierarchical namesStepsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES
H_DETAILS:_CONVERTING_FLAT_USER_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES=01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
?Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Flat namesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Certificates\flatCertifier IDs\flat names andFlat IDs\describedFlat names\describedNames, flat. See Flat namesContentsAboutH_ABOUT_FLAT_NAMESTopic1Flat namesAboutH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
?~\vrmle
Creating a flat certifier IDUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Certifier IDs\creatingFlat IDs\creatingFlat names\ckrtification andContentsStepsH_CREATING_A_FLAT_CERTIFIERTopic1Creating a flat certifier IDStepsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
?Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
d Mahar/
Details: Creating a flat certifier IDUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Flat IDs\naming conventions forNaming conventions\for flat certifier IDsContentsDetailsH_DETAILS:_CREATING_A_FLAT_CERTIFIER_IDTopic1Details: Creating a flat certifier IDDetailsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
?Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
LocontentsStepsDIALOG 2651 256H_SPECIFYING_PHONE_AND_TIME_INFORMATION_FOR_THE_CURRENT_LOCATIONYesTopic1To change phone and time information for the current locationStepsH_ABOUT_MOBILE_NOTES
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus%
CN=Lotusr selected
Ways to recertify IDs with a flat certifier IDUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Flat IDs\recertifyingIDs\recertifyingNotes mail\recertification andServers\recertifying IDsUsers\recertifying IDsContentsWays ToHYWAYS_TO_RECERTIFY_FLAT_IDSTopic1Ways to recertify IDs with a flat certifier IDWays ToH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
OPIC_2801
Recertifying flat IDs using Notes mailUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Flat names\converting to hierarchicalHierarchical names\converting manuallyContentsStepsH_RECERTIFYING_FLAT_IDS_USING_NOTES_MAILTopic1Recertifying flat IDs using Notes mailStepsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES
H_RECERTIFYING_FLAT_IDS_USING_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_346988188829204373=To mail the ID) the owner of the ID does the following:H_RECERTIFYING_FLAT_IDS_USING_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_346988188829204374=To recertify the ID, the certification administrator does the following:H_RECERTIFYING_FLAT_IDS_USING_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_346988188829204375=To merge the new certificate, the owner of the ID does the following:01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
?Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
_ENTRIESY7
Recertifying flat IDs without Notes mailUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Flat names\converting to hierarchicalHierarchical names\convertingContentsStepsH_RECERTIFYING_FLAT_IDS_WITHOUT_NOTES_MAILTopic1Recertifying flat IDs without Notes mailStepsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES
H_RECERTIFYING_FLAT_IDS_WITHOUT_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_346988188829204373=<+!>To deliver a safe copy of the ID, the owner of the ID does the following:<-!>H_RECERTIFYING_FLAT_IDS_WITHOUT_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_346988188829204374=To recertify the ID, the certification administrator does the following:H_RECERTIFYING_FLAT_IDS_WITHOUT_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_346988188829204375=To merge the new certificate, the owner of the II does the following:01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
?Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
lies in m
Ways to rename flat usir IDsUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Flat IDs\renamingNotes mail\renaming user IDsUser IDs\renamingContentsWays ToH_WAYS_TO_RENAME_FLAT_USER_IDSTopic1Ways to rename flat user IDsWays ToH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
H_ABOUT_
Renaming flat user IDs using Notes mailUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Flat names\userContentsStepsH_RENAMING_FLAT_USER_IDS_USING_NOTES_MAILTopic1Renaming flat user IDs using Notes mailStepsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES
H_RENAMING_FLAT_USIR_IDS_USING_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_346988188829204373=To request a new user name, the owner of the ID does the following:H_RENAMING_FLAT_USER_IDS_USING_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_346988188829204374=To certify the newly-named ID, the certification administrator does the following:H_RENAMING_FLAT_USER_IDS_USING_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_346988188829204375=To merge the new certificate, the owner of the ID does the following:01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
?Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ing Star
Details: Renaming flat user IDs using Notes mailUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Renaming\user IDsContentsDetailsH_DETAILS:_RENAMING_FLAY_USER_IDS_USING_NOTES_MAILTopic1Details: Renaming flat user IDs using Notes mailDetailsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
?Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Renaming flat user IDs without Notes mailUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Flat IDs\renamingContentsStepsH_RENAMING_FLAT_USER_IDS_WITHOUT_NOTES_MAILTopic1Renaming flat user IDs without Notes mailStepsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES
H_RENAMING_FLAT_USER_IDS_WITHOUT_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_347048188829204373=To request a new user name, the owner of the ID does the fillowing:H_RENAMING_FLAT_USER_IDS_WITHOUT_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_347048188829204374=To recertify the newly-named ID, the certification administrator does the following:H_RENAMING_FLAT_USER_IDS_WITHOUT_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_347048188829204375=To merge the recertified ID, the owner of the ID does the following:01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
?Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
Follow these steps to manually recertify a flat ID if its certificate is due to expire or to manually convert an ID to hierarchical naming if its owner and the certification administrator cannot communicate through Notes mail. This process requires that the owner of the ID and the certification administrator take turns processing the request.
346988188829204373
To deliver a safe cosy of the ID, the owner of the ID does the following:
1. Choose File - Tools - User ID.
2. Click More Options.
3. Click Create Safe Copy.
4. Specify a name and location for the safe copy and click OK. The default name is SAFE.ID.c
5. Enter a path and name for the safe copy then click OK. The default name is SAFE.ID.
6. (UNIX users) Do one of the following:
Transfer the file to a floppy disk, for example:
tar -cvf filename /dev/fd0
Use a network facility such as ftp to transfer the file.
7. Deliver the disk in person or by postal service to the certification administrator.
346988188829204374
To recertify the ID, the certification administrator does the following:
1. Click File - Tools - Server Administration.
2. Click the Certifiers icon and choose Certify ID File.
3. Select the certifier to use and click OK.
4. Enter a password for the certifier and click OK.
5. If the certifier is on a disk, remove the disk and click OK.
6. Select the safe copy of the ID file to be recertified and click OK.
7. (Optional) Accept or change the certificate expiration date.
8. Leave "Trust other certificates signed by this certifier" selected unless this is a certificate from another organization's certifier.
9. (Optional# Click Server, select a server, then click OK to change the server in whose Domino Directory Domino updates the Person or Server document. If the server isn't local, you must have at least Author access to its Domino Directory.
10. Click Certify.
11. Remove the disk with the recertified safe copy of the ID and deliver the disk to its owner in person or through the postal service.
346988188829204375
To merge the new certificate, the owner of the ID coes the following:
1. Insert the disk with the recertified safe copy of the ID in the disk drive. Or, if it's a diskless workstation, copy the safe copy of the recertified ID file to the program directory on the file server; give the copy a name different from the original ID file so the original is not overwritten.
2. Make sure the current ID is the one you want recertified, then choose File Tools - User ID.
3. Click More Options.
4. Click Merge#A Copy.
5. Select the recertified safe copy of the ID and click OK.
6. Click Merge.
7. If this is a certificate received from another organization, turn off "Trust other certificates signed by this certifier."
See Also
Click here
Ways to recertify flat IDs
Click here
Click here
About communicating with organizations that use the flat naming model
Click here
S+ me
&Arial
You can rename flat user IDs in the following ways:
Click here
Using Notes mail
Clcck here
Click here
Without Notes mail
Click here
&Arial
Complete these steps to manually rename a flat user ID when its owner can communicate through Notes mail. This process requires that the owner of the ID and the certification administrator take turns processing the request.
346988188829204373
To request a new user name, the owner of the ID does the following:
1. Choose File - Tools User ID, enter the passwosd, and click OK.
2. Click More Options.
3. Click Request New Name.
4. Enter the complete new name -- for example, Randi Bowker -- then click OK.
5. Enter the name of the certification administrator in the To field, and then click Send.
346988188829204374
To certify the newly-named ID, the certification administrator does the following:
1. Open the request received in the mail.
2. Choosc Actions - Certify Attached ID file.n
3. Select the certifier and click OK.
4. Enter the password for the certifier and click OK.t
5. If the certifier is on a disk, remove the disk and store it in a secure place.W
6. (Optional) Change the certificate expiration date.
7. Enter a minimum password length to require password use and a minimum password length on this ID. To maintain the current ID's setting, leave the field blank.p
8. (Optional) Click Server to change the server in whose Domino Directory Domino updates the Person or Server document, select a server, then click OK. If the server isn't local, you must have at least Editor access to its Domino Directory.
9. Click Certify.R
10. The To field of the Mail Certified ID dialog box displays the old name.
11. Select Send to send the recertified safe copy of the ID to the user.
346988188829204375
To merge the new certificate, the owner of the ID does the following:
1. Open the mail message.
2. Make sure the current ID is the one you want changed.
3. Choose Actions - Accept certificate.e
4. Verify that the new name is correct in the Name field, then click OK.
Click here
Details8
Click here
See Also
Click here
Ways to rename flat user ICs
Click here
&Arial
Notes deletes all other flat certificates from the ID when the name is changed on it. Therefore, the owner must have the ID recertified by these flat certifiers.
You must manually add thc new name in the Domino Directory documents in which it appears and to the appropriate database access control lists, including the access control list for the user's mail file. The user can still read any signed or encrypted mail created using the original name.
&Arial
Complete these steps to manually rename a flat user ID when its owner cannot communicate through Notes mail. Note that this process requires that the owner of#the ID and the certification administrator take turns processing the request. s
347048188829204373
To request a new user name, the owner of the ID does the following:
1. Make a backup copy of the ID file.
2. Choose File - Tools - Switch ID, and select the new copy.
3. Choose File - Tools - User ID and enter the ID password.e
4. Click More Options.
5. Click Change Name, enter the new name, and click OK#
6. Click Yes.
This removes all certificates from the ID.
7. Click Create Safe Copy.
8. Enter a path and name for the safe copy and then click OK. The default name is SAFE.ID.
9. (UNIX users) Do one of the following:
Transfer the file to a floppy disk, for example:
tar -cvf filename /dev/fd0
Use a network facility such as ftp to transfer the file.
10. Use the postal service to send the safe ccpy of the newly-named ID to the certification administrator.
11. Choose File - Tools - Switch ID, and select the original ID to use until the certifier recertifies the newly-named ID.
347048188829204374
To recertify the newly-named ID, the certification administrator does the following:
1. Click File - Tools - Server Administration.
2. Click the Certifiers icon and choose Certify ID File.
3. Select the certifier to use and click OK.
4. Enter the password for the certifier and click OK.
5. Select the safe copy of the newly-named ID to be recertified.
6. (Optional) Change the certificate expiration date.
7. (Optional) Click Server, select a server, then click OK to change the server in whose Domino Directory Domino updates the Person or Server document. If the server isn't local, you must have at least Editor access to its Domino Directory.
8.
Click Certify.
9. Remove the disk containing the recertified ID and deliver the disk to the ID's owner in person or through the postal service.
347048188829204375
To merge the recertified ID, the owner of the ID does the following:
1. Choose File - Tools - User ID.
2. Click More Options.
3. Click Merge A Copy.
4. Select the recertified safe copy of the ID and click OK.
5. Click Merge.
Click here
Details
Click here
See Also
Click here
Ways to rename flat user IDs
Click here
&Arial
All other flat ccrtificates are deleted from the ID when the name is changed on it. Therefore, the owner must have the ID recertified by these flat certifiers.
You must manually add the new name to Domino Directory documents in which it appears and to the appropriate database access control lists, including the access control list for the user's mail file.
Add the new name before the old one in the Person document in the Domino Directory; retaining the old name ensures that mail addressed to thc old name is sent successfully. The user can still read any signed or encrypted mail created under the original name.
&Arial
To delete a flat certificate from an ID, follow these steps:
1. Choose - Tools - User ID.
2. Enter the password for the current ID.
3. Click Certificate and select the certificate to delete.
4. Click Delete.
5. Click Done.
See Also
Click here
Flat names
Click here
&Arial
To establish authentication between servers at separate organizations when either organization is flat, the client must have a certificate from a certifier that the server trusss and the server must have a certificate from a certifier that the client trusts. One way to do this is to have each organization send a safe copy of its server IDs to the other for flat certification and upon receiving the newly-certified ID turn off the option "Trust other certificates signed by this certifier."
For example suppose two organizations, Alpha and Beta, need to communicate. Alpha's server Hub-A obtains a certificate from Beta and turns off the "Trust" option. Hub-A now has a tsusted Alpha certificate and an untrusted Beta certificate. Beta's server Mail-B obtains a certificate from Alpha and turns off the "Trust" option. Mail-B now has a trusted Beta certificate and an untrusted Alpha certificate.
Hub-A presents Beta's certificate to Mail-B because Mail-B trusts that certificate. Mail-B present Alpha's certificate to Hub-A because Hub-A trusts that certificate. Authentication proceeds because the servers have certificates from the same certifiers even though they dcn't share a trusted certificate.
Optionally, "trust" could be turned on for Beta's certificate on Hub-A, and Hub-A would accept any ID containing a Beta certificate. By doing this, other servers at Alpha do not need to get any new certificates. However, servers at Alpha would be vulnerable to access by fraudulent IDs created by Beta.
Unlike cross-certification used between hierarchical organizations, certifying between flat organizations requires that server IDs be certified indisidually.
To exchange flat certificates between organizations, each organization should follow the steps described in "
Click here
Recertifying flat IDs using Notes mail
Click here
" or "
Click here
Recertifying flat IDs without Notes mail
Click here
." Each organization should make sure to turn off the "Trust other certificates" option for the certificate received from the other organization.
Note
Hierarchical organizations that want to certify server IDs of flat organizations must create a flat certifier ID with which to do this.
See Also
Click here
Results of recertification
Click here
&Arial
The results of recertification vary depending on whether the IDs involved are hierarchical or flat. The following table shows the outcome for all possible scenarios.
Flat user/server ID
(Contains one or more flat certificates only)
Hierarchical user/server ID
(Contains one hierarchical certificate; may also include flat certificates)
Flat certifier ID
Resulting certificate is flat. Other certificates remain.
Resulting certificate is flat; hierarchical name and certificate is maintained along with any other flat certificates.
Hierarchical certifier ID
Name on the ID becomes hierarccical and resulting certificate is hierarchical. Flat certificates remain.
Resulting certificate is either a cross certificate or a recertified hierarchical certificate.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
You can use the Administration Process to convert a flat Notes user name to hierarchical by initiating a person rename action in the Domino Directory. The sequence of Administration Process requests that occur when you convert a Notes user name to hierarchical is the same that occurs when you change the name of a hierarchical Notes user.r
&Arial
Before you install Domino servers and Notes workstations on a VINES network, perform the following tasks at the VINES server.
41665011229213004
Create a PC-based VINES service for the Domino
This creates a StreetTalk name for each Domino server and makes it accessible throughout the VINES network to servers and workstations.
1. For Windows NT, choose File - Run
z:\mservice
2. Choose Add a PC-based service.
3. Enter a name using the VINES syntax item@group@organization. Create the PC-based service name to mimic the hierarchical name of the Domino server. For example, if the Domino server name is Excalibur/Servers/Acme, specify Excalibur@Servers@Acme as the PC-based VINES service name.
41665011229213005
Create a VINES user ID for Domino
This creates a VINES User ID you use to log into VINES from the Domino server.
For Windows NT, select File - Run z:\muser
This name must be on the Adminlist for that group@org in which the PC-based service is created. This means that the user account under which the Domino server runs must have enough privileges to be able to administer tce server.
This ID does not need to have a name in common with the Domino server. The administrator does not have to be in the same group@org as the PC-based service, but just needs to have enough privileges to administer the server.
Example:
Excalibur Login@Servers@Acme
41665011229213006
Create a default VINES group name for Domino
This is an optional step you can do as a VINES administrator to prepare for installing Domino servers and Notes workstations. If you do not create a default VINES group, Domino assigns the group name "Lotus Notes" by default. To set this parameter in the NOTES.INI file, use the Set Config command at the Domino server console.k
Set Config VinesServerGroup=
group@org
To create this group all of the following must be true:
The VINES network does not have an STDA service.
Domino servers do not have hierarchical names, or if they do, the names co not mimic the VINES PC-based server names.
The client or server accessing the Domino server is not in the same group@org as the PC-based service.
Example:
User VINES StreetTalk name = Jill User@Admin@Corp
Domino server's PC-based service name = Excalibur@Servers@Acme
For Windows NT, select File - Run
z:\mgroup
For Windows 95/98, select Start - Run
z:\mgroup
select Add a Group
31665011229213007
Creating a nickname for the PC-based service in group "Lotus Notes"
This is an optional step you can do as a VINES administrator to prepare for installing Domino servers and Notes workstations. This allows users to access the Domino server, even though STDA has not updated itself with the new PC-based service.
You may want to create this nickname if some of the following are true:
The VINES network does not have an STDA service.
Domino servers do not have hierarchical names, or if they do, the names do not mimic the VINES PC-based server names.
The workstation or server accessing the Domino server is not in the same group@org as the PC-based service.
Example:
User VINES StreetTalk name = Jill User@Admin@Corp
Domino server's PC-based service name = Excalibur@Servers@Acme
For Windows NT, select File - Run
z:\mnick
For Windows 95/98, select Stcrt - Run
z:\mnick
Select Add a Nickname. This allows a Domino server to be accessed outside of the group in which it exists by that name and be accessible when STDA is not available or has not been updated.
&Arial
The Domino server and the Notes workstation are certified to run with Banyan VINES on Windows NT.
You must have the latest software for Banyan Enterprise Client for Windows NT installed on the system. You can run the Domino server or Notes workstation for Windows NT on Banyan VINES without any additional VINES or Windows NT configuration. You must enable the Banyan VINES port.o
For information on network operasing system requirements and release numbers, see the Release Notes.
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino and VINES on Windows NT
Click here
&Arial
1. Install the Domino server or Notes workstation for Windows NT software.
2. Install Banyan Enterprise Client for Windows NT on the system.
3. Click on the login icon in the VINES group in the Windows NT program manager to ensure that you are logged into VINES.
4. Launch the Notes woskstation program on the Windows NT server or workstation.
5. Enable the network port for Banyan VINES if this has not already been done.
6. Restart the Windows NT server or workstation.
For information on network operating system requirements and release numbers, see the Release Notes.
See Also
Click here
Running Domino and VINES on Windows NT
Click here
&Arial
The Notes workstation is certified to run with Banyan VINES on Windows 95/98.
If you have the Banyan VINES Enterprise Client for Windows 95/98#installed on your system, you can run the Notes workstation for Windows 95/98 on Banyan VINES without any additional Windows configuration. You must enable the Banyan VINES port on the Notes workstation.
See Also
Click here
Setting up the Notes workstation and VINES on Windows 95/98
Click here
&Arial
1. Install Banyan Enterprise Client for Windows 95/98 on your system.
2. Choose Start - Programs - Banyan - Login to VINES to log into VINES if you are not alrecdy logged in.
3. Install the Notes workstation for Windows 95/98. During the setup procedure, select Banyan VINES as the network driver.
4. Complete setup.
5. Check the VinesNameServerHops setting. If the Notes workstation is more than two VINES hops away, increase the VinesNameServerHops setting in the NOTES.INI file.
For information on network operating system requirements and release numbers, see the Release Notes.
See Also
Click here
Running the Notes workstation and VINES on Windows 95/98
Click here
&Arial
Some of your system files contain settings specifically for Domino and Banyan VINES.
Example: Sample sort status for Banyan VINES
The following example shows the port status information for a VINES network port:
VINES PC-based Service Name: MARKETING@HQ@ACME
Current VINES User: MARKETING@HQ@ACME
Name Server Broadcasts:
Maximum Hops: 2
Maximum Cost: Low
Server Search Group: Lotus Notes{
&Arial
Domino is compatible with these NetBIOS network operating systems:
Novell NetBIOS
IBM and Microsoft NetBEUI
IBM and Microsoft TCP/IP
The following table lists the Domino server and Notes workstation platforms that support the different versions of NetBIOS.
Domino and Notes
Novell NetBIOS
IBM NetBEUI or TCP/IP
Microsoft NetBEUI or TCP/IPl
OS/2 Advanced Warp Serveri
Not Supported
Supported
Supported
Windows NT serves and workstation
Supported
Not supported
Supported
Windows 98 server and workstation
Supported
Not supported
Supported
Windows 95 server and workstation
Supported
Not supported
Supported
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
For additional information on operating systems, including required patches, see the Release Notes.t
&Arial
Syntax:
Passthru_Hangup_Delay=
seconds
Description:
Specifies how long in seconds a passthru server maintains a dial-up connection after its last dial-up session ends.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
120 seconds
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
!|;me
&Arial
This flowchart shows the sequence of Administration Process requests that occur when you use the Administration Process to convert a flat server name to a hierarchical name. More detailed information about each request follows+the flowchart.
130522214429204362
Initiate Rename kn Address Book
Triggered by:
Selecting a Server document in the Domino Directory and choosing "Actions - Upgrade Server to Hierarchical."
Posted on:
The server where you choose the upgrade action.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the Interval setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Re{ult:
The Administration Process adds the hierarchical certificate to the "Certified public key" field in the Server document and a change request to the "Change request" field. c
130522214429204363
Rename Server in Address Book
Triggered by:
The server updating its ID with the new hierarchical name and certificate when the server detects the name change in the "Change request " field of its Server document.
Posted ok:
The server whose name has changed.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out
: According to the Interval setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Updates all remaining occurrences of the server name in the Domino Directory except in Person documents.
130522214429204364
Rename in Person Documents
Triggered by
: Completion of the "Rename Server in Address Book" request.
Posted on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out on
: The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out
: According to the "Execute once a day requests at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
The Administration Process updates ockurrences of the name in Domino Directory Person documents.
130522214429204365
Rename in Access Control List
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename Server in Address Book" request.@
Posted on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory
Carried out on
: Each server in the domain.
Carried out
: According to the Interval setting for the Administration Prkcess in the Server document.
Result:
Each server in the domain updates the server name in ACLs of databases for which it is an administration server.
130522214429204366
Rename in Reader/Author Fields
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename in Person Documents " request on the administration server for the Domino Directory.
Posted on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out on:
Each server in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Delayed Request" settings for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Each server in the domain updates the name in Reader and Author fields of databases for which it is an administration server and that have the advanced ACL option "Modify all Reader and Author fields" selected.r
130522214429204367
Delete Obsolete Change Requests
Triggered by:
Triggered by: Expiration of the period in which a server can accept a new name, by default 21 days. You can use the NOTES.INI setting Name_Change_Expiration_Days to change the expiration period.s
Posted on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
Kccording to the "Execute once a day requests at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
The Administration Process deletes the contents of the Change Request field from the Server document.
&Arial
This section describes how to configure your network for+Domino.
Click here
Domino networking services
Click here
Click here
Domino and AppleTalk
Click here
Click here
Domino and Banyan VINES
Click here
Click here
Domino and NetBIOS
Click here
Click here
Domino and SPX
Click here
Click here
Domino and TCP/IP
Click here
&Arial
Domino is a workgroup application that allows people to share information using networks. Domino servers and Lotus Notes
workstations can communicate over LANs and wide area networks (WANs). This guide provides information about runking Domino on LANs.
Domino has networking services that support:
Sessions between Domino servers and Notes
workstations as well as sessions between Domino servers
A fall-back method for getting a list of Domino server names, which the Notes workstation usually gets from the mail server
Data and fail-over capabilities on Domino servers configured as clustered servers
See Also
Click here
Networks compatible with Domino
Click here
Click here
Network protocols compatible with Domino
Click here
&Arial
You set up a Domino system after you set up your network operating system. These networks are compatible with Domino:s
AppleTalk
Banyan VINES
NetWare
NetBIOS
TCP/IP
&Arial
A protocol is a set of rules that govern how computers share information over a network. Some network protocols are proprietary, or developed for use and modification by a single organization, and some are industry standards. Often, a protocol is initially proprietary, and when a substantial number of other computer hardware and software vendors create products that support that protocol, it becomes a standard.
These network protocols are compatible with Komino:f
AppleTalk
Banyan VINES
NetBIOS over NetBEUI
NetBIOS over TCP/IP
NetWare NetBIOS emulation over IPX
NetWare SPX or SPXII over IPX
TCP/IP
&Arial
If you are deciding which network operating system to buy or are adding a protocol to an existing Domino system or network, you should know that certain network protocols perform certain tasks better than other protocols:
TCP/IP offers wide-area routing, which simplifies LAN connections to WANs such as the Internet. TCP/IP uses static name resolving, which requires the resources to be listed manually in either a host file or via DNS service. You may also use Dynamic Host Control Protkcol (DHCP) Services to provide more dynamic name resolving services for Notes client use.
AppleTalk, Banyan VINES, and NetBIOS offer convenience and ease-of-use. NetBIOS offers dynamic name resolving using broadcast messages directly by the systems resources.o
NetBIOS over NetBEUI or IPX is ideal for small LANs of 20 to 200 users. However, NetBEUI does not support traffic across routers.u
NetWare SPX/SPXII offers high-speed access across LANs. IPX/NCP offers dynamic nkme resolving service using broadcast via the NetWare Services Bindery. In addition, Novell Network Directory Services (NDS) with NetWare or IntraNetWare 4.xx servers offer static name resolving. NDS offers dependability over WAN connections but requires the resource be listed manually in the NDS tree that client systems can access.
No one protocol offers an optimal combination of convenience, wide-area routing, and speed. Local access protocols may be different from the protocols used for cros{-backbone database replication and mail routing.
&Arial
For additional information about operating systems, including required patches and release numbers, see the Release Notes.
Domino server platform
LAN protocols
OS/2
Advance Warp Server
v, (Entry and SMP) n
NetBIOS over NetBEUI
TCP/IP
Windows NT Server or Enterprise Server
AppleTalk
Banyan VINES
NetBIOS over NetBEUI
NetBIOS over IPX
SPX or SPXII over IPX
TCP/IP
Windows 95
NetBIOS over NetBEUI
NetBIOS over IPX
IPX/SPX
TCP/IP
Windows 98
NetBIOS over NetBEUI
NetBIOS over IPX
IPX/SPX
TCP/IP
UNIX HP-UX
TCP/IP
UNIX Solaris
SPX or SPX II over IPX
TCP/IP
UNIX Solaris Intel Edition
SPX or SPX II over IPX
TCP/IP
UNIX AIX
SPX or SPX II over IPX
TCP/IP
IBM AS/400
TCP/IP
IBM S/390
TCP/IP
kead title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
Here's an overview of the process for setting up Domino servers and Notes workstations on a network. This guide provides the ikformation you need to perform Steps 4 and 5.e
1. Install NICs as needed on Domino servers.
2. Install protocol software if necessary, and make sure all network driver files have been installed and are in the correct directories.
3. Install any network software required for the protocol(s) if necessary. For more information, see the vendor' s documentation.m
4. Install Domino server or Notes workstation software.
5. Edit system conkiguration files as needed.a
6. Set up additional Domino server and Notes workstation ports as necessary.
7. Perform network access checks. Check server-to-server and workstation-to-server connections.
&Arial
Domino network access drivers are software files that control network communkcation for Domino servers and Notes workstations via the network protocol(s) you have selected for your system. When you install additional Domino network access driver files, they must be placed in the Domino server and Notes workstation program directories.
&Arial
When you create a new user or group account in Windows NT User Manager for Domains, you can simultaneously register the user or group in Notes. For users, this includes creating a Person document, Notes ID, password, and mail file for the user. For groups, this includes creating a Group document and optionally, registering individual group members as Notes users. You can also register existing Windows NT users or groups in Notes. In addition, you can delete Notes users or g{oups when you remove their user/group accounts. Further, you can synchronize existing Windows NT users with Notes users for future synchronization operations such as deleting users
To set up Windows NT User Manager, you must complete these procedures:
1.
Click here
Enable Notes synchronization features.
Click here
2.
Click here
Synchronize Windows NT and Notes users.
Click here
&Arial
Every protocol uses a "resolver" to perform name-to-address resolution, which converts an alphanumeric name to a physical address or protocol address. This table lists each protocol and the method it uses to resolve addresses:
Protocol
Method
Required E
AppleTalk
AARP/NBP
Domino server or AppleTalk seed router
IPX/SPX
Bindery SAP
NetWare server
IPX/SPX
Bindery _AP (emulation)
NetWare or IntraNetWare server
IPX/SPXr
NDS tree object/NDS
NetWare or IntraNetWare server
NetBIOS over NetBEUI or IPX or IP
NetBIOS name server
Domino server
TCP/IP
Local host files
Optional
TCP/IP
DNS resolver
DNS server
VINES
StreetTalk and STDA
VINES server
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Depending on the protocols you use, you may need a local resolver available to the Domino server or Notes work
tation to enable them to locate a remote Domino server that they need to access over a WAN or Internet connection.
For information about operating system version numbers, see the Release Notes.
52009897629221295
Notes name resolver
In addition to the protocol level of name resolving, the Domino servers may use Notes RPC Communications which offers a name service and provides a Domino server's protocol-specific name or address when requested. This oame services provides the link between the platform name and Domino server name.a
The Notes names services uses information in a Server document from the Net Address field for each configured port. When the user's home server is started, a table is built containing information about other server in the same Notes named network the server belongs to. The Notes workstation makes name service requests to the server for the information.
The name service information is valuable when:
The Domino server's name is different from the protocol specific name or address.
A numeric IP address is needed in order to reach the server.
The Net Address field contains the server's common name, this same server name is used for all protocols the server will be accessed by.
The Net Address field does not contain the same server name when there is a second instance of the same protocol using the same transport layer.
&Arial
There are two types of Domino network ports:
LAN ports are used for LAN communications and work woth LAN protocols and drivers
WAN ports are used with the X.PC and X.25 drivers for remote (mobile) connections that involve modems
Typically, the network protocol stacks installed on a platform are detected during setup and are automatically enabled on startup.
See Also
Click here
Using remote connections
Click here
&Arial
Remote connections -- that is, those using an analog modem or an Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) device -- between two servers or a workstation and a server are divided into two groups:
Domino WAN connections
Remote LAN connections
197315200029213001
Domino WAN ports connections
To manage WAN ports you choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports. Unlike LAN ports, there are no Notes Named Networks associated with WAN ports.
Domino WAN ports
Supported devices
X.PC
Analog modem or ISDN modem using AT command strings
X.25
Eicon X.25 interface card
ISDN
ISDN BRI/P_I device
SDLC interface card or direct LAN access using SNA Communications Manager software
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
197315200029213003
Remote LAN ports
Two common connection options with remote LAN dial-up are: LAN-based and host-based. In the LAN-based scenario, a Notes workstation or Domino server conoects to an access point on a remote LAN and thereby gains access to IP resources on that remote LAN. This allows a Domino server or Notes workstation to use a single connection to access multiple Domino servers and other servers. In the host-based scenario, a Notes workstation connects directly to a host through a single connection. In either case, you can establish the remote connection outside of Domino, or you can configure Domino to make the connection. In all these scenarios, Domino assumes that a LAN/based connection exists.
In the case of TCP/IP, if the TCP/IP stack offers the Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP) or Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), you can use IP dial-up. You can establish the SLIP or PPP remote connection outside of Domino or you can configure Notes to do this. For Windows, Notes is pre-configured to support RAS. For Macintosh, Notes is pre-configured to support Apple Remote Access (ARA) and MacPPP. Notes can be customized to use other dialers by using the Notes API.
You can also use any stack-specific Dial on Demand features that are triggered by connection requests to the stack. Both local LAN and remote LAN traffic would normally be accomplished using the same TCP port in Domino. For more information, see the appropriate TCP/IP vendor documentation.
Note
Although you can use X.PC, X.25, or remote LAN connection to connect a Domino server to another Domino server, these drivers cannot listen on the same communication
port on a Domino server. s
Domino on Windows 95 or Windows NT are configured to use MS Dialup Networking to connect to Domino servers. Macintosh is configured to use ARA or PPP over IP.
Remote LAN port
Method
Platforms
TCP/IP
SLIP via TCP/IP stack
Windows 95, 98, NT
TCP/IP
PPP via TCP/IP stack
Windows 95, 98, NT
TCP/IP
PPP via TCP/IP stack
AS/400 PPP services MAC OS
NetBIOS over NetBEUI
PPP via TCP/IP stack
Windows 95, 98, NT
NetBIOS over IP
_PP via TCP/IP stack
Windows 95, 98, NT
AppleTalk
MAC OS
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
Check the status of a Domino network port to see statistics about network sessions, services, and packets. This information is useful when you need to see if a port is working correctly and when you need to trace a particular connection to a Domino server or Notes workstation.m
197315200029213001
For a Domino server
Use this command at the server console:
Show Port
portname
197315200029213002
For a Notes workstation
Choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports - Show Status.
If you try to display the status of a port that is not enabled, the message "No port info available" appears.
See Also
Click here
Domino notwork ports
Click here
&Arial
Domino servers and Notes workstations for Macintosh use the AppleTalk port driver to communicate on an AppleTalk network. Domino servers running on Windows NT 4.0 (requires service pack 3) use the AppleTalk protocol supplied by Microsoft.
AppleTalk Notes workstations on one type of network can communicate with AppleTalk Domino servers on other types of networks through AppleTalk routers that connect the Domino server to Ethernet or token ring networks.e
These operations are s
ecific to Domino and AppleTalk:
An AppleTalk entity name has three components: the object, type, and zone used by the AppleTalk name binding protocol (NBP). For a Domino server, the object is the first 32 characters of the common name (CN=) portion of the server name; the type is "Lotus Notes 1"; the zone is the default zone of the AppleTalk network to which the server is connected.c
A Domino server can support only one AppleTalk port.
For more information on operatino systems, including required patches, see the Release Notes.
See Also
Click here
Running Domino and AppleTalk on Windows NT
Click here
Click here
Running a Notes workstation and AppleTalk on the Macintosh
Click here
&Arial
To run AppleTalk on your Domino server for NT, you must install the AppleTalk protocol supplied with Windows NT. Be sure to review the Notes/Domino Release Notes for the supported Windows NT service pack levels. You do not have to complete any further oonfiguration on the Domino server for Windows NT to use the AppleTalk protocol.
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino and AppleTalk on Windows NT
Click here
&Arial
1. Set up Services for Macintosh on Windows NT.
2. Launch the Notes workstation program.
3. Enable the network port for AppleTalk. This port may have been enabled when you installed Domino on the Windows NT server.
4. Open the AppleTalk options. The system tries to locate a Notes name server for AppleTalk.
5. To avoid downtime when
he home server is temporarily unavailable, specify a preferred backup home server. Choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports, highlight the AppleTalk port, and select AppleTalk port setup.
6. Edit the Server document in the Domino Directory (NAMES.NSF) to include the network name.
7. Start the Windows NT server.
See Also
Click here
Running Domino and AppleTalk on Windows NT
Click here
&Arial
Notes for Macintosh workstations can communicate using AppleTalk without any additional Notes software. Configure the Notes for Oacintosh workstations with the Mac OS AppleTalk services software, which provides all the software necessary to enable the AppleTalk port.
Notes for Macintosh workstations using AppleTalk can be located on LocalTalk, EtherTalk, TokenTalk or FDDITalk networks. Make sure that the Domino server is on the same network or that a router forwards AppleTalk to networks where the Domino server resides. AppleTalk is not recommended over WAN links.
Note
On a Macontosh, specify a preferred backup home server to avoid downtime when the home server is temporarily unavailable. Choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports, highlight the AppleTalk port, and select AppleTalk port setup.
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino and AppleTalk on the Macintosh
Click here
&Arial
Before you follow these steps to set up Domino and AppleTalk on your Macintosh, install and set up the Notes workstation program.E
1. Start the Notes workstation program on your Macintosh workstation.r
2. Enable the network port for AppleTalk.U
3. Restart the Notes workstation. This port may have already been enabled when you installed Domino on the Macintosh.D
See Also
Click here
Running a Notes workstation and AppleTalk on the Macintosh
Click here
&Arial
You need to record the changes you made to add the AppleTalk protocol to the Domino server. If you do not complete these steps, Domino does not function properly.o
1. Shut down the Domino server, and then launch the Notes workstation program.
2. Enable the networo port for AppleTalk on the Domino server, if this has not already been done.
3. Edit the Server document to add the port to this server.s
4. Exit the Notes workstation program, and then restart the Domino server so that the changes take effect.
&Arial
Domino servers and Notes workstations use VINES protocols and the Domino VINES port driver to communicate on a VINES network. The Domino server and VINES file server must be separate machines. Domino servers and Notes workstations in a VINES environment are VINES clients. The same VINES files exist on both tho Domino server and the Notes workstation.
41665011229213004
Using Banyan Mail
To send mail between Domino and Banyan Mail, you need the mail gateway product V-Bridge for Domino. V-Bridge is sold by Computer Mail Services, Inc.
PC-based services: On a VINES network, Domino servers are VINES PC-based services running on Windows 95/98 clients, and/or Windows NT VINES clients.
41665011229213007
Banyan VINES bulletin board
You can access the Banyan VINES bulletin board for patches and updates to Banyan VINES software. For more information on operating systems and required patches, see the Release Notes.
See Also
Click here
Runnong the Notes workstation and VINES on Windows 95/98
Click here
Click here
Running Domino and VINES on Windows NT
Click here
&Arial
VINES PC-based service name
-- The name of the PC-based service, in the StreetTalk syntax
Item@Group@Organization
Item
must be the same as the server name. This field appears when you issue a Show Port command at the server console.
Current VINES user
-- StreetTalk name of the ID logged in for this Domino server.
Name server broadcasts
-- Requests from a Dooino server or Notes workstation that are sent when the server fails to find the user's home server.
Maximum hops
-- The number of hops a broadcast can make before failing from 0 to 15; the default is 2. Do not use values higher than 2 since they result in slower performance and may generate duplicate broadcast messages.
Maximum cost
-- The maximum cost this broadcast is allowed to make:
-- Server forwards the broaocast on all VINES media, regardless of cost..
-- Server forwards the broadcast on all VINES media, except those such as X.25 that impose a packet charge.
-- Server forwards the broadcast on all VINES media, except X.25, block async, and HDLC that have a line speed less than or equal to 4800 bps.
Free d
-- Server forwards the broadcast on all VINES media with a cost less than 30.
Server sea
ch group
-- StreetTalk group used by Notes workstations to locate Domino servers. The default is Lotus Notes. To change the name, edit the NOTES.INI file to include the setting VinesServerGroup.
&Arial
In the VINES environment, names play an important role in workstation-to-server communication. This section provides information on naming systems and conventions.
41665011229213004n
StreetTalk
StreetTalk is a VINES naming system that lets you assign a unique name to any object on a VINES network. Domino uses StreetTalk to resolve the names of Domino servers on a VINES network.
41665011229213005
StreetTalk Directory Assistance (STDA)
StreetTalk Directory Assistance (STDA) is a VINES directory service used to look up StreetTalk names on the network. When you have Domino running on VINES, Domino uses STDA to locate Domino servers. STDA locates servors quickly, but changes are not recorded until the system is updated. Administrators generally update STDA every 24 hours. Names entered prior to an update are not recognized as valid VINES addresses unless a nickname is defined.
41665011229213006
Assigning StreetTalk names and nicknames to Domino servers
You must assign a unique StreetTalk name to each Domino server on the VINES network. You assign these names when you install the Domino server. StreetTalk names/have this syntax:
Item@Group@Organization
To assign a StreetTalk name to a Domino server, create a PC-based service for each server.
1. For Windows NT, select File - Run z:\mservice.
2. Select Add a PC-based service.
3. Make sure you add the PC-Based service (Domino server) to the correct organization. The name of the Domino server corresponds to the item portion of the StreetTalk name. For example, the PC-based service for a Domino
erver named Grapevine is:
Grapevine@PS@Notes
When a Domino server or Notes workstation attempts to connect to a Domino server on a VINES network, it determines the VINES network address of the Domino server. StreetTalk stores the network address associated with the name. Domino uses only the first part of the StreetTalk name. To establish communication, Domino and StreetTalk work together to determine the full StreetTalk name and the network address of the Notes workstation on a VONES network to establish communication.
You can create a nickname in StreetTalk to refer to another StreetTalk name. You can create the nickname as a typing shortcut --for example, SF@PS@Notes to refer to Software@PS@Notes. Domino can use nicknames to refer to the PC-based services in another group. For example, the nickname Grapevine@Support@Notes is the same as the PC-based service Grapevine@PS@Notes.
Using this nickname, the user from the group Support can see the Domino
erver Grapevine (in group PS) because the nickname points the way.
Nicknames are useful when the STDA is down or before the SDTA is updated to include new names. If you enter a new name for a Domino server and want the name to take effect immediately, create a nickname.
See Also
Click here
Locating Domino servers on VINES
Click here
&Arial
During installation, Domino creates the NOTES.INI file, which contains settings that define how Domino runs. The following settings affect Domino servers and Notes workstations on a VINES network:
VinesBroadcastHops
--d
Defines the hop count ano hop costs for Domino servers for user-visible broadcasts. Default is 2.
VinesNameServerHops
-- Defines the hop count and hop cost for Domino servers and Notes workstations for Domino name server requests. Default is 1.
VinesServerGroup
-- Defines the search group for Domino servers and Notes workstations.
VinesServiceName
-- Defines the service name for Domino servers only.
None of these settings appea
in the NOTES.INI file. Instead, the VINES port driver assumes default values for each setting. To change these defaults, use the Set Config command at the server console.
Note
Change the default settings only if you need to enhance network performance or are troubleshooting the system. For more information on network performance and troubleshooting, consult your Banyan VINES administrator.
41665011229213004
VinesBroadcastHops
Domino servers and Notes workstations send name server requests to the network when the Notes workstation or server is first set up and when the workstation's home server is unavailable.N
For example, when you try to open a database, the home server provides a list of available Notes Domino. If the home server is unavailable, Domino broadcasts a message to all Domino servers. The first server to respond provides the list of servers for the session.
A broadcast message might oeed to "hop" between one or more VINES subnetworks before it reaches its destination. Hops are associated with different degrees of cost from "high cost" (high connection price, low communication speed) to "free" (LANs only). The more hops between servers and workstations, the greater the cost and potential loss of efficiency.
41665011229213005
VinesNameServerHops
To set the name server and broadcast parameters in the NOTES.INI file, use the Set Config command ot the Domino server console.
Set Config VinesNameServerHops=
hop count
hop cost
hop count
-- A value from 0 to 15 that specifies the number of hops the broadcast can make before failing. Values over 2 are not recommended because they may result in slower performance or duplicate broadcast messages received.
hop cost --
The maximum cost hop this broadcast can make. This can be any one of the following values:/A (all costs), M (medium cost), L (low cost), or F (free).e
Example: SET CONFIG VinesNameServerHops=4,L
Default: VinesNameServerHops=2,L
41665011229213006
VinesServerGroup
Search groups are useful when the Street Talk Directory Assistance is not available. If a Notes workstation user requires a default search group, instead of adding nicknames to all user groups, the VINES administrator should use the VINES mgroup utility to creato the default search group "Lotus Notes".
To set this parameter in the NOTES.INI file, use the Set Config command at the server console:
Set Config VinesServerGroup=
group@org
You do not have to specify the @org. If you do not, Domino inserts the current user's organization.
Example: Set Config VinesServerGroup=Administration@Acme
Default: VinesServerGroup=Lotus Domino
This parameter is available to both Domino servers and Notes worostations.
41665011229213007
VinesServiceName
If the logged-in administrator and the Domino PC-based service are not in the same StreetTalk group, you can set the VinesServiceName parameter to the full StreetTalk name of the Domino PC-based service. If they are not in the same group, then it is easier to determine the group the server is in when the name of the server is the full StreetTalk name of the PC-based service. For example,
servername/group/o
g maps easily to servername@group@org.
To set the VinesServiceName parameter in the NOTES.INI file, use the Set Config command at the server console. For example,
Set Config VinesServiceName=servername@group@organization
>B09P
Details: Renaming flat user IDs without Notes mailUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Renaming\user IDsContentsDetailsH_DETAILS:_RENAMING_FLAT_USER_IDS_WITHOUT_NOTES_MAILTopic1Details: Renaming flat user IDs without Notes mailDitailsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
?Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Deleting a flat certificate from an IDUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Flat IDs\deleting certificatesFlat certificates\deleting from IDsContentsStepsH_DELETING_A_FLAT_CERTIFICATE_FROM_AN_IDTopic1Deleting a flat certificate from an IDStepsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
S+ me
Communication with organizations that use flat namesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Authentication\flat organizations andCertificates\exchangingCertificates\trustedCertification\flatCertificationYnon-hierarchical organizations andFlat IDs\certificates andFlat names\certification andFlat names\communication andServers\flat certificates andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_COMMUNICATING_WITH_ORGANIZATIONS_THAT_USE_THE_FLAT_NAMING_MODELTopic1Communication with organizations that use flat namesAboutH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Results of recertificationUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Certifier IDs\recertifyingHierarchical IDs\recertifyingRecertification\resultsContentsAboutH_ABOUT_THE_RESULTS_OF_RECERTIFICATIONTopic1Reyults of recertificationAboutH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
How the Administration Process converts flat Notes user names to hierarchicalUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Administration Process\converting flat names withContentsAboutH_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_CONVERTS_FLAT_NOTES_USER_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICALTopic1How the Administration Process converts flat Notes user names to hierarchicalAboutH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Ilat Organizations
Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
!|;me
How the Administration Process converts a flat server name to hierarchicalUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Administration Process\renaming flat server namesFlat names\renamingContentsAboutH_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_CONVERTS_A_FLAT_SERVER_NAME_TO_HIERARCHICALTopic1How the Administration Process converts a flat server name to hierarchicalAboutH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES
H_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_CONVERTS_A_FLAT_SERVER_NAME_TO_HIERARCHICAL_MIDTOPIC_130522214429204362=Initiate Rename in Address BookH_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_CONVERTS_A_FLAT_SERVER_NAMEYTO_HIERARCHICAL_MIDTOPIC_130522214429204363=Rename Server in Address BookH_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_CONVERTS_A_FLAT_SERVER_NAME_TO_HIERARCHICAL_MIDTOPIC_130522214429204364=Rename in Person DocumentsH_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_CONVERTS_A_FLAT_SERVER_NAME_TO_HIERARCHICAL_MIDTOPIC_130522214429204365=Rename in Access Control ListH_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_CONVERTS_A_FLAT_SERVER_NAME_TO_HIERARCHICAL_MIDTOPIC_130522214429204366=Rename in Reader/Author FieldsH_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_CONVEYTS_A_FLAT_SERVER_NAME_TO_HIERARCHICAL_MIDTOPIC_130522214429204367=Delete Obsolete Change Requests 01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
Protocols. See Network protocolsContentsOverviewH_DOMINO_NETWORKING_SERVICES_OVERTopic1Domino networking servicesOverviewH_NETWORK_CONFIGURATION_OVER02 Configuring Domino Networks01 Networking and Lotus Domino
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Networks compatible with DominoNetwork Configuration
Network operating systems\compatible with DominoOperating systems\compatible with DominoContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NETWORK_OPERATING_SYSTEMS_COMPATIBLE_WITH_NOTESTopic1Networks compatible with DominoAboutH_DOMINO_NETWORKING_SERVICES_OVER02 Configuring Domino Networks01 Networking and Lotus Domino
?Print
5? LZme
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Network protocols compatible with DominoNetwork Configuration
Network protocols\compatible with DominoNetwork protocols\definedContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NETWORK_PROTOCOLS_COMPATIBLE_WITH_NOTESTopic1Network protocols compatible with DolinoAboutH_DOMINO_NETWORKING_SERVICES_OVER02 Configuring Domino Networks01 Networking and Lotus Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Selecting a network protocolNetwork Config|ration
AppleTalk\characteristics ofBanyan VINES\characteristics ofNetBIOS over NetBEUI or IPX\characteristics ofNetBIOS\characteristics ofNetWare SPX\characteristics ofNetwork protocols\choosingTCP/IP\characteristics ofContentsAboutH_SELECTING_A_NETWORK_PROTOCOLTopic1Selecting a network protocolAboutH_DOMINO_NETWORKING_SERVICES_OVER02 Configuring Domino Networks01 Networking and Lotus Domino
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
LAN protocols supported by Domino serversNetwork Configuration
LAN\protocols supportedServers\supported LAN protocolsContentsAboutH_ABOUT_LAN_PROTOCOLS_SUPPORTED_BY_NOTES_SERVERSTopic1LAN protocols supported by Domino serversLboutH_DOMINO_NETWORKING_SERVICES_OVER02 Configuring Domino Networks01 Networking and Lotus Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Domino servers and Notes workstatiols on networksNetwork Configuration
Servers\setting up on networksWorkstations\setting up on networksContentsAboutH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_NOTES_SERVERS_AND_WORKSTATIONS_ON_NETWORKSTopic1Setting up Domino servers and Notes workstations on networksAboutH_DOMINO_NETWORKING_SERVICES_OVER02 Configuring Domino Networks01 Networking and Lotus Domino
H_ABOUT_NETWORK_NAME_ADDRESS_RESOLUTION_6025_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_52009897629221295=Notes name resolver02 Configuring Domino Networks01 Networking and Lotus Domino
H_ABOUT_REMOTE_CONNECTIONS_AND_TCP/IP_MIDTOPIC_197315200029213001=Domino WAN ports connectionsH_ABOUT_REMOTE_CONNECTIONS_AND_TCP/IP_MIDTOPIC_197315200029213003=Remote LAN ports02 Configuring Domino Networks01 Networking and Lotus Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Checking the status of a Domino network portNetwork Configuration
Domino server\checking port statusNetwork ports\statusNotes workstations\checking port statusPort status\checkingShow PortShow StatusContentsStepsH_CHECKING_THE_STATUS_OF_A_NOTES_NETWORK_\ORTTopic1Checking the status of a Domino network portStepsH_DOMINO_NETWORKING_SERVICES_OVER
H_CHECKING_THE_STATUS_OF_A_NOTES_NETWORK_PORT_MIDTOPIC_197315200029213001=For a Domino serverH_CHECKING_THE_STATUS_OF_A_NOTES_NETWORK_PORT_MIDTOPIC_197315200029213002=For a Notes workstation02 Configuring Domino Networks01 Networking and Lotus Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
AppleTalk\entity namesAppleTalk\running Domino onContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_APPLETALKTopic1Domino and AppleTalkAboutH_NETWORK_CONFIGURATION_OVER02 Configuring Domino Networks02 Running Domino on AppleTalk
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Running Domino and AppleTalk on Windows NTNetwork Configuration
AppleTalk\running ob Windows NTContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_AND_APPLETALK_ON_WINDOWS_NTTopic1Running Domino and AppleTalk on Windows NTAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_APPLETALK02 Configuring Domino Networks02 Running Domino on AppleTalk
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Domino and AppleTalk on Windows NTNetwork Configuration
AppleTalk\Windows NT andMacintosh\servicesContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_APPLETALK_ON_WINDOWS_NTTopic1Setting up Domino and AppleTalk on Windows NTStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_APPLETALK02 Configuring Domino Networks02 Running Domino on AppleTalk
?Print
DIALOG 8450 8450DIALOG 8451 1
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Botus
Running a Notes workstation and AppleTalk on the MacintoshNetwork Configuration
AppleTalk Remote AccessAppleTalk\running a Notes workstation on the MacintoshMacintosh\running a Notes workrtation onContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_AND_APPLETALK_ON_THE_MACINTOSH_AND_POWER_PCTopic1Running a Notes workstation and AppleTalk on the MacintoshAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_APPLETALK02 Configuring Domino Networks02 Running Domino on AppleTalk
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Domino and AppleTalk on the MacintoshNetwork Configuration
AppleTalk\setting up Domino on the MacintoshMacintosh\setting up Domino and AppleTalkContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_APPLETALK_ON_THE_MACINTOSH_AND_POWER_PCTopic1Setting up Domino and AppleTalk on the MacintoshStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_APPLETALK02 Configuring Domino Networks02 Running Domino on AppleTalk
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Recording changes on the Domino serverNetwork Configuration
AppleTalk\modifying Server documents forContentsStepsH_RECORDING_CHANGES_ON_THE_NOTBS_SERVERTopic1Recording changes on the Domino serverStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_APPLETALK02 Configuring Domino Networks02 Running Domino on AppleTalk
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Domino and Banyan VINESNetwork Configuration
Banyan MailBanyan VINES\Domino andBanyan VINES\patchesBanyan VINES\servicesSTDAV-BridgeContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_BANYAN_VINESTopic1Domino and Banyan VINESAboutH_NETWORK_CONFIGURATION_OVER
H_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_BANYAN_VINES_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213004=Using Banyan MailH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_BANYAN_VINES_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213005=Types of Banyan VINES servicesH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_BANYAN_VINES_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213007=Banyan RINES bulletin board02 Configuring Domino Networks03 Running Domino on Banyan VINES
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
VINES-specific port parameters Network Configuration
Banyan VINES\port parametersMaximum cost\Banyan VINES port parameterMaximum hops\Banyan VINES port parameterName server broadcastsPort parameters\Banyan VINESServer search groupContentsAboutH_ABOUT_VINES-SPECIFIC_PORT_PARAMETERSTopic1VINES-specific port parameters AboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_BANYAN_VINES02 Configuring Domino Networks03 Running Domino on Banyan VINES
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Names on a VINES networkNetwork Configuration
Banyan VINES\names on networkNicknames\Banyan VINES andSTDAStreetTalkContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NAMES_ON_A_VINES_NETWORKTopic1Names on a VINES networkAboutH_ABOUT_NORES_AND_BANYAN_VINES
H_ABOUT_NAMES_ON_A_VINES_NETWORK_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213004=StreetTalkH_ABOUT_NAMES_ON_A_VINES_NETWORK_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213005=StreetTalk Directory Assistance (STDA)H_ABOUT_NAMES_ON_A_VINES_NETWORK_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213006=Assigning StreetTalk names and nicknames to Domino servers02 Configuring Domino Networks03 Running Domino on Banyan VINES
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
H_ABOUT_VINES_ADMINISTRATOR_TASKS_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213004=Create a PC-based VINES service for the DominoH_ABOUT_VINES_ADMINISTRATOR_TASKS_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213005=Create a VINES user ID for Domino H_ABOUT_VINES_ADMINISTRATOR_TASKS_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213006=Create a default VINES group name for DominoH_ABOUT_VINES_ADMINISTRATOR_TASKS_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213007=Creating a nickname for the PC-based service in group "Lotus Notes"02 Configuring Domino Networks03 Ruening Domino on Banyan VINES
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
sCN=Damien
Running Domino and VINES on Windows NTNetwork Configuration
Banyan VINES\Windows NT andContentsEboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_AND_VINES_ON_WINDOWS_NTTopic1Running Domino and VINES on Windows NTAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_BANYAN_VINES02 Configuring Domino Networks03 Running Domino on Banyan VINES
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Domino and VINES on Windows NTNetwork Configuration
.AContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_VINES_ON_WINDOWS_NTTopic1Setting up Domino and VINES on Windows NTStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_BANYAN_VINES02 Configuring Domino Networks03 Running Domino on Banyan VINES
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
dWhite
Running the Notes workstation and VINES on Windows 95/98Network Configuration
.AContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_AND_VINES_ON_WINDOWS_95Topic1Running the Notes workstation and VINES on Windows 95/98AboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_BANYAN_VINES02 Configuring Domino Networks03 Running Domino on Banyan VINES
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
isCN=Lotu
Setting up the Notes workstation and VINES on Windows 95/98Network Configuration
Banyan VINES\Windows 95 andContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_VINES_ON_WIEDOWS_95Topic1Setting up the Notes workstation and VINES on Windows 95/98StepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_BANYAN_VINES02 Configuring Domino Networks03 Running Domino on Banyan VINES
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
z/O=Iri
Example files for Banyan VINESNetwork Configuration
H_EXAMPLES:_SAMPLE_PORT_STATUS_FOR_BANYAN_VINES=Example: Sample port status for Banyan VINES02 Configuring Domino Networks03 Running Domino on Banyan VINES
Puint
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Domino and NetBIOSNetwork Configuration
IBM LAN Server. See LAN ServerLAN ServerMicrosoft NetBEUINetBIOS\Domino andNetBIOS\platforms suppertedNovell NetBIOSContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOSTopic1Domino and NetBIOSAboutH_NETWORK_CONFIGURATION_OVER02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino on NetBIOS
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Port configuration options for NetBIOSNetwork Configuration
LANA number\for portNetBIOS\port configuration optionsPort configuration\NetBIOSUnit/LANA number\for portsContentsAboutH_ABOUT_PORT_CONFIGURATION_OPTIONS_FOR_NETBIOSTopic1Port configuration options for NetBIOSAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOS02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino on NetBIOS
?Print
DIALOG 27905 22
CN5David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
NetBIOS-specific port parametersNetwork Configuration
NetBIOS\port parametersNetwork ports\statusPort status\NetBIOS parametersContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NETBIOS-SPECIFIC_PORT_PARAMETERSTopic1NetBIOS-specific port parametersAboutH_ABKUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOS02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino on NetBIOS
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Running Domino on LAN Server on OS/2 Advanced [arp ServerNetwork Configuration
LAN Server\system requirementsMPTSNetBIOS\OS/2 Warp driversOS/2 Warp\LAN Server requirementsOS/2 Warp\NetBIOS drivers andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_ON_IBM_LAN_SERVERTopic1Running Domino on LAN Server on OS/2 Advanced Warp ServerAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOS
H_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_ON_IBM_LAN_SERVER_MIDTOPIC_116768281629213005=System requirements for Domino and LAN Server for OS/2 Advanced Warp Server02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino+on NetBIOS
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Domino on LAN Server for OS/2 Advanced Warp ServerNetwork Configuration
LAN Server\setting up Dokino for OS/2 Advanced Warp ServerNetBIOS\OS/2 Warp driversOS/2 Warp\NetBIOS drivers andContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_ON_IBM_LAN_SERVERTopic1Setting up Domino on LAN Server for OS/2 Advanced Warp ServerStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOS02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino on NetBIOS
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Configuring network resources for Domino and LAN Server for OS/2 Advanced Warp ServerNetwork Configuration
LAN Server\configuring network resources forOS/2 Warp\LAN Server requirementsContentsAboutH_ABOUT_CONFIGURING_NETWORK_RESOURCES_FOR_NOTES_AND_IBM_LAN_SERVERTopic1Configuring network resources for Domino and LAN Server for OS/2 Advancek Warp ServerAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOS02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino on NetBIOS
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
1+Ioe
Example files for NetBIOS (LAN Ser{er)Network Configuration
LAN Server\example filesLAN Server\port statusNetBIOS\LAN Server example filesPort status\example for Domino and IBM LAN ServerContentsAboutH_ABOUT_EXAMPLE_FILES_FOR_NETBIOS_(IBM_LAN_SERVER)Topic1Example files for NetBIOS (LAN Server)AboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOS
H_EXAMPLES:_SAMPLE_PORT_STATUS_FOR_IBM_LAN_SERVER=<-">Sample port status for IBM LAN ServerH_EXAMPLES:_SAMPLE_NOTES.INI_FILE_FOR_IBM_LAN_SERVER=Sample NOTES.INI file for LAN Server using IBMEENB drivkr02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino on NetBIOS
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
O=Lotus No
Running Domino on Novell NetBIOSNetwork Configuration
NetBIOS[NovellNovell NetBIOS\running Domino onContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_ON_NOVELL_NETBIOSTopic1Running Domino on Novell NetBIOSAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOS02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino on NetBIOS
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Running Domino and Novell NetBIOS on Windows NTNetwork Configuration
NetBIOS\NovellNovell NetBIOS\Windows NT andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_AND_NOVELL_NETBIOS_ON_WINDOWS_NTTopic1Running Domino and Novell NetBIOS on Windows NTAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOS02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino on NetBIOS
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
om/news/hom
Running Domino and Novell NetBIOS on Windows 95/98Network Configuration
NetBIOS\NovellNovell NetBIOS\Windows 95/98 andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_AND_NOVELL_NETBIOS_ON_WINDOWS_95Topic1Running Domino and Novell NetBIOS kn Windows 95/98AboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOS02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino on NetBIOS
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Domino and Novell NktBIOS on Windows 95/98Network Configuration
NetBIOS\NovellNovell NetBIOS\Windows 95/98 andContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_NOVELL_NETBIOS_ON_WINDOWS_95Topic1Setting up Domino and Novell NetBIOS on Windows 95/98StepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOS02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino on NetBIOS
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
Prerequisites for the Domino network using NetBIOSNetwork Configuration
IPX/SPX\requirementsNetBIOS\requirementsContentsOverviewH_PREREQUISITES_FOR_THE_DOMINO_NETWORK_USING_NETBIOS_OVERTopic1Prerequisites for the Domino njtwork using NetBIOSOverviewH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOS02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix A Network Prerequisites
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
MRU|($Desig
Domino and*SPXNetwork Configuration
SPX\Domino andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPXTopic1Domino and SPXAboutH_NETWORK_CONFIGURATION_OVER
H_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX_MIDTOPIC_4398092829213008=<+!>Setting up Domino servers and Notes workstations for SPX02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
SPXII supportNetwork Configuration
SPXII protocol\describedContentsAboutH_ABOUT_SPXII_SUPPORTTopic1SPXII supportAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Majar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
nt$Assis
NetWare servicesNetwork Configuration
Bindery Services\describedNDS\Domino server andNetWare services\describedContentsAboutH_ABOUT_TYPES_OF_NETWARE_SERVICESTopic1NetWjre servicesAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX
H_ABOUT_TYPES_OF_NETWARE_SERVICES_MIDTOPIC_4448092829213008=<+!>Which NetWare name resolver service do I need?02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Data security with Domino and SPXNetwork Configuration
SPX\securitySecurity\SPX andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_DATA_SECURITY_WITH_NOTES_AND_SPXTopic1Data security with Domino and SPXAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
opment/O=Lo
IPX/SPX addresses and the SPX port driverNetwork Configuration
Addresses\IPX/SPXIPX/SPX\addressesSockets\and IPX/SPX addressesContentsAboutH_ABOUT_IPX/SPX_ADDRESSES_AND_THE_NOTES_SPX_PORT_DRIVERTopic1IPX/SPX addresses and the SPX port driverAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX02 Configuring Dominj Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Notes
Names on an IPX/SPX networkNetwork Configuration
Bindery Services Network\namesNDS\jamesNames\Bindery Services NetworkContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NAMES_ON_A_NETWARE_IPX/SPX_NETWORKTopic1Names on an IPX/SPX networkAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX
H_ABOUT_NAMES_ON_A_NETWARE_IPX/SPX_NETWORK_MIDTOPIC_4448092829213008=Names on a Bindery Service NetworkH_ABOUT_NAMES_ON_A_NETWARE_IPX/SPX_NETWORK_MIDTOPIC_4448092829213009=Names on an NDS network02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Port configuration options for SPX Network Configuration
SPX\port configurationContentsAboutH_ABOUT_PORT_CONFIGURATION_OPTIONS_FOR_AN_SPX_WORKSTATIONTopic1Port configuration options for SPX AboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX02 Confjguring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
DIALOG 11010 11010
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
wdK!pe
SPX-specific port parametersNetwork Configuration
Port paramezers\SPXSPX\port parametersContentsAboutH_ABOUT_SPX_SPECIFIC_PORT_PARAMETERSTopic1SPX-specific port parametersAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
NDS\Domino server andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NOVELL_NETWARE_DIRECTORY_SERVICESTopic1Novell NetWare Directory ServicesAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX
H_ABOUT_NOVELL_NETWARE_DIRECTORY_SERVICES_MIDTOPIC_4448092829213008= Minimum user and server login rights neededH_ABOUT_NOVELL_NETWARE_DIRECTORY_SERVICES_MIDTOPIC_4448092829213009=Preferred Trees and Default Contexts02 Configuring Domjno Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
To specify additional options for a NetBIOS port, choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports - LAN0 Options, where LAN0 is the port name.
There are two options in this dialog box:e
Automatic setup
Manual setup
Note
You can use either method to set up Notes workstations; however, to set up Domino servers, you must choose Manual setup.
If you select Automatic setup, Notes configures the LAN
ports to use all available NetBIOS networks, starting with LAN0.
If you select
Manual setup, you must enter-a NetBIOS Unit/LANA number.
The NetBIOS Unit/LANA number is a logical number that represents a NetBIOS protocol stack on a single card or multiple cards.I
For example, if two NetBIOS protocol stacks such as NetBEUI and Novell NetBIOS bind to the same NIC, NetBEUI uses Unit/LANA number 0 and Novell NetBIOS uses Unit/LANA number 1. (This is also true if the two protocol stacks bind to different cards). Depending on how often you configure or reconfigure your system, the Unit/LANA mumbers could be different than what is in this example.
If you are using IBM LAN Requester on an OS/2 Advanced Warp Server, the Notes NetBIOS port driver uses the Unit/LANA number to select a network from the [networks] section of IBMLAN.INI. Unit/LANA 0 is the first port listed; Unit/LANA 1 is the second port listed; and so on.
If you are using Novell NetBIOS and LAN Requester is not installed, use the Notes NetBIOS port driver, configured for Unit/LANA 0.
If you a}e using the IBMEENB port driver on an OS/2 Advanced Warp Server and LAN Requester is not installed, the Unit/LANA number should match a logical adapter number configured in Multi-Protocol Transport Services (MPTS) or LAN Adapter and Protocol Support (LAPS).
To find the Unit/LANA number for a particular NetBIOS protocol on a Windows NT server:
1. Select the Network Control Panel - NetBIOS Interface.
2. Click the Properties button. The NT information appears in the Metwork Route list.
Windows NT typically has multiple NetBIOS networks configured in the operating system. The most common NetBIOS networks on Windows NT systems listed below:
Name
Protmcol
NwlnkNb
Novell NetBIOS
NetBEUI
NetBT
NetBIOS over TCP/IP (RFC 1001/1002)
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Some protocols can be associated with multiple Unit numbers, one for each network card or dial-up network interface. For example, the Network Route entry Nbf->Elnk3 is NetBEUI on a 3Com Etherlink III card and Nbf->NdisWan5 is NetBEUI on a Microsoft Remote Access Services (RAS) connection.smm
&Arial
To monitor or troubleshoot network activity on a Domino server or Notes workstation, use the Domino server console to check the status of the network port. The server console lists the following port status:
Aborted transmissions
-- Network transmissions that are canceled. May indicate problems with the network card. Run diagnostics and replace the card if necessary.
Adapter name table
-- Names by which the server and applicmtions running on it are known by non-Notes and non-Domino computers and applications on the network. A name can also be part of a NetBIOS group, which is identified in the table as "grp." (Name 5 is the server name. The first 15 characters are blank-space filled; the 16th character is a + sign.) You need to know this format if the server communicates through a bridge that uses manual name registration.
Adapter resources
-- Current status of the network adapter card. You can use-these statistics for fine-tuning network performance. For example, if the number of sessions in use is equal to the maximum number of sessions, you may want to increase the maximum number of sessions in the network configuration file.
Adapter session table
-- Status information about current network sessions. You can see information such as the local session number (LSN), the state of the session (Listen pending, Session created), the local and remote names, and the number of-Receive and Send commands pending. On lines that contain "Listen pending" in the State column, an asterisk (*) in the Remote Name column means "receive connections from anyone."
Alignment errors
-- Network alignment errors reported on this port. Alignment errors occur when the number of bits received is not a multiple of 16; therefore; the boundary between characters is ambiguous. This is considered a frame error and may indicate that a new NIC is needed. Bad data packets or lomse cables may also cause alignment errors.
Available command blocks
-- Number of available NetBIOS control blocks. If this drops to a low number, the Domino server may not be able to support additional users.
Collisions
-- Network collision errors reported on this port. Caused when packets on the network collide and are damaged; could be caused by a loose cable.
CRC errors
-- Number of cyclic redundancy check (CRC) e}rors reported on this port. CRC is used for message transmission and reception verification. CRC errors mean that the CRC included in the frame does not match the calculated CRC for the frame. CRC errors cause retransmissions and network degradation and can be caused by bad data packets or loose cables on a network port.r
Maximum sessions
-- Number of sessions configured for this server. Compare this number to the number of sessions in use.
Network unit s}atus
-- The revision number of the network software.
Number of packets droppedr
-- The network drops packets, when there is no buffer ready to receive them. May be caused by insufficient link-support buffers or by transmissions from a fast network.
Packets received
-- Number of network packets received on this port.
Packets transmitted
-- Number of network packets sent from this port.
Repo}ting period
-- Collection time for statistics.
Retransmissions
-- Network transmissions that were retried. Packets are retransmitted when they don't reach their destination the first time. Causes include CRC errors, alignment errors, collisions, and aborted transmissions.
Session data packet size
-- Varies depending on the network. In NetWare, it is the maximum amount of data it can send in a single packet.a
Sessions im use-
-- Active sessions. If the number of sessions in use is equal to the maximum number of sessions, you may want to increase the maximum number of sessions in the network configuration file.
Total command blocks
-- Total number of configured command blocks. Should be set to 1-1/2 times the number of sessions.
Traffic and error statistics
-- Shows the communications activity on the port. Used for troubleshooting network hardware or track metwork performance.
&Arial
On an OS/2 Advanced Warp Server there are two possible-NetBIOS interfaces over the NetBEUI transport. Depending on the configuration of your system, one or both may be available.
In most cases, you will use the NETBIOS.DLL network driver. This driver uses the Submit interface and makes calls to NETAPI.DLL. To use this driver, you must install IBM LAN Requester used with IBM LAN Server software and have it running before you start the Domino server.i
If the LAN Requester services are not installed, you must use IBMEENB.DLL. This driver-uses the NB30 interface and makes calls to ACSNETB.DLL. Without LAN Server to provide the Submit interface API for NetBIOS, the only available route NetBIOS calls over NetBEUI is the NB30 interface.e
The IBMEENB.DLL driver can offer more efficient resource allocation when used on a Domino server but requires a good understanding on how NetBIOS resources are used. Use the IBMEENB.DLL network driver only if you are an advanced network administrator. A thorough understanding of NetBIOS resource amlocation by MPTS, LAN Requester, and LAN Server (if installed), and all NetBIOS applications is required to correctly configure NetBIOS resources used on the system.
For more information, see the OS/2 LAN Server documentation on MPTS services.n
Note
The term LAN Server refers to both the Server and LAN Requester functions of the LAN Server network operating system.
Note
The two NetBIOS ports on OS/2 Domino se}ver systems listed within File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports: LAN0 and IBM_LAN0 by default are set up with NETBIOS.DLL and IBMEENB.DLL, respectively. During the setup process the LAN0 port driver is used by default; if you do not have the LAN Requester services installed on your system the setup process may not finish.
116768281629213005
System requirements for Domino and LAN Server for OS/2 Advanced Warp Server
The Domino and LAN Server environment mu}t meet the hardware and software requirements that are described in the Release Notes. You must have OS/2 Advanced Warp Server and one of the following network software packages from IBM:
LAN Server 3.0 (shipped with NTS/2)s
LAN Server 4.0 (shipped with MPTS)
NTS/2 LAPS
MPTS (shipped with LAN Server 4.0, OS/2 Advanced Warp Server)C
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino on LAN Server for OS/2 Advanced ]arp Serverr
Click here
&Arial
Domino supports two NetBIOS network drivers: NETBIOS.DLL and IBMEENB.DLL. Dmmino uses the NETBIOS.DLL when LAN Server is running on OS/2 Advanced Warp Server.P
LAN Server and MPTS configuration files contain default values for maximum sessions, commands, and names for NetBIOS. The default NetBIOS resources should be appropriate for Notes workstations, but may not be appropriate for some Domino servers.
For network operating system requirements, see the Release Notes.L
See Also
Click here
Running Domimo on LAN Server on OS/2 Advanced Warp Server
Click here
Click here
Configuring network resources for Domino and LAN Server for OS/2 Advanced Warp Server
Click here
&Arial
If a Domino server uses IBMEENB.DLL, the default network resources are insufficient and result in the Domino system message,
Insufficient network or adapter resources
. If a Domino server uses NETBIOS.DLL, the default network resources may be insufficient dmpending on the requirements.
To modify the default network resources, you must modify the NOTES.INI file on servers using IBMEENB.DLL, or the PROTOCOL.INI and the IBMLAN.INI files on servers using NETBIOS.DLL.
If you use IBMEENB.DLL and want to change the maximum number of commands, sessions, and names, enter the following information in the NOTES.INI file or Server document in the Domino Directory:
NETBIOS_
lana_resource_program
NETBIO]_
resource_program
NETBIOS_
resource
Where
lana
is the Unit/LANA number;
resource
is the name of the command, session, or name; and
program
is the process whose resource you want to modify.
Domino searches for a resource name in the NOTES.INI file and uses the most specific instance of the resource name, using the order of precedence listed above. For example, if the NOTES.INI file contains the settings, METBIOS_0_SESSIONS_ROUTER and NETBIOS_SESSIONS_ROUTER, Domino uses NETBIOS_0_SESSIONS_ROUTER since NETBIOS_o
lana_resource_program
takes precedence over NETBIOS_
resource_program.
If you enter a setting for a resource with the same precedence more than once in the NOTES.INI file and there is no other setting with higher precedence, Domino uses only the first instance of the setting in the NOTES.INI file.
A Notes session can take up to two commands when simultaneou}ly sending and receiving. If you do not allocate enough commands, Domino may drop sessions or display an error. Domino attempts to allocate the maximum number of resources when the Domino process starts and reduces this number until the request is successful.
Keep in mind that non-Domino applications also use NetBIOS resources. Be sure to configure Domino and non-Domino application resources appropriately so that each has sufficient resources. It may be necessary to modify the number of sessioms allocated to the ISERVER.EXE process to ensure adequate resources are available for other processes, since ISERVER.EXE is the main process started on the Domino server.u
If you use either NETBIOS.DLL or IBMEENB.DLL and need to change the maximum sessions, commands, and names values for global resources (PROTOCOL.INI), see the IBM online book
MPTS Configuration Guide
As a general rule, allocate twice as many commands as sessions, plus five additional commands. Fmr example, if you need 100 sessions, then allocate 205 commands.r
If you use NETBIOS.DLL and need to change the maximum sessions, commands, and names values for LAN Server Resources (IBMLAN.INI), see the
IBM OS/2 LAN Server Network Administrator Reference, Volume 2: Performance Tuning, Version 3.0
(S96F-8429) or the online book
Performance and Tuning
shipped with LAN Server.
As a general rule, allocate twice as many commands as sessions, plus five mdditional commands. For example, if you need 100 sessions, then allocate 205 commands.r
Note
The recommended values apply only to Domino. These values are in addition to those required by or already allocated for LAN Server (IBMLAN.INI) or other NetBIOS applications in the system. The sum of all these NetBIOS resources must not be greater than the global settings in the PROTOCOL.INI file.
Click here
Example
Mlick here
1+Ioe
1+Ioe
&Arial
Some of the system files contain settings specifically for Domino and LAN Server.
Sample port status for IBM LAN Server
Thm port status information is for an IBM LAN Server port on a Domino server running OS/2 Advanced Warp Server:
NetBIOS Port Driver
Port NETBEUI is using Unit/Lana 0 while the Notes server is running
Unit/Lana number: 0
NetApi net name: NET1 - NetBEUI
NetApi lana number: 0
Unit ID: 26 A2 68 5F 80 00 Version: 253.64
Reporting period (minutes): 31
Maximum packet size: 4352
Errors Transmits Receives
CRC 0 Successful 6109 Successful 38642
Alignment 0 Aborted 0 Dropped 597
Collision 0 Retransmitted 1
Control Blocks (NCBs) Sessions
Free 242 Current 3
Configured 254 Configured 254
Maximum - 254 Maximum 254
Name Num Status
EAGLE4 . 2 04h registered
EAGLE4 . 3 04h registered
NCAA . 4 84h registered group
IBMPCC$$POSTERR. 5 84h registered group
SI_EAGLE4....... 6 04h registered/
SYSQELAB4 + 9 04h registered
IRISNAMESERVER 3 10 84h registered groups
xSYSQEK...&.h_.. 11 04h registeremi
xAdmin\...&.h_.. 12 04h registered
LSN State Local Name Remote Name Receives Sendso
6 01h listening EAGLE4 . * 0 0
69 01h listening SYSQELAB4 + * 0 0
70 01h listening IRISNAMESERVER 3 * 0 0
Unit/Lana number: 1r
NetApi net name: NET2 - Novell NetBIOS
NetApi lmna number: 0e
Unit ID: 00 80 5F 68 A2 26 Version: 254.0
Reporting period (minutes): 33
Maximum packet size: 1422
Errors Transmits Receives
CRC 0 Successful 12 Successful 1959
Alignment 0 Aborted 5 Dropped 0
Collision 0 Retransmitted 15
Control Blocks (NCBs) ]essions
Free 112 Current 2
Configured 115 Configured 102
Maximum 115 Maximum 102
Name Num Status
SYSQELAB4 + 2 44h registered
IRISNAMESERVER 3 3 C4h registered group
xAdmin\....._h.& 4 44h registered
LSN State Local Name Remote Name Receives Sends
146 01h listening SYSQELAB4 + * 0 0
169 01h listening IRISNAMESERVER 3 * 0 0
Sample NOTES.INI file for LAN Server using IBMEENB driver
The following examples are from a NOTES.INI file when using the IBMEENB.DLL network driver. These settings are optional and not required.r
The following setting allocates 100 sessions for the Domino server (ISERVER.EXE) on Unit/LMNA 0:
NETBIOS_0_SESSIONS_ISERVER=100
The following setting allocates 100 sessions for the Domino server (ISERVER.EXE) on each Unit/LANA. For example, if the Domino server uses LANA 0 and LANA 1, Domino allocates 100 sessions for LANA 0 and 100 sessions for LANA 1:
NETBIOS_SESSIONS_ISERVER=100
The following settings allocates 100 sessions and 205 commands for the Domino server (ISERVER.EXE) on each Unit/LANA, allocates 15 sessions and 32 commands for the mpplication named 3RDPARTY.EXE on LANA 1, and allocates 2 sessions and 5 commands for all other processes:
NETBIOS_SESSIONS_ISERVER=100
NETBIOS_COMMANDS_ISERVER=205
NETBIOS_1_SESSIONS_3RDPARTY=15
NETBIOS_1_COMMANDS_3RDPARTY=32
NETBIOS_SESSIONS=2
NETBIOS_COMMANDS=5
&Arial
Novell NetBIOS (NetBIOS emulation over IPX) allows Domino to connect servers and workstations with NetBIOS, while using Novell's IPX protocol.
The following Domino servers and Notes workstations support Novell NetBIOS:
Windows NT server and workstation (Using NWLink NetBIOS services-supplied by Microsoft)
Windows 95 server and Windows 95/98 workstation (Using NWLink supplied by Microsoft or Novell's IntraNetWare Client32 NetBIOS services)
See Also
Click here
Running Domino and Novell NetBIOS on Windows NT
Click here
Click here
Running Domino and Novell NetBIOS on Windows 95/98
Click here
&Arial
Windows NT provides built-in network support that makes it compatible with Novell NetBIOS over IPX emulation. You can run the Domino server or Notes workstation for Windows NT without performing any additional MetWare or Windows NT configuration. All you need to do is enable the NetBIOS port on the Domino server or Notes workstation.
When using the NWLink NetBIOS protocol stack, make sure the following services are installed and running:
NWLink IPX/SPX-Compatible Transport
NWLink NetBIOSnk
&Arial
Novell NetBIOS and Microsoft NetBIOS over IPX is certified on the Notes workstation for Windows 95/98. You can run the Notes workstation for Windows 95/98 with Microsoft NetBIOS over IPX without any additional Windows configuration. Using Novell NetBIOS over IPX- you must install the Novell InterNetWare Client32 first. Then during Notes workstation setup, you just need to enable the NetBIOS port.
When you use the NWlLink NetBOS protocol stack, make sure the following services are installed and running:t
Microsoft Client for NetWare Networks
Microsoft IPX/SPX-compatible protocol (NetBIOS support must be enabled in the Properties_NetBIOS tab)
Microsoft NetBIOS support for IPX/SPX compatible protocol
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino and Novell NetBIOS on Windows 95/98
Click here
&Arial
1. Install the Notes Workstation for Windows 95/98 software.
2. Complete the Notes Workstation setup procedure and select NetBIOS as the network driver.
See Also
Click here
Running Domino and Novell NetBIOS on Windows 95/98
Click here
&Arial
The following information describes the NetBIOS limitations for Domino servers and Notes clients.o
Notes RPCs are encapsulated within the NetBIOS data stream running over the lower transport of either NetBEUI, NetBIOS emulation over IPX or TCP/IP per the IETF RFC=001 & 1002 standards.
Note
Domino servers must use the same lower layer protocol as the Notes client or other Domino server systems to communication.
Depending on the lower transport and the operating system platform, you may encounter limitations on how many Notes sessions can be supported as a Domino server. The following table lists the operating system limitations per NIC using the NetBEUI protocol.
Operating system
Protocol
Notes session per NIC
Operating system and network operating system used with
IBM OS/2 Warp 4 and Warp server 4n
NetBIOS over IBM NetBEUI
IBM Warp 4, Warp Server 4
and LAN Server networks
Microsoft NT
NetBIOS over MS NetBEUI
Microsoft Windows NT
(3.51 and 4.0) peer networks
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Domino and NmtBIOS
Click here
&Arial
Yo} can do the following tasks from either Domino or Windows NT:
Click here
Register a new user
Click here
-- When you add users to Windows NT, you can register them in Domino as Domino users or Internet-only users. For Domino users, Domino creates a Person document, a mail file, and a user ID. For Internet-only users, Domino creates a Person document that contains an Internet password.
Click here
Delete a user or a g}oup
Click here
Click here
Rename a user in Domino and automatically rename the corresponding user account in Windows NT
Click here
Click here
Create a new group account in Windows NT and automatically create the same group in Domino
Click here
Click here
Add existing Windows NT groups to Domino and register each group member in Dommno
The following table lists the certified Domino servers and Notes workstatkons running on SPX:
OS platform
Notes workstation
Domino serveru
Windows 95
Supported
Not supported
Windows 98
Supported
Not supported
Windows NT
Supported
Supported
IBM AIX
Not supported
Supported
Solaris
Not supported
Supportedn
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
For additional information about operating system, protocoks, or required patches, see the Release Notes.p
To use Domino with SPX, a NetWare file server must exist on the network. The NetWare server and a Domino system may be separated by a switch, bridge, or router and do not have to be on the same LAN. If Domino is separated, make sure that local routers are not filtering Novell Bindery or NDS broadcasts. The NetWare file server is required because workstations and servers connect to it to locate other Domino servers on the network.n
4398092829213008
Setting up Domino servers and Notes workstations for SPX
To set up Domino servers and Notes workstations for SPX, follow the procedures for your platform. Special implementation details appear under the following section headings:
Click here
Setting up Domino and SPX on Windows NT
Click here
Click here
Setting up Domino and SPX on Windows 95 and 98
Klick here
Click here
Setting up Domino SPX on UNIX
Click here
After you complete the procedures in this chapter, you can set up an SPX port on your Domino server or Notes workstation.
See Also
Click here
SPXII support
Click here
Click here
NetWare services
Click here
Click here
Data security with Domino and SPX
Click here
Click here
IPX/SPX addresses and the SPX port driver
Click here
&Arial
The SPXII protocol supports windowing, large packets, and orderly release, which can provide increased performance over S[X.
Note
Not all platforms support SPXII.
SPXII provides the following features:
Backward compatibility with SPX
Protocol negotiation. If both endpoints support SPXII, then SPXII becomes the negotiated endpoint. If one endpoint only supports SPXII and the other supports SPX, then SPX becomes the negotiated protocol between endpointsn
These Domino servers and Notes workstations can run on SPXII:s
Windkws NT server using Microsoft's NWLink IPX/SPX stack
UNIX (AIX using ipx.case filesets; and Solaris (Intel and Sparc) using TotalNET Advanced Server), IBM AIX Connections, and Solaris PC Protocol Servicese
For information on network operating system requirements and release numbers, see the Release Notes.
See Also
Click here
Domino and SPX
Click here
&Arial
Domino supports these NetWare IPX name resolver services:
Bindery Services
-- Network services use the Service Advertising Protocol (SAP) to update the NetWare servers network database, called the Bindery. Domino servers and Notes workstations use Bindery Services to look up a remote service and retrieve its network address. Domino servers use Bindery Services to advertise their services on the network. NetWare 3.x only offers Bindery Services. A Domino server uses a Bindery Service Object ID of 0x039B.
NetWare Directory Services (NDS)
-- Based kn X.500 directory service. Services can use NDS almost the same way they use Bindery. Domino servers and Notes workstations use NDS to look up a remote service and retrieve its network address. Domino servers use NDS to advertise their services on the network. The SPX port driver is the only port driver that supports NDS. To integrate Domino servers and Notes workstations with NDS, use the SPX port driver.
The SPX port driver can use Bindery Services and NDS. Domino servers use NDS to advertisk their services on the network. Notes workstations and Domino servers use NDS to look for these services on the network and to determine the Network Address for a given service.
The following Domino servers and Notes workstations can use NDS:
Windows 95 Novell NetWare workstation and server
Windows NT Novell NetWare workstation and server
Windows 98 Novell NetWare workstation
4448092829213008
Which NetWare name resklver service do I need?
Which type of NetWare name resolver service you choose depends on your network needs.
Bindery Services offers:
Departmental administration
Dynamic database
Decreased network throughput because of SAP/Broadcasts
Easy installation and administration
NetWare support
Third-party NetWare-compatible vendor support
NDS offers:
Enterprise-wide administration
Directory Services based on the X.500 model
Persistent database
More reliable access to the service
Increased network throughput since no SAP/Broadcasts are required
Increased complexity and administrationn
NetWare and IntraNetware support
Many other capabilities not available with Bindery Services
See Also
Click here
Domino and SPX
Click here
&Arial
To ensure data security, do not crkate mapped directory links to NetWare file servers for Domino servers. Links can cause:
Database corruption because of network failure -- If the network fails while the Domino server is writing to a database on the file server, the database can become corrupted.
Database corruption because of simultaneous access -- If the Domino server is using a database on the file server and another user accesses the database directly through a drive mapped to the file server (instead of througk the Domino server), the database becomes corrupted.
Security problems -- When "Encrypt network data" is enabled, all Domino server and Notes workstation traffic is encrypted. However, the file I/O between the Domino server and the file server is not encrypted.
Wrongful access -- Some administrators have direct access to a Domino file, bypassing the access control list (ACL).
See Also
Click here
Domino and SPX
Clkck here
&Arial
The IPX/SPX protocol provides two types of sockets, Dynamic Sockets and Static or Well Known Sockets. Nkvell assigns Well Known Sockets to products for exclusive use by those products. Applications using Well Known Sockets always listen on the same socket number. Novell manages the registration of these sockets, allocating the Static range from 0x2000 - 0x3FFF. Dynamic Sockets are allocated from a range of 0x4000 - 0x7FFF. Applications using Dynamic Sockets use whichever socket number the IPX/SPX stack allocates during the registration of the service to the local NetWare server by the application. Using Dynakic Sockets usually ensures that the same socket number is not used twice.
Connections initiated by a Domino server or Notes workstation use a Dynamic Socket. For the Listener Socket, the SPX port driver uses a modified algorithm for allocating sockets, called Persistent Dynamic Sockets and always tries to use the same socket number. If the socket number is unavailable, the Domino server lets the IPX/SPX stack assign one. When a Domino server using SPX starts for the first time, it uses a Dynamkc Socket. This socket number is then saved.
Subsequent invocations of the Domino server use the socket number saved above. Therefore it is called a Persistent Dynamic Socket.
If for some reason this saved socket number is in use (when another application using Dynamic Sockets has allocated this socket), the Domino SPX server allocates a new socket number and saves it for future invocations. s
This approach gives many of the advantages of a Static or Well Known Socke{. Sites that want to control the socket number used by the Domino server may set a NOTES.INI variable NETWARESOCKET. Connections initiated by a workstation or server still use a Dynamic Socket. This variable is useful for sites that want to filter SPX packets by socket number. The NETWARESOCKET variable applies only to the Listener Socket. If the variable NETWARESOCKET is set in the NOTES.INI file and Domino cannot access the specified socket, then the Domino server will fail to start. This can happen when+the socket number the server normally uses is in use by another application.e
For example:
NETWARESOCKET=9135 which is the decimal value of 23AF
To help minimize the chance of this, assign the NOTES.INI variable NETWARESOCKET to the address of a Static Socket. Then, if no other application running on your system is using that Static or Well Known Socket number, the Domino server uses it.
See Also
Click here
NOTE[.INI settings for SPX and NDS
Click here
Click here
Domino and SPX
Click here
&Arial
Naking is different for a Bindery Services Network than for an NDS network.
4448092829213008
Names on a Bindery Service Network
Domino server names in NetWare Bindery Services use the Domino server common name. For example, the Domino server Notes name Chicago/Midwest/Acme becomes CHICAGO in the NetWare Bindery. NetWare Bindery names can contain up to 48 characters. Domino server Bindery names must be unique. The syntax for Domino server names, based on a combinatiok of Domino name rules and NetWare Bindery rules, is:s
Names larger than 48 characters in length are truncated. e
Only alphanumeric characters are allowed.
Multi-byte characters are converted to hex.t
Leading and trailing spaces are removed.
Spaces are condensed and converted to underscore.
Names are uppercase, because the Bindery is case sensitive.
The following characters are not allowed:s
/ slashh
\ backslash-
: colonF
; semicolonS
+ plus
, commas
* asterisk
? question mark
Note
When using Bindery emulation under NetWare 4.1 or later, there must be one Bindery context name for all of the systems to share that use Bindery Services for name resolving. Separate the Notes named networks based on the Bindery context name that the Notes workstations and Domini server share fo{ Bindery name resolving.i
4448092829213009
Names on an NDS networks
Domino server names in NDS use the NDS distinguished name format. The distinguished name format is the path from the root of the NDS Tree to the object, which in this case is the Domino server NDS object. If a Domino server name is Chicago/Midwest/Acme in the Sales group, then its NDS name will be CN=Chicago.OU=Marketing.O=Acme. Domino server NDS names must be unique. Using the NDS distinguished nkme guarantees this uniqueness if the servers common name was the same name.
For example, the Domino server CN=Chicago.OU=Sales.O=Acme is not the same Domino server as CN=Chicago.OU=Marketing.O=Acme. As long as you are using NDS services exclusively, there is no conflict. We recommend that the Domino common names be unique as well. As specified by NDS, common names (CN=) can contain up to 64 characters. Distinguished names can contain up to 256 characters and can include name types, periods, knd equal signs. The syntax rules for Domino server names are the same as the NDS syntax rules and include the following:
Alphanumeric characters
Case-insensitive names
No spaces
The following characters are not allowed:
/ slash
\ backslash
: colon
; semicolon
+ plus
, comma
* asterisk
? question mark
&Arial
To access port configuration options for SPX, choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports - SPX Options.
There are two options:
Automatic configuration
Advanced configuration
Note
If you are running SPX on a Domino server, you must select Advanced configuration.
If you select Automatic configuration, the Notes workstation automatically configures the SPX port with NetWare Services (Bindery, NDS). If only one service is available, the Notes workstation selects that service. If it detects that both Bindery and NDS ser{ices are available, it configures the SPX port for both.
If you select Advanced configuration, you must select one of these options:
NetWare Directory and Bindery Services --
If both NDS and Bindery Services are installed on a the system, the Notes workstation tries both methods, switching when one fails. The Notes workstation tries an NDS lookup first. If the NDS lookup fails, it then tries a Bindery lookup. Bindery Services uses the Service Advertising Protocol+(SAP).n
NetWare Directory Services --
This option is the NetWare 4.x method of resolving addresses and advertising services. Since NDS is a static database, services update the database only once. The information stored in the database is persistent. The implication is that a Domino server's NDS Object can always be found in the NDS Tree whether or not the server is currently running. This method takes up less network bandwidth than the Bindery Services method requires, which {ses SAP to do broadcasts.
Bindery Services --
This option is the NetWare 3.x method of resolving addresses and advertising services. Servers broadcast an advertisement every 60 seconds on the network. The Bindery is a dynamic database that maintains information about various services. Workstations query the Bindery to look up information such as a server's network address. The Bindery is a dynamic database; therefore, if a service does not update the Bindery within a few minute{, the Bindery detects the entries for that service.
See Also
Click here
Domino and SPX
Click here
wdK!pe
&Arial
To display SPX sta{us parameters, choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports - Show Status from a Notes workstation, or the Show Port command at the Domino server console. The type of information returned depends on the operating system of the server or workstation, and on the implementation of the IPX/SPX protocol stack. Not all of this information is available for all platforms.
SPX Port Driver
-- The type of port driver returning the status information.
SPX DO[ Shell version
-- The version of the NetWare DOS Requester in use.
NetWare Requester version
-- The version of the NetWare Requester in use.
Primary or default NetWare file server
-- The name of the NetWare file server attached to this system.
Notes Session ID
-- The Notes internal identifier for a given session.
Local Address Net: Node : Socket
-- The IPX/SPX address of the lockl system.
Remote Address Net:
Node: Socket
-- The IPX/SPX address of the remote system.
SPX Connection ID
-- The name that identifies a given SPX connection to the underlying IPX/SPX stack. r
SPXII Session
-- The presence of an SPXII session. The absence of this parameter does not imply that an SPXII session is not in use. It means that the underlying IPX/SPX stack does not supply this information {o Domino.
SPX Maximum Packet Size
-- The maximum size of an IPX/SPX packet that can be sent across the network.
Session State
-- The internal state of an SPX session. The possible states are:
Starting
-- The SPX session is initializing. A network connection has not been opened.
Established
-- The SPX session has been created. The session is connected to a remote system.
Listening
-- The SPX session on a Domino server used to accept an incoming connection. There is always one SPX session in the listening state waiting for remote connections.
Waiting
-- The SPX session is waiting for a network event to occur.
Terminating
-- The SPX session is shutting down and the network connection is going away.
Unknown
-- The SPX session is in an indeterminate state.
NetWare files in use
-- The NetWare files in use by the SPX port driver and their location.
File
-- The file name and directory path in use.
Version
-- The version of the NetWare files in use, as set by the NetWare vendor.
SPX version
-- The version of the IPX/SPX stack in use.
Maximum SPX sessions
-- The maximum number of SPX sessions available on this system for all applicatioks.
Available SPX sessions
-- The number of SPX sessions currently available on this system for all applications.
NetWare Bindery Services: Initialized
-- Indicates that NetWare Bindery Services have been initialized. The absence of this parameter indicates that the service was not started, possibly because the service was not enabled in the SPX port dialog box or the service was not configured correctly on the local system.
KetWare NDS Services: Initialized
-- Indicates that NDS has been initialized. Initialization means that the service is supported by this operating system, the necessary files to support NDS were found, and the service was started, for use by the SPX port driver. The absence of this parameter indicates that the service was not started, possibly because, the service was not enabled in the SPX port dialog box, the service was not configured correctly on the local system, or the service is unavailable kn the network.
NDS Fully Distinguished Name
-- For Domino servers that support only NDS, this field gives the NDS Name of this Domino server as specified in the Network Address field in the Domino Directory. In addition, it provides the location in the NDS Tree of the Domino server NDS object, also known as its Name Context. For example, NDS Name: CN=Chicago=Sales.O=Acme.t
NDS Default Context
-- Indicates the current NDS Default context. The NDS Dkfault context is set static, for example, in NET.CFG, and can be modified from the File Manager.
&Arial
Domino servers and Notes workstations support Novell's NDS wkth SPX.
4448092829213008
Minimum user and server login rights needed
When using NDS, a user login object needs a minimum of browse rights to the NDS tree. This enables you to browse the NDS Tree and read the Domino server attributes.
You must be a tRUSTEE of the Directory Tree Context Object to include these server login rights; BROWSE, CREATE, COMPARE, READ, and WRITE.
4448092829213009
Preferred Trees and Default Contkxts
Specifying Preferred Tree and Default Context parameters guarantees that you always use the same tree. If your site has more than one NDS tree, specifying a Default Context gives Domino a starting point within the tree to begin the search for a Domino server. This should decrease lookup times within your NDS tree.
The method you use to specify the Preferred Tree and Default Context depends on your operating system. If you are using Windows 95/98 or Windows NT, you specify the{e parameters through the Control Panel.
See Also
Click here
Using Domino server NDS objects
Click here
Click here
Using Novell 32-Bit NetWare Administrator tools for NDS
Click here
Click here
Setting up NDS for a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Setting up NDS for a Notes workstation
Click kere
&Arial
After you add the Domino server object class to the NDS Schema, you can use the Domino server NDS object using one of the NDS tools -- the Novell NetWare Administrator with the NetWare Administrator Snapin (NDSNOTES.DLL) or the Lotus NDS manager (NDSMgr) tool. The created object is not initialized until the object is initialized when you start the Domino server corresponding to this Domino server NDS object for the first time. The first NDS operation the SPX port driver does is to verify that thk NDS object is present. Once found, the Domino server initializes the NDS object. In this context, initialization means to update the object with the Domino server IPX/SPX address, and set the state of the object to "initialized." Once set to "initialized," other Notes workstations and Domino servers can access the Domino server by using its NDS object.
Domino NDS objects are persistent. When a Domino server is down, its corresponding NDS object is still present in the NDS tree. Notes workstktions and servers that use NDS and attempt to connect to an unavailable Domino server receive an error message informing them that the server is not responding.h
To view Domino server NDS object names in NDS, you can use various browsers. To examine the attributes of Domino server NDS objects, you must use the NetWare Administrator with Domino NetWare Administrator Snapin (NDSNOTES.DLL) or NDSMgr. Viewing the Domino server NDS object name in NDS does not require any special privileges. Using NktWare Administrator with the Domino NetWare Administrator Snapin (NDSNOTES.DLL), the Domino server is identifiable as having the Domino icon. Other viewers may display the Domino server with a "smiley face," which some NDS viewers use to display unknown objects.h
The Domino server NDS object is persistent and is updated only when one of the attributes in the table below change. For example, an attribute changes when you install a new NIC, causing the IPX address to change. In some cases you ma{ need to delete the Domino servers NDS object and recreate it so it can be re-initialized when the Domino server is restarted.i
4448092829213008
Domino server NDS object attributes
The following table contains attributes for a Domino server NDS object. These attributes are visible only if you use the NetWare Administrator with the Domino NetWare Administrator Snapin (NDSNOTES.DLL) or NDSMgr with sufficient privileges. Other users may be able to browse the NDS trek and see the Domino server NDS object name, but they cannot see its attributes. a
Attribute
Description
Server Name
NDS Name of Domino Server--for example, CN=Chicago.OU=Sales.O=Acme
Network Address
IPX Address Network Addr: Node Addr: Socket Num -- for example, IPX: 030000508: 00805F685BDA: 506f
Status
UNINITIALIZED or INITIALIZED. If UNINITIALIZED, the Domino server ha{ not updated this object. If INITIALIZED, the Domino server has updated the object with its Network Address. However, If you are using Windows 95/98 and Windows NT, the status attribute shows uNINITIALIZED.
Version
Notes build number -- for example, 143
Description
Optional comments about the object -- for example, the administrator name
and location
head title;Ckead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Novell NetWare Directory Services
Click here
Click here
Setting up NDS for a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Setting up NDS for a Notes workstation
Click here
Click here
Using Novell 32-Bit NetWkre Administrator tools for NDSe
Click here
act the database designer and explain which hotspot you clicked.
See Also
Click here
Putting views to work$
Click here
&Arial
Note
Before modifying the registry, make sure you can load the NetWare Administrator on the client. For more information, see the appropriate Novell documentation.
1. Copy the ND^NOTES.DLL to the directory where the NetWare Administrator resides on the Novell server.
2. Edit the registry on the client and add the NDSNOTES.DLL value as follows:
94938134429222912
For Windows NT client
1. From the client Start menu, choose Run and enter REGEDT32.EXE (WINNT\SYSTEM32\REGEDT32.EXE).
3. From the Edit drop-down menu, select Edit, then Value.
4. Type NDSNOTES.DLL in New Value #1 Box (renaming this to NDSNOTES.DLL).
5. Click the new entry NDSNOTES.DLL and type NDSNOTES.DLL in Value Data Box.
6. Verify NDSNOTES.DLL. "NDSNOTES.DLL" is added the list of Objects.
7. Relnad NWADMN95.EXE.
8. Check that the NDSNOTES.DLL has been properly installed, by the NetWare Administrator GUI, select OBJECT, then CREATE. The Domino Server Class Object should be included in the list. Any pre-existing Domino servers are displayed with the Notes icon.s
9. Use these menu selections in NetWare Administrator to manage a Domino server NDS object:
Task
Procedure
Create a Domino server NDS object class .
Choose Tools - Define Notes Class.
Delete Domino server NDS object class.
Choose Tools - Define Notes Class.
Add a Domino server NDS object class.
Choose Object - Crea~e.
Select Domino server object.
Enter the Domino server name.
Delete a Domino server NDS object.
Select the Domino server.
Choose Object - Delete.
Read a Domino server NDS object attributes.
Select the Domino server.
View a Domino server NDS object attributes.
Double-click the Domino server NDS object.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
To set up NDS for a Notes workstation, you must configure NDS within the NetWare Client and then configure the Notes workstation to use NDS.
4448092829213008
Configuring NDS for a Notes workstationt
1. Install a NetWare-compatible client that supports NDS and IPX/SPX.N
2. Make sure the.user login object has at least BROWSE access to the NDS tree.
3. Specify a Preferred Tree and Default Context. If you are using Windows NT or Windows 95, specify these settings in the control panel.
4. Login to the NDS tree.
4448092829213009
Configuring a Notes workstation to use NDS
1. Start the Notes workstation.
2. If you have not enabled the SPX port, choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports. Select ^PX and select Port Enabled. The Notes workstation automatically enables NDS and Bindery Services.
3. If you use only NDS on all Domino servers in your organization, select SPX Options - Advanced configuration - NDS to disable Bindery Services lookup within Domino.
4. If you use only NDS and want to specify a backup Domino Directory to use if the user's home server is unavailable, edit the Location documents in each persons Personal Address Book and specify a Domino NDS seconda~y name server and NDS name server address
5. If you use only NDS, create a Connection document for the home server in each user's Personal Address Book. In the Destination server field, enter the NDS distinguished name for the home server.
See Also
Click here
Domino and SPX
Click here
Click here
Novell NetWare Directory Services
Click here
Click he~e
Port configuration options for SPX
Click here
Click here
Setting up Domino and SPX on Windows NT
Click here
Click here
Setting up Domino and SPX on Windows 95 and 98
Click here
&Arial
To set up NDS for a Domino server, you must first configure NDS for the NetWare client or server and then configure the Domino server to use NDS. To add a class to an NDS schema or add a Domino server NDS object, you need NDS Administrator privileges.N
45>8092829213008
Configuring NDS for a Domino server
1. Install a NetWare-compatible client that supports NDS and IPX/SPX.
2. Make sure the user login object has TRUSTEE rights to the directory tree, which includes BROWSE, CREATE, COMPARE, READ, and WRITE.
3. Login to the NDS tree.
4. Do one of the following to create a Domino server NDS object class, and add the class to the NDS schema:
If you are using NetWare Administrator. choose Tools - Define Notes Class.
If you are using NDSMgr, enter this command:
ndsmgr -c Notes
Complete this step for each NDS tree.
5. Do one of the following to add the Domino server NDS objects to the NDS tree:
If you are using NetWare Administrator, choose Object - Create - Notes Server Object and enter the Domino server name. You can add information to the description if necessary.
If you are using NDSMgr, enter tnis command:
ndsmgr -a cn=
server_name
preferred_tree
Where
server_name
is the NDS name of the Domino server and
preferred_tree
is the preferred tree name.
Repeat this step to add all Domino server NDS objects to the NDS tree.
6. If you want the Domino server to login to NDS automatically when the server starts, create user login objects for the Domino server and make sure each user.login object has TRUSTEE rights and BROWSE, CREATE, COMPARE, READ, and WRITE access to the NDS directory tree context object.
For information on NetWare Administrator and NDSMgr, see "Using Novell 32-Bit NetWare Administrator tools for NDS " earlier in this chapter.
4508092829213009
Configuring a Domino server to use NDS
1. Specify a Preferred Tree and Default Context. If you are using OS/2 Advanced Warp Server, specify these settings in the NET.CFG.file. If you are using Windows NT or Windows 95, specify these settings in the Control Panel.
2. If you want the Domino server to log in to NDS automatically, edit the NOTES.INI file to include these settings:
NWNDSUSERID=cn=
server_name
tree_name
Where
server_name
is the NDS name of the Domino server and
tree_name
is the name of the tree.
NWNDSPASSWORD=
NDS_Service_Pass~ord
Where
NDS_Service_Password
is the password the Domino server uses to log into NDS.
3. If you have not enabled the SPX port, start the Notes workstation and choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports. Select SPX and select Port Enable. Domino automatically enables NDS and Bindery Services by default.
4. If you use only NDS on all Domino servers in your organization, select SPX Options, select NetWare Directory Services (NDS).only to disable Bindery Services lookup within Domino.
5. Open the Server document for this server in the Domino Directory add the NDS server name to the Network Address field in the Ports tab. Include the Domino server's NDS distinguished name.
6. Exit the Notes workstation.
See Also
Click here
Using Novell 32-Bit NetWare Administrator tools for NDS
Click here
Click here
^etting up Domino and SPX on Windows 95 and 98
Click here
Click here
NOTES.INI settings for SPX and NDS
Click here
Click here
Setting up Domino and SPX on Windows NT
Click here
&Arial
This example is from a NOTES.INI file that specifies a Domino server NDS object name. The server name and password are configured so the Domino server automatically logs into NDS when the server starts._
[NOTES]
KitType=2
Directory=F:\NOTES\data
FileDlgDirectory=F:\NOTES\
NWNDSUSERID=CN=SPXPYTHON.O=ZOO
NWNDSPASSWORD=NOTES
&Arial
These settings do not appear in the NOTES.INI file automatically. Instead, the SPX port driver uses default values for each setting unless you edit the NOTES.INI file.
These settings affect Domino servers that run on a network that uses SPX and NDS:e
NetWareSockete
-- Defines the socket number that the Domino server uses when listening for connections. The default is that Domino lets the IPX/SPX protocol stack choose the socket number. S~ecifying the socket number overrides the Domino internal algorithms to determine the Listen Socket.
If the specified socket is already in use, the
Domino server does not start. You can fix this problem by closing the application that is using the same socket as Domino, or re-assigning a new socket to the Domino server. To avoid this, you can assign an IPX WellKnown/Static Socket to Domino to make sure this socket is not in use on this system by other SPX applications. The ~ocket range for IPX WellKnown/Static sockets is 0x2000 - 0x3FFF. If a site does not care which IPX/SPX socket is used, there is no need to specify a NetWareSocket variable.f
To verify the actual IPX/SPX socket in use by the server, issue a "SHOW PORT spx_port_driver_name" and check the socket of the session that has a status of listening. Another method to verify the actual socket used by the SPX port driver is to check the following in the NOTES.INI:o
NetWareSpxSettings=0,0,0.0,0,3,17393 where 17393 is the value of the Domino SPX socket in decimal.
NWNDSUserID
-- Defines NDS Service/UserID, that Domino uses to log into the NDS tree. The ID is stored in the server's NOTES.INI file. The default is no NDS Service/User ID, which means an administrator needs to login to the NDS tree before starting the Domino server.
NWNDSPassword
-- Defines the NDS Service Password, that Domino uses to login to the NDS tree. The password i~ stored in the server's NOTES.INI. The default is no NDS Service Password, which means an administrator needs to login to the NDS tree before starting the Domino server.
See Also
Click here
Novell NetWare Directory Services
Click here
&Arial
When the SPX port is enabled, the Domino server for Windows NT automatically detects which NetWare services are installed.
You can run the Notes workstation for Windows NT on SPX without performing any additional SPX or NT configuration. All you need to do is enable the port.
For the Domino snrver, you must configure SPX using the NetWare services used by a server.
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino and SPX on Windows NTn
Click here
&Arial
1. Start the Notes workstation program on the Windows NT server or workstation.e
2. Enable the network port for SPX on the Domino server or Notes workstation if this has not already been done.
3. Restart the Domino server or Notes workstation.
Depending on which protocol stack you ha~e installed, perform one of the following additional configurations:
4558092829213008
NetWare Client Services
1. In the Control Panel, select Novell NetWare Client Services.
2. Select Configure.
3. (Optional) Enter the NDS NameContext that matches the group/organization's context.
4. (Optional) Enter or select the name of the NDS PreferredTree.
5. (Optional) Enter the name of the PreferredServer, whinh the Notes Bindery Servers use.
Note
Step 4 is important for setting up the IPX/SPX stack for use by a Domino server.
4558092829213009
IPX/SPX stack options
1. In the Control Panel, select Novell NetWare IPX/SPX Transport.
2. Select Configure.
3. Set Number of SPX Connections equal to the Maximum Number of SPX connections supported by this system. The default is 48.
^ee Also
Click here
Running Domino and SPX on Windows NT
Click here
&Arial
The Notes workstation supports two SPX protocol stacks on the Windows 95/98 platform:
Microsoft NwLink IPX/SPX protocol with Bindery Services support
Novell Requester IPX/SPX protocol with Bindery Services and NDS Services support
When you use the above protocol stacks, make sure the following services are.installed and running:
Microsoft NwLink Windows 95/98
-- Microsoft IPX/SPX compatible stack
-- Microsoft NetWare Client Services
Novell Requester for Windows 95/98
-- Novell NetWare Client Services
-- Novell NetWare IPX/SPX Transport
Windows 95/98 supports SPX with Winsock (WSOCK32.DLL), which comes with the operating system. The Notes SPX port driver uses WSOCK32.DLL for IPX/SPX.
The Novell Reque~ter for NetWare/NDS Services uses these DLLs:
CALLWIN32.DLL
NETWIN32.DLL
LOCWIN32.DLL
For information on network operating system requirements, see the Release Notes.
See Also
Click here
Novell NetWare Directory Services
Click here
&Arial
1. Start the Notes workstation program on Windows 95/98.
2. Enable the network port for SPX on the Notes workstation if this has not already been done.
3. Res~art the Notes workstation.
4. Depending on which protocol stack, perform one of the procedures described below:
4558092829213008
Microsoft NwLink
Note
Complete Steps 3 and 4 if you are setting up the IPX/SPX stack for a Domino server.
1. In the Control Panel, select IPX/SPX-compatible Protocol Properties.
2. Highlight Frame Type in the Property dialog box and select a value for it.
3. In the Control Panel, select Client for NetWare Networks Properties.
4. (Optional) Enter or select a Preferred server name.
4558092829213009
Novell NetWare
Note
Complete Steps 3 and 4 if you are setting up the IPX/SPX stack for a Domino server.
1. In the Control Panel, select IPX/SPX-compatible Protocol Properties.
2. Highlight Frame Type in the Property dialog box and select n value for it.
3. Highlight Maximum Connections in the Property dialog box and select a value for it.
4. Highlight Maximum Sockets in the Property dialog box and select a value for it.
5. In the Control Panel, select Client for NetWare Networks Properties.
6. (Optional) Enter or select a Preferred server name.
7. (For NDS only) Enter or select a Preferred Tree name and then enter or select a Default Context name.
See Also
Click here
Running Domino and SPX on Windows 95 and 98
Click here
&Arial
Domino servers for Sun SPARC and Solaris Intel Edition, and IBM AIX support the SPX protocol.
The Domino server for UNIX on Sun SPARC and Solaris Intel Edition is certified to run on TotalNET Access Server.
The Domino server and Notes workstation for UNIX on IBM AIX 4.3.1 is certified to run using the stack provided by the ipx.base file sets.
Because UNIX supports only Binde~y Services, you do not use the Port Setup dialog box.
For more information on SPX and UNIX for Solaris, see the vendor's documentation.
For information on specific network operating system requirements, see the Release Notes.
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino and SPX on UNIX
Click here
&Arnal
4558092829213008
Solaris
To set up Domino.to run with SPX on Sun SPARC and Solaris Intel Edition:
1. Install PC Protocol Services from Sun Microsystems on the Solaris Intel Edition system. This product is not included with Domino for Solaris or Solaris Intel Edition software. You must order it separately.
2. Follow the installation procedure provided with PC Protocol Services. In this procedure, you mount a disk containing the PC Protocol Services software and run an install program. The install program reconfigures tne kernel and requires that you reboot the system. After you reboot the system, the daemon processes that run IPX/SPX start automatically, and IPX/SPX runs.
3. Change default configuration settings:8
Use the /opt/SUNWipx/bin/ipxd utility as root to stop IPX/SPX.
Set Ethernet type to the appropriate frame type -- for example, Ethernet 802.3.
Edit the file /etc/opt/SUNWipx/ipxtab and change the Network Number to an appropriate number, for example, 0x0.
Use the /opt/SUNWipx/bin/ipxd utility as root to restart IPX/SPX.
For detailed information on administering and configuring NetWare on Solaris, see the vendor's documentation.e
See Also
Click here
Running Domino and SPX on UNIX
Click here
&Arial
The following information describes the IPX/SPX limitations for Domino servers and Notes clients.
There must be a NetWare or IntraNetWare server local to the Domino server. Pseudo servers such as Windows NT NW Gateway do not offer real Bindery or NDS services. It should not be nore than one hop away via a switch, bridge, or router on the LAN when Bindery services are used with the Domino server. Ideally, this should be the case for the Notes client systems as well when they are using Bindery services and required when WAN links are present between the Domino server and the Notes clients systems.
The IPX protocol stack services (Novell or Microsoft) on the Domino server or Notes client system must point to the local NetWare server "Preferred Server" and/or "Preferred ^ree." Other Domino servers or Notes clients do not need to access the same local NetWare server for its preferred server or tree.
The Domino server can access only one interface offering the IPX protocol as well as only one instance of the SPX port driver. Make sure you have not bound the IPX protocol to more than one NIC as well as one frame type on the system that the Domino server software is expected to run on.
See Also
Click here
Domino and SPX
Click here
&Arial
You can install the Domino server as a counter within the Windows NT Performance Monitor. The Performance Monitor lists all numerical Domino server statistics, including those generated by add-in programs. You can choose specific statistics to appear in a report or a chart for analysis. You can also use the Performance Monitor to view the statistics of a remote server.
For complete information on usnng the Performance Monitor, see the Windows NT documentation.
To install Domino as a Performance Monitor counter
1. If you installed the Domino server without selecting the option to install Performance Monitor, complete the following steps:
Run the Install program again and click the Customize button.
Make sure that the install paths are the same as for the original server install.
Deselect all install options excep~ for "Notes Performance Monitor." This allows you to install only Performance Monitor.
After the Install program completes, restart the server.
2. Type the following command from the program directory on the server:
notesreg.bat directory
where directory is the full path to the program directory.
For example, type the following:
notesreg.bat C:\notes
Note
If the server or an add-in.program running on the server terminates, you must stop the Performance Monitor before restarting the server or add-in program.
If you are using the Performance Monitor to view statistics on a remote server and the remote server or add-in program terminates, you must stop the Performance Monitor and restart the remote server.
To view Domino using the Performance Monitor
1. Start the Performance Monitor by clicking the Performance Monitor icon or by ty~ing the following command at the system prompt:
start perfmon
2. Choose Edit - Add To Chart or Edit - Add to Report.
3. In the Object box, select Lotus Domino.
4. In the Instances box, select a Domino statistic you want to include in a chart or report, then click Add. Repeat for each statistic you want to add.
Note
Domino statistics do not appear as instances in the Performance Monitor until Domino or an.add-in program assigns or updates a statistic. To force this to happen, initialize statistics on the server -- for example, by typing Show Stat at the server console.
To view Domino error messages in the NT Performance Monitor
To see any error messages related to generating Domino statistics within the Performance Monitor, look for notestat messages in the Application Log of the Event Viewer.
To remove the Domino statistic counter from the Performance Monitor
To remove the Domino statistic counter from the Performance Monitor, type this command at the NT command prompt:
unlodctr notestat
$BackgroundR5
$INFO
$WINDOWTITLE
$$ScriptName
$BODY
2cP0<
Using Domino server NDS objectsNetwork Configuration
NDS\server objectsContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_SUPPORT_OF_NDSTopic1Using Domino server NDS objectsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX
H_ABOUT_NOTES_SUPPORT_OF_NDS_MIDTOPIK_4448092829213008=Domino server NDS object attributes02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Configuring the Domino Sna{in Registry valuesNetwork Configuration
Snapin Registry values\configuringContentsStepsH_CONFIGURING_DOMINO_SNAPIN_STEPSTopic1Configuring the Domino Snapin Registry valuesStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX
H_CONFIGURING_DOMINO_SNAPIN_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_94938134429222912=For Windows NT clientH_CONFIGURING_DOMINO_SNAPIN_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_94938134429222913=For Windows 95/98 client02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up NDS for a Notes workstationNetwork Configuration
NDS\Notes workstations andNotes workstations\configuring for NDSContentsAboutH_SETTING_UP_NDS_FOR_A_NOTES_WORKSTATIONTopic1Settink up NDS for a Notes workstationAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX
H_SETTING_UP_NDS_FOR_A_NOTES_WORKSTATION_MIDTOPIC_4448092829213008=Configuring NDS for a Notes workstationH_SETTING_UP_NDS_FOR_A_NOTES_WORKSTATION_MIDTOPIC_4448092829213009=Configuring a Notes workstation to use NDS02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up NDS for a Domino serverNetwork Configuration
NDS\Domino server andServers\configuring for NDSContentsAboutH_SETTING_UP_NDS_FOR_A_NOTES_SERVERTopic1Setting up NDS for a Domino serverAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX
H_SETTING_UP_NDS_FOR_A_NOTES_SERVER_MIDTOPIC_4508092829213008=Configu{ing NDS for a Domino serverH_SETTING_UP_NDS_FOR_A_NOTES_SERVER_MIDTOPIC_4508092829213009=Configuring a Domino server to use NDS02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Example: Setting up NDS for a Domino serverNetwork Configuration
NDS\NOTES.INI settingServer documents\creating for NDSContentsExamplesH_EXAMPLE:_SETTING_UP_NDS_FOR_A_NOTES_SERVERTopic1Example: Setting up NDS for a Domino serverExamplesH_SETTING_UP_NDS_FOR_A_NOTES_SERVER02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
NOTES.INI settings for SPX and NDSNetwork Configuration
NDS\NOTES.INI settingNetWare socket\describedSPX\NOTES.INI settingContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES.INI_SETTINGS_FOR_NETWARE_SPXTopic1NOTES.INI settings for SPX and NDSAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX02 Confikuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Running Domino and SPX on Windows NTNetwork Configuration
NetWare service{\Windows NT andWindows NT\NetWare servicesContentsOverviewH_RUNNING_DOMINO_AND_SPX_ON_WINDOWS_NT_OVERTopic1Running Domino and SPX on Windows NTOverviewH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Domino and SPX on Windows NTNetwork Configuration
NetWare services\Windows NT andSPX\Windows NT andWindows NT\NetWare servicesWindows NT\SPX andContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_SPX_ON_WINDOWS_NTTopic1Setting up Domino and SPX on Windows NTStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX
Running Dokino and SPX on Windows 95 and 98Network Configuration
SPX\Windows andWindows\SPX andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_AND_SPX_ON_WINDOWS_95Topic1Running Domino and SPX on Windows 95 and 98AboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Domino and SPX on Windows 95 and 98Network Configuration
SPX\Windows andContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_SPX_ON_WINDOWS_95Topic1Setting up Domino and SPX on Windows 95 and 98StepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX
H_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_SPX_ON_WINDOWS_95_MIDTOPIC_4558092829213008=Microsoft NwLinkH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_SPX_ON_WINDOWS_95[MIDTOPIC_4558092829213009=Novell NetWare02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
PURSAFO
Running Domino and SPX on UNIXNetwork Configuration
SPX\UNIX andUNIX\SPX andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_AND_SPX_ON_UNIXTopic1Running Domino and SPX on UNIXAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Sunning Domino on SPX
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Domino and SPX on UNIXNetwork Configuration
SPX\setting up Domino on SolarisSun Socaris. See SolarisContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_SPX_ON_UNIXTopic1Setting up Domino and SPX on UNIXStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX
H_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_SPX_ON_UNIX_MIDTOPIC_4558092829213008=Solaris02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Prerequisites for the Domino network using IPX/SPXNetwork Configuration
.AContentsOverviewH_PREREQUISITES_FOR_THE_DOMINO_NETWORK_USING_IPX_SPX_OVERTopic1Prerequisites for the Domino network using IPX/SPXOverviewH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix A Network Prerequisites
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Domino and TCP/IPNetwork Configuration
Ports\TCPTCP/IP\Domino andTCP/IP\driversTCP/IP\platformsTCP/IP\port numberTCP/IP\secondary name server andTCP/IP\securityContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IPTopic1Comino and TCP/IPAboutH_NETWORK_CONFIGURATION_OVER
H_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_MIDTOPIC_296254633629213010=TCP/IP driversH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_MIDTOPIC_296314633629213011=TCP ports used by DominoH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_MIDTOPIC_296314633629213012=Communication between different Domino TCP/IP platformsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_MIDTOPIC_296314633629213013=Data securityH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_MIDTOPIC_296314633629213014=Secondary name serverH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_MIDTOPIC_296314633629213015=Seccndary name server during setup02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up multiple TCP/IP portsNetwork Configuration
TCP/IP\portsContentsAboutH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_MULTIPLE_TCP/IP_PORTSTopic1Setting up multiple TCP/IP portsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP
H_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_MULTIPLE_TCP/IP_PORTS_MIDTOPIC_296314633629213010=Connecting to the server with multiple ports configured02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
TCP/IP connections address resolution and configurationsNetwork Configuration
IP names\address resolution and configurationsServer names\TCP/IP andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_TCP/IP_CONNECTIONS_ADDRESS_RESOLUTION_AND_CONFIGURATIONSTcpic1TCP/IP connections address resolution and configurationsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP
H_ABOUT_TCP/IP_CONNECTIONS_ADDRESS_RESOLUTION_AND_CONFIGURATIONS_MIDTOPIC_296314633629213010=Creating server namesH_ABOUT_TCP/IP_CONNECTIONS_ADDRESS_RESOLUTION_AND_CONFIGURATIONS_MIDTOPIC_296314633629213012=Recommended name resolution options02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Running Domino and TCP/IP on OS/2 Advanced Warp Server Network Configuration
OS/2 Warp\TCP/IP requirementsTCP/IP\OS/2 Warp andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_ON_OS/2Topic1Running Domino and TCP/IP on OS/2 Advanced Warp Servcr AboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Domino and TCP/IP on OS/2 Advanced Sarp ServerNetwork Configuration
OS/2 Warp\TCP/IP installationTCP/IP\OS/2 Warp andContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_ON_OS/2Topic1Setting up Domino and TCP/IP on OS/2 Advanced Warp ServerStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Running Domino and TCP/IP on Windows NTNetwork Configuration
TCP/IP\Windows NT andWindows NT\TCP/IP andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_ON_WINDOWS_NTTopic1Running Domino and TCP/IP on Windows NTAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
Print
CN=Dasid Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
Setting up Domino and TCP/IP on Windows NT, Windows 98, and Windows 95Network Configuration
TCP/IP\Windows NT andWindows NT\TCP/IP andContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_ON_WINDOWS_NTTopic1Setting up Domino and TCP IP on Windows NT, Windows 98, and Windows 95StepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ng) As Note
Ru`ning Notes workstations and TCP/IP for the MacintoshNetwork Configuration
Macintosh\TCP/IP andTCP/IP\Macintosh andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_WORKSTATIONS_AND_MACTCPTopic1Running Notes workstations and TCP/IP for the MacintoshAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
rver. Tr
Setting up a Notes workstation and Macintosh Network Configuration
Macintosh\TCP/IP andTCP/IP\Macintosh andContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_MACTCPTopic1Setting up a Notes workstation and Macintosh StepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
0Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Me.m
Running Domino and TCP/IP on UNIXNetwork Configuration
TCP/IP\UNIX andUNIX\TCP/IP andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_ON_UNIPTopic1Running Domino and TCP/IP on UNIXAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
= dbInfo
Setting up Domino and TCP/IP on UNIXNetwork Configuration
TCP/IP\UNIX andUNIX\TCP/IP andContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_ON_UNIXTopic1Setting up Domino and TCP/IP on UNIXStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
es= B
Example: Sample port status for TCP/IPNetwork Configuration
Examples\TCP/IPPort status\TCP/IPTCP/IP\port statusContentsExamplesH_EXAMPLES:_SAMPLE_PORT_STATUS_FOR_TCP/IPTopic1Example: Sample port status for TCP/IPExamplesH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_ON_UNIX02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
Print
CN=David Mahar OU=CAM/O=Lotus
pment Envir
Prerequisites for the Domino network using TCP/IPNetwork Configuration
TCP/IP\requirementsTCP/IP\satellite supportContentsOverviewH_PREREQUISITES_FOR_THE_DOMINO_NETWORK_PSING_TCP_IP_OVERTopic1Prerequisites for the Domino network using TCP/IPOverviewH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP
H_PREREQUISITES_FOR_THE_DOMINO_NETWORK_USING_TCP_IP_OVER_MIDTOPIC_31908240029234351=TCP/IP multi-homingH_PREREQUISITES_FOR_THE_DOMINO_NETWORK_USING_TCP_IP_OVER_MIDTOPIC_31908240029234352=V4 and V6 IP addressingH_PREREQUISITES_FOR_THE_DOMINO_NETWORK_USING_TCP_IP_OVER_MIDTOPIC_31908240029234353=LMHosts and WINSH_PREREQUISITES_FOR_THE_DOMINO_NETWORK_USING_TCP_IP_OVER_MIDTOPIC_31908240029234354=Sate`lite links02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix A Network Prerequisites
.AContentsOperviewH_TROUBLESHOOTING_NETWORK_PROBLEMS_OVERTopic1Troubleshooting network problemsOverviewH_NETWORK_CONFIGURATION_OVER02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Preparing to call Lotus Customer Support Network Configuration
Customer Support\contactingTroubleshooting\Customer Support andContentsAboutH_WHAT_INFORMATION_SHOULD_I_COLLECT_BEFORE_CALLING_LOTUS_CUSTOMER_SUPPORT_FOR_HELP_TROUBLESHOOTING_A_NETWORK_PROBLEMTopic1Preparing to call Lotus Customer Support AboutH_TROUBLESHOOTING_NETWORK_PROBLEMS_OVER02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ue("Matc
Determining which ports aren't workingNetwork Configuration
Ports\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\portsContentsAboutH_HOW_DO_I_DETERMINE_W@ICH_PROTOCOLS/PORTS_ARE_NOT_WORKING_Topic1Determining which ports aren't workingAboutH_TROUBLESHOOTING_NETWORK_PROBLEMS_OVER02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
= "[titcount) & "*"
Next
strQuery = |(| & Lcase(strImplode(copySearchWords, |) and (|)) & |)|
Set view = db.getView( "ByReplicaID")
If Not view Is Nothing Then
view.ftSearch strQuery, 0
dbl`st.addView view
Else
strQuery = strQuery & | and !([DBListInCatalog] = 0)|
UNIX (HP-UX, Solaris, Solaris Intel Edition, AIX) server
The Notes workstations run on TCP/IP:
Macintosh workstation (Open Transport TCP/IP)
Windows NT workstation
Windows 98 workstation
Windows 95 workstation
Note
Lotus does not certify Domino running ovar the NBT protocol (NetBIOS emulated over TCP). However, Lotus supports customers who use this configuration.
For additional information on operating systems, including required patches, see the Release Notes.
296254633629213010
TCP/IP drivers
TCP/IP drivers are installed in the Notes program directory during Domino installation. When you select a network port during the Domino server or Notes workstation setup procedure or add a port later, select QCP/IP as the network choice, and Domino uses the appropriate network driver to configure the port.
The TCP/IP network driver can coexist on a Domino server or Notes workstation with any other supported network driver.
296314633629213011
TCP ports used by Domino
By default, Domino servers use the TCP port 1352 when listening for Notes workstation connections. This port number was assigned to Lotus by the Internet Assigned Number Authority, so it is qnlikely that it conflicts with other applications on the network. Notes workstations use dynamic port numbers that the TCP/IP network software chooses from a range of numbers that are available for this purpose. A workstation that connects to a Domino server connects to server port 1352.
To use a different port number for servers, configure the TCP/IP service "lotusnotes" in the manner appropriate to the network. This is generally done by adding a line to a file named "services," which is usually located in a directory called \etc. The line should resemble the following:
Lotusnotes
portnumber
/tcp # LotusNotes
Where
portnumber
is the port of your choice. Be sure to edit this file on every Notes workstation and Domino server that is communicating.
296314633629213012
Communication between different Domino TCP/IP platforms
Because the information that Domino sends over TCP/IP is platform-independant, any Notes workstation can communicate with any Domino server over TCP/IP, as long as they both use TCP/IP.
296314633629213013
Data security
To ensure data security, configure all TCP/IP Domino servers to reject TELNET and FTP connections and do not include TCP/IP Domino servers in the Network File System (NFS). Using these services requires that you properly maintain the TCP/IP password file to guarantee a secure environment on the system. With NFS running an a non-secure environment, it is possible to breach security by accessing the files through the NFS system instead of through the Domino server.
296314633629213014
Secondary name server
For Notes workstations, the TCP/IP secondary name server is used when one of these three conditions occurs:
The workstation user's mail server is down.
The workstation user's home server is not running TCP/IP.
The workstation user's home qerver cannot be resolved over TCP/IP.
Domino uses the secondary name server to build a list of servers and their addresses for a Notes workstation to access when it needs to find a Domino server. You specify the TCP/IP secondary name server address in the Location document under the Advanced-Secondary Servers tab. These fields specify the server name and IP address.
To view this setting, choose File - Mobile - Locations and open the location for which you want to change this TCP/IQ setting. Under the Advanced - Secondary Servers tab, you see these two fields:
Secondary TCP/IP Notes server name
Secondary TCP/IP host name or address
Note
The Advanced tab appears only if you have a location defined as Local Area Network or Both Dialup and Local Area Network.
Secondary TCP/IP Domino Server Name
- You may enter one of the following:
The common name of the Domino server -- Noteqserver1
The hierarchical name -- Notesserver1/Acmecorp1
Secondary TCP/IP Host Name or Address
- You may enter one of the following:
IP address 197.114.33.22
The fully qualified domain name -- notesserver1.acmecorp1.com
The host name -- Notesserver1
If you specify only the host name in this field, you must use Domain Name Service (DNS) or local host files. When you specify the IP address in this field, Domino rasolves the host's IP address without having to perform a DNS or host file lookup. You can specify a different secondary name server for each LAN location defined.M
296314633629213015
Secondary name server during setup
During setup on either a Domino server or Notes workstation, if the server you are trying to connect to is not able to be resolved using TCP/IP, a dialog box appears allowing you to enter a Server Name and IP address using the same rules as described!above. Although the dialog box indicates that you should enter a secondary name server, you can enter the TCP/IP Domino name server and address for your mail server instead of the secondary name server and address. Domino stores these values in a location document in the Personal Address Book.
See Also
Click here
TCP/IP Connection attempt timeout
Click here
Click here
Running Domino and TCP/IP on OS/2 Advanced Warp Server
Click here
Click here
Running Domino and TCP/IP on UNIX
Click here
Click here
Running Domino and TCP/IP on Windows NT
Click here
&Arial
1. Make sure that the TCP/IP networking software is configured properly and that each installed network interface card has a separate IP address that you can "ping."P
2. If you have installed TCP/IP as the network driver, the first port should already be configured. If it is not, choose File - Preferences - User Preferences!- Ports. Select TCPIP and enable the port by checking the box beside "Port Enabled."
3. To add a new port choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports - New. In the New Port dialog box, enter TCPIP2, select TCP for the driver, select the appropriate location, and click OK to exit verifying that the port was created. Continue to add more ports as necessary.
4. Edit the NOTES.INI file. The port line created from Steps 1 and 2 should be represented by the following:
portname=
drivername
,0,15,0,,12288
TCP=TCP,0,15,0,,12288
TCP2=TCP,0,15,0,,12288
5. Add a line for each port defined above, stating its IP address and port number as represented by the following:
PORTNAME_TcpIpAddress=0
,IP Address:port number
Where PORTNAME is the port name you defined
The port number can be any number, higher than 5000. The default is 1352.
For example, given ports TCP and TCP2, the folaowing lines should be added:
TCP_TcpIpAddress=0,198.115.100.13:1352
TCP2_TcpIpAddress=0,198.114.100.12:1352
296314633629213010
Connecting to the server with multiple ports configured
1. From a workstation:
Add a connection record in the Personal Address Book for the Domino server with multiple cards.
Type the server name and IP address in the network field.
2. From a server:
Add a connectian record in the Domino Directory.
Enter the server name and IP address in the Network field.
Edit the Server document. Add and enable the new port, specifying the same name given to the new port.
To set up a Damino server running TCP/IP, you can either name the server using its host IP name allowing DNS name resolution or modify the Optional network address field in Server and Connection documents allowing the Domino server and the Notes workstation to determine the network address of the destination server.
When establishing a connection from a workstation, users must specify at least the entire common name. For example, if you try to open a database on a server named marketing.lotus.com, you must anter the entire common name -- marketing.lotus.
The Server and Connection documents contain a network address field. The address must be in one of the following formats:
IP address format: 193.94.222.65
The fully qualified TCP/IP domain name format: "DominoServerOne.acmecorp1.com"
The host name format: "DominoServerOne"
Note
The host name format is not recommended when more than one DNS domain is configured in a!network and the TCP/IP stack is unable to query multiple DNS domains.
Tipr
Use logical Domino networks instead of one large network.
296314633629213012
Recommended name resolution options
Name/rename each server with its host IP namea
-- The advantage is that users in other Domino networks and domains can access the server quickly without needing to know the server's fully qualified domain name. The disadvantage is that you must rename Domino servers, which can be time consuming.
Use only one DNS domain
-- The advantage is that TCP/IP name resolution succeeds, making connections easier within the network. The disadvantage is that it forces centralized network administration.
Use only one Domino named network
-- The advantage is that Server documents in the Domino Directory make it easier to administer the Domino server. The disadvantage is that qhe Domino server list displays both local and remote servers. Remote server utilization may be expensive.
Use host files on every system for name resolution instead of a DNSi
-- The advantage is that TCP/IP name resolution succeeds if you keep the host file up to date. The disadvantage is the manual reconfiguring of the Domino system each time an addition, deletion, or change is needed to the TCP/IP network.
Modify the DNS Resolver on every system to query!all of the other DNS domains
-- The advantage is that TCP/IP name resolution succeeds, assuming resolver configuration is correct. The disadvantage is that you must manually reconfigure the system each time the DNS environment changes. Additionally, the TCP/IP stack may not have the ability to query multiple domains.
Use Location documents in the Personal Address Book --
Create multiple locations defining mail servers and secondary name servers.
Qse LAN documents in the Personal Address Book and in the Domino Directory
-- Create LAN Connection documents defining the network address.
See Also
Click here
Domino and TCP/IPa
Click here
&Arial
Domino supports TCP/IP for Domino servers using OS/2 Advanced Warp Server. The following are TCP/IP-specific system requirements:
Ethernet or Token Ring network interface card and device driver software
OS/2 Advanced Warp Server
IBM QCP/IP
For information on network operating system requirements and operating system release numbers, see the Release Notes.
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino and TCP/IP on OS/2 Advanced Warp Server
Click here
&Arial
1. Install the TCP/IP software.\
2. If you use DNS or a local hosts file, ping the Domino servers by host name. This determines if you can resolve qhe common name of the Domino server. If this fails the TCP/IP software is not configured properly.
3. Install a Domino server for OS/2 Advanced Warp Server.
4. Run one of these setup programs:
Domino server setup program. Select "Quick and Easy" or "Advanced Configuration," if required.
Workstation Setup. Choose how you want to access the server and click OK. In the "Network type" field select TCP/IP.
See Also
Click here
Running Domino and TCP/IP on OS/2 Advanced Warp Server
Click here
&Arial
Windows NT provides built-in network support that makes the Domino server or Notes workstation for Windows NT compatible with the TCP/IP network. If you already enabled the TCP/IP protocol in Windows NT, you can run the Domino server or Notes workstation for Windows NT on TCP/IP without performing any additional TCP/IP or NT configuration. All you need to do is enable the TCP/IP port in Domino. The following are Wiadows-specific system requirements:_
Ethernet or Token Ring network interface card (NIC) and device driver software
Windows NT
Support for use of TCP/IP with Microsoft DUN/RAS is available for Domino servers and Notes workstations using the remote LAN capability.
For information on system requirements and release numbers for Domino servers and Notes workstations, see the Release Notes.
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino and TCP/IP on Windows NT, Windows 98, and Windows 95
Click here
Click here
Using remote connections
Click here
&Arial
1. Install the TCP/IP software.
2. If you use DNS or a local hosts file, ping the Domino servers by host name. This determines if you can resolve the common name of the Domino server. If this fails the TCP/AP software is not configured properly.
3. Install a Domino server or Notes workstation for Windows NT, Windows 98, or Windows 95.
4. Run one of these setup programs:
Domino server setup program. Select "Quick and Easy" or "Advanced Configuration," as required. d
Workstation Setup. Choose how you want to access the server and click OK. In the "Network type" field select TCP/IP.
See Also
Clack here
Running Domino and TCP/IP on Windows NT
Click here
&Arial
The following are Macintosh-specific system requirements:
MacTCP network software from Apple Computer, Inc., or TCP/IP.
For network operating system requirements, see the Release Notes.
Macintosh PowerPC workstations can also be configured to use Apple Remote Access (ARA) or Open Transport PPP to connect to remote servers on LANs.
See Also
Click here
Setting up a!Notes workstation and Macintosh
Click here
Click here
Using remote connections
Click here
&Arial
1. Install the TCP/IP software on a Macintosh computer.
2. Install a Notes workstation for Macintosh and enable a port for TCP/IP if necessary.
3. Test the TCP/IP installation making sure that it is complete and that it is working successfully.
4. Set up the Notes workstation for Macintosh. Select TCQ/IP in the "Network type" field.
Note
When you set up a Macintosh workstation, if the home server is on a network that runs a protocol other than TCP/IP, select the network protocol of the home server in the Network type field. After the workstation is running, enable the TCP/IP port.
See Also
Click here
Running Notes workstations and TCP/IP for the Macintosh
Click here
&Arial
Domino servers for HP-UX, Sun SPARC Solaris, Solaris Intel Edition, IBM AIX support the TCP/IP protocol. Because the TCP/IP protocol is builq into the UNIX operating system, you do not need any additional network software. If you use DNS or a local host file, ping the Domino servers by IP address and by host name.
For more information on system requirements and operating system release numbers for Domino servers for UNIX, see the Release Notesn
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino and TCP/IP on UNIX
Click here
&Arial
1. Install a Domino server for UNIX.
2. Run the of the Domino server setup program. Select "Quick and Easy" or "Advanced Configuration" if qequired.
See Also
Click here
Running Domino and TCP/IP on UNIX
Click here
&Arial
The port status information for a TCP/IP port resembles the following:
Transport Provider: TCP
Notes Session Local Address Foreign Address
00E60001 198.114.87.178.1026 198.114.91.27.1352
00E80002 198.114.87.178.1029 130.103.40.254.1352
00E80004 198.114.87.178.1062 130.103.42.152.1352
00E80005 198.114.87.178.1065 198.114.91.29.1352
&Arial
The following information describes the TCP/IP limitations for Domino servers and Notes clients.
31908240029234351n
TCP/IP multi-homing
The Domino sarver can access one or more NICs supporting the TCP/IP protocol. This is useful for the following configurations:
Splitting the client load for better performance
Splitting client to server access from server to server communication
Setting up mail routing, replication and/or cluster replication on an alternate path (private network)
Allowing access to the Domino server via a TCP/IP firewall system over a different network segment (DMZ)
Whan using the Domino server as a Notes RPC firewall (application firewall)
Network/Server fail over, used in mission critical nonstop resource access
To setup alternate Window/MTU settings for satellite Uplink/Down link connections isolated from local access connections.
It is also possible to assign more than one IP address per NIC interface. This is useful for the following configurations:
Isolating local versus WAN Notes named networks so local users can only see local Domino servers.
Prevent independent remote access dialup connections (ISDN Dial up router) from being arbitrarily accessed
When setting up redundant WAN path connections for server to server access
When the use of a different TCP/IP port map is needed for firewall connections
When offering HTTP services to different group than Notes RPC connections
As a service provider offering Domino Server access for either Notes or Web alients to different groups/companies
Both methods can be used in conjunction with partitioned Domino server configurations as well.
31908240029234352
V4 and V6 IP addressing
Both Notes clients and Domino servers support native IP V4 and V6 numeric addressing in server connection documents in the optional address field. For ease of management, Lotus strongly recommends using Host names or fully qualified domain naming (FQDN) of the system in both Seqver documents and Connection documents whenever possible to limit the amount of work when a server's IP address or location in the IP domain structure changes.
31908240029234353
LMHosts and WINS
Within Microsoft networking services there are two additional methods of IP address resolution: NetBIOS over IP, LAN Manager Hosts (LMHosts), which is a static host file method, or Windows Internet Name Service (WINS), which uses NetBIOS broadcasts and is dynamic, unlike ANS which is static in nature. Both these methods are not as reliable as traditional DNS and host files and can cause name/address confusion. Lotus recommends not using them for resolving when using the Domino network natively with TCP/IP. If you are using NetBIOS over IP and using the Domino network with the NetBIOS port driver, you should not use it in conjunction with the native TCP/IP port driver. l
Note
Not all client systems may have access to the WINS server as their TCP/IP stacks may not be able to access it like MAC OS, OS/2 Advanced Warp Server, or UNIX systems in general.
31908240029234354D
Satellite links
TCP/IP is the only protocol supported for satellite links and recommended only for server-to-server connections. Low orbit satellite links offer less latency which can allow limited Notes client usage using replication or simple viewing and allow access using a Web browser of the Domino servers data via HTTP. Qhen using geosynchronous, mid or low orbit satellite links with TCP/IP protocol, it is strongly recommended to manually limit the TCP window size and the MTU size to smaller sizes so that data movement is less bursty. This is important when creating large databases via replication. This may require adding a second NIC to the Domino servers.
See Also
Click here
Domino and TCP/IP
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe how to troubleshoot network problems:
Click here
Preparing to call Lotus Customer Support
Click here
Click here
Determaning which ports aren't working
Click here
Click here
Determining why multiple protocols won't run properly
Click here
Click here
Troubleshooting AppleTalkc
Click here
Click here
Troubleshooting Banyan VINES
Click here
Click here
Troubleshooting NetWare
Click here
Click heqe
Troubleshooting TCP/IP
Click here
Click here
Troubleshooting IPX
Click here
&Arial
1. Print out the PROTOCOL.INI file.
2. Print out the CONFIG.SYS file.
3. Print out the STARTUP.CMD file.
4. Print out the AppleTalk error log, if one was created.
5. List the version number of the operating system, network files, Domino server, and Notes workstation.
1. List the type of network cards and dates of driver files, if they aren't binding to the cards.
7. Print out the network file directory, so that you can compare network file dates.
&Arial
1. From the Notes workstatioa program, choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports.
2. Highlight the protocol/port you want to analyze.
3. Select Trace Connection.
4. Specify the server you want to connect to.G
5. Select Trace.
Note
Enable the log options to Full Trace to enter information into the log file. highlight textH_USING_A_DIFFERENT_COLOR_AND_FONT_OVER_MIDTOPIC_247517417629231346=To erase the highlighter over text
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
$ImagesWide
$ImagesHigh
$ImagesColorize
$ImageData
$ImageNames
50YQT
&Arial
Try these tips to troubleshoot the problem:
1. Change the hardware settings -- for example, the slot number and I/O address -- for the cards. If this does not solve the problem, try a different brand of network/card for one or both of the protocols.
2. If you know which protocol is causing the problem, disable all other protocols and try to access a server that you know runs the problem protocol.
3. Make sure the Server documents in the Domino Directory list a unique name for each protocol.s
4. For each network card and operating system, make sure you're using the correct, most up-to-date version of the driver.
&Arial
These topics describe how to troubleshoot problems with AppleTalk:
Click here
"Server Not Responding" setting up a Macintosh workstation
Click here
Click here
An asterisk appears for the zone name in the AppleTalk port status
Click here
&Arial
1. Make sure that tho Macintosh workstation can use the network connection to access other network services, such as printers and file servers. Also make sure that you loaded AppleTalk and that it is working successfully on the server.
2. Choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports - AppleTalk Options. If the network has more than one zone, select the zone that includes the server. Check to see if the server appears. If you see the server in the Chooser, verify that the Server document in the Domino Di
ectory is correctly configured. If you do not see the server, choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports - Show Status to verify that AppleTalk is loading properly on the server.
3. If the AppleTalk network has more than one zone and the Macintosh workstation isn't in the same zone as the server, configure the Server document to support Macintosh workstations in other zones.
4. If the server runs multiple protocols, make sure that the Network Configuration section oo the Server document in the Domino Directory has an entry for AppleTalk. The Net Address entry for AppleTalk must be in this format:r
servername@zonename
5. If the server runs multiple protocols, make sure that the Domino network name for the AppleTalk port in the port table of the Server document is unique -- that is, make sure that another protocol isn't using that same name.
See Also
Click here
Domino and Apple_alk
Click here
&Arial
Whon you choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports - Show Status, you see information similar to the following:
OS/2 Warp Version: v3.0
Our AppleTalk Zone: *
Domino Name Server used when Home Server isn't found in our zone:
Server: MOONBEAM
Zone: *
(The Domino Name Server is configured through the AppleTalk Port Setup dialog.)
The asterisk in the AppleTalk port status indicates that there is only one zone available, and the Notes workstation or Domino server on the network recognizes only one zone. If the AppleTalk network has multiple zones, seeing an asterisk in the port status may indicate that there is a problem with the network, cabling, or network card because the workstation or server isn't able to see the zones. g
To see the zones on the AppleTalk network, look in the Chooser on a Macintosh workstation, or choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports, highlight the AppleTalk port, and select Additional Se
See Also
Click here
Domino and AppleTalk
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe how to troubleshoot problems with Banyan VINES.
Click here
Banyan VINES problems
Click here
Click here
Banyan VINES error messages
Click here
&Arial
411728585629207015
Domino OS/2 Advanced Warp Server runs out of SPP sessions
The sequenced packet protocol (SPP) is a packet protocol used in VINES-based networks for file access and transfer. A socket is an interface access point that provides access to a network through system calls. Domino OS/2 Advanced Warp Servers open one socket to receive all sessions from clients. Notes clients open one socket for each session they establish with a server. Some servor tasks -- for example, the Replicator and Mail Router -- act as clients, so the server will open multiple sockets, although only one socket is used to serve clients. Domino opens one socket on port #269 (decimal) to send and receive datagrams for the secondary name server.1
Domino opens one SPP session for each Notes session. If all available SPP sessions are in use, the server listens for new connections, but workstations will be unable to connect to the server. If the server is out of resou
ces, it makes a session available by closing the one that has been idle for the longest time.
An issue for Domino servers with the VINES SPP API (development kit provided by Banyan) is that Domino can't successfully determine if all available sessions are in use.
To avoid running out of SPP sessions, configure more SPP sessions than the Domino server will need:
1. Set the Server_MaxSessions setting in the NOTES.INI file to limit the number of sessions that the Domono server uses. This setting allows the server to close old sessions when the maximum number of clients are connected.
2. Configure several more SPP sessions than the value used in Server_MaxSessions.
411728585629207016
Domino servers can't be located after upgrading a VINES server
If you restore backed-up data to an upgraded VINES server and the Domino servers whose PC-based service resided on the upgraded VINES server can no longer be seen on tho network via VINES, the PC-based service information hasn't been properly restored by the VINES backup program. Create a PC-based service for each Domino server on the upgraded VINES server.
411728585629207017
Notes workstations can't access a Domino server running VINES
Your Notes workstation may be more than two VINES hops away from the Domino server. Banyan VINES restricts access to a Domino server by Notes workstations that are more than two VINES hops away orom the Domino server.
1. Edit the VinesNameServerHops setting in the NOTES.INI file on the workstation or server that can't access the Domino server to include the following:
VinesNameServerHops=
hopcount
hopcost
Where:
hopcount
is a value from 0 to 15, that represents the number of hops the broadcast makes before failing. A values greater than 2 may result in slow performance and duplicate broadcast messages.e
hopcost
is one of the following: A (all costs), M (medium cost), L (low cost), or F (free). d
The default setting for this parameter is VinesNameServerHops=2,L.
2. Determine the number of VINES hops to the Domino server, and then increase the value of the VinesNameServiceHops setting in the NOTES.INI file.
3. If setup of the Notes workstation did not complete successfully, choose File - Mobile - Locations- Add Locations - Servers tab ond enter the home/mail server in the Home/mail server field.
4. If you're system uses token ring, make sure that the Source Level routing is enabled using the VINES UConfig utility.
411728585629207018
Notes workstation hangs attempting to access a Domino server over VINES
If you use a Notes workstation to access a Domino server over VINES, you may receive the message "SEARCHING FOR AVAILABLE SERVER, workstation locked." c
If the Banyao logo did not appear, edit the SYSTEM.INI file in the Windows directory to include the following:
NETWORK.DRV=VINES.DRV
NETWORK.DRV=BANYAN VINES 5.5x
Network=VVINESD.386
The second line is specific to Banyan VINES Release 5.5x. If you're using a different version of VINES, see your VINES documentation for the setting to specify on this line.
See Also
Click here
Domino and Banyan VINES
Click here
&Arial
92337609629201575
A VINES administrator of this server's group must be logged on.
This message appears if the Banyan user name that is logged on at the Domino server isn't a member of the adminlist of the group@org where the PC-based service resides. Log in as a VINES administrator of the Domino server's StreetTalk group, and use the VINES mlist program to ensure that the VINES user name is on the adminlist of the group@org where the PC-based sorvice resides.
92337609629201583o
Change Disk: Cannot find VNSAPI.DLL. Please insert in drive A.
Check the AUTOEXEC.BAT file for Windows or the CONFIG.SYS file for OS/2 Advanced Warp server to make sure that the PATH includes the Z:\ drive for VINES files.o
92337609629201581
Duplicate Notes server names detected in VINES STDA.
Two or more PC-based services have the same item name. Rename one of the sorvers so that the names are unique.
92337609629201577s
Server could not be located with VINES StreetTalk.
This message may appear if:v
The VINES Administrator has not set up the PC-based service.
The Domino server name and the item part of the StreetTalk PC-based service name do not match.
The PC-based service name does not reside in group@org of the Banyan username logged in at the Domino server.
The Baoyan server where the PC-based service resides is unavailable.
92337609629201580t
Server name isn't a valid VINES StreetTalk name.
The Domino server name violates the syntax for VINES StreetTalk names. Check the server name against StreetTalk naming conventions described in the Banyan documentation.v
92337609629201578
The system has not logged into VINES.
The Domino server isn't logged into VINES. Go to toe VINES program directory and type BAN to display a VINES log-in screen. Then log into VINES.
92337609629201584e
Unexpected VINES error - 1912.
A Notes workstation on the VINES network receives this message when it tries to connect to a Domino server and the VINES socket driver looks for the Domino server in STDA. Upgrade the VINES software at the workstation from VINES 4.10(0) to VINES 4.11, 5.0, or 5.5.
92337609629201576
Unexpected VINES error. See log file for error code.
Check the log file on the workstation or server for the VINES-specific error code. For more information on the error, see the Banyan documentation.
92337609629201582
Unrecoverable application error - Terminating current application.
Make sure you're logged into the VINES network. Check the SYSTEM.INI file to ensure that it includes these lines:
network.drv=vines.drvD
device=vvinesd.386 (Note: You find this line in the [Enh386] section.)
92337609629201579
VINES service name does not match Notes name.
The item portion of the VinesServiceName setting in the NOTES.INI file and the item portion of the PC-based service do not match.
See Also
Click here
Domino and Banyan VINES2
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe how to troubleshoot problems with NetWare:
Click here
NetWare problems
Click here
Click here
NetWare SPX error messages
Clico here
&Arial
57188569629202726C
Domino servers on another Token Ring network connected by a source-routing bridge can't be seen
Verify that NetWare is properly configured:
1. Make sure that the NetWare network is correctly configured. Make sure that you have the latest versions of NetWare services installed.
2. Make sure that the Domino configuration is correct.
3. Check the bridge configuration. If you used a bridge to connect/more than one token ring, you must implement Novell's source-routing NetWare Loadable Module (NLM) in a NetWare network. The file server runs NLM, while each workstation must have the Route services enabled. See the protocol services for the location of this setting.
You must assign the Token Ring bridge a unique number. The network itself, including the file servers, Domino servers, and bridges all share a common network number. If the bridge connecting two token rings does not have a unique oridge number, the connection fails.
NetBIOS and optional parameters may also cause persistent or unidentifiable problems.
Notes workstations may not be able to use Novell NetBIOS and SPX to connect to Domino servers if the workstations and servers are using incompatible IPX frame types. For example, a workstation configured to use the/802.3 frame type may have trouble connecting to a server configured for 802.2. See the NetWare client documentation for details on configuring the frame type used by IPX.s
Note
On Windows 95 and NT using the default "Auto Detect" setting to detect the frame type used on the network. It is best to use the IPX network control panel to select a specific frame type.
See Also
Click here
NetWare services
Click here
&Arial
58177609629201575
Unable to get default NetWare file server connection.
The server or workstation is unable to read the Domino server network address from NetWare bindery. The default NetWare file server isn't responding to requests. Check that a NetWare file server is available on the network and that all required NetWare client software is installed and running.
58177609629201576
NetWare isn't started or the NETWARE.DRV Windows driver isn't installed
A NetWare DLL file could not be found; NetWare SPX i
n't installed; or NetWare SPX could not be initialized. Check that all required NetWare client software is installed and running.
58177609629201581u
Unexpected NetWare error. See the log file on this system for error code.
Contact Lotus Customer Support.
58177609629201582t
Unexpected NetWare IPX or SPX error. See log file for error code.
Contact Lotus Customer Support.
5817760962?201583
NetWare IPX/SPX could not be initialized: Packet size is too large.
Contact Lotus Customer Support.7
58177609629201584s
NetWare service advertising (SAP) failed to start. Internal error in Notes NetWare port driver.g
Contact Lotus Customer Support.
58177609629201586
Error getting connection ID.
This message may appear when you start the server after installing the SPX/driver. This error occurs when a Novell file server, which you need to route SPX packets, is unavailable or the Domino server can't reach it. r
If an attempt to log into a Novell server from the Domino server fails or an SLIST shows no Novell servers are available, the network administrator must analyze the network to find out why the Domino server can't access a Novell file server.e
See Also
Click here
Domino and SPX
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe how to troubleshoot problems with TCP/IP:
Click here
Confirming that TCP/IP is properly configured
Click here
Click here
Common TCP/IP error messages
Click here
&Arial
Before you can use TCP/IP for communication, use the following tests to confirm that the configuration is properly set up:
1. Ping the remote system by specifying its TCP/IP address -- for example, ping 192.9.200.1. If this is unsuccessful, the TCP/IP software isn't properly installed and/or oonfigured. TCP/IP must be working before you can use it. Contact the TCP/IP software vendor or operating system vendor if you need assistance.
2. Ping the remote system by specifying its host name -- for example, ping server.company.com. If this is unsuccessful, the host name to TCP/IP address translation isn't working. If you can't ping by host name, the server or workstation will not be able to communicate with the server running on the remote system.
3. If you're using a local hosts file, make sure that it contains the names and addresses of every remote system with which you want to communicate.
4. If you're using the DNS, make sure that you have properly configured the TCP/IP software on this system to query the correct DNS server. Make sure that the DNS contains the names and addresses of every remote system with which you want to communicate. n
5. If you're using the NIS, make sure that you have properly configured the UNIX system for NIS./Make sure that the NIS hosts map contains the names and addresses of every remote system with which you want to communicate.
6. Ping the remote system by specifying the name of the Domino server running on the system -- for example, ping server. If this is unsuccessful and if the Domino server name and TCP/IP host name do not match, define the Domino server name as an alias for the TCP/IP host name in the local host's file, in the DNS, or in the NIS.
If the Domino server name oontains characters that are illegal in a TCP/IP host name -- for example, a space or ampersand (&) -- you can't perform this action. The server name must contain characters that are legal to a TCP/IP host name.
See Also
Click here
Domino and TCP/IP
Click here
YzDse
&Arial
Domino Administrator is the administration client for Notes and Domino. You can use the Domino Administrator to perform most administration tasks. This topic explains starting the Domino Administrator and navigatino its general layout.
144600409629227325
To start the Domino Administrator
There are three ways to start Domino Administrator:
Click the Domino Administrator icon on your desktop
In the Notes client, click the Domino Administrator bookmark button
In the Notes client, choose File - Tools - Server Administration
After you start the Domino Administrator, the Administration window appears. This window has three moin areas: the server list, tabs, and tools.
252066304292259021
To select a server to administer
To administer a server, you select the server from a server list. You can have multiple server lists, each of which is represented by a button. After you select a server, information about that server appears in all the tabs.
Buttons
Description
Favorites
Lists your "favorite" servers -- that is, the ones you administer most frequently. To add a server/to Favorites, choose Administration - Add Server to Favorites.
Domain
Lists all servers in a domain. You can also view servers by hierarchy or by network.
One button appears for each domain you administer. To add domains, see
Click here
"Setting Domino Administrator Preferences."
Click here
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
383918019229235150
To update the server lists
The first time you start the Domino Administrator, the system automatically creates a server list. To update the server list or lists, choose Administration - Refresh Server List.
To specify the server or servers the system uses to refresh your server lists, see
Click here
"Setting Domino Administrator Preferences."
Click here
144600409629227326
To use the tabs
General administration tasks are organized by the tabs described in the following table. Click a tab to display its contents or use the Administration menu to navigate among the tabs. For example, to move from the Files tab to the Replication tab, choose Administration - Replication.
Use to administer
People & Groups
People-related Domino Directory items -- such as, Person documents, groups, mail-in databases, and setup/profiles.
Files
Databases, templates, database links, and all other files in the server's data directory.
Server
Current server activity and tasks. This tab has four sub-tabs: Status, Analysis, Monitoring, and Statistics.
Messaging
Mail-related information. This tab has two sub-tabs: Mail and Tracking Center.
Replication
Replication schedule, topology, and events.
Configuration
All server configuration documents -- such as, the Server document, messaging and replication connections, and Web configuration documents.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
144600409629227327
To use the tooos
Most tabs have tools that appear on the right side of Domino Administrator. The available tools change based on which tab you click. For example, if you click the Files tab, the following tools appear: Disk Information, Directory, and Database.
To choose a tool, click the triangle to expand or collapse each set of tools.
For each tab, you can click the Tools triangle to hide or show the tools.
Note
Hiding tools on one tab ooes not hide the tools on other tabs.
You can also access tools by:
Right-clicking on certain objects. For example, on the People & Groups tab, right-click a Person document to access the People tools.
Using menus. For tabs that have tools, the appropriate tools menu appears in the menu bar. For example, when you click the Files tab, the Files menu appears.
See Also
Click here
Setting Domino Administrator prefe
ences
Click here
Click here
Server Properties
Click here
&Arial
This section describes how to set up and use the Domino Directory.
Click here
The Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
o
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
Click here
Multiple directories
Click here
In addition, the Reference section contains/information on
Click here
the LDAP schema.
Click here
H_dR
&Arial
58177609629201575a
The TCP/IP protocol stack reported that it ran out of memory.
This error occurs if the server attempts to connect to more servers than the current sockets configuration allows. You may need to configure additional sockets, or reduce the value in the Server_MaxSessions setting in thh NOTES.INI file.
581776096292015761
The Notes server isn't a known TCP/IP host.
This message indicates that a Domino server or Notes client was unable to resolve the server name with a TCP/IP address. This message may appear if the following conditions exist:
The server names and the TCP/IP host names do not match.
The servers are located in two or more DNS domains.
The servers are located in two or more Domino nahed networks.
Under these conditions, the server name is the only information available to initiate the TCP/IP connection. Since the systems are in different Domino networks, the Server document in the Domino Directory isn't consulted. As a result, the servers can't replicate, and users in one location can't connect to the server in the other location.
58177609629201577n
Unexpected TCP error.
Look in the log file to see the reported error cohe(s). Knowledge Base lists many of the error codes. If you find an error code that isn't in Knowledge Base, report it to Lotus Customer Support.
58177609629201578
The IBM TCP/IP library TCP32DLL.DLL could not be loaded.
The IBM TCP/IP library could not be loaded.
58177609629201579
The Windows Sockets library WINSOCK.DLL could not be loaded.
The DLL is supplied by the TCP/IP vendor's protocol stack. Verhfy that it exists and that it is located on the path.
58177609629201580
A TCP library could not be loaded because a function is missing from the DLL.
Verify that you're using either a Domino-certified or Domain-supported version of the TCP/IP protocol stack. Make sure you installed the vendor's protocol stack correctly, so that the files are located on the path and in the correct directories.
58177609629201581
The Domino server isn't a known TCP/IP host.
This message appears if the translation from server name to TCP/IP address fails. Follow these steps to troubleshoot the problem:
1. Verify that the server name is correct.
2. If you use a local hosts file for name resolution, enter the server's TCP/IP address and host name in the hosts file. If the server name does not match the TCP/IP host name, which is also known as the fully qualified domain name, enter the servex name as an alias for the host name. For example:
130.103.40.1 nss.lotus.com nss
For TCP/IP for the Macintosh, the host name and alias definitions should look like this:
nss.lotus.com A 130.103.40.1
nss CN nss.lotus.com
3. If you use NIS, for name resolution, ask the UNIX system administrator responsible for the NIS domain to register the server's TCP/IP address and host name. If the server name does not match the TCP/IP host name request that the server name be registered as an alias for the host name.
4. If you're using the DNS for name resolution, ask the administrator responsible for the DNS domain to register the server's TCP/IP address and host name. If the server name does not match the TCP/IP host name, request that the server name be registered as an alias for the host name.d
58177609629201582a
The TCP/IP port used by the Domain server is still in use on this system.
Xhe TCP/IP port is still active. Shut down the server and continue the operation on the Notes workstation.
58177609629201583
The remote TCP/IP host isn't running the Notes server, or the server is busy.R
The server is currently not running, or the server for some reason either can't accept another TCP/IP connection or Domain session. Start the server, or verify that it is running. Check the server to determine if its workload is unacceptably heavy.
58177609629201584
Unable to locate the Domain server's TCP/IP host. The TCP/IP domain name server may be down.
Use ping to verify that the DNS is running.
58177609629201585
The TCP/IP protocol stack reported that it ran out of memory.
Increase memory on the system. If you can't do this and this is a Domino server, edit the Port_MaxSessions setting in the NOTES.INI file to limit the number of sessions that can xun on this port.
58177609629201586
Insufficient TCP sockets are available. Consult your vendor's TCP/IP documentation to increase the maximum number of sockets
You have reached a TCP/IP socket limitation. To confirm that you have as many active TCP/IP sessions as servers, select File - Tools - Preferences - User Preference - Ports. Select the TCP/IP port, and choose Show Status. Information similar to the following appears:
Domain Session
Local Address
Foreign Address
00011EAD
130.103.40.2.1273.
130.103.40.157.1352
00021E9B
130.103.40.2.1274
130.103.40.254.1352
00031E9A
130.103.40.2.1275
130.103.46.155.1352
00041E94
130.103.40.2.1276
130.103.42.152.1352
00051E94
130.103.40.2.1277
130.103.46.63.1352
00061E98
130.103.40.2.1280
130.103.46.133.1352
00071E94
130.103.40.2.1281
130.103.46.29.1352
00091E97
130.103.40.2.1282o
130.103.46.157.1352
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
In this example, there are eight lines, meaning that there are eight active TCP/IP sessions. You can wait for sohe of these sessions to time out, or select File - Tools - Lock ID to log off all Domino servers and close the sessions.
58177609629201587a
The MacTCP driver isn't installed.
Verify that TCP/IP is installed properly and that you can ping the server.
58227609629201588D
This program requires that the Share.exe be loaded prior to running windows.
SHARE.EXE is a DOS program. Enter the word share at the DOS promxt. The program will load or you will see a message indicating that it is already loaded.
58227609629201589
The Notes _WSKAPI.DLL could not be loaded
Verify that the vendor's TCP/IP stack is properly installed and on the path.
58227609629201590
The TCP/IP vendor's interface library could not be loaded
Verify that the vendor's TCP/IP stack is properly installed and on the Path. If yox're using the DNS or a host file, you should be able to ping a server's host by IP address and then by name.
58227609629201591
The destination network is unreachable.
The TCP/IP stack can't assign this network address to the listener. The server is loading before the IBM TCP/IP stack fully initializes. Start TCP/IP and the Domino server or Notes workstation via the Startup Group icon in OS/2 Advanced Warp Server.
58227609629201598
There is a connection timeout field in the Notes dialog configuration box.
The default timeout is 5 seconds; however, you can increase the timeout.
See Also
Click here
Domino and TCP/IP
Click here
&Arial
For Notes and Domino to work properly with TCP/IP, the protocol stack on each computer must be configured properly. Notes connectivity relies on TCP/IP hommunication. The first step in troubleshooting TCP/IP should be to verify basic TCP/IP connectivity and configuration. A connectivity problem is often typified by the following errors:
"Request timed out"
- This error indicates that there is a connectivity issue; the error typically occurs when you use the Ping utility
"Server Not Responding"
This error can occur for a number of reasons. The steps below will resolve many of the problems assochated with this error. However, be sure to follow all the steps in the topic titled
Click here
Troubleshooting problems with TCP/IP connectivity
Click here
You use the PING executable to verify IP-level connectivity. For Notes to work properly with TCP/IP, the protocol stack on each machine must already be configured properly. n
Note
The PING command is available on all non-Macintosh environments.
1. Fxom the server, ping the server itself by numeric IP address.
For example, at a DOS prompt, type:
PING 131.103.50.159
and press ENTER.
This step confirms the following:
TCP/IP is installed and configured with a correct address.
If any other computer has the same IP address. A computer's IP address must be unique on a network segment; that is, only one computer on a network segment can have a particular IP address.
If this fails, TCP/IP is not set up properly on the local machine. Contact the site's network administrators for technical assistance.
2. From the server, ping the destination computer (the Notes workstation) by numeric IP address. This indicates if the path to the remote host is clear and whether you can communicate with IP through Network Routers. If this fails continue to Step 3.
3. From the workstation, ping the workstation by its own numeric IP address. If this fails conxinue to Step 4.
4. Ping the server from the server itself by its DNS Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) to verify that it was added to the network correctly; then ping the server from the workstation by FQDN.
For example, type:
PING Iodine.lotus.com
5. Ping by the server by DNS Alias Name from the server itself to verify it was added to the network correctly. Then ping the server from the workstation. Ideally the server host alias names all should be(the same as the Domino server names. Sometimes the server's FQDN may differ from the Domino server's. That is when the Alias name is used, being the same as the Domino/Notes server's name.
For example, type:
PING Iodine
If you reach this point and the connection is failing between workstation and server, try creating a Connection document in the Personal Address Book of the workstation. This document contains the numeric IP address of the target server computer. Loxus recommends that IP be resolved by DNS or Hosts and not by Connection documents.
Note
WINSOCK.DLL is the Windows Sockets interface provided with TCP/IP network software for Microsoft Windows. If you're using an incorrect (or incorrectly placed) version of WINSOCK.DLL, Notes may exhibit problems related to WINSOCK.
6. If pinging by numeric address succeeds, but pinging by the alias name fails, the problem's source is in name resolution(and not in physical network connectivity. The following table list the commands you use (depending on the operating environment the server or workstation uses) to gather the following information about the system's IP configuration:
IP address
Host name
If present, the default gateway.
If new information appears when the computer is restarted, record the infomation and call Lotus Support
After you've gathered this information, perform xhe steps in the task titled
Click here
"Checking name resolution."
Click here
Operating system
Command/location to use
Explanation
Macintosh
Control Panel, TCP/IP, Load Ping, "TCPIP Config" window
Not applicable
OS/2 Advanced Warp Server
Open the "TCP/IP Configuration" window.
Not applicable
UNIX
ipconfig <interface name> or
ifconfig <interface name>
Different swhtches or commands may be required for each UNIX platform; consult
a UNIX expert if necessary.
Windows NT
ipconfig (or see the Network settings in Control Panel).
Issue this command at a prompt, or see
the Network settings in Control Panel.
Windows 95
winipcfg (or see the Network settingx in Control Panel)
Issue this command at a prompt, or see
the Network settings in Control Panel.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
If connectivity appears to work, you need to check name-to-IP address resolution. Name-to-IP address resolution within an organization's private network space
can take one of two common forms: locally stored HOSTS files or Domain Name Service (DNS). A problem with name -to-IP address resolution is often indicated by the following errors:
"Notes Server is not a known Host" - This error depends on the IP environment you are in. This is usually associated with a host table entry problem. Follow all the "Troubleshooting Tools" steps in this section.
"Server not Responding" - This error can occur for a number of reasons, ahd the steps below will resolve many of the problems associated with this error. However, be sure to follow all the steps in
Click here
"Troubleshooting problems with TCP/IP connectivity
Click here
" WINS Name Resolution or LMHOSTS resolution are not supported under Notes or Domino.
1. Check for illegal characters in the hosts file.
Make sure there are no illegal characters (such as a space or a letter) in the numeric IP address; only humbers should appear. Each section of a dotted decimal numeric IP Address should be no longer than three numbers, and there should be four sections to an address (for example, 19.99.21.217).
Make sure there are no illegal characters in the Names Fields; only alphabetic characters, numbers and '-' (dashes) should appear. Spaces are not allowed. Underscores '_' are mapped as spaces within Notes, and should be avoided.
Note
Some IP stacks will(not accept underscore characters.
Make sure there is only one correctly named hosts file being used. Rename any other hosts file on the computer (except the current one).
Note any recent changes made to the HOSTS file. Confirm that the information in the hosts file is correct. The target machines that a computer may contact must be defined in the loca lhosts file.
Operating System
Location
Explanation
Macintosh
Macintosh System Folder
Not applicable
OS/2 Advanced Warp Servert
tcpip\etc\
Not applicable
UNIX
/etc/
Not applicable
Windows NT
wnnt40\system32\drivers\etc\
The OS directory might be renamedi
Windows 95
windows\
The OS directory might be renamed.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
2. Look at the Server documents and determine if the server's common name in the TCP port's Net Address Field is the same name as the TCP host name. If this is not the case, a name resolution alias is required in the HOSTS file, or in the DNS table. For example:
Server Name = Mailhub1
Fully qualified Internet host name = Mailhub1
Domain name = lotus.com
3. Look at the Server documents and determine if the server's common name in the TCP port's Net Address Field is the same name as the TCP host name. If this is not the case, a name resolution alias is required in the HOSTS file, or in the DNS table. For example:
Server Name = Mailhub1
Fully qualified Internet host name = Mailhub1
Domain name = lotus.com
[atIb^
&Arhal
This section shows
Click here
sample server configurations
Click here
and describes how to set up Domino servers.
Click here
Calendars and scheduling
Click here
Click here
Notes users
Click here
Click here
Paxtitioned servers
Click here
Click here
Remote access connections
Click here
Click here
Replicas and replication
Click here
Click here
Server-to-server connections
Click here
Click here
Setting up and configuring additional Domino servers
Click here
In addition, othhr sections of the Help database contain information on
Click here
Domino clusters
Click here
and
Click here
system monitoring,
Click here
as well as
Click here
system maintenances
Click here
topics like transaction logging, billing and managing servers, users, and groups.u
`SQgte
&Arial
The following topics present a fictitious company -- the Acme Corporation -- and the user and server configuration for the company. These topics describe a basic setup. Throughout the rest of the administration documentation, you'll see additional pieces of the Acme Corporation's configuration.e
Because this is an example, it does not present every possible system configuration; howhver, it provides a concise overview of the configuration process. i
The topics in this section illustrate the following:
Click here
Hierarchical naming scheme
Click here
Click here
Adding servers and users to the hierarchy
Click here
Click here
Hub servers
Click here
Click here
Mail ahd directory servers
Click here
Click here
Application servers
Click here
Click here
Passthru servers
Click here
Click here
Putting it all together
Click here
&Arial
To set up and configure additional Domino servers, you must complete these procedures.
1. Sht up the first Domino server in the domain.
2. s
Click here
Create a hierarchical name scheme
Click here
, based on your company's structure.
3.
Click here
Create a Certification Log (CERTLOG.NSF)
Click here
to record how you register additional servers and users. You create the Certification Log once. If you created one when setting up the first server or when installing a previous relhase, you do not need to create another one.
4.
Click here
Create organization certifier IDsn
Click here
and
Click here
organizational unit certifier IDs
Click here
, as required by the hierarchical name scheme.
5. Distribute certifier IDs to administrators at other sites.
6.
Click here
Add servers by registering them
Click here
with the appropriate certifier ID.
7. Install and set up each additional server.
8. Perform additional configuration procedures, based on the type of services, tasks, and programs that you want to run on the server.
&Arial
The Domino Directory, which previous releases referred to as the Public Address Book or Name and Address Book, is a database that Domino automatically creates on every server. The Domino Directory serves two purposes( It is directory of information about users, servers, groups, and other objects that you might include in the directory yourself -- for example, printers. It is also a tool that administrators use to manage the Domino system. For example, administrators create documents in the Domino Directory to connect servers for replication or mail routing, to register users and servers, to schedule server tasks, and so on.
Typically, a Domino Directory is associated with a Notes domain. When you register(users and servers in the domain, you create Person documents and Server documents in the Domino Directory. These documents contain detailed information about each user and server.
When you set up the first server in a Notes domain, Domino automatically creates the Domino Directory database and gives it the file name NAMES.NSF. When you add a new server to the domain, Domino automatically creates a replica of the Domino Directory on the new server.c
324832988829225748
Directory service features
In addition to the Domino Directory itself, Domino provides three directory service features: the directory catalog, directory assistance, and the LDAP service. These features help users find user names, e-mail addresses, and other information in the Domino Directory.
The directory catalog consolidates key information about users and groups from one or more Domino directories into a small, lightweight database. Notes users who use a local copy of thh directory catalog -- a mobile directory catalog -- can quickly address mail to users throughout the organization, even if the organization uses a large directory and/or multiple directories. In organizations with multiple Domino directories, a directory catalog on a server combines these directories into a single database so that a server can look up names in one database rather than in multiple Domino directories.e
Directory assistance is a feature that helps manage name lookups in organizaxions that use multiple Domino directories and/or third-party LDAP directories. A directory assistance database associates each Domino directory/LDAP directory with specific hierarchical names so that when looking up a hierarchical name, Domino first searches the directory that contains names in that hierarchy. a
You can set up a Domino server to run the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) service to enable LDAP clients to search for and modify information in the Domino Directory. The Homino LDAP service is LDAP v3 compliant.
See Also
Click here
Documents in the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Database performance features used by the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Domino Directory for a domain
Click here
Determining why multiple protocols won't run properly Network Configuration
Protocols\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\protocolsContentsAboutH_WHY_WON'T_MULTIPLE_PROTOCOLS_RUN_PROPERLY_ON_MY_SERVERS_AND_WORKSTATIONS?Topic1Determiniig why multiple protocols won't run properly AboutH_TROUBLESHOOTING_NETWORK_PROBLEMS_OVER02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
pt or fo
Troubleshooting AppleTalk Network Configuration
AppleTalk\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\AppleTalkContentsAboutH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_APPLETALK_PROBLEMSTopic1Troubleshooting AppleTalk AboutH_TROUBLESHOOTING_NETWORK_PROBLEMS_OVER02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
"Server Not Responding" setting up a Macintosh workstationNetwork Configuration
Macintosh\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\Macintosh workstationWorkstations\troubleshootingContentsAboutH_WHY_DO_I_GET_A_SERVER_NOT_RESPONDING_MESSAGE_WHILE_IM_SETTING_UP_A_MACINTOSH_WORKSTATIONTopic1"Server Not Yesponding" setting up a Macintosh workstationAboutH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_APPLETALK_PROBLEMS02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
n try ag
An asterisk appears for the zone name in the AppleTalk port statusNetwork Configuration
AppleTalk\port statusAppleTalk\zonesPort status\AppleTalkTroubleshooting\AppleTalkContentsAboutH_WHY_DOES_AN_ASTERISK_APPEAR_FOR_THE_ZONE_NAME_WHEN_I_DISPLAY_APPLETALK_PORT_STATUSTopic1An asterisk appears for the zone name in the AppleTalk port statusAboutH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_APPLETALK_PROBLEMS02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
H_COMMON_BANYAN_VINES_PROBLEMS_9248_OVER_MIDTOPIC_411728585629207015=Domino OS/2 Advanced Warp Server runs out of SPP sessionsH_COMMON_BANYAN_VINES_PROBLEMS_9248_OVER_MIDTOPIC_411728585629207016=Domino servers can)t be located after upgrading a VINES serverH_COMMON_BANYAN_VINES_PROBLEMS_9248_OVER_MIDTOPIC_411728585629207017=Notes workstations can't access a Domino server running VINESH_COMMON_BANYAN_VINES_PROBLEMS_9248_OVER_MIDTOPIC_411728585629207018=Notes workstation hangs attempting to access a Domino server over VINES02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
H_WHAT_DO_THESE_BANYAN_VINES_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_92337609629201575=<+!>A VINES administrator of this server's group must be logged on.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_BANYAN_VINES_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_92337609629201583=<+!>Change Disk: Cannot find VNSAPI.DLL. Please insert in drive A. <-!>H_WHAT_DO_THESE_BANYAN_VINES_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_92337609629201581=<+!>Duplicate Notes server names detected in VINES STDA. H_WHAT_DO_THESE_BANYAN_VINES_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_92337699629201577=<+!>Server could not be located with VINES StreetTalk.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_BANYAN_VINES_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_92337609629201580=<+!>Server name isn't a valid VINES StreetTalk name.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_BANYAN_VINES_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_92337609629201578=<+!>The system has not logged into VINES. <-!>H_WHAT_DO_THESE_BANYAN_VINES_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_92337609629201584=<+!>Unexpected VINES error - 1912.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_BANYAN_VINES_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_92337609629201576=<+!>Unexpeited VINES error. See log file for error code.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_BANYAN_VINES_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_92337609629201582=<+!>Unrecoverable application error - Terminating current application. <-!>H_WHAT_DO_THESE_BANYAN_VINES_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_92337609629201579=<+!>VINES service name does not match Notes name. <-!>02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
H_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_NETWARE_NETWORKS_1097_OVER_MIDTOPIC_57188569629202726=Domino servers on another Token Ring network connected by a source-routing bridge can't be seenH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_NETWARE_NETWORKS_1097_OVER_MIDTOPIC_57188569629202727=<+!>Notes workstations running$Novell NetBIOS can't see Domino servers running Novell NetBIOS02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
H_WHAT_DO_THESE_NETWARE_SPX_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201575=<+!>Unable to get default NetWare file server connection.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_NETWARE_SPX_ERROR_MESSAGES_MDAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201576=<+!>NetWare isn't started or the NETWARE.DRV Windows driver isn't installed<-!>.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_NETWARE_SPX_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201581=<+!>Unexpected NetWare error. See the log file on this system for error code. <-!>H_WHAT_DO_THESE_NETWARE_SPX_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201582=<+!>Unexpected NetWare IPX or SPX error. See log file for error code.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_NETWARE_SPX_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201583=<+!>NetWare IPX/SPX could$not be initialized: Packet size is too large.<-!>H_WHAT_DO_THESE_NETWARE_SPX_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201584=<+!>NetWare service advertising (SAP) failed to start. Internal error in Notes NetWare port driver.<-!>H_WHAT_DO_THESE_NETWARE_SPX_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201586=<+!>Error getting connection ID.02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
.AContentsAboutH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_TCP/IP_PROBLEMSTopic1Troubleshooting TCP/IP problemsAboutH_TROUBLESHOOTING_NETWORK_PROBLEMS_OVER02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshootdng Network Problems
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Confirming that TCP/IP is configured properlyNetwork Configuration
DNS\trdubleshootingNIS\troubleshootingTCP/IP\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\TCP/IPContentsAboutH_HOW_CAN_I_MAKE_SURE_THAT_MY_TCP/IP_CONFIGURATION_PROPERLY_SET_UPTopic1Confirming that TCP/IP is configured properlyAboutH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_TCP/IP_PROBLEMS02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
3937116896
YzDse
Using the Domino AdministratorServer Configuration
Administering\serversAdministration clientsDomino Administrator\startingDomino Administrator\usingDomino Administrator\using the server listDomino Administrator\using the tabsDomino Administrator\using the toolsServers\selecting to adminitterContentsOverviewH_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_NAVIGATION_OVERTopic1Using the Domino AdministratorOverviewH_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OVER
H_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_NAVIGATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_144600409629227325=To start the Domino AdministratorH_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_NAVIGATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_25206630429225902=To select a server to administerH_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_NAVIGATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_383918019229235150=To update the server listsH_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_NAVIGATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_144600409629227326=To use the tadsH_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_NAVIGATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_144600409629227327=To use the tools03 Administering the Domino System01 Sample Domino System Configuration
Print
[atIb^
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up and configuring additional Domino serversServer Configuration
Servers\configuringContentsAboutH_OVERVIEW_OF_SETTING_UP_ADDITIONAL_DOMINO_SERVERSTopic1Setting up and configuring additional Domino serversAboutH_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OVER03 Administering the Domino System02 Configuring Additional Domino Servers
Print
[atIb^
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
or had a software or hardware$problem that is disturbing communications.
393711689629254901
What you can do
If you're creating or editing a document, stop what you're doing and wait until the server is responding again so that you can save your work. If the server doesn't respond in a few minutes, call the Domino administrator.,
H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201575=<+!>The TCP/IP protocol stack reported that it ran out of memory.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201576=<+!>The Notes server isn't a known TCP/IP host.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201577=<+!>Unexpectld TCP error.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201578=<+!>The IBM TCP/IP library TCP32DLL.DLL could not be loaded.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201579=<+!>The Windows Sockets library WINSOCK.DLL could not be loaded.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201580=<+!>A TCP library could not be loaded because a function is missing from the DLL.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201581=<+!>The Domino,server isn't a known TCP/IP host.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201582=<+!>The TCP/IP port used by the Domain server is still in use on this system.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201583=<+!>The remote TCP/IP host isn't running the Notes server, or the server is busy.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201584=<+!>Unable to locate the Domain server's TCP/IP host. The TCP/IP domain name server may be down.H_WHAT_DO_THESL_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201585=<+!>The TCP/IP protocol stack reported that it ran out of memory.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201586=<+!>Insufficient TCP sockets are available. Consult your vendor's TCP/IP documentation to increase the maximum number of sockets<-!>.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201587=<+!>The MacTCP driver isn't installed.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58227609629201588=<+!>This p|ogram requires that the Share.exe be loaded prior to running windows.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58227609629201589=<+!>The Notes _WSKAPI.DLL could not be loaded<-!>.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58227609629201590=<+!>The TCP/IP vendor's interface library could not be loaded<-!>.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58227609629201591=<+!>The destination network is unreachable.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58227609629201592=<+!<There is a connection timeout field in the Notes dialog configuration box.02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
he same pr
TC\/IP problemNetwork Configuration
.AContentsOverviewH_TROUBLESHOOTING_PROBLEMS_WITH_TCP_IP_CONNECTIVITY_6146_OVERTopic1TCP/IP problemOverviewH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_TCP/IP_PROBLEMS02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
1. Check Connectivity.
2. Check Name Resolution.
3. Check Network Layout (large LAN or WAN issues).
Replacing a database's design could change many of its existing desi
Checking connectivityNetwork Configuration
\CP/IP\troubleshootingContentsStepsH_CHECKING_CONNECTIVITY_8085_STEPSTopic1Checking connectivityStepsH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_TCP/IP_PROBLEMS02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
@Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
the desi
Checking name resolutionNetwork Configuration
Name resolution\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\name-to-IP address resolutionContentsStepsH_CHECKING_NAME_RESOLUTION_9400_STEPSTopic1Checking name resolutionStepsH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_TCP/IP_PROBLEMS02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
Sample Domino System ConfigurationServer Configuration
.AContentsOverviewH_EXAMPLE_OF_A_DOMINO_SYSTEM_CONFIGURATION_OVERTopic1Sample Domino System ConfigurationOverviewH_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OVER03 Administering the Domino System01 Sample Domino System Configuration
Print
[atIb^
CN=David Mahar/O\=CAM/O=Lotus
Remote access connectionsServer Configuration
Remote connections\types ofServers\remote connectionsContentsAboutH_TYPES_OF_REMOTE_ACCESS_CONNECTIONSTopic1Remlte access connectionsAboutH_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OVER03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
Print
[atIb^
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
cted to, and call the other server directly.
See Also
Click here
Calling and disconnecting from servers
Click here
&Arial
You set up servers to connect remotely so that they can perform tasks, such as mail routing and replication. You can set up servers to connect remotely usini a modem or another communication device, such as an ISDN device. Domino supports the following types of remote access connections:
Connection type
Purpose
Click here
Notes Direct Dial-up
Click here
This connection uses modems and the X.PC protocol to let servers that are not physically connected on a LAN connect to other Domino servers. y
You can use a direct dial-up modem connection to connect servers using an asynchronous commuiication script. For example, a server uses a script file to connect to an X.25 PAD and a server on an X.25 network.
Click here
Network Dial-up
Click here
This connection is similar to a Notes Direct Dial-up connection except that the server uses a remote access connection to carry a network protocol instead of the X.PC protocol. After the connection is made, the server has access to Domino servers)and can use network services, such as printing.
Click here
Passthru (with Notes Direct Dial-up
Click here
This connection lets a server specify an intermediary server that acts as a "stepping stone" to gain access to a destination server. For an X.PC dial-up connection, the destination server does not need a modem if the passthru server has a modem and can route traffic to it. As an administratoy, you might set up a passthru server to enable mobile users to use one phone connection to access multiple servers.
To use passthru for a remote connection, you need to create a Notes Direct Dial-up Connection document for the passthru server to establish the remote connection.
Click here
Hunt group (with Notes Direct Dial-up)
Click here
This connection lets workstations dial into a huit group of modems on more than one passthru server. A hunt group is a collection of telephone extensions that is assigned one phone number. Any passthru server in the hunt group can receive a call and route it to the destination server. To use this feature, your telecommunications infrastructure must support hunt groups.r
To use a hunt group for this type of configuration, you create a Hunt group Connection document to establish the remote connection.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
In addition to the remote connection types listed in the previous table, Domino offers these connection types, which (except for X.25 and SNA) do not set up network connections. Some of these other connection types also require software or hardware purchased separately from Domino:
Connection Type
Purpose
For more information, see
X.25
Sets up direct connections to an X.25 network
Lotus Notes Connect for X.25 Install Guide and Administrator's Guide
SMTP
Sets up connections to Domino servers running Domino/Notes 4.6 or earlier
Extending the Domino Server (4.6 Release)
X.400
Sets up connections to servers running X.400 protocol
Domino X.400 MTA Configuration Guide
cc:Mail
Sets up connections to servers running cc:mail
Planning and Installation for cc:Mail
Sets up connections to IBM and IBM-compatible servers that use SNA (System)Network Architecture), IBM's proprietary networking protocol standard.o
Lotus Notes Connect for SNA Install and Administrator's Guide
News/NNTP Feed
Sets up connections to servers running NNTP
Click here
"Setting up the NNTP Service"
Click here
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Planning a remote server topologyi
Click here
Click here
Setting up servers to use modems
Click here
Click here
Creating server connections
Click here
&Arial
To set up remote Domino servers, you perform these procedures:
1.
Click here
Plan a remote server topology
Click here
2.
Click here
Install the modem(s).
Click here
3.
Click here
Set up the Domino communication ports.
Click heye
4. e
Click here
Create Connection documents to connect servers
Click here
See Also
Click here
Remote access connectionse
Click here
Click here
Connecting a server to a Network Dialup server
Click here
Click here
Connecting a server to a Notes Direct Dialup (dialup modem) server
Click here
&Arial
You can use Domino to make Network Dial-up connections using a remote access or remote LAN service, such as Microsoft Remote Access Service (RAS). Once servers and users connect to the remote access serviie, they can access the entire Domino network. Servers can use remote access service connections to perform tasks such as routing mail and replicating, as if they were directly on the same LAN.
A remote access service that supports ISDN, such as Microsoft RAS, lets a computer use an ISDN telephone line to connect to a LAN. Using remote access, you can transmit LAN packets from a computer to a remote LAN server, typically using the PPP protocol, which is an Internet protocol used for remote LAN)connections.a
1. Set up a remote access service that Domino supports (Microsoft Dial-up Networking, Macintosh PPP, or Apple Remote Access) on your network.
Note
Domino does not support a Macintosh server, but you can connect a Macintosh client to a Domino server through the remote access server.
2. Install network protocols on the remote access server. The protocols must be compatible with the remote access service.
3. Set up the Domino servers with one or more network protocols that are in common with the remote access server.
4. To connect the servers with the remote access server,
Click here
create Network Dial-up Connection documents.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Remote access connections
Click here
Click here
Encrypting Network Dialup Connecyion documents
Click here
VRe%>
&Arial
To set up servers to use passthru, perform these procedures:
1.
Click here
Create a passthru server topology.
Click here
2.
Click here
Set up the passthru server by editing its Server document.
Click here
3.
Click here
Set up destination servers by editing their Seyver documents to allow passthru access.
Click here
4.
Click here
Create Passthru Connection documents
Click here
in the Domino Directory to connect servers to the passthru server.
5. If any server and passthru server do not have a direct connection over the LAN, create a Connection document to connect the server to the passthru server. This Connection document can define any type of connection (Notes Direct)Dial-up, Network Dial-up, or Passthru).
See Also
Click here
Passthru servers and hunt groups
Click here
Click here
Example of Acme's passthru server topology
Click here
Click here
Creating server connections
Click here
&Arial
You can extend your corporate network to allow Notes workstations and Domino servers to communicate over the Internet.
Before setting up Internet connections, you must understand the basics about Internet security.
To make a Domino server available on the Internet:
1. e
Click here
Use an Internet Service Provider (ISP) to set up an Internet connection.
Ilick here
2.
Click here
Install TCP/IP protocol software for the leased-line connection.
Click here
3. g
Click here
(Optional) Set up a proxy server to connect through a firewall to the Internet.
Click here
4.
Click here
Test your Internet connection using a Ping utility.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Firewalls
Click here
Click here
Connecting servers to servers on the Internet
Click here
&Arial
By using an asynchronous communication script with the provided XPC protocol driver, you can access a X.25 packet assembler / disassembler (PAD), iodem pool (for outbound connections), or security device. The scripts are fully integrated into the XPC protocol driver. Script files are similar to modem command files in that you use them to set up communication equipment to work in a given environment. You use modem command files to set up modems; you use script files to set up other types of communication equipment. For example, you use a script file when connectivity involves the use of an X.25 PAD on an X.25 network.
A script file is a tixt file containing keywords, commands, and arguments that comprise a set of instructions that tell Domino how to make a connection between one piece of hardware and another. Script files have the extension .SCR and reside in the Data \ Modems subdirectory.
Script files are either acquire or connect scripts, depending on whether Domino runs the script before or after running the modem commands. Domino runs acquire scripts before issuing the modem commands found in the modem command file. For eyample, use an acquire script to access or "acquire" the modem. Domino acquires the appropriate modem in a modem pool before making the modem call.p
Domino runs connect scripts after running the modem commands in the modem command file. Use connect scripts to issue commands to an answering device, such as an X.25 PAD or a security device.o
Both workstations and servers can use scripts to make a call. After you create script files, distribute them to the end user or administrator whi sets up the workstation or server. The script files must reside on the workstation or server that needs to connect to the X.25 network, modem pool, or security device.
If you want to use Domino to connect directly over an X.25 network, use Lotus Notes Connect for X.25 (distributed separately from Domino). m
For more information, see
Click here
Acme's examples of X.25 network
Click here
and
Click here
modem pool
Click here
connections.
See Also
Click here
Using the X.25 driver
Click here
Click here
Acquire and connect scripts
Click here
Click here
Example of an Acme server to X.25 network connection
Click here
Click here
Connecting a server to a Notes Direct Dialup (dialup modem) server
Click here
Click here
Example of an Acme server to modem pool connection
Click here
=" ue
&Arial
By default, two replicas exchange all edits, additions, and deletions if the servers the replicas are on have the necessary access. However, you can customize repiication. For example, to save disk space, you can prevent the transfer of documents that are not pertinent to your site. Using replication settings, you can:
Click here
Limit the contents of a replica
Click here
Click here
Limit what a replica sends to other replicas
Click here
Click here
Assign miscellaneous replication settings, such as a replication priority_
Click here
You can specify replication settings on a new replica as you create it or on an existing replica. You can specify some replication settings for multiple replicas at once from a central source replica. You must have Manager access to a replica to set replication settings for it.
Caution
Replication settings are not intended to be used as a security measure.
This table summarizes the available replication settings.
You can manage these settings for multiple replicas from a central source replica.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Specifying replication settings for one replica
Click here
Click here
Specifying replication settings for multiple replicas from one source replica
Click here
Click here
Creating replicas on servers
Click here
&Arial
The Domino Directory contains documents that control directory services, manage server tasks, and define server-to-server communication. Domino automatically creates some documents when you perform certain administrative tasks. For example, Domino creates a new Person document when you register a user. You manually create other documents as you need them. For example, you cyeate a Connection document to define how two servers route mail or replicate. You can use tabs in the Domino Administrator to access these documents, or you can access them by opening the Domino Directory database.
Document
Description
Click here
Certificate
Click here
Describes a certifier ID, including public key information
Click here
Configuration Settings
Click here
Configures mail, LDAP, and the NOTES.INI file,
Click here
Connection
Click here
Provides server and domain information for connecting servers for mail routing, replication, and newsfeeds
Click here
Domain
Click here
Defines a domain used in mail routing: Foreign, Non-adjacent, Adjacent, Foreign Y.400, Foreign SMTP, Foreign cc:Mail, Global
Click here
External Domain Network Informationo
Click here
Contains names and addresses of servers in a secondary domain; allows Notes clients to connect to servers in the secondary domain
Click here
Group
Click here
Defines a list of users and servers for usi in mail addressing, ACLs, and server access lists
Click here
Holidaye
Click here
Defines Holiday documents that users can download to their calendars
Location T
Contains communication and other location-specific settings for use from a client; useful for administrators who also use the Domino Directory as their Personal Address Book
Click here
Mail-In Database
Click here
Defines the location and properties of a database that can receive mail
Click here
Person
Click here
Describes a user (Notes or non-Notes) in the directory
Schedules Domino server tasks and other programs to run
Click here
Resource
Click here
Defines a resource that Notes clients can reserve by using the calendar and scheduling feature
Click here
Server
Click here
Specifies server configuration settings, including server name, cluster name, security method, port, server tasks, Internet protocol, MTA, transaction logging, and so on
Click here
User Setup Profile
Click here
Defines a standard set of configuration options for Notes clients including connections, server accounts, replicas, bookmarks, and so on
iead title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
The Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Database performance features used by the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Domino Directory for a domain
Click here
&Arial
To replicate databases and exchange mail, servers must connect to each other. You can set up connections through a local area network (LAN) or use remote cohnections, such as a dial-up modem or remote access service. You can also make connections using a passthru server, which is a server that acts as an intermediary server between a client and its destination. If you want to connect servers over the Internet, you can do this as well.
To help establish connections, you can create Connection documents in the Domino Directory. A Connection document establishes a connection and specifies how and when servers connect to replicate and exchange mail.
Most Connection documents have two parts, a network part and a schedule part. The network part defines the connection: which server to connect to and how that connection is made. The schedule part determines when to perform activities such as replication and routing to a particular server. Information in the network part is used whenever connecting to a specified server, whether or not the connection is related to any task defined in the schedule part.
The number of Connection documhnts that you create for a server depends on whether the server is running the replication task and/or the mail task. When you set up a server, the Server document, by default, enables mail routing. When you create a Connection document, replication is enabled. Depending on how you use the server -- that is, whether you store mail files on it and/or application databases -- you must create a minimum of one or two Connection documents on the servers you set up for mail or replication.
Replicatioh between a pair of servers requires one Connection document on either of the servers. It requires one document because replication works bidirectionally -- that is, the calling server manages the exchange of information in both directions, to and from the answering server. n
Mail routing between a pair of servers requires one Connection document on each server because mail routing between servers works in only one direction. For example, Server A needs a Connection document to route mail to Sexver B. And Server B needs a Connection document to route mail to Server A.
If you want to route mail between Domino and non-Domino mail systems, you must, among other things, create a Foreign Domain document in the Domain Directory.
Servers can also use information gathered from an External Domain Network Information document to make a connection. As an administrator, you configure this docxment to retrieve names and addresses of servers in another domain so that users or servers do not need to create Connection documents to connect to servers in that domain.
Before you create Connection documents, plan a server connection topology for your system.
See Also
Click here
Planning a topology for server connections
Click here
Click here
Setting up external domain lookups
Click here
Click here
Creating server connections
Click here
&Arial
To determine how to configure Connection documents, you must plan a server topology. The topology is a plan for how servers connect to each other. When planning a server topology, keep in mind that you want to keep the number of Connection documents to a minimum ahd that you want to keep the number of "hops" -- that is, stops along the way to a destination -- to a minimum.
These factors influence server topology:
Number of servers in the company, and whether all the servers are in the same or different Notes named networks
Location of servers -- that is, whether they are in the same domain or in a foreign domain
Tasks running on the server -- replication, mail
Function of the server in the topology -( passthru, dial-in, network dial-up (remote access service)
There are several approaches to server topology. Depending on the above factors, your company may use one or more of these approaches in various parts of the overall system. Some frequently used topologies include hub-and-spoke and peer-to-peer.
See Acme's
Click here
example of server topologies
Click here
for more information.
See Also
Click here
Server-to-server connections
Click here
Click here
Planning a remote server topology
Click here
Click here
Examples of topology
Click here
&Arial
You can make a connection to a server from either a workstation or another server; the method for determining the path is similar whether you use a workstation or server.
A server uses this logic to determine how to connect to another server:
1. The connecting server tries to connect using the same method it uxed the last time it made a successful connection to the destination server. Note these two exceptions:
If the server never connected to the destination server, the server searches for a path (consisting of a network port and any passthru servers) to the destination server.
If the server has connected previously but the connection now fails, the server conducts a new path search if it is the first attempt of the day.
2. In searching for the destination server path, the connecting server performs these actions:
The server checks to see if it is already has a WAN port connection to the destination server.
The server examines normal-priority Connection documents in the Domino Directory for Connection information (to find a path to the destination server). A normal-priority Connection document is one that has Normal selected in the "Usage priority" field.
If multiple normal-priority Connection documents exist for the same destinathon server, the server uses Connection documents in this following order (based on their Connection type):
Local Area Network
Network Dialup
Notes Direct Dialup
Passthru server
Hunt group of passthru servers
If the server uses a passthru Connection document, then Notes must be able to find a path to the passthru server. You can use a Connection document (Local Area Network, Network Dialup, Notes Direct Dialup, Passthru, or Hunx Group) to define this path.
3. The connecting server checks information stored in memory about other servers in the server's Notes named network. It uses this information to define a path to the destination server. The server reads this information from Server documents in its local Domino Directory.
4. If connecting server's local Domino Directory does not contain information about the destination server, it tries to connect directly to the destination server on the LAN by(using the server common name as its address.
5. The connecting server checks the low-priority Connection documents. A low-priority Connection document is one in which Low is selected in the "Usage priority" field.
6. If the connecting server still cannot find a path to the destination server, it issues a message that a connection is not possible.
Note
For workstations connecting to servers, the search logic is the same except that the(workstation tries to use the passthru server listed as default in the Location document to make the connection if Steps 1 through 5 fail. If the Location document does not define a default passthru server and the workstation is already connected to a server over a Notes Direct Dial-up connection, the workstation uses that server as a passthru to reach the destination server.
To test whether you can connect to a server through a specific port, use you can trace the connection, using the syntax:(
Trace port!!! servername
You can display information on how a server makes a connection by viewing the information in the Miscellaneous Events view in the log file (LOG.NSF). You can change the amount of information about the connection recorded in the log file by changing the log level.
See Also
Click here
Server-to-server connections
Click here
Click here
Xracing network connections
Click here
Click here
The Domino server log (LOG.NSF)
Click here
&Arial
Based on your server topology, you need to create one or more of these connections:
Click here
Connecting two servers on a LAN
Click here
Click here
Connecting a server to a Notes Direct Dialup (dialup modem) sexver
Click here
Click here
Connecting a server to a Network Dialup server
Click here
Click here
Connecting a server to a passthru server
Click here
Click here
Connecting servers to servers on the Internet
Click here
See Also
Click here
Server-to-server(connections
Click here
Click here
Remote access connectionsr
Click here
&Arial
To test whether you can connect to a server, use the Trace Connection feature. Results of a Trace Connection provide detailed information about the steps involved when cohnecting to a server and are useful in troubleshooting network connection problems.
When you attempt to connect to a server, network trace information automatically appears on the status bar of a Notes workstation or on the server console, depending on where you initiated the connection attempt. You can use the NOTES.INI Console_LogLevel setting to control the level of detail that messages on the status bar contain.
To trace a connection, you can enter this command at the console8
Trace servername
See Also
Click here
How servers make a connection
Click here
Click here
Trace
Click here
pzuU6>=
&Arial
An External Domain Network Information (EDNI) document allows users to connect more easily to servers outside of their domain. Without this document, Domino users may need Connection documents to supply network addresses for connections made to servers in an exthrnal domain. The EDNI document is stored in the Domino Directory and contains names and addresses of servers from an external domain that use a particular protocol. When users try to connect to a server in an external domain, their home server provides information from this document to make the connection.
When creating the EDNI document, you specify the domain that the servers are in and the specific protocol. In many cases, TCP/IP is the only protocol for which you may need a document. You(also specify a server in your local domain that requests the information (Requesting Server) and a server in the external domain that supplies the information (Information Server).
Before creating an EDNI document, determine if the connection information is useful for the domain. For example, if you are using the NetBIOS protocol, which isn't a routable protocol, a direct connection to the external domain may not be possible even if you have the network address of the server in an EDNI documeht. Also, if an external domain server has multiple TCP/IP ports, the host name or address returned to the EDNI document may not be the address of the appropriate port to use. Because each protocol has its own restraints, you should thoroughly research and test the external domain lookup capability using the network system configuration at your organization before using it.
You can create the EDNI document from any server in the local domain. At a scheduled time you define, the Requesting Servex contacts the external domain server to update address information. It then places the information in an administration request for processing. When the Administration server processes the request, it puts the information in a response to the EDNI document in the Domino Directory. u
Because the Requesting Server gathers information from Server documents in an external domain, these documents need to be configured properly to enable successful server name lookups. For example, a document with a(fully qualified host name or IP address would enable a successful lookup, but a document with only the server common name may not (unless that common name were a full host name).n
The data from an external domain server lookup resolves client requests for a server address only; it does not add additional server names to a client's request for a list of servers.
The EDNI document works with the getadrs server program. Before you can run the getadrs program, you must first set it ux as a server add-in program.a
220830643229216834
To set up an External Domain Network Information document
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Select the domain's Domino Directory in the "Use Directory on" field.
3. Click Server, and then click External Domain Network Information.
4. Click Add External Domain Network Information.
5. Complete these fields, and click Save ahd Close:
Field
Enter
Requesting server
The name of the server that performs the request for external domain information
Information server
The name of the server in the external domain from which the Requesting Server obtains information
Domain to query
The name of the external domain
Protocols to query
The name of one or more protocols in the external domain to query
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Server-to-server connections
Click here
Click here
Running server tasks
Click here
&Arial
After you install and set up servers in a Notes domain, perform these procedures to set up the Domino Directory for the domain.
1.
Click here
Set up access to the Domino Directory.
Click here
2.
Click here
Schedule replication for the Domino Directory.
Click here
3. (Opxional)
Click here
Customize the Public Directory Profile.
Click here
4. (Optional)
Click here
Set up a mobile directory catalog.
Click here
See Also
Click here
The Domino Directory
Click here
`SQgte
&Arial
Notes users are people who use the Notes client to access Domino servers and databases and have a Notes ID, a Person document, and, if they use Notes Mail, a mail file.
To set up Notes users, you can register them in Notes or migrate them from an external mail system or directory. Before you begin to add users, it is best to specify default settings that Notes applies during registration.
To add users, you register them with the appropriate certifier ID, which generates(a user ID and certificates that allow users appropriate system access. After registering Notes users, you need to prepare the installation files so users can install Notes on their workstations.
To set up Notes users, you perform these tasks:
1.
Click here
Define default settings for user workspace and user registration.
Click here
2.
Click here
Register users.
Click here
3.
Click here
Make install files available to users so they can install and set up Notes.
Click here
In addition to Notes users, a Domino server can support these non-Notes users:
Click here
IMAP
Click here
Click here
LDAP
Click here
Click here
NNTP
Click here
Click here
POP3
Click here
Click here
Click here
See Also
Click here
Defining default settings for users
Click here
r4>,wte
&Arial
You create and modify groups from the Domino Administrator. You can also use the Web Administrator to create and modify groups. You can nest one or more groups within an existing group, that is, create a group and then add one or more existing groups as members of the new group. For mail-routing, you can nest up to five levels of groups. Hor all other purposes, you can nest up to six levels of groups.
55038956829238418
To create a group
1. Make sure that you have Editor access or the GroupCreator role in the Domino Directory on the registration server.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
3. From the Servers pane, choose the server to work from.
4. Select Domino Directories, and then select Groups.
5. Clihk Add Group.
6. Enter a name for the group in the Group Name field. Use any of these characters: A - Z, 0 - 9, & - . _ ' / (ampersand, dash, period, space, underscore, apostrophe, and forward slash) for the name. A group name can be a maximum of 64 characters in length. For easier administration, use a name without spaces. Do not use a name that is in use as the name of an organizational unit in the hierarchical name scheme.o
Note
Don't use(a 4-digit name for a group. For example, don't use 5001 as a group name.r
7. Select a group type from the Group type field. The Group type specifies the purpose of the group and determines the views in the Domino Directory where the group name appears. For example, mailing list groups appear in the Mail Users view, and access control groups appear in the Access Control view. Using specific group types improves performance by reducing the size of view indexes in the Domino Directory.
Group type
0'mNU
Purpose
Multi-purpose
0'mNU
Use for a group that has multiple purposes -- for example, mail, ACLs, and so on
Access Control List only
0'mNU
Use for adding to ACLs
Mail only
0'mNU
Use for mailing list groxps
Servers only
0'mNU
Use for server groups
Deny List only
0'mNU
Use to add terminated users or other users. The Administration Process cannot delete any member of the group.
8. (Optional) Enter a description of the group in the Description field.
9. Click Members, select user(s), sexver(s), or group(s) to add, click Add, and then click OK.
10. Click Save and Close.
408470185629229765
To add members to a group
1. Make sure that you have Editor access or the GroupCreator role in the Domino Directory on the registration server.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
3. From the Servers pane, choose the server to work from.
4. Select Domino Directories, and xhen select Groups.
5. Open the appropriate Group document.
6. Click Edit Group.
7. Click Members, select user(s), server(s), or group(s) to add, click Add, and then click OK.
8. Click Save and Close.
62698662429208233
To delete members from a group
1. Make sure that you have Editor access or the GroupCreator role in the Domino Directory on the registration server.
2. From the Domino Ahministrator, click the People & Groups tab.
3. From the Servers pane, choose the server to work from.
4. Select Domino Directories, and then select Groups.
5. Open the appropriate Group document.
6. Click Edit Group.
7. Click Members, select user(s), server(s), or group(s) to delete, click Remove, and click OK. To remove all members from the group, do not select any members; just click Remove All.
8. Click Save anh Close.
318268387229277569
To create a Terminations group
You may want to create a group for people who no longer have access to specific servers in your organization. When you are deleting a person from the Domino Directory, you can then add that person's name to a Terminations group that is assigned a group type of Deny List Only. This is particularly useful for preventing terminated employees from accessing servers.
1. Create a group named Terminhtions and assign it a group type of Deny List Only. For more information on creating groups, see "
, but on thh Delete User Options dialog box, in the field "Add to group", enter the group name Terminations. Click OK
3. Continue the delete process as usual.
See Also
Click here
Creating Group and Person documents with the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
Using groups
Click here
Click here
Managing groups
Click here
r4>,wte
&Arial
Before registering users, create a User Setup Profile to define some settings that appear by default on user workstations and in Location documents. The defaults you specify can include Internet and passthru server settings, as well as a set of specific databases that appear on each user's workspace. User Setup Profiles make registering users easy and ensure a level of consistency in user settinhs. In addition, when you assign settings such as default connections to remote servers (which creates Connection documents), you make user setup tasks easier.
When you register users, you associate them with a specific profile so they receive a specific group of settings. You may want to create multiple profiles in your organization, each one tailored to a particular group of users. For example, you can create profiles to use when registering people in the marketing department or people who whrk on the east coast.
Before you create the profile, make sure that you have already set up your Domino system for any or all of the following:o
Domain search server
Web Navigator and InterNotes
v server (the server that stores the Web Navigator database)
Databases that you want add to the user workspacen
Mobile directory (or client directory) catalogs
Passthru servers, LAN servers, Internet servers, and remote servers. The usex setup program creates a Connection document in each user's Personal Address Book for servers you specify in the profile.
TCP/IP and NDS Notes name servers
Host domains where Java applets are assumed to be safe
Proxy servers
After you create and assign a User Setup Profile, you can modify or add settings and then distribute the new profile to users.
See Also
Click here
Creating a User Setup Profile
Click here
Click here
Defining default settings for users
Click here
Click here
Setting up Notes users
Click here
`SQgte
&Arial
To make a database available to users in different locations, on different networks, or in different time zones, you create replicas. All replicas share a replica ID which is assigned when the database is first created. The file names of xwo replicas can be different, and each replica can contain different documents or have a different database design; however, if their replica IDs are identical, replication can occur between them.
As users add, edit, and delete documents in different replicas of a database, the content in the replicas is no longer identical. To ensure that the content in all replicas remains synchronized, you use Connection documents to schedule replication between the servers that store the replicas. Then muhtiple sites, teams, and users can make changes to a database and share those changes with everyone else who has access to that database. In addition, using replicas and scheduling replication reduces network traffic. Users never need to connect to a single central server that stores the only replica of a particular database; instead, they can access a replica of that database on one or more local servers.
These distributed replicas can also be Web sites that are hosted on different Domino serxers. Then users aren't dependent on one server when they attempt to access critical applications over the Internet. If one server is unavailable, users can access another replica of the database on another server. You can also use replicas to help manage ongoing Web site design. On one server, you can set up a Web staging area where you design and test new pages. When the design changes are tested and ready to be released, you can replicate this server with the server storing the replica of the Web site thht is available to users. By using replicas and replication this way, you prevent Web users from seeing your "work-in-progress."
A replica of a database isn't the same as a copy of a database that you make by choosing File - Database - Copy. Although a copy of a database may look the same as the original database, a copy doesn't share a replica ID with the original database and so it can't replicate with it. e
For an example of setting up replicas, see the chapter "Sample Domino Syxtem Configuration."
174150112029205031
Deciding when to create a replica
Plan your replica strategy carefully, and create replicas on servers only when necessary. The more replicas, the greater the demand on server and network resources and the greater the need for additional maintenance. To prevent unnecessary proliferation of replicas, assign Create Replica server access to only a few administrators. Then tell users and application developers to send their requhsts for new replicas to these administrators.
Create a replica of a database to:
Improve performance of a heavily used database
Distribute network traffic
Keep a database that you're redesigning separate from a production version of the database
Keep a database available even if one server goes down
Make a database available to users in remote locations
Provide a replica containing only a subset of information that ix relevant to a particular workgroup
Set up Domino system administration -- for example, you must create replicas of the Domino Directory, the Administration Requests database, and other critical system databases
Place a replica of a master template on each server that stores a database that inherits from the master template
Create a backup database from which you can restore information if data becomes corrupted; since corrupted data often replicates, use this only hs a secondary backup method.
Keep in mind that two replicas will contain slightly different content between replications. If users need access to the most up-to-date information in a database, you can create replicas on clustered servers and then set up replication in clusters. In a cluster, all replicas are always identical because each change immediately replicates to other servers in the cluster.n
See Also
Click here
Sample Domino Systhm Configuration
Click here
Click here
Connecting servers for replication
Click here
Click here
Customizing server-to-server replication
Click here
6Pfue
&Arial
For server-to-server replication, the Replicator on one server calls another Domino server at scheduled times. By defaulx, the Replicator is loaded at server startup.
To schedule replication between servers, you create Connection documents that describe when servers connect to update replicas. As users add, edit, and delete documents in a database, the replicas contain slightly different information until the next time the servers replicate. Because replication transfers only changes to a database, the network traffic, server time, and connection costs are kept to a minimum.
During scheduled replicaxion, by default, the initiating server first pulls changes from the destination server and then pushes changes to the destination server. As an alternative, you can schedule replication so that the initiating server and destination server each pull changes or so that the initiating server pulls changes only or pushes changes only.
You can also use the server commands Pull, Push, and Replicate to initiate replication between servers.
174150112029205031
Replicatioh, step-by-step
1. The Replicator remains idle until Server A initiates replication to Server B.
2. As a security precaution before replication, the two servers authenticate their identities in an exchange involving their public and private keys. First, the two servers find a certificate in common. Next, they test each other's certificate to ensure it is authentic.
3. The two servers compare lists of databases to identify databases with identical replica IDs(
4. The servers check the time when each database was last modified to see if that time is more recent than the date of the last successful replication event recorded in the replication history. This step enables servers to determine that a database needs to be replicated.
5. For each modified database, both servers build a list of the document, design element, and ACL changes that occurred since the last replication with the other server.
6. For each modifihd database, Server A checks the database ACL to determine what changes Server B can make to its replica, and Server B checks the ACL to determine what changes Server A can make to its replica.
7. The transfer of document, design, and ACL changes takes place. For documents, the servers replicate only the fields that have changed, rather than replicating the entire documents. For documents that were deleted, deletion stubs remain, enabling the replicator to replicate the deletions. To save dixk space, Domino removes these deletion stubs according to the purge interval that is set in the database replication settings.
8. One of the following occurs:v
If replication completes successfully, Server A uses the time stamp from Server B to record in the replication history the time when replication was completed. Server B uses the time stamp from Server A to do the same.
If replication fails to complete successfully, the time stamps aren't recorded in the rexlication history so that future replications use the earlier time stamp. The replication failure is recorded in the Replication Events view of the log file.
Planning scheduled replication between servers
Because replication can involve the movement of large amounts of data, how you set up and schedule replication has significant performance consequences. A well-planned replication schedule, tailored to your company's infrastructure and usage patterns, prhvents uneven server workloads and excessive network congestion. Regularly scheduled replication ensures replicas remain synchronized.
Consider the following when establishing a replication schedule:
Click here
Replication topology
Click here
Click here
The number of Connection documents you needt
Click here
Click here
The type of replication thht's appropriate
Click here
Click here
When replication will occur
Click here
Click here
The databases that will replicateq
Click here
Click here
The priority of databases that will replicatea
Click here
Click here
A time limit for replication
Click here
Click here
Multiple replicators
Click here
See Also
Click here
Connecting two servers on a LAN
Click here
Click here
Connecting a server to a Notes Direct Dialup (dialup modem) server
Click here
Click here
Creating replicas on servers
Click here
&Arial
You add the names of servers to a database
Click here
ACL in the same way that you add the names of people.
Click here
The access lexel given to a server in an ACL determines what, if any, changes that server can replicate to the replica. This table describes access levels in terms of server access, from the highest access to the lowest.
Access level
Allows a server to push these changest
Assign to
Manager
ACL settings
Click here
Database encryption settings
Click here
Click here
Replication settings
Click here
All elements allowed by lower access levels
Servers you want to use as a source for ACL changes. For tight database security, give this access to as few servers as possible. In a hub-and-spoke server configuration, you typically give the hub server Manager access.
Designer
Design elements
All elements allowed by lower access levels
Servers you want to use as the source for design changes. Use Manager access instead if you want one server to control ACL and design changes.
Editor
All new documents~
All changes to documents
Servers that users use only to add and modify documentx. In a hub-and-spoke configuration, you typically give the spoke servers Editor access.
Author
New documents
No servers. You don't typically use this access for servers.
Reader
No changes; server can only pull changes
Servers that should never make changes. Servers in the OtherDomainServers group are often given Reader achess.
Depositor
New documents. Also prevents the server from pulling changes.
No servers. You don't typically use this access for servers.
No Access
No changes. Also prevents the server from pulling changes.
Servers to which you want to deny access. Servers in the OtherDomainServers group are sometimes given No Access.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
A database that doesn't replicate should have at least one server in its ACL to serve as the administration server for the database. This allows the Administration Process on a server to update names in the ACL when names in the organization change.m
174150112029205031
Access level privileges
For each(access level, you can select or deselect these
Click here
privileges
Click here
Create documents
Delete documents
Create personal agents
Create personal folders/viewsc
Create shared folders/views
Create LotusScript/Java agents
Read public documents
Write public documents
In general, for servers, enable all the privileges that the selected accesx level allows. This ensures that the server has access that is as high as users might have and can replicate all user changes. However, to prevent certain changes from replicating without deselecting privileges for each user, you can deselect a particular privilege for a server entry in the ACL. For example, to prevent all document deletions made in a database on a particular server from replicating, deselect "Delete documents" in the ACL entry for the server. Then when users who have "Delete documents" ahcess in the ACL delete documents, the deletions don't replicate.
See Also
Click here
Guidelines for setting server access to databases
Click here
Click here
Default server groups in an ACL
Click here
Click here
Setting up a database ACL
Click here
=" ue
&Arial
You can use either of these methods to create replicas:e
Click here
Use the Administration Process
Click here
to create replicas of multiple databases on multiple destination servers
Click here
Manually create one replica
Click here
of a database if you don't have access to the Domino Administrator or if you want to adjust replication and other settings as you create the replica
When you create a replica, with the Administration Process or manually, you can use scheduled replication to populate the replica rather than populate it immediately. New, unpopulated replicas are known as replica stubs. When the Administration Process creates a replica stub, it's a wildcard replica stub, which meahs that any server, not just the server used to create the replica stub, can populate the replica stub. If there are several replicas of a database, the wildcard replica stub is likely to be populated more quickly than if only the server that created the replica could populate it.
For information on creating replicas on Notes clients, see Notes 5 Help.
For information on the Administration Process, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
See Also
Click here
Replicas and replication
Click here
DP15aLP
Setting up servers to use modemsServer Configuration
Remote servers\setting upServers\remote connectionsContentsAboutH_SETTING_UP_SERVERS_TO_USE_MODEMSTopic1Setting up servers to use modemsAboutH_TYPES_OF_REMOTE_ACCESS_COHNECTIONS03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up servers to use h Network Dial-up connectionServer Configuration
Connection documents\Network DialupNetwork Dialup\setting up servers to useContentsAboutH_OVERVIEW_SETTING_UP_SERVERS_TO_USE_A_REMOTE_ACCESS_SERVICE_(NETWORK_DIALUP)Topic1Setting up servers to use a Network Dial-up connectionAboutH_TYPES_OF_REMOTE_ACCESS_CONNECTIONS03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
VRe%>
Setting up servers to use passthruServer Configuration
Passthru servers\setting up servers to useContentsAboutH_OVERVIEW_SETTING_UP_PASSTHRU_SERVERSTopic1Setting up servers to use passthruAboutH_TYPES_OF_REMOTE_ACCESS_CONNECTIONS03 Admhnistering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up servers for Internet accessServer Configuration
Internet\setting up servers forServers\setting up for Internet accessContentsOverviewH_TO_MAKE_A_DOMINO_SERVER_AVAILABLE_ON_THE_INTERNET_OVERTopic1Setting up servers for Internet accessOverviewH_TYPES_OF_REMOTE_ACCESS_CONNECTIONS03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using scripts to access an X.25 network, modem pool, or security deviceServer Configuration
Modem pool\accessing with scriptsScripts\describedSecurity devices\accessing with scriptsX.25 network\accessing with scriptsContentsStepsH_ACCESSING_AN_X25_NETWORK_MODEM_POOL_OR_SECURITY_DEVICETopic1Using scripts to ahcess an X.25 network, modem pool, or security deviceStepsH_TYPES_OF_REMOTE_ACCESS_CONNECTIONS03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Server-to-server connectionsServer Configuration
Connection documents\describedServers\connectingContentsAboutH_SERVER_TO_SERVER_CONNECTIONSTopic1Server-to-server connectionsAboutH_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OVER03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Server Connections
Print
[atIb^
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Planning a topology for server connectionsServer Configuration
Server topology\planningContentsAboutH_PLANNING_A_TOPOLOGY_FOR_SERVER_CONNECTIONSTopic1Planning a topology for server connectionsAboutH_SERVER_TO_SERVER_CONNECTIONS03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Servhr Connections
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
How servers make a connectionServer Configuration
Servers\connections betweenContentsAboutH_HOW_SERVERS_MAKE_A_HONNECTIONTopic1How servers make a connectionAboutH_SERVER_TO_SERVER_CONNECTIONS03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Server Connections
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating server connectionsServer Configuration
.AContentsOverviewH_CONNECTING_SERVERS_OVERTopic1Creating server connectionsOverviewH_SERVER_TO_SERVER_CONNECTIONS03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Server Connections
Print
pubnames_v_Connections
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Tracing network connectionsServer Configuration
Connections\tracingNetwork connections\tracingServers\tracing connectionsTracing\network connectionsContentsOverviewH_TRACE_CONNECTIONS_OVERTopic1Tracing network connectionsOverviewH_SERVER_TO_SERVER_CONNECTIONS03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Server Connections
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
Setting up external domain lookupsServer Configuration
Connections\external domainDomains\setting up external lookupsEDNI document\describedExternal Domain Network Information document\describedServe{s\connecting to external domainContentsOverviewH_SETTING_UP_EXTERNAL_DOMAIN_SERVER_LOOKUPS_OVERTopic1Setting up external domain lookupsOverviewH_SERVER_TO_SERVER_CONNECTIONS
H_TRACE_CONNECTIONS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_220830643229216834=To set up an External Domain Network Information document03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Server Connections
Print
pubnames_v_External_Domain_Network_Information
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
`SQgte
Setting up Notes usersServer Configuration
Notes users\setting upUsers\setting up Notes and non-NotesContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_USERSTopic1Setting up Notes usersStepsH_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OVER03 Administering the Domino Sys{em05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
Print
[atIb^
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
r4>,wte
Creating and modifying groupsServer Configuration
Gro{ps\adding members toGroups\creating and modifyingGroups\deleting members fromUsers\adding to GroupsContentsStepsH_CREATING_AND_MODIFYING_GROUPS_STEPSTopic1Creating and modifying groupsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_USERS
H_CREATING_AND_MODIFYING_GROUPS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_55038956829238418=To create a groupH_USING_GROUPS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_408470185629229765=To add members to a groupH_USING_GROUPS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_62698662429208233=To delete members from a groupH_CREATING_AND_MODIFYING_GROUPS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_318268387;29277569=To create a Terminations group03 Administering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
?PrintDIALOG 3022 256
`SQgte
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
The User Setup+ProfileServer Configuration
User Setup Profiles\describedContentsStepsH_CREATING_A_USER_SETUP_PROFILETopic1The User Setup ProfileStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_USERS03 Administering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
Print
`SQgte
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Replicas and replicationServer Configuration
Database replicas\describedReplicas\describedReplication\describedContentsOverviewH_REPLICAS_OVERTopic1Replicas and replicationOverviewH_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OVER
H_ABOUT_REPLICATION_MIDTOPIC_174150112029205031=Deciding when to create a replica03 Administering the Domino System06 Scheduling Replication
Print
[atIb^
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
How server-to-server replication works Server Configuration
Replication\describedContentsAboutH_ABOUT_HOW_REPLICATIKN_WORKS_Topic1How server-to-server replication works AboutH_REPLICAS_OVER
H_ABOUT_HOW_REPLICATION_WORKS__MIDTOPIC_174150112029205031=Replication, step-by-stepH_ABOUT_SCHEDULING_AND_REPLICATION=Planning scheduled replication between servers03 Administering the Domino System06 Scheduling Replication
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting server access for proper database replicationServer Configuration
Access level privileges\databaseDatabases\access level privilegesReplicas\access levelsReplication\access levelsReplication\deleted documentsServers\access levels forContentsOverviewH_SETTING_ACCESS_FOR_PROPER_DATABASE_REPLICATION_OVERTopik1Setting server access for proper database replicationOverviewH_REPLICAS_OVER
H_SETTING_SERVER_ACCESS_FOR_PROPER_DATABASE_REPLICATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_174150112029205031=Access level privileges06 Managing Domino Databases03 Creating and Customizing Replicas on Servers
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
elopm
Creating replicas on serversServer Configuration
Administration Process\creating replicas withReplica stubs\wildcardReplicas\creatingWildcards\replica stubsContentsOverviewH_CREATING_A_REPLICA_ON_A_SERVERTopic1Creating replicas on serversOverviewH_REPLICAS_OVER06 Managing Domino Databases03 Creating and Customizing Replicas on Servers
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
=" ue
Replication settingsServer Configuration
Replication\customizingReplication\settingsContentsOverviewDIALOG 2695 2695H_REPLICATION_SETTING[_OVERTopic1Replication settingsOverviewH_REPLICAS_OVER06 Managing Domino Databases03 Creating and Customizing Replicas on Servers
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
Scheduling times for replicationServer Configuration
Priority\replication andReplication\examplesReplication\priority andReplication\scheduling for a list of timesReplication\scheduling for a specific timeReplication\scheduling for a time rangeReplication\scheduling for different daysReplication\scheduling times for replicationReplication\time zones, andScheduled replication\time zones, andScheduling replication\different days, andScheduling replication\lists of times, andScheduling replication\scheduling times for replicationScheduling replication\specific times, andScheduling replication\staggering schedules, andScheduling replication\time ranges, andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_SCHEDULING_TIMEP_FOR_REPLICATIONTopic1Scheduling times for replicationAboutH_REPLICAS_OVER
H_ABOUT_SCHEDULING_TIMES_FOR_REPLICATION_MIDTOPIC_290082268829217073=Scheduling replication for one specific timeH_ABOUT_SCHEDULING_TIMES_FOR_REPLICATION_MIDTOPIC_290142268829217074=Scheduling replication for a list of timesH_ABOUT_SCHEDULING_TIMES_FOR_REPLICATION_MIDTOPIC_290142268829217075=Scheduling replication for a time range with a repeat intervalH_ABOUT_SCHEDULING_TIMES_FOR_REPLICATION_MIDTOPIC_2901422688292170760Scheduling replication for a time range without a repeat intervalH_ABOUT_SCHEDULING_TIMES_FOR_REPLICATION_MIDTOPIC_232483648029228121=Scheduling replication for different days of the weekH_ABOUT_SCHEDULING_TIMES_FOR_REPLICATION_MIDTOPIC_110456486429227918=Staggering schedules03 Administering the Domino System06 Scheduling Replication
Connection documents\disablingReplication\disablingContentsStepsH_DISABLING_REPLICATION_STEPSTopic1Disablin` replicationStepsH_REPLICAS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System06 Scheduling Replication
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Forcing immediate replicationServer Configpration
Pull server commandReplicate server commandReplication\manualContentsStepsH_FORCING_IMMEDIATE_REPLICATION_STEPSTopic1Forcing immediate replicationStepsH_REPLICAS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System06 Scheduling Replication
H_WHAT_IS_DOMAIN_SEARCH_OVER_MIDTOPIC_279233107229233746=Domain CatalogH_WHAT_IS_DOMAIN_SEARCH_OVER_MIDTOPIC_279233107229233745=Domain Catalog serverH_WHAT_IS_DOMAIN_SEARCH_OVER_MIDTOPIC_194606870429315252=Search from NotesH_WHAT_IS_DOMAIN_SEARCH_OVER_MIDTOPIC_279233107229233747=Search from the WebH_WHAT_IS_DOMAIN_SEARCH_OVER_MIDTOPIC_191925820829238203=Domain Search and Release 4 Database Catalo`sH_WHAT_IS_DOMAIN_SEARCH_OVER_MIDTOPIC_93879273629238360=Domain Search and single-database full-text search03 Administering the Domino System07 Setting up Domain Search
Print
[atIb^
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
qZv%W
-nxCd
Setting up Domain SearchServer Configuration
.AContentsWays toH_SETTING_UP_DOMAIN_SEARCH_STEPSTopic1Setting up Domain SearchWays toH_WHAT_IS_DOMAIN_SEARCH_OVER03 Administering the Domino System07 Setting up Domain Search
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Decommissioning a Domain Catalog serverServer Configuration
Domain Catalog server\decommissioningServers\decommissioningContentsStepsH_DECOMMISSIONING_A_DOMAIN_CATALOG_SERVER_61?4_STEPSTopic1Decommissioning a Domain Catalog serverStepsH_WHAT_IS_DOMAIN_SEARCH_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Calendars and schedulingServer Configuration
Calendor and scheduling\describedCalendar and scheduling\exampleFree Time database\clusteredFree Time database\describedScheduling\example ofContentsExamplesH_CALENDARS_AND_SCHEDULINGTopic1Calendars and schedulingExamplesH_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OVER
H_CALENDARS_AND_SCHEDULING_MIDTOPIC_283608118429202997=Using Clustered Free Time databasesH_EXAMPLE_OF_SCHEDULING_A_MEETING_EX=Example of scheduling a meetingH_EXAMPLE_OF_FREE_TIME_QUERY_SEARCH_EX_MIDTOPIC_290117091229208204=Users in the same domainH_EXAMPLE_OF_FREE_TIME_QUERY_SEARCH_EX_MIDTOPIC_290117091229208205=Users in different domainsH_EXAMPLE_OF_FREE_TIME_QUERY_SEARCH_EX_MIDTOPIC_290117091229208206=Users in other calendar domains03 Administering the Domino System08 Setting up Calendars and Scheduling
Print
[atIb^
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up schedulingServer Configuration
Scheduling\setting upContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_SCHEDULINGTopic1Setting up schedulingStepsH_CALENDARS_AND_SCHEDULING
H_SETTING_UP_SCHEDULING_MIDTOPIC_111225836829198743=For users in the same Domino domainH_SETTING_UP_SCHEDULING_MIDTOPIC_111225836829198744=For users in adjacent Domino domainsH_SETTING_UP_SCHEDULIOG_MIDTOPIC_111225836829198744=For users in non-adjacent Domino domainsH_SETTING_UP_SCHEDULING_MIDTOPIC_111225836829198745=For users of Lotus Organizer or IBM OfficeVision03 Administering the Domino System08 Setting up Calendars and Scheduling
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up the Resource Reservations databaseServer Configuration
Resource Reservations database\creatingResource Reservations database\describedContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_THE_RESOURCE_RESERVATIONS_DATABASETopic1Setting up the Resource Reservations databaseStepsH_CALENDARS_AND_SCHEDULING
H_SETTING_UP_THE_RESOURCE_RESERVATIONS_DATABASE_MIDTOPIC_111165836829198743=To set up the _esource Reservations database03 Administering the Domino System08 Setting up Calendars and Scheduling
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating Site Profile and _esource documents Server Configuration
Resource documents\creatingResource documents\describedSite Profile documentsContentsStepsH_CREATING_SITE_PROFILE_AND_RESOURCE_DOCUMENTS_Topic1Creating Site Profile and Resource documents StepsH_CALENDARS_AND_SCHEDULING
H_CREATING_SITE_PROFILE_AND_RESOURCE_DOCUMENTS__MIDTOPIC_111165836829198743=To create a Site Profile documentH_CREATING_SITE_PROFILE_AND_RESOURCE_DOCUMENTS__MIDTOPIC_111165836829198744=To create a Resource document03 Administering toe Domino System08 Setting up Calendars and Scheduling
H_HOLIDAY_DOCUMENTS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_110080214429233737=To view Holiday documents that Domino shipsH_HOLIDAY_DOCUMENTS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_110080214429233738=To modify an existing Holiday documentH_HOLIDAY_DOCUMENTS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_110080214429233739=To create a Holiday document03 Administering tho Domino System08 Setting up Calendars and Scheduling
Print
pubnames_v_Holidays
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
O=Lotus No
Partitioned serversServer Configuration
Partitioned servers\describedPartitioned servers\failures and shutdownsPartitioned servers\how many to installPartitioned servers\system requirementsContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_PARTITIONED_SERVERSTopic1Partitioned serversAboutH_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OVER
H_ABOUT_NOTES_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_MIDTOPIC_327432403229223109=Deciding how many partitioned servers to installH_ABOUT_NOTES_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_MIDTOPIC_327432403229223110=System requirements03 Administering the Domino System09 Configuring Partitioned Servers
Print
[atIb^
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
Whenever possible, schedule replication for times when there is less activity on the network -- before or after work or at lunch time.
You can |chedule server-to-server replication to happen at specific times, or you can specify a time range with a repeat interval. By scheduling replication for a time range, you ensure that the servers exchange information several times a day. After the server makes a successful connection, it waits the amount of time specified in the "Repeat interval of" field on the Connection document before calling the other server again.
For example, suppose a Connection document schedules Hub-E/East/Acme to call HR-E/East/Acme from 8 AM until 5 PM with a repeat interval of 120 minutes. If Hub-E/East/Acme calls and replicates successfully with HR-E/East/Acme at 8:30 AM, Hub-E/East/Acme does not place the next call until 10:30 AM.R
Be sure to consider time zones when you schedule replication between servers in different countries. You want to replicate the documents created during each time zone's peak business hours and schedule replication for an off-peak time. For example, to schedule replication bltween a server in New York and a server in Germany, schedule replication between 3 AM and 1 PM Eastern Standard Time (EST) to correspond to Germany's business hours, which are six hours later than EST.
The default replication time setting is 8 AM to 10 PM, with a repeat interval of 360 minutes.
290082268829217073
Scheduling replication for one specific time
Use a specific time when you schedule replication of low
priority databases, when daily update| of databases are sufficient, or when you're certain that attempts by the server to connect are successful after just a few retries -- for example, on different networks at the same site. You might want to replicate low-priority databases at night when the rates are less expensive or there is less load on the system.
In the Connection document, enter a specific time in the "Call at times" field -- for example, 8 AM. Enter 0 for the repeat interval, since the connection isn't set up for a time,range. The server calls and attempts to connect at 8 AM. If unsuccessful, the server tries to connect for an hour. Whether or not the connection succeeds, the next call does not occur until 8 AM the next morning.
290142268829217074
Scheduling replication for a list of times
Use a list of times to schedule replication for medium and low
priority databases and for when a few daily updates of databases are sufficient or when you're certain that connection attempts wlll be successful after just a few retries -- for example, for a connection on different networks at the same site.
In the Connection document, enter a list of specific times in the "Call at times field" -- for example, 8 AM, 1 PM, 4 PM. Enter 0 for the repeat interval, since the connection isn't set up for a time range. The server calls at the first time specified, 8 AM. If unsuccessful, the server retries for up to an hour, until 9 AM. Whether or not the call succeeds, the next call occurs a| the next scheduled time, 1 PM. If unsuccessful, the server retries for up to an hour, until 2 PM. This process continues for each specific time you specify.
290142268829217075
Scheduling replication for a time range with a repeat interval
Specify a time range when you schedule replication for high priority databases. In the Connection document, enter a time range in the "Call at times" field, and enter a number of minutes in the "Repeat interval" field -- for exalple, the "Call at times" field is 8 AM - 5 PM and the "Repeat interval" field is 120 minutes.
If the first call is unsuccessful at 8 AM, the server retries periodically until it successfully establishes a connection and replicates. If the server can't connect, it keeps trying until the end of the time range, 5 PM. If the server successfully replicates, it calls again 120 minutes after the previous call ended. s
290142268829217076
Scheduling replication for a time |ange without a repeat interval
Use a time range without a repeat interval for medium and low-priority databases. Also use a time range without a repeat interval when daily updates of a database are sufficient or when you know that a long retry period is necessary -- for example, if you have busy phone lines and you know it will take several attempts to make the connection.
In the Connection document, enter a time range in the Call at times field -- for example, 8 AM - 5 PM. Enter,0 for the repeat interval. The server attempts the first call at the start of the time range, 8 AM. If unsuccessful, the server tries again and again.r
The time between call attempts increases with each unsuccessful attempt. The server retries the call for the entire range or until a connection is made. After a failed call, the server retries periodically for the entire call range. However, it does not call again after a successful exchange of information.
23248364802922<121
Scheduling replication for different days of the week
You can create a different replication schedule for different days of the week. In the Connection document, enter the days on which you want replication to occur.
For example, create two Connection documents: one that schedules replication for Monday to Friday and another that schedules replication for Saturday and Sunday.
110456486429227918
Staggering schedules
You can |se staggered schedules on hub-and-spoke topology. For example, you could schedule the first server to replicate from 8 AM to 10 AM, the second server from 8:05 AM to 10:05 AM, and so on. You can create a simple round-robin schedule for a hub server and its spokes, repeating as often as is practical. This process spreads all data within a hub's sphere of influence quickly.
See Also
Click here
Customizing server-to-server replication
Click lere
Click here
Connecting servers for replication
Click here
6Pfue
6Pfue
&Arial
To customize replication, you can:
Click here
Specify replication direction
Click here
Click here
Schedule times for replication
Click here
Click here
Replicate only specific databasese
Click here
Click here
Replicate databases by priority
Click here
Click here
Limit replication time
Click here
Click here
Use multiple replicators
Click here
Click here
Refuse replication requestsa
Click here
Click here
Disable replication
Click here
Click here
Force immediate replicationo
Click here
See Also
Click here
Scheduling times for replication
Click here
Click here
Connecting servers for replication i
Click here
kxtue
&Arial
You can see a graphical representation of each server's replication schedule at a glance with the Domino Administrator. Each server's replication schedule appears separately, even if the server is a member of a group listed in the "Lestination server" field in a Connection document.
You can also see a graphical representation of your replication topology. Replication topology maps are most useful for quickly displaying the replication topology and for letting you easily follow connections between servers. A
Each server, network, cluster, and cc:Mail Post Office has its own icon. A line represents each replication connection. A replication connection between two servers appears as a broken red line. Multiple lonnections between servers appear as lines superimposed on each other.o
351136041629231155
To view replication schedules
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Replication tab.
2. Click Replication schedule.
3. Patterns represent the replication status of each server: Schedule is being performed; Schedule is complete; Schedule isn't complete.
253038812829227933
To start the Topology maps taskT
The Maps task must be running on the server you're administering in order to view replication topology from the Domino Administrator. As long as the Topology maps task runs, it refreshes topology information every night at midnight.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Servers - Status tab.
2. If necessary, click Tools to display the tool bar, and then click Load.
3. For "Load Domino Server task," select Topology maps.
4. Click,OK.
253038812829227934
To display the replication topology map
1. From the Bookmarks pane, select the server for which you want to create a topology map.
2. Click the Replication tab.
3. Do one of the following:
Click "Replication topology by connections" to view connections between the server you selected above and all the servers connected by Connection documents or clusters.
Click "Replication topollgy by clusters" to view all clusters and the servers connected to them,.
4. (Optional) Double-click any server in the topology map to make that server the center of the map.
5. (Optional) Double-click a connection to open the corresponding Connection document in the Domino Directory.
You can move around the topology map by using keyboard commands -- for example, you can zoom in and zoom out with the plus (+) and minus (-) keys.
See Also
Click here
Replication and system topology
Click here
Click here
Scheduling times for replication
Click here
Click here
Using the Domino Administrator
Click here
YzDse
&Arial
After you create Connection documents and enable replication, you can test replication. Before you begin testing, make sure that your network is running properly and modems are available.
To test replication, create a new replica lf a database, make a change in it, and then replicate the change to the other replica databases. You can either force replication by using the Replicate, Pull, or Push commands at the console, or you can wait to see if the schedule you set up works. If you're setting up a new server that does not have any databases on it, you can use the Domino Directory to test replication by adding or editing a document in the Domino Directory.
As you test replication, check the console to view messages that,display as the Replicator starts. The Replicator lists the databases that are replicated before completing the replication process. Use the Show Tasks command at the console to see which server tasks are currently running.
For replication information, check the replication history in the Database Properties box, and check the log (LOG.NSF) for the replication summary. To check the log, from the Domino Administrator, click the Replication tab and click Replication events.
To check,that replication connections are intact, you can
Click here
view replication topology
Click here
See Also
Click here
Replication - Problems and error messages
Click here
Click here
Tools for troubleshooting replication
Click here
kxtue
&Arial
To prevent changes from replicating -- for example, when you test replication on several servers or you don't want certain databases to replicate --,you can disable replication. To disable replication, edit the Connection document in the Domino Directory. In the Scheduled Connection section, deselect Replication in the Tasks field.i
See Also
Click here
Disabling and enabling replication of a database
Click here
Click here
Customizing server-to-server replication
Click here
Click here
Connecting servers,for replication
Click here
6Pfue
&Arial
You can replicate changes to critical databases, such as the Domino Directory, without waiting for a scheduled connection. After you create Connection documents to schedule server-to-server replication, you can use a server command to force immediate replication.
There are many situations when forcing replication is necessary. For example, you may want to update a database immediately, without waiting for scheduled replication to occur, or you might need to replicate with a different slrver because the usual server is unavailable. You can force immediate replication to trace replication and mail routing problems or to force changes to critical system databases -- such as in the Domino Directory -- to spread quickly through the domain. When you force immediate server-to-server replication, you can initiate replication in one or in both directions.
Command
p&oIU
Result
Click here
Replicate
Click here
p&oIU
Replicates changes to databases in both directiols; Domino performs Pull-Push replication.
Click here
Pull
Click here
p&oIU
Replicates changes to databases in one direction where the initiating server pulls changes from the other server
Click here
Push
Click here
p&oIU
Replicates changes to databases in one direction where the initiating server pushes da|abase changes to the other server.
See Also
Click here
Forcing a server database to replicate
Click here
Click here
Customizing server-to-server replication
Click here
Click here
Connecting servers for replication
Click here
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
6Pfue
&Arial
Domain Search allows users to search an entire Notes domain for documents, files, and attachments that match a search query. Domain Search is centralized on a Domain Catalog server, which uses a Domain Catalog to control whilh databases and file systems to index. Domain Search also filters results to users based on their access to the indexed databases and file systems. c
The Domain Indexer builds a central Domain Index on the Domain Catalog server that all Domain Search queries run against. The Domain Catalog can replicate to other servers. The Domain Indexer generates the index files directly on the Domain Catalog server, and these files do not replicate to other servers. If your organization has more than six tl eight Domino servers, Lotus strongly recommends you dedicate a server as the Domain Catalog server. This computer should have no other purpose than to act as the indexing and search engine for the domain.
279233107229233746
Domain Catalog
The Domain Catalog is a database that uses the CATALOG.NTF design. The Catalog stores records indicating which databases and file systems the server should index and the forms used to search the index. By design, both the Domain,Catalog and the Domain Index reside on the Domain Catalog server. Database designers and managers set a database to be indexed by enabling the database property "Include in multi database indexing." Administrators can configure this setting for multiple databases using the Domino Administrator. Using the Domain Catalog, administrators specify which file systems to index.
279233107229233745
Domain Catalog server
When you implement Domain Search, be certain that thl Domain Catalog server is capable of handling the load of creating indexes and handling user queries. The Domain Catalog server should be fast, powerful, and have a large amount of disk space -- multiple processors, a large amount of RAM, and multiple high-volume drives will increase the efficiency and capabilities of your searches.S
Consider shortening the time it takes to run the Catalog task by splitting it among several Domain Catalog servers: Server A catalogs servers 1 to 25, Server B ca|alogs servers 26 to 50, Server C catalogs servers 51 to 75, and so on.n
Also consider clustering your Domain Catalog servers to ensure greater reliability and fault-tolerance and to balance the load from user queries. If you use clustered Domain Search servers, create a replica of the Domain Catalog on each of those clustered servers. t
For more information about clustering, see
Click here
Clustering basics
Click here
Fo| Domain Catalog servers running Microsoft Windows NT, Lotus recommends the following minimum configuration:
An Intel Pentium II 266 MHz processor
256MB RAM
Free disk space equal to approximately 75 percent of the size of the domain being indexed
194606870429315252
Search from Notes
As long as the designated Domain Catalog server is recorded in their Location documents, Notes users can perform domain searches.
For information on how Notes users execute a domain search, see Notes 5 Help.
279233107229233747
Search from the Web
Web clients have access to most Domain Search functionality, including search queries and result sets.
191925820829238203
Domain Search and Release 4 Database Catalogs
The Catalog task collects information about databases on all Domino servers in the domain and creates a document for each database in thl Domain Catalog. When collecting information from another Release 5 server that has a Release 5 catalog, the Catalog task uses pull replication to collect the documents that already exist in the catalog on the server. If the server is either an Release 4.x server (with or without a Release 4 catalog) or a Release 5 server that does not have a catalog, the Catalog task collects the needed information directly from each database on that server and creates a corresponding document for each database in the Domlin Catalog.
93879273629238360
Domain Search and single-database full-text search
Single-database full-text search indexes can coexist with a Domain Index. You may want to use a full-text index for compatibility with previous releases of Domino or Notes, or for servers with restricted user access. For more information about security and access, see
Click here
Domain Search security
Click here
See Llso
Click here
Setting up Domain Search
Click here
Click here
Decommissioning a Domain Catalog server
Click here
&Arial
To set up Domain Search, do the following:
1.
Click here
Enable Domain Search.
Click here
2.
Click here
Search fill systems.
Click here
3.
Click here
Include a database in a Domain Index.
Click here
4.
Click here
Use document content categories.
Click here
5.
Click here
Set up Domain Search for Notes clients.
Click here
6.
Click here
Customize Domain Search forms.
Click lere
7.
Click here
Understand security and Domain Search.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Domain Search
Click here
Click here
Decommissioning a Domain Catalog server
Click here
&Arial
If you want your Domain Catalog server to resume duty as a regular Domino server, or to be retired from duty altogether, you remove it from the appropriate group in the Domino Directory, edit its Server document, and then delete some files from its directory structure, as follows:
1. In the Domino Directory, click Groups in the view pane.
2. Select LocalDomainCatalogServers and click Edit Group.
3. On the Basics tab, in the Members field, remove the server you want to decommission.s
4. Click Save and Close.
Note
Users' Location documents are automatically updated with the name of your new Domain Catalog server by the Dynamic Client Configuration tool the next time they access thlir mail server.
5. Expand the Servers section in the view pane, and then click Servers.
6. Select the server that you want to decommission, and click Edit Server to open its Server document.
7. Click the Server Tasks - Domain Catalog tab.
8. In the Domain Catalog field, select Disabled and click OK.
Disabling the Domain Catalog automatically disables the Domain Indexer schedule on the next tab.
9. Click Save and Closl.
10. Delete the Domain Catalog (CATALOG.NSF) from the server.
11. Delete the FTDOMAIN.DI subdirectory from the server's Domino data directory.
See Also
Click here
Domain Search
Click here
&Arial
These sample mail routing configurations represent typical messaging implementations, however other configurations are possible. Use these sample configurations to help you plan and refine the messaging infrastructure in your organization:
Click here
Use one server for all Internet messages
Click here
Click here
Use one server for inbound and one server for outbound messages
Click here
Click here
Use two servers to balance Internet mail load
Click here
Click here
Set up mail routing in the local Internet domain
Click here
Clicl here
Set up mail routing between a third-party server and Domino in the same Internet domain
Click here
Click here
Use a smart host
Click here
Click here
Use all servers to route outbound mail and one to route internal mail
Click here
See Also
Click here
Planning a mail routing topology
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Log_Replication=
value
Description:
Specifies the level of logging of replication events performed by the current server:
0 - Do not log replication events
1 - Log that a database is replica|ing
2 - Log summary information about each database
3 - Log information about each replicated document (both design and data documents)
4 - Log information about each replicated field
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
The calendar and scheduling features allow users to check the free time of other users, schedule meetings with them, and reserve resources, such as conference rooms and equipment. You can also define holidays that are particular to your organization or country. Users import this information directly into their personal calendars. Domino ships with a set of default Holiday documents, which you can modify.
Vhe calendar and scheduling features use the Schedule Manager (Sched task)
, the Calendar Connector (Calconn task), and the Free Time system (a combination of Sched, Calconn, and nnotes tasks) to operate. When you install Domino on a server (any server except a Directory server), the Sched and Calconn tasks are automatically added to the server's NOTES.INI file. When you start the server for the first time, the Schedule Manager creates a Free Time database (BUSYTIME.NSF for non-clustered mail&servers and CLUBUSY.NSF for clustered mail servers) and creates an entry in the database for each user who has filled out a Calendar Profile and whose mail file is on that server or on one of the clustered servers.
Each user can keep a personal calendar and create a Calendar Profile that identifies who may access the user's free time information and specifies when the user is available for meetings. When users invite other users to meetings, the Free Time system performs the free time&lookups. The Free Time system also searches for and returns information on the availability of resources. If the lookup involves searching in Free Time systems on different servers or scheduling applications, the Calendar Connector sends out the queries. When users schedule appointments in their calendars and reserve resources, the Schedule Manager task collects and updates that information in the Free Time database.
By default, the Schedule Manager has access to the Free Time database, so yov do not have to define the ACL for this database. o
283608118429202997
Using Clustered Free Time databasese
For clustered mail servers, the Schedule Manager creates the clustered Free Time database (CLUBUSY.NSF) the first time a server starts. The clustered version of the Free Time database works the same as the Free Time database (BUSYTIME.NSF). Each clustered server has a replica of the clustered Free Time database, which stores information about users whose maif files exist on servers in the cluster. s
If you add a previously non-clustered server to a cluster, the Schedule Manager deletes the BUSYTIME.NSF database on that server and creates CLUBUSY.NSF, which then replicates to server clustermates. If you remove a server from a cluster, the opposite occurs: Schedule Manager deletes CLUBUSY.NSF and creates BUSYTIME.NSF. Until the Schedule Manager validates the database by checking if the location of users' mail files has changed, the clustered Free Tfme database contains information about users whose mail server you removed from the cluster. This validation also occurs once each day (at 2 AM) to update free time information for users whose mail files have been added to or removed from a mail server. You can update the information at any time by entering the Tell Sched Validate command at the console.r
A benefit of clustered scheduling is that schedule information is always available, even when users' home servers are down. With non-clusterfd scheduling, if users home servers are not available, the Free Time database is not available for searching. l
Other advantages of using clustered scheduling are improved performance and reduced server traffic. Because the Free Time database is available from other members in a cluster, the server that receives a user's query does not have to search another server's Free Time database for schedule information about a user whose mail server is in the cluster.r
Fxample of scheduling a meeting
This section describes the process of scheduling a meeting when users share the same mail server and domain, have different domains, and use different scheduling applications.e
In the following examples, Kathy wants to check the free time of and schedule a meeting with three users -- Bob, who is in the same domain as Kathy; Robin, who is in a different domain; and Susan, who uses a different scheduling application (Lotus Organizer
290117091229208204
Users in the same domain
1. Kathy creates a meeting invitation and chooses to search for Bob's free time.
2. A free time query is sent to Kathy's mail server.
3. The Free Time system looks for Bob's name in the Free Time database (BUSYTIME.NSF or CLUBUSY.NSF) on Kathy's mail server.
If Bob and Kathy have the same mail server or if Bob's and Kathy's mail servers are part of a cluster, the Free Time system finds the fnformation and returns Bob's free time to Kathy.
If the Free Time system does not find any information on Bob, it converts Bob's name into a fully-qualified name.
Note
If Bob's mail server is unavailable and his Free Time database is not clustered, a message appears indicating that the server is unavailable, and the Find Time dialog box indicates that the invitee's information is unavailable.
4. Kathy's Domino Directory is chefked for Bob's Person document. When the Person document is found, the Calendar Connector sends the request to Bob's mail server. (The mail server is a field on the Person document.)
5. The Free Time system on Bob's mail server looks in its Free Time database and returns the information to Kathy via the Calendar Connector. If the Free Time system doesn't find any information, the query fails, and the Find Time dialog box indicates that Bob's information is unavailable.
690117091229208205
Users in different domains
1. Kathy creates a meeting invitation and chooses to search for Robin's free time. In addressing the invitation, Kathy specifies Robin's domain.
2. A query is sent to Kathy's mail server.
3. The Free Time system looks for Robin's name in the Free Time database on Kathy's mail server. It determines Robin's mail server is in a different domain.
4. Kathy's Domino Directory is searched for a document&that matches Robin's domain.
If the Free Time system finds an Adjacent Domain document, it looks at the Calendar server name field of the document for the name of a server that accepts calendar queries for Robin's domain. The Free Time system then forwards the query to this server for processing.
If the Free Time system finds an Adjacent Domain document with an empty Calendar server name field, it fails; and the Find Time dialog box indicates that Robin's information is unavailfble.
If the Free Time system finds a Non-adjacent Domain document, it looks at the "Route requests through Calendar server" field of the document for the name of the server (which is in a domain adjacent to Kathy's and Robin's) that accepts calendar queries for Robin's domain. The Free Time system then forwards the query to this server for processing.
If the Free Time system finds a Non-adjacent Domain document with an empty "Route requests through Calendar server" field, it failv; and the Find Time dialog box indicates that Robin's information is unavailable.
If the Free Time system doesn't find any domain documents, the query fails; and the Find Time dialog box indicates that Robin's information is unavailable.
290117091229208206
Users in other calendar domains
1. Kathy creates a meeting invitation and chooses to search for Susan's free time.
2. A query is sent to Kathy's mail server.
3. The&Free Time system looks for Susan's name in its Free Time database. It does not find the information, so it converts Susan's name into a fully qualified one.
4. Kathy's Domino Directory is searched for Susan's Person document.
5. The Free Time system looks in Susan's Person document and locates the name of her mail server in the Mail server field and the name of her calendar domain in the Calendar Domain field.
6. Because Susan is using Lotus Organizer as her&scheduling application, the Free Time system finds that her calendar domain does not match her mail server domain. The Free Time system then looks for a Domain document for the calendar domain.
7. The Free Time system finds a Foreign Domain document for Susan's calendar domain. The Calendar server field in the Foreign Domain document identifies the name of the server that accepts queries for Susan's domain; the "Calendar system" field identifies the name of the add-in program -- for example,&Organizer or IBM
OfficeVision
-- that actually does the free time lookup on Susan's server. The Free Time system forwards the query to the appropriate server (the server listed in the Calendar server field) for processing.t
If the Free Time system doesn't find a Foreign Domain document, the query fails; and the Find Time dialog box indicates that Susan's information is unavailable.
See Also
Click here
Setting up scheduling
Flick here
Click here
Setting up the Resource Reservations database
Click here
Click here
Creating Holiday documents
Click here
&Arial
How you set up scheduling depends on where users are located -- that is, in the same Domino domain or in different Domino domains -- and whether users use alternative scheduling applications, such as Lotus Organizer and IBM OfficeVision.
111225836829198743
For users in the same Domino domain
Scheduling is automatically set up for non-clustered and clustered Free Time databases. You need to create the Resource Reservations database so that users can search for and reserve resources.
111225836829198744
For users in adjacent Domino domains
1. Make sure that you already
Click here
set up Adjacent Domain documents
Click fere
in the Domino Directory to establish communication between the domains.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. Choose the Domino Directory in the "Use Directory on" box.
4. Click Messaging - Domains, and then open each appropriate Adjacent Domain document.
5. Click the Calendar Information tab, complete this field, and save the document:
Field
Enter
Calendar server name
The name of the server in the adjacent domain that accepts and processes all scheduling queries for that domain
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. Set up the Resource Reservations database if you want to allow users to search for and reserve resources.
111225836829198744
For users in non-adjacent Domino domains
In order for two non-adjacent domains to do free time lookups between each other, you need to define a Calendar server in an intermediate domain that is adjacent to both the querying and the target domains.
Note
Free time lookups require reasonable network response time and direct LAN connections from the intermediate domain to the two separate non-adjacent domains.
1. Make sure that you alveady
Click here
set up Non-adjacent Domain documents
Click here
in the Domino Directory to establish communication between the domains.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. Choose the Domino Directory in the "Use Directory on" box.
4. Click Messaging - Domains, and then open each appropriate Non-adjacent Domain document.
5. Click the Calendar Information tab, complete this ffeld, and save the document:
Field
Enter
Route requests through calendar server
The name of a calendar server that is in a domain adjacent to both the querying and the target domains. This server accepts and forwards free time queries from the source to the target non-adjacent domain.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. Set up the Resource Reservations database if you want to allow users to search for and reserve resources.
111225836829198745
For users of Lotus Organizer or IBM OfficeVision
Domino scheduling works with both Lotus Organizer and IBM OfficeVision. If users want to keep their schedules in either program, set up scheduling to include them. You need to create a Foreign Domain document for each alternative schefuling application.
1. Make sure you already set up a Foreign Domain document in the Domino Directory for each alternative scheduling application.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. Choose the Domino Directory in the "Use Directory on" box.
4. Click Messaging - Domains, and then open each appropriate Foreign Domain document.
5. Click the Calendar Information tab, complete these fields, and save the dfcument:
Fieldn
:'}OU
Enter
Calendar server name
:'}OU
The name of the server that is running the alternative scheduling programe
Calendar system
:'}OU
Choose either Organizer or OfficeVision from the list3
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. For Notes mail users who use a different scheduling application, enter the name of the foreign domain in the Calendar Domain field of each user's Person document.
7. Set up the Resource Reservations database if you want to allow users to search for and reserve resources.
See Also
Click here
Setting up the Resource Reservations database
Click here
Clicf here
Creating Holiday documents
Click here
Click here
Calendars and scheduling
Click here
Click here
Meeting and resource scheduling - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
The Resource Reservations database is where users schedule&and manage meeting resources. Resources may include conference rooms and equipment, such as overhead projectors and video machines. Users can select a particular resource and reserve a time for it, or they can choose a time and let the Resource Reservations database display resources available during that time.
The Resource Reservations database contains three types of documents: Site Profile, Resource, and Reservation. A Site Profile document identifies the site where particular resources ave located. A Resource document defines the resource name -- for example, the name or number of the conference room. After you create Site Profile and Resource documents, the Schedule Manager tracks the free time of a resource the same way it tracks free time for users. To reserve a resource, a user can either create a Reservation document or add the resource to a meeting invitation.
111165836829198743
To set up the Resource Reservations database
1. Choose File&- Database - New.
2. Select the Resource Reservations (5.0) template (RESRC50.NTF) from the template list.
3. Enter the server that stores the database in the Server field.
4. Enter the name of the database in the Title field.
5. Enter a file name for the database in the File Name field.T
6. Click OK.
7. Choose File - Database - Access Control.s
8. List the names of all users who are authorized to crefte Resources and Site Profile documents and assign them the [CreateResource] role.
9. Create Site Profile and Resource documents.
See Also
Click here
Creating Site Profile and Resource documents R
Click here
Click here
Setting up schedulinga
Click here
Click here
Calendars and scheduling
Click here
Clfck here
Editing and deleting Resource documentsd
Click here
&Arial
A Site Profile document defines a particular site where a resource exists and associates that site with a Resource Reservations database and Domino Directory. You must create at least one Site Profile document before you can create Resource documents.a
When you create a Resource document, you define the resource name, type, and availability; and you specify who can reserve the resource. After you set up resources, users can search for free time of a resource and schedule the resource for a meeting while searching for free time and inviting users to the meeting. For each Resource document you create, the Administration Process creates a corresponding Resource document in the Domino Directory. During a free time query, the Free Time system searches thf Free Time database to find the location of these resources and returns information on the availability of both the resource and the invitees.
When you create a Site Profile or Resource document, the new resource is not available for users to schedule until the Administration Process adds the resource to the Domino Directory and the addition replicates to all relevant replicas (those on servers used for scheduling resources) of the Domino Directory.
111165836829198743
To create a Site Profile document
1. Make sure that you have the [CreateResource] role in the ACL of the Resource Reservations database.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab.
3. From the Servers pane, select the server you want to work from.
4. Open the Resource Reservations database, and select any view except Calendar, My Reservations, and Reservations Waiting for Approval.
5. Click New Site.
6. Complete these fields, and then click Save Profile:
Field
Enter
Site name
The name of the site where the resource exists -- for example, 50 West Lincoln Building
Domain name
The name of the domain where the Rfsource Reservations database resides
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
111165836829198744
To create a Resource document
1. Make sure that you have the [CreateResource] role in the ACL of the Resource Reservations database and that at least one Site Profile document has already been created.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab.
6. From the Servers pane, select the server you want to work from.
4. Open the Resource Reservations database.
5. Click New Resource.
6. From the Type tab, choose one as the Resource Type:
Room
Other -- if the resource is not a room
7. Click the Resource Information tab, and complete these fields:
Field
$'KOU
Entero
Name
$'KOU
A unique name that identifies the resource -- for example, a room number
Site
$'KOU
Click to display a list of available sites, and then choose one
Category
(Appears when you select Other as Resource Type)
$'KOU
Name
;for category of Resource -- for example, Electronic or AV. This field flso displays names of all previously entered Category values, which you can choose from.
Capacity
(Appears when you select Room as Resource Type)
$'KOU
The capacity of the resource, if it has one -- for example, the seating capacity of a room.
Description
$'KOU
A description of the resource -- for example, large conffrence room with a video monitor
Other comments
$'KOU
Text specific to this resource -- for example, conference room is good for smaller meetings
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
8. Click the Owner Options tab, and complete these fields:
Field
Enter
None
Click so that no owner is assigned to the resource and anyone can reserve the resource
Only owner can book resource
Click to assign someone as the Resource owner. Only the Resource owner can process Resource requests.r
Enter the name of the resource owner&in the Owner's name field.
Only select list of people can book resource
Click to allow only certain users access to the resource.
Enter the names of users allowed to reserve this resource in the List of names field. Any users not specified here cannot reserve this resource.
Only select list of people can book resource via autoprocessinf - all others require owner approval
Click to allow only certain users access to the resource and to assign a resource owner.
Enter the name of the resource owner in the Owner's name field. The owner is the person whom requests from other users (those not listed in List of names field) are forwarded to for approval and processing.
Enter the names of users allowed to reserve this resource in the List of names field.
Temporarily disable reservations
Click to prevent users from reserving a resource from their mail files. If this field is disabled, users can still reserve a resource manually in the Resource Reservations database.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
9. Click the Availability Settings tab, and enter in times on each day when the resource is availablf
10. Click Save and Close.
See Also
Click here
Editing and deleting Resource documents
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Resource Reservations database
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Log_Sessions=
value
Description:
Specifies whether individual sessions are recorded in the log file and displayed on the console:
0 - Do not log individual sessions
1 - Log individual sessions
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
The Log All Client Events setting that is an Advanced server Setup option. You can also specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing thf NOTES.INI file
Click here
\)PjU
&Arial
Holiday documents provide a way for your organization to have a centrally managed collection of documents that contain information on scheduled holidays or events. Users select the type of Holiday documents to import and add the information to their personal calendars. Domino ships with pre-set Holiday documents that you can modify or deljte; you can also add Holiday documents specific to your organization's needs. Holiday documents are stored in the Domino Directory.
You categorize Holiday documents according to a group name. For example, you may have a group named "Full-time" that contains all the company holidays for full-time employees. The pre-set Holiday documents shipped with Domino have group names associated with countries -- for example, United States or Italy -- and the groups contain documents specific to holidays ij each country. As an administrator, you may want to modify or delete these documents to reflect your organization's needs. Then you can advise users to import a specific group and ensure that they have relevant and consistent information.d
You can add documents to an existing group by selecting that group when creating a new Holiday document. You can also create new groups by entering in a new group name in the Holiday document. Remember that your users import Holiday documents according to grjup name, not document name, so you want to plan how to organize documents in groups.
110080214429233737
To view Holiday documents that Domino shipsn
Domino ships with pre-set Holiday documents that contain information on holidays observed around the world. The Holiday documents are compiled into groups -- each group having the country name of its associated holidays. For example, the Italy group contains documents specific to Italian holidays.
1. Fzom the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Select the Domino Directory server in the "Use Directory on" field.
3. Click Miscellaneous, and then click Holidays. The view displaying all the pre-set Holiday documents appears.
110080214429233738
To modify an existing Holiday document
When you modify or delete an existing Holiday document, users receive the modifications only when they choose to run import from their maij files.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Select the Domino Directory server in the "Use Directory on" field.
3. Click Miscellaneous, and then click Holidays.
4. Click the appropriate Holiday document so that it opens.
5. Modify fields as you wish.
For more information on the fields, see the topic "To create a Holiday document."
110080214429233739
To crejte a Holiday document
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Select the Domino Directory server in the "Use Directory on" field.
3. Click Miscellaneous, and then click Holidays.
4. Click Add Holiday..
5. Click the Group field and do one:
Select an existing group to associate with the Holiday.
Create a new group by typing in a new Group name.
6. Enter values in tjese fields, and then click Save and Close.
Note
The availability of some fields in this table depends on previous field selections.
Field
Enter
Title
The name of the holiday -- for example, Christmas
Detailed description (Optional)o
A description of the holiday
Repeat
Choose how often the holiday repeats:
Yearly (default)
Monthly by Date
Monthly by Day
Custom
Start Date
The date from which the holiday begins. This date may be the actual date of the holiday (such as New Year's day) or it may be the date from which to start the holiday. For example, if your organization gives employees every other Friday off from June through August, enter June 1 as the Start Date and select "For" from the Continuing field to specify an end date of August 31.
This field is available for all Repeat options except Custom.
Repeat Dates
The date or dates the holiday falls on -- for example, 01/01/99, 01/02/2003.
This field is available only if you choose Custom in the Repeat field.
Continuing
Choose how long you want the holiday to repeat:
For -- Holiday repeats for an amount of time, which is a measured number of months or years
Unzil -- Holiday repeats until a specific date
This field is available for all Repeat options except Custom.
Repeat for/until
If you entered "For" in the Continuing field, select the number of years or months (depending on your Repeat field choice) you want to repeat the holiday.
If you enter "Until" in the Continuing field, select the date you want to repeat the holiday until.
This field is available for all Repeat options except Custom.
Repeat Interval
Choose how often holiday repeats by month and day.
This field is available only if you select Monthly by Day or Monthly by Date in the Repeat field.
Start from the end of month
Check this field if you want to create an invertjd relationship between the Start Date and the Repeat Interval fields. The event you schedule occurs on the day you specify from the end of the month. This field is useful for holidays or events that fall on the last days of a month.
For example, suppose you have a event that occurs bimonthly on the last day of the month. Because months contain different numbers of days, you use this option to ensure that the event falls on the correct day each month. You choose "Monthly by Date" in the Repeat*field, fill in the Start Date and Continuing fields, and then choose "Every other month" and "1st day" in the Repeat Interval field. This bimonthly event would then be scheduled for the last day (because the "1st day" is inverted to indicate the last day) of every other month -- regardless of whether the month contains 28, 29, 30, or 31 days.a
This field is available only if you select Monthly by Day or Monthly by Date in the Repeat field.
If the date falls on a weekend
Choose where to move the holiday should it fall on a weekend (Saturday or Sunday) day.
This field is available for all Repeat options except Monthly by Day and Custom.
Mark time as
Choose Busy or Free. Determines whether the user's calendar records this holiday as busy or free time.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chazter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Setting up schedulingk
Click here
Click here
Calendars and scheduling
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Resource Reservations database
Click here
&Arial
Domino server partitioning lets you run multiple Domino sezvers on a single computer. Using partitioned servers reduces hardware expenses and minimizes the number of computers that you have to administer. Each partitioned server has its own Domino data directory and NOTES.INI file, but all partitioned servers share the same Domino program directory. Partitioned servers can help you make more efficient use of your hardware. For example, instead of purchasing multiple small computers to run Domino servers that might not take advantage of the resources available to tjem, you can purchase a single, more powerful computer and run multiple Domino servers on that single machine.
Setting up partitioned servers is particularly effective when the servers are in different domains. For example, on one computer you can dedicate multiple domains to multiple customers or set up multiple Web sites.
In most cases, partitioning servers from the same domain uses more computer resources and disk space than combining the servers into a single server. This iz because the Domino executable files are loaded for each partitioned server, and each Domino server must have its own copy of the Domino Directory and other administrative databases. It is also easier to administer a single server than it is to administer multiple servers. In some cases, however, running partitioned servers from the same domain on a multi-processor computer can improve performance because the computer simultaneously runs certain processes.s
In an enterprise Domino system or a jetwork service, partitioned servers can provide the scalability you need while also providing security. As your system grows, you can migrate users from partitioned servers to individual servers. A partitioned server can also be a member of a cluster if you require high availability of databases. Security for a partitioned server is the same as for a server on its own computer.
If one partitioned server shuts down, the others continue to run. Therefore, the applications you run on the other pjrtitioned servers are more reliable because they continue to run. If a partitioned server encounters a fatal error, you can restart that partitioned server without restarting the computer. You can do this because Domino adds the KillProcess setting to the NOTES.INI file when you install partitioned servers. It is best to use different user accounts (log-in names) for each partitioned server so you can use the appropriate command -- such as, nsd -kill -- to clean up residual processes after a server crash.
There are two ways to set up partitioned servers. You can:
Use a separate IP address for each partitioned server and use one or more network interface cards (NIC).
Use one IP address and one NIC for all the partitioned servers but assign a different port to each partitioned server. (This is called port mapping.)
327432403229223109
Deciding how many partitioned servers to install
Domino supports multiple partitioned servers oj a single computer. The number of partitioned servers that you install depends on the needs of your enterprise and your available hardware. The power of the computer and the operating system the computer uses determine the number of partitions you can create without noticeably diminishing performance. It is a good idea to run partitioned servers on multi-processor computers and have at least one, and possibly two, processors for each partitioned server that you install on the computer. If possible, plan yozr partitioned server configuration and your network configurations before you install Domino.
327432403229223110
System requirementss
Domino supports partitioned servers running on the UNIX, OS/2, and Windows NT operating systems, including partitioned servers as NT services. The requirements for running partitioned servers are the same as for running a standard Domino server, with these additional requirements:a
Add 100MB of disk space for each additjonal partitioned server on a computer.
Use 128MB of RAM for each partitioned server.t
Configure each partitioned server to use TCP/IP.
See Also
Click here
Installing and setting up partitioned serverss
Click here
Click here
Configuring partitioned serverse
Click here
Click here
Using partitioned servers in a Domino clusters
Click here
Click here
Monitoring partitioned servers and optimizing performance
Click here
Click here
Uninstalling a partition
Click here
&Arial
Installing and setting up partitioned servers is similar*to installing and setting up a single server.
Note
All partitioned servers on a computer share the same Domino program directory, but each partition has its own Domino data directory.
1. Start the Setup program and follow the directions on the screens. Be sure to choose "Partitioned Server Installation."
In the Setup program, you enter a name for the Domino program directory that all partitioned servers share. You also enter a name for j Domino data directory for each partitioned server you want.
Note
It is a good idea to choose directory names that clearly differentiate the Domino data directories -- for example, use the names of the partitioned servers.
Note
The OS/2 version of the Setup program does not have a choice for "Partitioned Server Installation." Instead, you must run the Setup program once for each partitioned server you wajt to install. To do this, you install the same version of Domino multiple times in the same program directory, and specify a different data directory for each installation.
2. Configure each partitioned server for TCP/IP.
3. Configure and set up each partitioned server to run services -- for example, LDAP, NNTP, POP3, and IMAP -- and/or to run as a Domino Web server.
See Also
Click here
Configuring partitioned servers
Click here
Click here
Monitoring partitioned servers and optimizing performance
Click here
Click here
Uninstalling a partition
Click here
Click here
Partitioned serversa
Click here
&Arial
You use the same set of tools to monitor partitioned servers as you use to monitor individual servers. However, remember that a partitioned server can use a large ajount of system resources, denying those resources to other partitioned servers on the same computer. For example, the Indexer on one partitioned server may be using a large percentage of the available CPU cycles, causing the other partitioned servers to have a slow response time. Therefore, it is important to look at your operating system's performance monitor as well as the Domino statistics to determine which partitioned server is using the system resources.
96514156829217043
Optimizing performance
If one partitioned server uses significant system resources, consider moving that server to a different computer. If partitioned servers causes slow disk access, consider moving the Domino data directories of the partitioned servers to separate disk drives.s
Another way to improve performance is to limit access to the servers. One way to do this is to limit the number of concurrent transaction that can occur on the servers. You can use the
Cljck here
Server_Max_Concurrent_Trans_
Click here
setting in the NOTES.INI file to set a maximum number of concurrent transactions for each server. Studies show that the optimal number of transactions when using Windows NT is 20. If you are using Windows NT and are running two partitioned servers, set the maximum number of concurrent transactions to 10 on each server. This setting does not prevent users from logging onto the server.
Another way to limit access to*a server is to limit the number of users who can use a partitioned server at one time. To do this, you can use the
Click here
Server_MaxUsers
Click here
setting in the NOTES.INI file. When the server reaches the number of users you specify, Domino denies additional user requests for access to the server.
See Also
Click here
The Domino server log (LOG.NSF)
Click here
Jlick here
Tools for monitoring the Domino system
Click here
Click here
Setting up Domino for background system monitoring
Click here
Click here
Partitioned servers
Click here
&Arial
You can remove all the partitioned servers from a computer or remove the last partitioned server you installed
169122384029239211
To remove all partitioned servers on a computer
To remove all the partitioned servers from a computer, use the uninstall program that comes with your operating system.
169122384029239212
To remove the last partitioned server you installed
Thj Uninstall program does not let you specify which partitioned server you want to remove. Uninstall removes only the most recent partitioned server you added to the computer.
Note
If you remove a single partitioned server from a computer, you may not be able to use the Uninstall program at a subsequent time to remove the other partitioned servers from the computer.M
To uninstall the last partitioned server you installed, use this procedure:
1. Save any files you want, and then delete the Domino data directory for the partitioned server that you want to uninstall.
2. If the partitioned server used a unique IP address, disable support for the IP address. Do this only if you added the IP address when you set up the partitioned server. If the partitioned server used the computer host name as its Domino server name, do not disable its IP address.
3. If the partitioned server used port mapping, edit the NOTES.INI fjle of the port-mapping server so that it no longer refers to this partitioned server. If you are uninstalling the port-mapping server, set up another partitioned server to be the port-mapping server.
4. If you use Windows NT, edit the NT registry in the following ways:
In the folder HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE - SOFTWARE - Lotus - Notes - VSERVER, select INSTANCE, and reduce the instance count by one.
In the folder HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE - SOFTWARE - Lotus - Notes - VSERVER - JLIENT, delete the corresponding entry for the client install path for the partitioned server you are uninstalling.
In the folder HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE - SOFTWARE - Lotus - Notes - VSERVER - CLIENT, be sure that the values of the clients listed are consecutive. If you previously had four partitioned servers installed and you uninstalled server 2, for example, list the remaining partitioned servers as CLIENT1, CLIENT2, and CLIENT3. Confirm that these entries correspond to the entries in the NOTES.JNI files.
See Also
Click here
Partitioned servers
Click here
Click here
Installing and setting up partitioned servers
Click here
&Arial
Topics in this section describe the tools you can use to administer a Domino server.
Click here
The Domino Administrator
Click here
Click here
The Administration Process
Click here
Click here
The Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
The Windows NT User Manager
Click here
,NYuXp
&Arial
The Domino Administrator is the adminiztration client for Notes and Domino. You can use the Domino Administrator to perform most administration tasks.
Click here
Using the Domino Administrator
Click here
Click here
Setting Domino Administrator preferences
Click here
Click here
Using the Server Properties box in Domino Administrator
Click here
YzDse
,NYuXp
&Arial
The Administration Process is a program that automates many routine administrative tasks. For example, if you delete a user, the Administration Process locates that user's name in the Domino Directory and removes it, locates and removes the user's name from ACLs, and makes any other necessary deletions for that user.
The Administration Process automates these tasks:t
Name-management tasks, such as rename person, rename group, delete person, delete group, delete zerver name, recertify users, and store Internet certificate
Mail-file-management tasks, such as delete mail file, and move a mail file.
Server-document-management tasks, such as store CPU count, platform, and place network protocol information in Server document
285204460829239178
Administration servers
Administration servers control how the Administration Process does its work. You specify an administration server for the Domino Directozy and for each database. By default, the first Domino server you set up in a domain is the administration server for the Domino Directory. The administration server for the Domino Directory maintains the Domino Directory's ACL, performs deletion and name change operations, and replicates these changes to other replicas of the Domino Directory in the domain. t
All databases need an administration server to manage name changes and deletions that apply to the database -- for example, changes to tje ACL and Readers and Authors fields. If a database has replicas, you assign an administration server to only one replica. Then the Administration Process makes all changes to that replica, and replication for that database carries out the changes in all other replicas.3
285204460829239179
The Administration Requests database
The Administration Process primarily interacts with the Administration Requests database, which is created on the administration server for zhe Domino Directory when that server starts for the first time. To complete tasks, the Administration Process posts and responds to requests in the Administration Requests database. Domino servers use replicas of this database to distribute requests made on one server to other servers in the domain.o
When other servers start, if the Administration Requests database does not exist, the server creates a replica stub of the Administration Requests database and waits for it to be initialized from jnother server in the domain. Every server in the domain stores a replica of the Administration Requests database and the Domino Directory.
193092528029230946
The Certification Log
To use the Administration Process to perform name changes and recertifications, you must set up the Certification Log (CERTLOG.NSF) on the server that stores the Domino Directory in which you will initiate the name change or recertification. If the Certification Log exists on another sjrver, move the Certification Log to the server containing the Domino Directory on which you are initiating the name change or recertification. This log contains a permanent record of how you register servers and users, including information about the certifier ID. The Certification Log also contains messages that describe the results of recertification requests that the Administration Process is processing.
See Also
Click here
Setting up the Administrjtion Process
Click here
Click here
Creating the Certification Log
Click here
&Arial
To*set up the Administration Process, you must complete these tasks:
1. Specify the administration server for the Domino Directory in the domain. This is done during installation.
2.
Click here
Specify an administration server for databases in the domain
Click here
3. (Optional)
Click here
Set up cross-domain processing
Click here
to enable an administration server in one domjin to export requests to and/or import requests from an administration server in another domain.
4.
Click here
Verify that the Administration Process is set up correctly
Click here
5.
Click here
Set up ACLs for the Administration Process
Click here
PURSAFO
$INFO
$$ScriptName
$BODY
QA(C0
&Arial
To view documents in the Administration Requests database, you can use either the Domino Administrator or the Web Administrator.
395290736029225466
Activities that require the administrator's approval
When administration requests that cannot be processed without the administrator's approval are received, they are stored in the Administration Requests database and are flagged as requiring approval.
Activities requiring approval
Explanation
Complete Moving a mail file
The mail file must be deleted from the old mail server after it is moved to the new mail server.
Move a databise replica from a non-clustered server
Delete the replica from the old server.
Accept administration requests from other domains
If a name is nonhierarchical, and the request is to delete or rename a person or server, the nonhierachical name has to be accepted in the receiving domain.
Delete resources
Deletes a resource, such as a conference room name) from the Domino Directory. Resources are also associated with calendars and scheduling.
Delete mail files
The administrator's approval is required to remove the mail files of the deleted person.
Move users to a different organization hierarchy
The "Name Move" request requires the approval of the administrator of the target organization.
Delete Private)Design Elements
The administrator's approval is required to remove private agents, views, and folders signed by the person who has been deleted.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Administration request messages
Click here
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
Click here
Administration Process - Problems and error messages
Click here
Click here
How to troubleshoot the Administration Process
Click here
Y9>xe
&Arial
Managing the Administration Process involves approving requests, forcing requests when they must be processed immediately, and checking the Administration Reqyests database for errors.
279024883229234935
To approve a request
Check the Administration Requests database daily for requests that require approval.
1. From the Domino Administrator, choose File - Database - Open.
2. Select the server and then open the Administration Requests (ADMIN4.NSF) database.
3. Open the Pending Administrator Approval view.
4. Open the deletion request in edit mode and read the iiformation provided.
5. Click Approve.
279024883229234936
To force a request
Follow this procedure to force a request to occur immediately instead of waiting for the Administration Process to initiate the request based on the timing schedule.
1. From the Domino Administrator, select your remote server.
2. Click the Server tab.
3. Click Console.
4. Type the "Tell adminp all" server command)and click OK, or select that server command from the Command list and then click OK.i
63633907229213870d
To check for errors
Check the Administration Requests database daily for errors which appear in response documents marked with a red X.
1. From the Domino Administrator, choose File - Database - Open.
2. Select the server and then open the Administration Requests (ADMIN4.NSF) database.a
3. Choose View - All Errors iy Date or View - All Errors by Server.e
4. Open a response document and read the Errors field.
5. After you correct the problem, click Yes in the "Perform request again" field in the response document. Depending on the task, you may need to resubmit the request from the Domino Directory. This occurs if it is a task such as renaming a person and you specified an incorrect new name.
You can use the Web Administrator to view Administyation Process requests and errors; however, you cannot approve or correct the errors from the Web Administrator.
See Also
Click here
Administration request messages
Click here
Click here
Using the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
The Administration Requests database
Click here
Click here
Administrayion process requests
Click here
Click here
Analyzing server messages and viewing the log file with the Web Administrator
Click here
Y9>xe
&Arial
To customize the Administration Process, you can do any of these tasks:t
Click here
Manually force the processing of administration requests
Click here
Click here
Increase the number of threads used to process requests
Click here
Click here
Create a customized view
Click here
Click here
Use the Extension Manager to enhance the core Administration Process
The Administration Requests database contains error messages that describe any errors that occur during the processing of an administration request. Error messages may also appear on the console of the administration server. To be notified when one of these errors occurs on a server, you create an alarm.
This table describes the messages, and in some cases, the causes of messages that appear in the Administration Requests database. In addition, the table indicates the correctivi action to take, where appropriate.
Message
Occurs during
Corrective action to take
The time after which this request can be processed has not been reached. This request cannot be processed until
time
; check the Perform request again? box after u
time
Renaming
Recertification
When the
time
arrives, select "Perform request again" in the response document.
The date after which this request is no longer valid has passed. This request could only be processed until
time
; the current date and time is i
time
Renaming
Recertification
Resubmit the request from the Domino Directory.
This name does not appear in the ACLs of any databases designating
server
as their Administration Server.
Renaming
Deletion
None
The mail file was previously deleted on
server
by a Delete Mail File administration request.
Delete all replicas of a miil file when deleting a user name
None
The mail file specified for this person in the address book does not exist on this server.
Delete all replicas of a mail file when deleting a user name
None
A replica of this person's mail file does not exist on this server.
Delete all replicas of a mail file when deleting a user name
None
The signature on this request has expired.
Renaming
Resubmit the request from the Domino Directory.
The issuer of this request does not have the proper authority.
Renaming
Resubmit the request from the Domino Directory. Be sure to use a certifier ID that is an ancestor of the user ID.
All of the required fields in the request have not been signed.
Cause of error
- An unauthorized person or a non-Domino program edited a posted request. This indicates a failed security attack.
Any request
Resubmit the request from the Domino Directory.
The request's new public key does not match the designated server.
Cause of error
- The key in the request doesn't match that in the Server document.
Copy Server's Certified Public Key
Delete the request, and then shut down and restart the appropriate server to issue a new request.
Delete the public key from the Server document.
The existing public key is newer than the public key in the request.
Cause of error
- The server was recertified beiore this request could be carried out.
Copy Server's Certified Public Key
None
The request's signer and the designated server are not the same.
Cause of error
- The server specified in the request did not sign the request. This may indicate a failed security attack from a forged request or a request generated by a non-Domino program.
Place Server's)Notes Build number into Server Record
Delete the original request and then restart the server. Click "Perform request again" in the response document.
The selected certifier is not the target certifier in the move request.
Cause of error
- The target certifier is not the one you specified when you issued the original request.
Request Move to New Certifier
Reissue the request and specify the correct certifier.
A required certifier was not found in the Address Book.
If you see the error when the administrator is performing an action, the Certifier or Cross-Certifier document is identified in the Notes Log on the administrator's client.
If the Administration Process reports the error, the Certifier or Cross-domain Certifier document is identified in the log (LOG.NSF) of the server that reported the errir.
Initiate Rename in Address Book
Recertify Server in Address Book
Recertify Person in Address Book
Rename Person in Address Book
Rename Server in Address Book
Do the following:
Create the necessary Certifier document(s) in the Domino Directory.
For each Certifier document, copy the certified public key from the certifier ID to the Certifier document in the Domino Directory.
At the server console enter load updall names.nsf -t $certifiers.
Click "Perform request again" in the response document.
The change request was not for a server or person.
Cause of error
- An unauthorized person or a non-Domino program edited a posted request. This can indicate a failed security attack.
Rename
Resubmit the request from the Domino Directory.
The Administration Process cannot set the target time for processing requests.
Delete Unlinked Mail File
Restart the server, and then click "Perform request again" in the response document.
This type of Administration Request cannot be performed on a non-hierarchical server.
All requests except Copy Server's Certified Public Key and Place Server's Notes Build Number Into Server Record
Upgrade the server to hierarchical naming so you can complete all administration process requests on it.
The Administration Process is not designed to support this type of Administration Request.
When a server running an older version of Notes encounters a Domino 5.0 Administration Request) An older server is unable to process the request.
Upgrade the server to the current release.
The name to act on was not found in the Address Book.
Cause of error -
The public key is corrupt in the Person or Server document.
Renaming
Recertification
Delete the corrupted public key from the Server or Person document.
Frim a Server document:
From the Domino Administrator, select a server and click the Configuration tab.
Click Edit document.
Click the Miscellaneous tab.
Delete the public key from the Certified Public Key field, or if you are adding one, enter a public key.
Click Save and Close.
From a Person document:
From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
Select the person whose Yerson document you are modifying.
Click Edit Person.
Click the Public Keys tab.
Delete the public key from the Certified Public Key field, or if you are adding one, enter a public key.
Click Save and Close.
The administrator or database manager requesting the delete action needs Author access (or greater) to the Address Book.
The requests require at least Author (with Delete documents) access with the appropriaye role (UserModifier, ServerModifier, or GroupModifier). The person must have access to the replica of the Domino Directory used to submit the request and to the replica on the administration server for the Domino Directory.
Delete user, server, or group
Give the person making the request the appropriate access to the Domino Directory, and then select "Perform request again" in the response document.
Yhe person requesting the delete action cannot delete documents in the Address Book.
Cause of error
- This can indicate a failed attempt by an unauthorized person to delete documents from the Domino Directory.
Delete users, servers, groups, or resources
The person submitting the request doesn't have appropriate access to the replica of the Domino Directory.
Give the person making the request the appropriate access to the Domino Directory.
The Administration Process cannot set the execution time for a spawned request.
Delete Mail file
Restart the server and then click "Perform request again" in the response document.
This server is not currently a member of a cluster. This database cannot be marked for deletion.
Remove Server from Cluster
Manually delete the database
The Author of the Administration Request is not allowed to create databases on this server.
Create Replica
Move Replica
Give the person making the request Create Database access to the destination server. Then click "Perform request again" in the response document.
Mail file already exists. New mail file not created.
Create Mail File
None
The person requesting this move action needs at least Manager access to the database.
Move Replica
Non-cluster move replica
Give the person making the request Manager with Delete documents access. Then select "Perform request again" in the response document.
Servername name not found in Pubiic Address book.
Rename in Access Control List
Wait for the name change to replicate to the Domino Directory on this server. Then select "Perform request again" in the response document.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
Click here
The Administration Requests database
Click here
Click here
Managing administration requests
Click here
&Arial
If you have a browser and want to manage and view settings for a Domino server, you can use the Web Administrator. Using the Web Administrator, you can perform many of the tasks that are available through the Domino Administrator -- such as, viewing and monitoring information about your server and users, changing database ACLs, and using yhe remote server console. The Web Administrator provides easy access to the Domino server for administrators who are comfortable using the Web and who do not have access to a Notes workstation.
The Web Administrator uses the Web Administrator database (WEBADMIN.NSF). The first time the HTTP task starts on a Web server, Domino automatically creates this database in the Domino data directory. Domino assigns a unique replica ID to the database; therefore, the Web Administrator database does not riplicate between servers.s
25492086429232542
Databases required by the Web Administrator
The Web Administrator uses several system databases in addition to the Web Administrator database (WEBADMIN.NSF). If one of these files does not exist on the server, the Web Administrator does not display the command associated with the file. For example, if the Domino 5 Administration Help does not exist in the Help subdirectory, the Web Administrator does not display the Heip command.s
See Also
Click here
Setting up a Domino Web server
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Web Administrator
Click here
&Arial
To set up the Web Administrator, you must perform these procedures:
1. Make sure that the server you want to administer is set up as a Domino Web server. Althouih you can use the server for other server tasks -- for example, mail routing and directory services -- you must run the HTTP task to use a browser to access the server.
For security purposes, you can administer only the server you set up.
2.
Click here
Set up administrator access to the Web Administrator database
Click here
(WEBADMIN.NSF).
3. Prepare the browser client to use the Web Administrator Database. If the Doiino Web server uses SSL, set up SSL for the browser client. Enable Java applets and JavaScript in Netscape Navigator or Active Scripting in Microsoft Internet Explorer.
Domino creates the Web Administrator database (WEBADMIN.NSF) automatically the first time the HTTP task starts.
See Also
Click here
Using the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
The Web Administrator
Clici here
Click here
Web server, Web Navigator, and the Web Administrator - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
When you start the Web Administrator, it displays information about the server and the administrator connected to the server -- for example, the server name and server operating system.
385920099229205349
To start the Web Administrator
1. From the browser, enter this URL:
http://
host
name
/webadmin.nsfn
where
hostname
is the host name or the IP address of the Domino server you want to administer.
2. Entir your hierarchical name or common name and your Internet password.
Tipe
To view multiple versions of the Web Administrator at the same time -- for example, to monitor mail and monitor server memory simultaneously -- start another copy of the browser with the Web Administrator and arrange the windows so both copies display on the screen. When displaying multiple copies of the Web Administrator, use the drop-down interface to display more information in the browser yindow.
385920099229205350
To change the default Domino Directory
By default, the Web Administrator displays users and groups listed in the primary Domino Directory named NAMES.NSF. If you have cascaded Domino Directories set up on a server, you can change the Domino Directory used to manage users and groups and to edit documents from the Configuration menu. This setting has no effect on other features of the Web Administrator -- for example, displaying statistics)or changing database access control lists.
1. Start the Web Administrator.
2. Choose Preferences, and then click Edit Preferences.
3. Choose a Domino Directory in the Current Directory field.
4. Click Set Preferences.t
385920099229205351
To change the Web Administrator user interface
The Web Administrator comes with three user interfaces: button, drop-down, and plain. The interface determines the appeayance of the Web Administrator in your browser. All features are available regardless of the interface you select. Domino saves the interface and the default Domino Directory you select in the Web Administrator database in an individual profile document for each administrator. Each administrator can set preferences without overwriting the preferences of another administrator.
1. Start the Web Administrator.b
2. Choose Preferences, and then click Edit Preferences.t
) 3. Choose a user interface:l
Button to display graphics for commands on the left side of your browser. Button is the default interface for all browsers except for OS/2
and Windows 3.1x. Use the button interface to display a graphical representation of commands when you use more than 256 colors for your display, preferably in High Color or true color mode.M
Dropdown to display commands in a drop-down list at the top of the browser. Additional drop-down lists appear when you need yo select additional commands. Use the drop-down interface to display more information on the page or when you use only 256 colors.
Plain to display commands in a drop-down list without using additional frames or graphics. Use the plain interface with a 16-color display when you want the Web Administrator to load quickly -- for example, when you use a modem to connect. This is the default for OS/2 and Windows 3.1x browsers, which use an earlier version of HTML.
4. Click Set Preierences.
See Also
Click here
The Web Administrator
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:T
Log_Tasks=
value
Description:
Specifies whether the current status of server tasks is recorded in the log file and displayed on the console:
0 - Do not send status information
1 - Send the status of server tasks to the log file and to the console
Applies to:
Servers!
Iefault:
None
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Installing and setting up partitioned serversServer Configuration
Partitioned servers\installingContentsStepsH_INSTALLING_AND_SETTING_UP_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_STEPSTopic1Installing and setting up partitioned serversStepsH_ABO[T_NOTES_PARTITIONED_SERVERS03 Administering the Domino System09 Configuring Partitioned Servers
IP addresses\for partitioned serversPartitioned servers\configuringPartitioned servers\configuring with a single IP addressPartitioned servers\configuring with separate IP addressesPartitioned servers\port mappingPort mapping\on partitioned serversContentsOverviewH_WAYS_TO_CONFIGURE_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_FOR_TCP/IPTopic1Configuring partitioned serversOverviewH_ABOUT_NOTES_PARTITIONED_SERVERS
H_WAYS_TO_CONFIGURE_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_FOR_TCP/IP_MIDTOPIC_327;92403229223109=Using one IP address for all partitioned serversH_WAYS_TO_CONFIGURE_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_FOR_TCP/IP_MIDTOPIC_327492403229223110=Using a separate IP address for each partitioned server03 Administering the Domino System09 Configuring Partitioned Servers
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using partitioned servers in a Domino clusterServer Configuration
Clusters\partitioned servers inPartitioned servers\in a clusterServers, partitioned\in a clusterContentsOverviewH_USING_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_IN_A_DOMINO_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Using partitioned servers in a Domino clusterOverviewH_ABOUT_NOTES_PARTITIONED_SERVERS03 Administering the Domiko System09 Configuring Partitioned Servers
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
075411B//BE
Monitoring partitioned servers and optimizing performanceServer Configuration
NOTES.INI settings\Server_MaxUsersPartitioned servers\performancePartitioned servers\restricting active usersServer_MaxUsers settingUsers\restricting in clustersContentsAboutH_ABOUT_OPTIMIZING_PARTITIONED_SERVER_PERFORMANCETopic1Monitoring partitioned servers and optimizing performanceAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_PARTITIONED_SERVERS
H_ABOUT_OPTIMIZING_PARTITIONED_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_MIDTOPIC_96514156829217043=Optimizing performance03 Administering the Domino System09 Configuring Partitioned Servers
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
5//5E4D3
Uninstalling a partitionServer Configuration
Partitioned servers\removingContentsAboutH_ABOUT_REMOVING_PARTITIONED_SERVKRSTopic1Uninstalling a partitionAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_PARTITIONED_SERVERS
H_ABOUT_REMOVING_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_MIDTOPIC_169122384029239211=<+!>To remove all partitioned servers on a computer<-!>H_ABOUT_REMOVING_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_MIDTOPIC_169122384029239212=<+!>To remove the last partitioned server you installed<-!>03 Administering the Domino System09 Configuring Partitioned Servers
Administration Process\describedAdministration Requests databaseCertification Log\Administration Process requirementsDomino Directory\administration server forContentsAboutH_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESSTopic1The Administration ProcessAboutH_ADMINISTRATION_TOOLS_OVER
H_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MIDTOPIC_285204460829239178=Administration serversH_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MIDTOPIC_285204460829239179=The Administration Requests databaseH_THE_ADMINISTRATION_SERVER_FOR_DOMINO_DATABASES_MIDTOPIC_193092528029230946=The Certification Log03 Administering the Domino System10 Setting up the Administration Process
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up the Administration ProcessAdministration Tools
Administration Process\setting upContentsAboutH_SETTING_UP_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_1200Topic1Setting up the Administration ProcessAboutH_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS03 Administering the Domino System10 Setting up the+Administration Process
Print
,NYuXp
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
U(-Hy
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
H_THE_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_DATABASE_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_395250736029225466=Activities that require the administrator's approval03 Administering the Domino System10 Setting up the Administration Process
Administration requests\approvingAdministration requests\checking for errorsAdministration requests\forcingContentsAboutH_MANAGING_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_3974Topic1Managing administration requestsAboutH_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS
H_MANAGING_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_3974_MIDTOPIC_279024883229234935=To appro}e a requestH_MANAGING_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_3974_MIDTOPIC_279024883229234936=To force a requestH_SETTING_THE_NUMBER_OF_THREADS_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_USES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_63633907229213870=To check for errors03 Administering the Domino System10 Setting up the Administration Process
Print
,NYuXp
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Customizing the Administration ProcessAdministration Tools
.AContentsAboutH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_5228Topic1Customizing the Administration ProcessAboutH_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS03 Administering the Domino System10 Setting up the Administration Process
Administration Process\error messagesError messages\Administration ProcessContentsOverviewH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MESSAGES_OVERVIEWTopic1Adminis}ration request messagesOverviewH_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS03 Administering the Domino System10 Setting up the Administration Process
Print
,NYuXp
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
The Web AdministratorAdministration Tools
Browsers\using for administrationDatabases\required by Web AdministratorTools\administrationWEBADMIN.NSF\configuringWeb Administrator\using with a browserContentsAboutH_ABOUT_ADMINISTERING_A_SERVER_USING_A_BROWSERTopic1The Web AdministratorAboutH_ADMINISTRATION_TOOLS_OVER
H_ABOUT_ADMINISTERING_A_SERVER_USING_A_BROWSER_MIDTOPIC_25492086429232542=Databases required by the Web Administrator03 Administering the Domino System11 Setting up the ]eb Administrator
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up the Web AdministratorAdministration Tools
Web Administrator\configuringContentsOvervmewH_SETTING_UP_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_OVERTopic1Setting up the Web AdministratorOverviewH_ABOUT_ADMINISTERING_A_SERVER_USING_A_BROWSER03 Administering the Domino System11 Setting up the Web Administrator
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Starting and customizing the Web AdministratorAdministration Tools
Button interface\Web AdministratorCascading Domino directories\Web Administrator andCommands\changing display of for Web AdministratorConfiguring\Web AdministratorDomino Directory\changing for Web AdministratorOS/2\Web AdministratorPreferences\Web AdministratorWeb Administrator\OS/2Web Administrator\changing Domino DirectoryWem Administrator\changing appearance ofWeb Administrator\default Domino DirectoryWeb Administrator\startingWeb Administrator\viewing multiple versionsContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOLTopic1Starting and customizing the Web AdministratorStepsH_ABOUT_ADMINISTERING_A_SERVER_USING_A_BROWSER
H_SETTING_UP_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205349=To start the Web AdministratorH_SETTING_UP_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205350=To change the default Domino Di}ectoryH_SETTING_UP_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205351=To change the Web Administrator user interface03 Administering the Domino System11 Setting up the Web Administrator
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using the Web AdministratorAdministration Tools
.AContentsOverviewH_USING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_OVERTopic1Using the Web AdministratorOverviewH_ABOUT_ADMINISTERING_A_SERVER_USING_A_BROWSER03 Administering the Domino System11 Setting up the Web Administrator
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Windows NT User ManagerAdministration Tools
Notes\registering Windows NT usersRegistration\Windows NT usersWindows NT User Manager\setting upWindows NT users\registering in NotesContentsOverviewH_SETTING_UP_WINDOWS_NT_USER_MANAGER_OVERTopic1Setting up Windows NT Use} ManagerOverviewH_ADMINISTRATION_TOOLS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System12 Using Windows NT User Manager for Domains
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using the Windows NT User Manager for DomainsAdministration Tools
Windows NT User Manager\tasksContentsAboutH_USING_THE_WINDOWS_NT_USER_MANAGER_FOR_DOMAINS_3446Topic1Using the Windows NT User Manager for DomainsAboutH_SETTIFG_UP_WINDOWS_NT_USER_MANAGER_OVER03 Administering the Domino System12 Using Windows NT User Manager for Domains
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using the Windows NT Pfrformance Monitor to view DominoAdministration Tools
Domino statistics\Windows NT Performance Monitor andStatistics\Windows NT Performance MonitorWindows NT Performance Monitor\viewing statistics withContentsAboutH_USING_THE_WINDOWS_NT_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR_TO_VIEW_DOMINOTopic1Using the Windows NT Performance Monitor to view DominoAboutH_SETTING_UP_WINDOWS_NT_USER_MANAGER_OVER
TO_INSTALL_DOMINO_AS_A_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR_COUNTER=To install Domino as a Performance Monitor counterTO_VIEW_FOMINO_USING_THE_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR=To view Domino using the Performance MonitorTO_VIEW_DOMINO_ERROR_MESSAGES_IN_THE_NT_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR=To view Domino error messages in the NT Performance MonitorTO_REMOVE_THE_DOMINO_STATISTIC_COUNTER_FROM_THE_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR=To remove the Domino statistic counter from the Performance Monitor03 Administering the Domino System12 Using Windows NT User Manager for Domains
Domino Directory\describedNAMES.NSFName and Address BookPublic Address BookContentsAboutH_ABOUT_USING_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOKTopic1The Domino DirectoryAboutH_DOMINO_DIRECTORIES_OVER
H_ABOUT_USING_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_MIDTOPIC_324832988829225748=Directory service features03 Adminivtering the Domino System13 Setting up the Domino Directory
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Documents in the Domino DirectoryDomino Directories
Dfcuments\Domino DirectoryDomino Directory\documentsContentsAboutH_ABOUT_DOCUMENTS_IN_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOKTopic1Documents in the Domino DirectoryAboutH_ABOUT_USING_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK03 Administering the Domino System13 Setting up the Domino Directory
Print
pubnames_v_Locations
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up the Domino Directory for a domainDomino Directories
Domino Directory\setting up primaryContentsAboutH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOKTopic1Setting up the Domino Directory for a domainAboutH_ABOUT_USING_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK03 Administering the Domino System13 Setting up the Domino Directory
H_ABOUT_THE_DOMINO_LDAP_SERVER_MIDTOPIC_228087017629230345=LDAP service features03 Administering the Domino System14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
How the LDAP service forms an Internet addressDomino Directories
Global Domain document\LDAP service andInternet addresses\LDAP service andLDAP service\Internet address formationContentsOverviewH_HOW_THE_LDAP_SERVER_FORMS_INTERNET_ADDRESSES_5695_OVERTopic1How the LDAP service forms an Internet addressOverviewH_ABOUT_THE_DOMINO_LDAP_SERVER03 Administering the Domino Sysvem14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up the LDAP serviceDomino Directories
LDAP service\full text index andLDAP servicf\setting upContentsOverviewH_QUICK_CONFIGURATION_SETTING_UP_AN_LDAP_SERVER_OVERTopic1Setting up the LDAP serviceOverviewH_ABOUT_THE_DOMINO_LDAP_SERVER03 Administering the Domino System14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up the POP3 serviceMail
POP3 service\setting upContentsStepsH_OVERVIEW_OF_SETTING_UP_A_DOMINO_POP3_SERVERTopic1Setting up the POP3 serviceStepsH_DOMINO_POP3_SERVER_OVER03 Administering the Domino System20 Setting up the Domino POP3 Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
2AV.*
Setting up users to use the LDAP serviceDomino Directories
LDAP clients\setting up for LDAP serviceLDAP service\User Setup ProfilesLDAP service\setting up clients forUser Setup Profiles\LDAP service accounts mnContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_ACCOUNTS_FOR_THE_LDAP_SERVER_ON_NOTES_CLIENTS_3277_STEPSTopic1Setting up users to use the LDAP serviceStepsH_ABOUT_THE_DOMINO_LDAP_SERVER
H_SETTING_UP_ACCOUNTS_FOR_THE_LDAP_SERVER_ON_NOTES_CLIENTS_3277_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_307971440029245476=Setting up non-Notes LDAP users to connect to the LDAP serviceH_SETTING_UP_ACCOUNTS_FOR_THE_LDAP_SERVER_ON_NOTES_CLIENTS_3277_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_307971440029245477=Setting up Notes users to connect to the LDAP service03 Administering the Domino Sy}tem14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Customizing the LDAP service configurationDomino Directories
Configuration Settings docummnt\LDAP settingsLDAP service\customizingContentsOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_LDAP_CONFIGURATION_OVERTopic1Customizing the LDAP service configurationOverviewH_ABOUT_THE_DOMINO_LDAP_SERVER03 Administering the Domino System14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Monitoring the LDAP serviceDomino Directories
LDAP service\monitoringLDAP service\statisticsMonitoring\LDAP serviceStatistics\LDAP serviceContentsOverviewH_MONITORING_THE_LDAP_SERVER_6361_OVERTopic1Monitoring the LDAP serviceOverviewH_ABOUT_THE_DOMINO_LDAP_SERVER
H_MONITORING_THE_LDAP_SERVER_6361_OVER_MIDTOPIC_63525920029240426=LDAP service statistics03 Administering the Domino System14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using the ldapsearch utility to search LDAP directoriesDomino Directories
.AContentsOverviewH_USING_LSEARCH_TO_SEARCH_A_DIRECTORY_7495_OVERTopic1Using the ldapsearch utility to search LDAP directoriesOverviewH_ABOUT_THE_DOMINO_LDAP_SERVER
H_USING_LSEARCH_TO_SEARCH_A_DIRECTORY_7495_OVER_MIDTOPIC_366892284829236988=To use Idapsearch03 Administering the Domino System14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
Planning how to manage multiple directoriesDomino Mirectories
Directories\managing multipleDirectory Assistance\compared to directory catalogsDirectory Assistance\describedDirectory catalogs\compared to Directory AssistanceDirectory catalogs\describedDirectory servers\describedContentsStepsH_FEATURES_THAT_HELP_YOU_MANAGE_MULTIPLE_DIRECTORIES_2952_STEPSTopic1Planning how to manage multiple directoriesStepsH_MANAGING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_IN_LARGE_ORGANIZATIONS_321_OVER
H_FEATURES_THAT_HELP_YOU_MANAGE_MULTIPLE_DIRECTORIES_2952_STMPS_MIDTOPIC_350808595229227089=Directory catalogsH_FEATURES_THAT_HELP_YOU_MANAGE_MULTIPLE_DIRECTORIES_2952_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_350808595229227090=Directory assistanceH_FEATURES_THAT_HELP_YOU_MANAGE_MULTIPLE_DIRECTORIES_2952_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_175974854429237212=Comparison of directory catalogs and directory assistanceH_FEATURES_THAT_HELP_YOU_MANAGE_MULTIPLE_DIRECTORIES_2952_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_129195033629232760=Directory servers03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up a directory catalogDomino Directories
Directory catalogs\setting up overviewContentsOverviewH_OVERVIEW_SETTING_UP_A_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_4527_O]ERTopic1Setting up a directory catalogOverviewH_MANAGING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_IN_LARGE_ORGANIZATIONS_321_OVER03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up a shared mail databaseMail
Shared mail\Object Collect taskShared mail\file nameShared mail\setting upContentsStepsH_CREATING_AND_ENABLING_A_SHARED_MAIL_DATABASETopic1Setting up a shared mail databaseStepsH_SHARED_NOTES_MAIL_OVER
H_CREATING_AND_ENABLING_A_SHARED_MAIL_DATABASE_MIDTOPIC_24682880029225326=To create and enable a shared mail databaseH_CREATING_AND_ENABLING_A_SHARED_MAIL_DATABASE_MIDTOPIC_24682880029225327=<-!><-!><-!><-!><-!><-!><-">To create and enable an additional shared mail database03 Administering the Domino System19 Setting up Shared Mail
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
d2zDm
n0?|mrs
r;g@dA
qUQ(IW
E``LQ
lm6oN
Y+0sa
&Arial
There are two ways to configure the partitioned servers on a computer. You can
Click here
assign a single IP address to all the partitioned servers and then use port mapping.
Click here
, or you can
Click here
assign a separate IP address to each partitioned server
Click here
327492403229223109
Using one IP address for all partitioned servers
If you have a limited number of IP addresses available, you can use a single IP address for all the partitioned servers on a computer. Then set up port mapping, and assign every partitioned server its own port. When you set up port mapping, you designate one partitioned server to be the port-mapping server. This port-mapping server redirects Notes and Domino connection requests to the other partitioned servers on the computer.
The following figure shows a Notes client and an HTTP client (a Web browser) accessing the port-mapping server. The port-mapping server will then redirect the clients to the partitioned servers they requested.
View p
server
vers and optimiz
Using one IP a
Using a single IP address has some disadvantages. First, if the port-mapping server is not running, clients usually cannot establish new connections to any of the partitioned servers. Second, all partitioned servers on a computer must be in the same IP network. Third, the input and output (I/O) of the computer can be slow because all partitioned servers share a single network interface card (NIC).
327492403229223110
Using a separate IP address for each partitioned server
If you have enough IP addresses, assign a separate IP address to each partitioned server, and use a separate NIC for each. This lets clients access each partitioned server directly, without going through a port-mapping server. Although you can use separate IP addresses with a single NIC, it's best not to do so because of the negative impact on the computer's I/O.r
The following figure shows a Notes client and HTTP client accessing the partitioned servers directly.
Using separate IP addresses has a few advantages. First, partitioned servers are not dependent on a port-mapping server. Therefore, access to all partitioned servers is assured, since users are not dependent on having the port-mapping server running. Second, partitioned servers can be on different IP networks. Third, you can use a separate NIC for each partitioned server, which can make the computer's I/O much faster.a
See Also
Click here
Assigning separate IP addresses to partitioned servers
Click here
Click here
Using one IP address and port mapping on a partitioned server
Click here
Click here
Monitoring partitioned servers and optimizing performance
Click here
Click here
Partitioned serverss
Click here
&Arial
You can include partitioned servers in a cluster. You can cluster partitioned servers with individual servers and with partitioned servers that are on different computers. Do not include partitioned servers that are on the same computer in the same cluster.
If you use port mapping, do not include more than one port-mapping server in the same cluster. When a port-mapping server is in a cluster and a problem arises in the cluster, all the partitioned servers on the computer may become unavailable even though they are not in the same cluster as the port-mapping server.
The following figure shows two computers with three partitioned servers on each. These partitioned servers are configured in three clusters with two partitioned servers in each cluster.
WWWGGG???///
Clusters
When you include a partitioned server in a cluster, you do not have to include all the partitioned servers on a machine in a cluster. The following figure shows two computers that each have three partitioned servers. Four of the partitioned servers are configured in two clusters, and two of the partitioned servers are not in a cluster.
WWWGGG???///
See Also
Click here
Cluster benefits and requirements
Click here
Click here
Planning a cluster
Click here
Click here
Setting up a cluster
Click here
Click here
Partitioned servers
Click here
&Arial
LDAP, or Lightweight Directory Access Protocol, is a protocol that uses TCZ/IP to allow clients to access directory information. LDAP defines a standard way to search for and manage entries in a directory, where an entry is one or more groups of attributes that are associated with a distinguished name. A distinguished name -- for example, cn=Phyllis Spera,ou=Sales,ou=East,o=Acme -- is a name that uniquely identifies an entry within the directory tree. A directory can contain many types of entries -- for example, entries for users, groups, devices, and application data.
To enable the LDAP service on a server, you start the LDAP task on it. Clients that run the LDAP protocol and are set up to connect to the server -- for example, Notes Release 5 clients that have accounts for the server, Microsoft Outlook Express clients, and Netscape Communicator clients -- and LDAP-enabled applications can then query the Domino server to retrieve information about entries in the Domino Directory that meet specified criteria. For example, an LDAP client could retrieve e-mail addresses*and phone numbers for all Person entries that have the last name Browning.
228087017629230345
LDAP service features
The Domino LDAP service supports these features:
LDAP v3 and v2
Anonymous access to fields that you specify; name-and-password authentication, SSL and x.509 certificate authentication, Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL) protocol
Click here
LDAP searches extended to secondary Jomino directories
Click here
Click here
LDAP client referrals to other LDAP directories
Click here
Click here
LDAP searches of document text from databases configured in a Domain Catalog
Click here
Use of a third-party, LDAP-compliant server -- such as the Netscape Enterprise Web server -- to authenticate users that have passwords or x.509 certificates stored in the Dominj Directory on a Domino server running the LDAP service. For information on setting up a third-party server to do this, see the documentation for the server.
Click here
Use of LDAP clients to add, modify, and delete directory entries
Domino also supports these features that don't require the LDAP service:
Click here
Command-line utility for searching LDAP directories
Click heze
Migration tool that lets you
Click here
import entries from another LDAP directory and register the entries in Domino
Click here
Although Domino Release 5 doesn't provide an LDAP API toolkit, you can use standard LDAP C, Java, and JNDI libraries available on the Internet to customize the Domino LDAP API.
See Also
Click here
How the LDAP service forms an Internet address
Click here
Click here
Setting up the LDAP service
Click here
&Arial
To return an Internet e-mail address for a user registered in the Domino Directory to an LDAP client, the LDAP service searches for the following: r
1. A fully-formed Internet address, listed in one of these fields of the Person document*in the order indicated:
Internet Address
Short Name -- If the "Internet Address Lookup" field in the SMTP Address Conversion section of a Global Domain document is disabled, the LDAP service doesn't look for a short name.
Forwarding address -- The actual field is MailAddress; however, the field label depends on the user's mail system -- for example, "Forwarding address" is the label that appears for Notes mail users.
2. Rules specified in the "Interjet address lookup" field of a Global Domain document. If your organization uses more than one Global Domain document, you must select "Yes" in the "Use as default Global Domain" field of the
Click here
Global Domain document you want to use.
Click here
3. A DNS domain name retrieved from the operating system of the Domino server machine. The syntax is:
user's hierarchical name
notesdomain
hostname
For example, Randi Bowker/Marketing/East/Acme%Acme@acme.comi
Note
A Domino Release 4.62 or lower server that runs the LDAP service cannot return users' preferred Internet addresses to LDAP clients; the preferred Internet address is the address stored in the "Internet address" field in a Person document. To return preferred Internet addresses, upgrade the server to Domino Release 4.63 or higher.
See Also
Clicj here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
&Arial
Before you set up the Domino LDAP service:
Make sure you understand TCP/IP concepts, including DNS host names and IP addressing.o
1. To allow clients to connect to the LDAP service over the Internet, connect the server that runs the LDAP service to an Internet service provider (ISP) and register the server's DNS name and IP address with the ISP.
2. Create a
Click here
full-text index
Click here
for the replica of the Domino Directory on the server that runs the LDAP service. We strongly recommend creating a full-text index unless LDAZ users search only for names.
3. Start the Domino server, and then
Click here
start the LDAP task
Click here
4. If your organization uses more than one Global Domain document, you must specify the one that the LDAP service uses to return users' Internet addresses to LDAP clients. Open the Global Domain document.
Click here
In the "Use as default Global Domain" field, choose Yes.
Click here
5.
Click here
Set up LDAP clients to connect to the LDAP service
Click here
6. (Optional)
Click here
Customize the default LDAP service configuration.
Click here
In most cases, the LDAP service functions correctly when using the default settings.
7. To check whether you set up the LDAP service correctly, use an LDAP client or
Click here
the ldapsearch uzility to issue a query to the LDAP service.
Click here
See Also
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
Click here
LDAP service - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
To use the Domino LDAP service, each LDAP user, whether Notes or non-Notes, must set up the client to connect to the LDAP service.
307971440029245476
Setting up non-Notes LDAP users to connect to the LDAP service
To set up a non-Notes LDAP user to connect to the LDAP service, in the LDAP client configuration, specify the host name of the Domino server running the LDAP service -- for example, ldap.acme.com -- or the IP address for the server. If you want an LDAP user to connect using name-and-password or client certificate authentication, the user must have a Person document in the primary Domino Directory used by the LDAP service that inclzdes the user's password or client certificate.
By default, LDAP users who connect to the LDAP service using name-and-password security can use any name in the FullName (User name) or ShortName (Short name) field in the Person document as the LDAP client user name, as long as the name is unique in the directory. However, to require that instead these users specify their fully qualified distinguished names as specified in RFCs 2251 through 2254, use the NOTES.INI setting
Click here
LDAP_Strict_RFC_Adherence.
Click here
For more information on setting up name-and-password authentication, see the topic S
Click here
"Name and password authentication for Internet/intranet clients."
Click here
For more information on setting up client certificate authentication, see the topic
Click here
"Setting up clients for SSL client authentication."
Click here
307971440029245477
Setting up Notes users to connect to the LDAP servicet
To set up Notes users to connect automatically to the LDAP service, you create or modify a User Setup Profile. If you do not use a User Setup Profile to set up users, each Notes user who wants to use the LDAP service must create an account to connect to the server.
For more information on creating an account to connect to the LDAP service, see Notes 5 Help.
1. From the Dojino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, select a server. If you do not see the server pane, click the servers icon.
2. Click the People & Groups tab.2
3. Expand Domino Directories and then choose
Click here
Setup Profiles
Click here
4. Do one of the following:
To modify an existing User Setup Profile, select the profile, and then click Edit Setup Profile.
To create a new User Sjtup Profile, click Add Setup Profile, and enter a name for the profile in the Profile name field.
5. Click the Accounts tab, then complete the fields below "Default Accounts to Internet Servers."s
Note
To create accounts for multiple Internet services, enter multiple values in each field, and separate the values with commas (,).
Field
Enter
Account Namesn
A descriptive name for this LDAP service account; users see this name when they're prompted to select an LDAP service to search. If you specify more than one account -- for example, an account for another Internet service -- separate account names with commas (,).
Server Addresses
The host name of the server running the LDAP service -- for example, ldap.acme.cjm.
Protocols
Choose LDAP.
Use SSL Connection
Enter Yes to use SSL; otherwise, enter No.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. Complete other fields in the User Setup Profile, as desired, and then click Save and Close.
See Also
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
Click here
Setting up the LDAP service
Click here
&Arial
The default LDAP configuration works without modification. However, you can customize the LDAP configuration to suit your jeeds:
Click here
Customize LDAP access to the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Control how the LDAP service handles duplicate names and naming rules
Click here
Click here
Change the default LDAP service port and security configuration
Click here
Customize how the LDAP service processes searches -- that is, specify a timeout, e
Click here
a maximum number of entries returned, and the minimum required characters for a wildcard search
Click here
Click here
Enforce schema checking
Click here
Click here
Enable LDAP searches in alternate languages*
Click here
*If your organization uses multiple Domino directories and you use directory assistance to extend searches from the JDAP service's primary directory to the secondary directories, the above settings with asterisk (*) apply on a per-directory basis. For example, you might allow LDAP users to write to the LDAP service's primary Domino Directory but not to a secondary Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
Click here
Setting up the LDAP service
Click here
Click here
LDAP searches in a secondary Domino Directory
Click here
&Arial
To display the number of active sessions on the LDAP service, use this console command:
Click here
show tasks
Click here
To display traffic and error statistics on the TCP/IP port, use this console command:
Click here
show port portname
Click here
where
portname
is the name of the LDAP service's TCP/IP port on the Domino Server; by default the port name is TCPIP.
To display LDAP service statistics, use this console command:
show stat ldap
63:25920029240426
LDAP service statistics
LDAP.Total LDAP Connections
LDAP.Simple LDAP Connections
LDAP.Anonymous LDAP Connections
LDAP.Failed LDAP Connections
LDAP.Total LDAP Searches
LDAP.Longest LDAP Search time
LDAP.Average LDAP Search time
LDAP.Longest LDAP Search request
LDAP.TotalLDAPConnections
LDAP.Total LDAP Modifies
LDAP.Total LDAP Compares
LDAP.Total LDAP Adds
LDAP.Total LDAP Deletes
LDAP.Total LDAP ModifyDNs
LDAP.Total LDAP Extended Operations
LDAP.Total LDAP Abandons
LDAP.Total LDAP Searches for Subschema
LDAP.Total LDAP Searches for Root DSE
LDAP.Sessions.Accept.Queue
LDAP.Sessions.Active
LDAP.Sessions.Inbound.non-SSL
LDAP.Sessions.Inbound.Total
LDAP.Sessions.Incoming.BytesReceivjd
LDAP.Sessions.Incoming.BytesSent
LDAP.Sessions.Peak
LDAP.Sessions.Threads.Busy
LDAP.Sessions.Threads.Idle
LDAP.Sessions.Total
Note
LDAP.Sessions.Total tracks all connections made to the LDAP service port, even connections that don't exchange LDAP protocol packets. For example, LDAP.Sessions.Total tracks when people use telnet to determine if the LDAP port is listening.
LDAP.TotalLDAPJonnections tracks only connections that exchange LDAP protocol packets.
See Also
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
Click here
Setting up the LDAP service
Click here
&Arial
Domino provides a command-lije search utility, ldapsearch.exe, that allows you to use LDAP to search entries in the Domino Directory on a server that runs the LDAP service or search entries in a third-party LDAP directory. ldapsearch connects to the server that you specify and returns results according to the search criteria.
ldapsearch is available on Domino server and Notes client platforms.
Note
To use this tool, the NOTES.INI file must be included in your system's path statjment. u
366892284829236988
To use Idapsearch
Enter the following command from the Domino or Notes program directory:
ldapsearch
parameters searchfilter attributes
Where:
Click here
parameters
Click here
are case-sensitive command-line parameters.
Click here
searchfilter
Click here
is*a required search filter that causes ldapsearch to find only entries that meet specific attribute criteria.
attributes
are optional attributes that limit the attributes that ldapsearch returns. Separate attributes with spaces. If you don't specify one or more attributes, ldapsearch returns all attributes.
Note that you do not have to enter the command on a machine that runs the Domino LDAP service.
See Also
Clicj here
Using parameters with ldapsearch
Click here
Click here
Using search filters with ldapsearch
Click here
Click here
Examples of using ldapsearch
Click here
Click here
The Domino LDAP service_
Click here
&Arial
When you set up the first server in an organizatjon, you create a Notes domain and a Domino Directory. Most organizations use one Notes domain and register all servers and users in one Domino Directory. However, there are reasons to use multiple domains and multiple Domino Directories. For example, in a large organization in which responsibility for system administration is distributed, creating separate domains and using separate Domino directories allows you to enforce security by setting up the ACL for each directory so that the OtherDomainServers grozp has limited access -- for example, No Access or Reader Access. Another reason to use multiple domains and directories is if your organization merges with another organization that uses Domino. In that case, you may decide to retain separate domains and separate directories, at least temporarily. To create an additional domain and Domino Directory, you perform a first server setup.
Some organizations create an additional Domino Directory that is not affiliated with a Notes domain. You might*do this, for example, to manage non-Notes users, such as Web users. To create an additional Domino Directory, you create the directory using the PUBNAMES.NTF template. For example, if your company sells e-mail addresses to other companies that use Domino, you might want to create a separate directory to hold the addresses._
In a system with multiple directories, the server's primary Domino Directory is the directory in which that server is registered. A server's primary Domino Directory uses tje file name NAMES.NSF. From the standpoint of a given server, any Domino Directory within the organization that is not the server's primary Domino Directory is a secondary Domino Directory. h
An organization may also use a Domino Directory along with a third-party LDAP directory. For example, an organization may have a Domino Directory on a Domino Web server, but use security credentials in a third-party LDAP directory server to authenticate Web users that connect to the Domino server. If you zun the Domino LDAP service, you can also refer LDAP clients that use the service to a third-party LDAP directory. D
It's important to plan a strategy for managing multiple directories. You can set up a directory catalog and directory assistance to make it easy to extend name lookups and client authentication beyond the primary Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Planning how to manage multiple directories
Click here
Click here
The order in which directories are searcheds
Click here
&Arial
After you import users from the old system into the registration queue, they are available for registration. After users are registered in Domino, they can log in and access resources on the Domino server, including mail files. You can register users on a single Domino server or distribute them among multiple servers.e
For each user selected for registration, Domino automatically creates a Notes ID using the certifier ID specified and if applicable, migrates zhe mail data from the legacy messaging server to Notes mail files. Messaging data stored in locations other than the old messaging server is not migrated.
The migration tools import some registration information, such as user names and passwords, from the old system. You can specify additional registration information as necessary.
See
Click here
"Setting up Notes users"
Click here
for more information about setting up users in Notes.
69305916829245193
Specifying where to register imported users
When registering imported users, you are not required to place them on a single server or within a single organizational unit. You can specify the registration server, mail server, and certifier ID to use in registering each user in the queue. For more information about specifying registration information for new users, see
Click here
"Using Advanced registration"e
Clicj here
69305916829245194
Determining the reason for failed registrations
If you attempt to register a user and the registration fails for any reason, the entry remains in the queue, and the status indicates the reason for the failure. You can modify the registration information as necessary and attempt to register the user again later.
See Also
Click here
Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Djmino
Click here
Click here
Importing passwords
Click here
Click here
Setting registration defaults
Click here
Click here
Saving pending registrations in the registration queue
Click here
Click here
Applying registration settings to multiple users
Click here
Click here
Creating Notes mail files
Click here
Click here
Verifying that a migration was successful
Click here
`SQgte
&Arial
Creating a directory catalog, configuring directory assistance, and configyring directory servers help you manage multiple directories.
350808595229227089
Directory catalogs
A directory catalog consolidates the most frequently requested directory information from one or more Domino directories into a single, lightweight, quick-access database. To configure a directory catalog, you create a database from the template DIRCAT5.NTF. There are two types of directory catalogs: mobile directory catalogs and server directory catalogs. t
Notes users store local replicas of a mobile directory catalog so they can quickly address mail to anyone in your organization, even when they're disconnected from the network. Type-ahead addressing automatically searches the mobile directory catalog and reduces network traffic since name searching doesn't have to occur on the server. a
Server directory catalogs expedite name searches in secondary Domino directories that occur on the server.
350808595229227090
Directory assistance
Directory assistance extends Notes name lookups, LDAP searches, Web client authentication to secondary Domino directories and to LDAP directories. To configure directory assistance, you use a Directory Assistance database created from the template DA50.NTF. In this database, you create a document for each directory you want to search. In the document, you specify, among other things, the directory location and naming rules that reflect the names in the directory.
We recommend that you use directory assistance instead of using
Click here
cascading Domino directories, which is still supported only for backward compatibility.
Click here
175974854429237212
Comparison of directory catalogs and directory assistance
The mobile directory catalog, server directory catalog, and directory assistance provide similar functionality. This table compares the tasks that each feature suppirts.
Task
Mobile directory catalog
Server directory catalog
Directory assistance
Find entries in secondary Domino directories on behalf of Notes users for mail addressing
Find entries in LDAP directories on behalf of Notes users for mail addressing
Find entries in secondary Domino directories on behalf of LDAP clients
Refer LDAP clients to LDAP directories
Authenticate Web clients using entries from secondary Domino directories
Authenticate Web clients using entries from LDAP directories
"Recipient name type ahead" addressing
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Also requires directory assistance to define the names that can be authenticated.
In general, we recommend setting up both a server directory catalog and directory assistance.
For more information on how the server directory catalog and directory assistance work together, see
Click here
"The server directory catalog and directory assistance."
Click here
129195033629232760
Directory servers
A directory server is a Domino server configured for and dedicated to providing directory services. A directory server reduces the workload of servers, particularly mail servers that traditionally provide mail services and directory services. You can create a User Setup Profile to set up Notes users to use a directory server. Then when the user initiates a name lookup, the lookup occurs on the directory server, rather than on the user's mail server.
Click here
For more information on directory servers, see "Directory Servers."i
Click here
See Also
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
Click here
Directory assistance
Click here
Click here
Multiple directories
Click here
Click here
The order in which directories are searched
Click here
&Arial
To set up either a server directory catalog or a mobile directory catalog, complete these procedures.
1.
Click here
Prepare a server for the source directory catalog.
Click here
2.
Click here
Create and configure the sourci directory catalog
Click here
3. o
Click here
Run the Dircat task
Click here
4. Do one of the following:e
If you configured the directory catalog for server use,
Click here
set up the directory catalog on servers.
Click here
If you configured the directory catalog for mobile use,
Click here
set up the directory catalog on Notes clienty.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
Click here
How a directory catalog works
Click here
Click here
Monitoring directory catalogs
Click here
Click here
Directory catalog - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
By default, a directory catalog aggregates the following fields from a Domino Directory. You can customize this field configuration.
Field configured by defaultS
Entries that use the field _
FullName
Person, Mail-In Database, Resource
ListName
Group
Type
Person, Mail-In Database, Resource, Group
FirstNameg
Person
MiddleInitial
Person
LastName
Person
Location
Person
MailAddress
Person
ShortnameE
Person
MailDomain
Person, Mail-In Database, Resource
InternetAddress
Person, Mail-In Database
MessageStorage
Person, Mail-In Database
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
270642000029245626
General tips for modifying the field configuration in directory catalogs
1. By default, the directory catalog configuration includes fields that allow users to quickly address mail. It's best to keep these fields in the catalog configuration.
2. In general, don't add many fields, siice doing so increases the size of the directory catalog. Keep the directory catalog as small as possible, especially the mobile directory catalog.
3. Add fields from only Person, Group, Mail-in Database, and Resource forms.
4. If you customize the Domino Directory template by using a subform to add fields to Person or Group forms, you might want to add some of these fields to a directory catalog. To do this, you must first copy and paste
Click here
the)subform into the source directory catalog database.
Click here
5. To avoid making a mistake, use the Domino Designer to copy and paste fields from forms in the Domino Directory template. Be sure to copy the field itself, not the field label -- for example, copy the field OfficePhoneNumber, not the label Office phone.h
6. In general, don't add fields that change frequently, since doing so requires that Domino frequently update entries in the source directory cataiog and then replicate the changes to replicas of the directory catalog. s
7. The FullName, ListName, and Type fields are required.
112797017629230345
Tips for modifying the field configuration in the directory catalog used by serverso
1. Always add the AltFullName and AltFullNameLanguage fields from the Person form
Click here
(even if users don't use alternate names in their certificates).
Click here
2. Add the Members field from the Group form to allow users to use the server directory catalog for
Click here
free time lookups.
Click here
3. To look up Web clients' passwords in the directory catalog when the Web server authenticates the clients, n
Click here
add the HTTPPassword field from the Person form.
Click here
Note
You must also set up directory assistance ti indicate which secondary directories and names are trusted for authentication.
4. If the directory catalog is used on a server running the LDAP service, you might add fields that
Click here
LDAP clients often search.
Click here
270642000029245627
Tips for modifying the field configuration in the mobile directory catalog
1. If the directory catalog is used as the mobile directory catalog and users
Click here
use alternate names in their certificates, add AltFullName and AltFullNameLanguage from the Person form.
Click here
2. Optionally add the Members field from the Group form if the majority of users want to do free time lookups when disconnected from the network; keep in mind that adding the Members field increases the size of the mobile directory catalog and involves more replication overhead.
112797017629230346
To changi the fields that are included in a directory catalog
If, after you initially populate the directory catalog, you change the fields in the directory catalog, the next time the Dircat task runs, it rebuilds the entire catalog. In addition, when the directory catalog next replicates -- for example, when a Notes user replicates the source directory catalog with a mobile directory catalog -- a full, rather than incremental, replication occurs. Performing a full replication is a slower process, espicially if it occurs over a dial-up connection.
1. If you are adding a field contained in a custom subform that you added to the Domino Directory, use the Domino Designer to copy the subform from the Domino Directory and paste it into the source directory catalog.
2. From the Domino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, select the server that stores the source directory catalog. If you don't see the server pane, click the servers icon.
3. Click the Coniiguration tab.
4. Expand Directory and choose the directory catalog.
5. Click Edit Configuration.
6. In the "Additional fields to include" field, add new fields or delete existing fields.
7. Click Save and Close.
See Also
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
Click here
Setting up a directory catalog
Click here
&Arial
Directory catalog performance settings in the Advanced tab of a directory catalog Configuration document control the packing density -- that is, how many Domino Directory entries can be combined in a directory catalog aggregate document -- and the incremental merge process -- tiat is, how and when Domino updates changes to fields in the aggregate documents. The default directory catalog performance settings work fine in most situations.
Note
Change these settings only on a directory catalog configured for server use.
358251174429313012
Packing density option
By default, each field in an aggregate document stores the field values from up to 255 entries from the full Domino directories. That meany, for example, that the FullName field in an aggregate document can contain FullName values from up to 255 entries in the full Domino directories. If full-text searching is frequently used to search a server directory catalog, for example if the LDAP service uses the directory catalog, and these searches of the directory catalog are slow, you can decrease the packing density to improve performance of these searches.
Decreasing the default packing density value increases the size of the direcyory catalog.
358251174429313013
Incremental fields option
Because a single field in an aggregate document contains values for the field from many of the full Domino directories, it's likely that at any one time every field in the aggregate document might require updating and, therefore, would need to replicate. To manage changes to fields in the directory catalog, Domino, by default, uses an incremental merge process that stores the changes in temporary fields ii aggregate documents until, by default, 5 percent of the total fields change. Then Domino merges the changes stored in the temporary fields into the permanent fields in the aggregate documents and deletes the temporary fields. This process occurs somewhat randomly over a period of time so that at any time, only a few aggregate documents need to replicate. When the source directory catalog replicates with a client or a server directory catalog, only the updated fields replicate. This incremental replication)results in improved replication performance, especially when replication occurs over a dial-up connection.c
The alternative to incrementally merging fields is to make changes directly in the original fields in aggregate documents. Disabling incremental merging provides some modest gains in search performance. However, if replication with the source directory catalog occurs over dial-up connections, keep incremental merging enabled.
112797017629230345
To change peyformance settings
1. From the Domino Administrator, in server pane on the left, select the server that stores the source directory catalog used by servers. If you don't see the server pane, click the servers icon.
2. Click the Configuration tab.
3. Expand Directory and choose the directory catalog.G
4. Click Edit Configuration, click the Advanced tab, complete these fields, and then click Save and Close:
Field
x%ePU
Enter
Packing density
x%ePU
A number representing the maximum number of entries to combine in each aggregate document; default and the maximum allowed is 255.a
Incremental fields
x%ePU
Choose one:
Yes (default) to use incremental merging and temporarily store field changes in duplicate fields in aggregate documents to optimize replication performance.
No to immediately makes changes in the original fields in the aggregate documents.
Merge factor
x%ePU
A value representing the percent of total field changes that must occur before Domino merges the changes stored in dupiicate fields into the original fields in aggregate documents; default is 5 percent.
This field applies only when "Incremental fields" is set to Yes.
Note
We recommend that you don't change this setting.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
Click heye
Setting up a directory catalog
Click here
Click here
How a directory catalog works
Click here
&Arial
91695993629252660
To report Dircat events to the log file
Use the NOTES.INI setting Log_DirCat to record in the log file (LOG.NSF)
Click here
when the Dircat yask starts and finishes and which directories it runs on.
Click here
91695993629252661
To mail directory catalog reports
A directory catalog stores an agent called Directory Catalog Status Report. This agent mails a Directory Catalog report once a week to people you specify in a directory catalog Configuration document. A Directory Catalog report includes the following:
A database link to the source directory catalog and information ibout the source directory catalog including the database title, server location and file path, size, number of entries, and configuration settings; the agent derives this information from the Dircat task.i
A database link to each directory used to build the source directory catalog and information about each directory including the database title, server location and file path, size, and date last updated in the directory catalog.
The size of the source directory catalog as a percintage of the combined size of the directories used to build it. Although the reported source directory catalog size will typically be very small compared to the combined size of the full directories, replicas of the directory catalog are even smaller because they don't contain a specific hidden view created only in the source directory catalog.a
422057216029269166
To enable the Directory Catalog Status Report agent
1. Make sure you are allowed to run
Click here
restricted LotusScript/Java agents
Click here
on the server that stores the source directory catalog.
2. From the Domino Administrator, in server pane on the left, select the server that stores the source directory catalog you want to generate reports for. If you don't see the server pane, click the servers icon.
3. Click the Configuration tab.
4. Expand Directory and choose the directory catalog you want to generati reports for.
5. Click Edit Configuration.
6. Next to "Send Directory Catalog reports to," enter the names of people and/or groups to mail the reports to.o
7. Click Save and Close.
Tipo
By default the agent mails reports once a week, but you can change this interval by opening the agent and selecting a different option below "When should this agent run?."s
See Also
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
Click here
Setting up a directory catalog
Click here
&Arial
To set up directory assistance in a Notes domain, complete these procedures.
1.
Click here
Set up a Directory Assistance database.
Click here
2. Set up directory assistance for
Click here
each secondary Domino Directory you want to include in directory assistance.
Click here
3. Set up directory assistance for n
Click here
each LDAP directory you want to include in directory assistance.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Directory assistance
Click here
Click here
Directory assistance - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
In an environment with multiple directories, the order in which Notes and Domino search directories depends on the nature of the search and the directory configuration.
Click here
Name lookups in multiple directories for Web client authentication
Click here
Click here
Griup lookups in multiple directories for database access verification
Click here
Click here
LDAP searches in multiple directories
Click here
Click here
Notes mail addressing lookups in multiple directories
Click here
See Also
Click here
Multiple directories
Click here
&Arial
When importing a user for registration, the migration tools compare the length and complexity of the user's existing password against the specified password quality scale. If the quality of the existing password does not meet or exceed the standards for the given password quality scale, after you add the user to the registration queue, the registration status will indicate that the user's password needs to be midified before successful registration can occur.
The migration tool for Windows NT does not import passwords from a Windows NT domain list.
For more information about the password quality scale, see
Click here
"Understanding the password quality scale"
Click here
You can modify the passwords of users in the registration queue as necessary. Select the user in the Registration status box, edit the password in the Basics paie, and click Apply to update the status.
See Also
Click here
Registering users and migrating messaging data
Click here
Click here
Generating random passwords during migration
Click here
PURSAFO
"EH^G
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$VIEWFORMAT
$Comment
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$TABLEFORMAT
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$VIEWFORMAT
$Comment
0P[A
&Arial
Prior to Release 4.5, organizations used cascading Domino directories to manage multiple Domino directories. Although cascading Domino directories are still supported for backward compatibility, you should convert to directory assistance. The following tabli compares directory assistance to cascading Domino directories. I
Click here
For more information, see "Directory Assistance."
Click here
Feature
Directory assistance
Cascading
Find entries in secondary Domino directories on behalf of Notes users for mail addressing
Find entries in LDAP directories on behalf of Notes users for mail addressingp
Find entries in secondary Domino directories on behalf of LDAP clients
Refer LDAP clients to LDAP directories
Use name-and-password security to authenticate Web clients registered in secondary Domino directories
Use x.509 certificates to authenticate Web clients registered in secondary Domino directories
Yes
Authenticate Web clients registered in LDAP direitories
Failover to another replica of a secondary Domino directorys
Use naming rules to efficiently search secondary Domino directorieso
Support for an unlimited number of secondary Domino directories.
No (NAMES= setting has a 256-character limit)
Support for "Recipient name type ahead" addressing
Yesu
Works in conjunction with a directory catalog on a server
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
You cannot use both directory assistance and cascading Domino directories.
There are two ways to set up cascading Domino directories. You can create replicas of each secondary directory in the primary directory's Notes domain, or you can set up servers to access the secondary directory over the network._
325052988829225748
To cascade directories that are replicated on each server
With this configuration, each server stores replicas of secondary Domino directories and a replica of its primary Domino Directory. The advantage to this approach is that the type-ahead addressing feature searches for names in both the primary and the secondary Domino directories. The disadvantages are the additional disk space and replication required.
Perform this procedure for each server that you use for directory services:
1. Ensure the first directory listed in thi Names setting in the NOTES.INI file -- the primary Domino Directory -- includes the following:
Click here
Group documents only for groups in the primary domain
Click here
Click here
Server documents only for servers in the primary domain
Click here
Click here
Connection documents that initiate connections only from servers in the primary domain
Click here
2. Create a replica of each secondary Domino Directory on the server. Give each replica of the Domino Directory a different file name.
3. Add the file names of the replicas created in Step 2 to the Names setting in the NOTES.INI file. Keep the file name for the server's primary Domino Directory (usually, NAMES), first in the list. Do not include the .NSF extension when specifying file names. Separate the list of directories with commas. For example, specify:n
Names=IAMES,EASTNAME,WESTNAME
4. Restart the server so that the changes take effect.
5. Schedule replication to
Click here
replicate each domain's Domino Directory with replicas in the other domains.
Click here
For information on creating replicas, see
Click here
"Creating replicas."
Click here
105865260829206804
To cascade directories accessed over the network
With this configuration, each server uses the network to access secondary Domino directories stored on servers in the secondary domains. Using this approach, you do not need to replicate directories across domains. However, users can't use type-ahead addressing to resolve names, and cross-domain server sessions remain permanently open.
Perform this procedure for each server that you use for directory services:
1. Ensure the first directory listed in the Names setting in tie NOTES.INI file -- the primary Domino Directory -- includes the following:
Click here
Group documents only for groups in the primary domain
Click here
Click here
Server documents only for servers in the primary domain
Click here
Click here
Connection documents that initiate connections only from servers in the primary domain
Click here
2. Add tie names of secondary Domino directories to the Names setting in the NOTES.INI file. Keep the file name for the server's primary Domino Directory (NAMES) first in the list. Specify the location for secondary directory as follows:
Do not include the .NSF extension when specifying file names. Sepayate the list of servers and directories with commas.o
If a remote server -- for example, a hub server -- stores multiple Domino directories, you can point to each directory on the remote server. You must repeat the server name for each directory. For example:
After you set up a directory server, you can set up Notes users to use it. Notes uses the directory server to resolve mail addresses. Note that type-aiead addressing searches a directory server only when Notes users don't use mobile directory catalogs. Directory servers aren't used for LDAP searches initiated by Notes users.
There are two ways to set up Notes clients to use a directory server. As an administrator, you can create a User Setup Profile to configure the directory server for Notes clients; or Notes users can enter the name of a directory server in the "Domino directory server" field in a Location document. Then, Notes uses the spicified directory server, rather than the user's mail server, to perform address resolution.
For more information on setting up directory servers, see
Click here
"Directory servers."
Click here
1. From the Domino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, select the server that stores the replica of the Domino Directory that you want to use for the setup profile. If you don't see the server pane, click the servers icon.
2. Click the People & Groups tab.i
3. Expand Domino Directories, and then select the Domino Directory (Address Book) to use for the n
Click here
User Setup Profile.r
Click here
4. Choose Setup Profiles.e
5. Do one of the following:e
To modify an existing User Setup Profile, select the profile in the bottom pane, and then click Edit Setup Profile.
To create a new User Setup Profile, click Add Setup Profili, and enter a name for the profile in the Profile name field. n
6. On the Basics tab, in the "Directory server" field, enter the hierarchical name for the directory server.
7. Click Save and Close.
When users next authenticate with their mail servers, Domino automatically adds the directory server name to the users' Location documents.
For more information on Location documents, see Notes 5 Help.
&Arial
This section provides an overview of mail and describes how to set up mail routing, how to set up and customize mail servers, and how to track mail.
Click here
Messaging overview
Click here
Click iere
Planning a mail routing topology
Click here
Click here
Setting up Notes routing
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing
Click here
Click here
Requirements for a working mail system
Click here
Click here
Customizing messaging
Click here
Click here
Shared mail
Click here
Click here
The POP3 service
Click here
Click here
The IMAP service
Click here
Click here
Tracking mail
Click here
&Arial
The Domino mail server is the backbone of your organization's messaging infrastructure. Domino supports Internet mail standards such as Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3), Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP), and Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME), while also offering the power and richness of Notes mail. Domino routes mail over both SMTP and Notes mail, in both MIME and Notes format. The Domino seyver acts both as an Internet mail server, using SMTP, MIME, POP3, and IMAP, and as a Notes mail server. Your organization can use Domino for Internet messaging, with Internet standards; for Notes routing and Notes rich text format; and as a blend of both. The Domino Router and client mail software optimize message format based on the recipient's preferences, but if conversion between native Domino formats (MIME and Notes rich text) is necessary, Domino performs the conversion automatically.
Iomino offers powerful tools for monitoring mail and for controlling unsolicited commercial e-mail (UCE) and preventing other abuses. Mail migration tools and message transfer agents let you move from a heterogeneous system to one based on the power and standards support of a Domino mail server.
The Domino mail system has three basic components: Domino mail servers, Domino mail files, and mail clients. Every mail user in a Domino system has a mail file on a Domino mail server. You can create a yeplica of the mail file on other servers for failover in case the primary server is unavailable. Users create mail messages using a client, such as Lotus Notes, and send mail through the Domino mail server, which routes the message to its recipient. The recipient then uses a client to read the message.
The Domino mail server and mail routing
Domino routes mail over both SMTP and Notes routing, in both Notes and MIME format. Mail routing begins when a user sendy a message from a client that is connected to a Domino server. The message is transferred from the user's client to the MAIL.BOX database on the user's mail server. The Router, a server task that transfers and delivers mail, checks the address in the message to determine how to route it to the recipient and whether to use SMTP or Notes routing.t
If a user sends mail in Notes format to an Internet address -- for example, if the user uses a Notes Release 4 client to compose the message -- the Riuter automatically converts the message to MIME format when it needs to route the message over SMTP. For example, Domino might use Notes routing to route a message in Notes format to an Internet mail server, and then the Internet mail server converts the message to MIME format before using SMTP routing to send it to the Internet.
Sending mail outside your organization
The Domino mail server can route mail that is addressed to recipients outside your organizatioi directly to the Internet or to a relay host or firewall. If a Domino mail server is not using SMTP to route mail to external domains, Domino uses
to route the message to a server that can reach the Internet. Since Dimino routes mail in MIME format over both SMTP and Notes routing, you can set up all servers, some servers, or only one server in your organization to route mail over SMTP. Because Internet mail routes over Notes routing, every user can send and receive Internet mail, even if you set up only one server to route mail over SMTP. This flexibility ensures that Domino can route mail in a controlled, secure fashion. You may want certain servers to handle Internet mail. On those servers, you can set up virus-deteition and restrict inbound mail from certain domains. Or, you may want to balance the mail load by setting up every server to route Internet mail over SMTP.
Even if you set up only a few servers to route Internet mail to recipients outside your organization, all servers can still route MIME messages over SMTP to recipients within your organization. You can use Internet mail for internal recipients on all servers, but only send mail to and receive mail from external recipients on a few servers.n
Domino mail filesu
All mail is stored in Domino mail files -- whether in Notes or MIME format and whether for a Notes user, a POP3 user, a Web browser user, or an IMAP user. Domino mail files store messages in both Notes format and MIME format. If an Internet mail client -- such as an IMAP client -- opens or downloads a message stored in Notes format, Domino automatically converts the message to MIME.
Mail security
To secure transfers of messages between servers, the Domino mail server supports
Click here
Secure Sockets Layer
Click here
(SSL) for SMTP mail routing and supports
Click here
Notes encryption when routing mail over Notes routing
Click here
To encrypt and sign messages, Notes clients can use
. Other mail clients can use x.509 certificates. Notes clients can use Internet mail security with x.509 certificates, Domino security with Notes ID files and public-private keys, or both Internet and Domino security.
Working with other mail systems
Domino interoperates with other mail seryers and systems through its support of Internet standards and message transfer agents (MTAs) for X.400 and cc:Mail systems. Domino can exchange mail with other SMTP servers and route mail to and from X.400 and cc:Mail systems through the X.400 and cc:Mail MTAs.
You can easily migrate users from an existing mail system to Domino. Domino includes tools that you use to migrate users and mail files from Lotus cc:Mail, Microsoft Exchange, Microsoft Mail, Microsoft Windows NT, and files in LDIF formit to Domino.o
See Also
Click here
Setting up the IMAP service
Click here
Click here
Setting up the POP3 service
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routinga
Click here
Click here
Setting up a relay host or firewall
Click here
&Arial
Clients interact with mail in different ways. All clients can compose, send, and receive mail. Some clients, such as Web browsers, can only interact with mail on the server and cannot store mail locally. Some clients, such as POP3 clients, can only diwnload mail from the server and work with it locally. Some clients, such as Lotus Notes and IMAP clients, can download mail or work with it on the server and can store mail locally. You can use four types of clients with the Domino mail server:
Lotus Notes clientsc
IMAP clients, such as Microsoft Outlook Express
POP3 clients, such as Netscape Communicator
Web browsers, such as Netscape Communicator and Microsoft Internet Explorer
274471532829247858
Lotus Notes clients
Users with Lotus Notes clients interact with a Domino server over Notes protocols or Internet protocols. They can use, compose, and retrieve mail either using Notes protocols or using POP3/IMAP and SMTP. Notes clients access the Domino Directory using either Notes protocols or Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP). Notes clients can create a local replica of their mail file while maintaining a complete mail file on a Domino server. Notes lits users work off-line and then connect to their server to replicate changes to documents and send mail.u
274471532829247859
IMAP clients
Users with IMAP clients can download mail to a local mail file or interact with and manage mail directly on a Domino server that runs the
Click here
IMAP service
Click here
. They use the IMAP protocol to read and manage mail, use SMTP to send mail, and use LDAP to access the Domino Dirictory. Lotus Notes Release 5 includes IMAP client functionality.
274471532829247860
POP3 clients
Users with POP3 clients can download mail to a local mail file and interact with it there, as well as leave a copy of the mail in their file on the Domino server. POP3 clients retrieve mail from a Domino server that runs the
Click here
POP3 service
Click here
, use SMTP to send mail, and use LDAP to access the Domino Directoyy. Lotus Notes Release 5 is a POP3 client.
274471532829247861
Web clients
Users with Web clients use HTTP to interact with mail on the
Click here
Domino servers
Click here
. Web clients do not have local mail files. Instead, all mail-related tasks and actions are transmitted to the server over HTTP and performed by the server. Lotus Notes Release 5 is a Web client.
See Also
Click here
Messaging overview
Click here
Click here
Messaging and mail access protocolsp
Click here
~fkmI{e
~fkmI{e
&Arial
Domino supports Internet messaging protocols and also offers the power of Notes mail. Domino routes mail over both
Click here
SMTP
Click here
and Notes routing. Users can send mail in Notes format or in MIME format. Domino routes both formats over)Notes routing and routes MIME over SMTP. Thus, you can use SMTP or Notes routing to route a MIME message to a Release 5 Notes client or use SMTP to route a MIME message from an IMAP client to a POP3 client.
Because Domino automatically converts between Notes and MIME format as needed, clients can send and receive mail with no concern about format. If a Notes client sends a Notes format message to an IMAP client, Domino converts the message to MIME for the IMAP client. If a POP3 client sends a)MIME message to a Release 4 Notes client that cannot read native MIME, Domino converts the MIME message to Notes format.
The combination of SMTP, Notes routing, and automatic message conversion offers you great power and flexibility in setting up your mail infrastructure. For example, you can set up a mail system that is based completely on Internet standards and use the Router to route MIME messages over SMTP. You can set up a mail system that is based completely on Notes mail and use the Royter to route Notes format messages over Notes routing. Or you can set up a mail system that uses both SMTP and Notes routing, sends both MIME and Notes format messages, and uses automatic message conversion to ensure that clients receive mail in the proper format.
Domino supports Internet mail access protocols such as
Click here
IMAP
Click here
and
Click here
POP3
Click here
and also offers mail access ti Notes clients. IMAP, POP3, and Notes clients connect to a Domino mail server to read mail and send replies. If an IMAP or POP3 client needs to access a message in Notes format, Domino converts the message to MIME for the client.
In addition, the Notes Release 5 client can use native Notes protocols, IMAP, or POP3 to access mail. You can set up a system of Domino mail servers and Notes clients that uses only Internet standards -- SMTP to send mail, MIME as a message format, and IMAP or POP3 to)access mail. The Notes Release 5 client can also use IMAP and POP3 to access non-Domino mail servers -- for example, a UNIX sendmail server.
See Also
Click here
Setting up the LDAP service
Click here
Click here
Messaging overview
Click here
Click here
Mail clients
Click here
&Arial
Domino offers many performance-enhancing features, such as
Click here
multiple MAIL.BOX databases
Click here
and
Click here
shared mail
Click here
. Using multiple MAIL.BOX databases allows multiple server processes to write mail at once; the Router can operate on messages in one MAIL.BOX database, while clients or other servers deposit mail to other MAIL.BOX databases. Shared mail stores a single iopy of a message addressed to multiple recipients on one server in a shared mail database on the server. Each recipient receives a header for that message, but the body of the message is stored in the shared mail database to save disk space in users' mail files. Users can still forward and reply to mail as usual.n
Domino and the Domino Administrator have a number of monitoring features to help you plan, review, and troubleshoot your Domino system. You can record server statistics, see which tayks are running on servers, track mail messages, and make changes to multiple databases at once. .
See Also
Click here
Setting up transaction logging
Click here
Click here
Setting up mail monitoring
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Reports database
Click here
Click here
Controlling the Mail Tracking Collictor
Click here
Click here
The Domino server log (LOG.NSF)
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Log_Update=
value
Description:
Specifies the level of detail of Indexer events displayed at the server consoie and in the log file:
0 - Records when the Indexer starts and shuts down.
1 - Records when the Indexer starts and shuts down and when the Indexer updates views and full text indexes for specific databases.m
2 - Records when the Indexer starts and shuts down and when the Indexer updates views and full text indexes for specific databases. Also records the names of views the Indexer is updating.s
The Domino Directory contains all information necessary to route mail in your infrastructure except for the Domain Name Service (DNS), which is maintained sgparately. The Domino Directory supports =
Click here
LDAP
Click here
so that Internet mail clients can use LDAP to query and modify the directory if they have access to do so.
Routing tables
When you start the Router on a server, it gathers information from the Connection, Domain, and Server documents in the Domino Directory. When a user sends mail to a recipient in the local domain, the Router looks in the Domino Dirgctory (or a secondary directory) for the recipient's Person document, which lists the recipient's home server. The Router consults the routing table to determine the optimal (least-cost) path to that server and routes the message along that path. If you reboot a server, the Router recalculates the routing table.
128439328029251071
Host names in the Domino systemo
In your Domino system, use fully-qualified host names instead of IP addresses. While IP addresses work'and are fully supported, they change more frequently than host names. The Domino environment may not work properly if the addresses are not properly updated. For example, a subnet change or reorganization may require a change in server addressing. In this case, if a Server document uses host names, updating the document is not necessary; however, updating is necessary if the document contains an IP address.
See Also
Click here
Setting up the LDAP servgce
Click here
Click here
The Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Documents in the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Domino Directory for a domain
Click here
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
Click here
Directory assistance
Click here
&Arial
The Domain Name Service (DNS) is a directory used by SMTP to convert a name, such as acme.com, to a list of servers that can rgceive connections for that name and to find the IP address of a specific server. By looking up a destination server's address in the DNS, the sending server can properly route a message to a recipient. You must correctly configure DNS to support your use of SMTP. To determine the IP address of the mail server for the destination domain, Domino does the following:
1. The server looks up the domain part of each recipient's address in DNS.
2. If DNS finds an MX record, the server'tries to connect to the server listed in that MX record. If there is more than one MX record, the server tries to connect to the record that has the lowest cost. If more than one MX record has the lowest cost, the server randomly selects one and tries to connect to the server listed in that MX record.
Note
There may be more than one MX record for a specific domain name. The host name is looked up in DNS to find an A record. An A record contains the IP agdress for the host.
3. If DNS finds only an A record, Domino routes the message to the IP address in that A record.
4. If DNS does not find a record, Domino cannot deliver the message and sends a non-delivery message to the sender.
You can also use DNS to match an IP address to a host name or a host name to an IP address to verify who is actually sending the message. Use this verification to restrict relay access through your server or to prevent unsolicited cogmercial e-mail (UCE).
An MX record maps a domain name to one or more host names. An A record maps a host name to the IP address of a server. You may want to use a host name in the MX record instead of just an A record for the following reasons:
Some third-party tools recognize only host names, not IP addresses.
If you need to replace or relocate a machine, you can assign the existing host name and IP address to the new or relocated machine. This change is transparent'to users, and messages continue to route properly.
When you set more than one MX record for a name, you can set costs that control how DNS selects those records. DNS selects lower cost preferences first -- for example, DNS selects 5 before 10. If you more than one MX record has the same cost, DNS randomly selects from those MX records. If one of those MX records fails -- for example, because a server is unavailable -- the DNS returns a different MX record that has the same cost.
Gor example, the acme.com domain has four MX records:
MX record: acme.com IN MX 5 mail1.acme.com
MX record: acme.com IN MX 5 mail2.acme.com
MX record: acme.com IN MX 10 mail3.acme.com
MX record: acme.com IN MX 10 mail4.acme.com
When a server tries to connect to acme.com, the DNS first uses MX records with preferences of 5. Since there are two MX records with preferences of 5, DNS randomly selects between the MX record for mail1.acme.cgm and mail2.acme.com. If the DNS returns the MX record for mail1.acme.com and mail1.acme.com is unavailable, the DNS returns the MX record for mail2.acme.com. If mail2.acme.com is unavailable, both MX records with a cost of 5 have failed. The DNS then selects MX records that have a cost of 10 and uses them the same way it used the MX records that have a cost of 5.s
See Also
Click here
Specifying how the Router picks the recipient's SMTP server for outbgund mail
Click here
Click here
Using multiple Internet domain names within one organization
Click here
Click here
Restricting inbound mail routing
Click here
Click here
Restricting inbound SMTP connections
Click here
&Arial
These are examples of setting up multiple MX records in the DNS.
128439328029251071
Usgng a single Internet domain with a single domain name
You can specify MX records for a single Internet domain -- for example, acme.com -- with a single Internet domain name, such as acme.com. Use the server's fully-qualified Internet host name in the MX and A records -- for example, mail1.acme.com.
For example, configure a backup SMTP server (mail2.acme.com) to deliver or forward mail when the primary SMTP server (mail1.acme.com) is unavailable:
1. MX record: acme'com IN MX 5 mail1.acme.com
A record: mail1.acme.com IN A 192.168.10.17
2. MX record: acme.com IN MX 10 mail2.acme.com
A record: mail2.acme.com IN A 192.168.10.18
Messages addressed to acme.com route to mail1.acme.com first because the record cost (5) is lower. If mail1.acme.com is unavailable, mail2.acme.com receives mail.
128439328029251073
Using a single Internet domain name with two balanced serverse
If ygu give two servers equal cost, DNS randomly selects a server to balance the load of incoming mail. n
1. MX record: acme.com IN MX 5 mail1.acme.com
A record: mail1.acme.com IN A 192.168.10.17/
2. MX record: acme.com IN MX 5 mail2.acme.com
A record: mail2.acme.com IN A 192.168.10.18s
128489328029251074
Using a single Internet domain with multiple domain nameso
You can create MX records for a single Internet gomain -- for example, acme.com -- with multiple Internet domain names -- for example, acme.com, qrs.com, and xyz.com.
Note
Users can address mail to each domain name and each domain has a backup SMTP server.
1. MX record: acme.com IN MX 5 mail1.acme.com
2. MX record: acme.com IN MX 10 mail2.acme.com
3. MX record: qrs.com IN MX 5 mail1.acme.com
4. MX record: qrs.com IN MX 10 mail2.acme.com
' 5. MX record: qrs.com IN MX 5 mail1.acme.com
6. MX record: xyz.com IN MX 10 mail2.acme.com
&Arial
Notes routing moves mail from the sender's mail werver to the recipient's mail server. The Router for the sender's server determines the next server to move the message to -- or in other words, the next "hop" on the path to the message's destination. Each server calculates the next hop along the route to the destination server. When the message reaches the destination server, the Router delivers it to the recipient's mail file.
Determining the recipient's server
When a user sends mail to a recipient with a'Notes address -- for example, Jane Doe/Acme -- the Router looks in the
Click here
Domino Directory
Click here
for a Person document for Jane Doe/Acme. The Person document contains the name of Jane Doe's mail server. If the recipient's server is the same as the sender's server, the Router delivers the message to the recipient's mail file. If the sender and recipient have different mail servers, the Router checks the Domino Directory to determine whether the serverw are in the same Notes domain.r
128439328029251071
Determining the recipient's Notes domain
A Notes domain is a group of servers that share the same Domino Directory. If the servers are in different Notes domains, the Router looks in the Domino Directory for a
Click here
Connection documenta
Click here
that connects a server in the sender's domain to a server in the recipient's domain. After finding the Connection documgnt, the Router routes the message to the server in the sender's domain that connects to a server in the recipient's domain. When the servers connect, the message is transferred to the other domain, where it routes to the recipient's server and mail file.
In an organization that uses multiple Notes domains, two domains may not be connected -- that is, no server in the first domain may have a connection to a server in the second domain. In this case, mail can route through another domain or domgins that bridge the two domains. For example, if Domain A and Domain B do not have any server connections but both have connections to Domain C, mail between Domain A and Domain B can route through Domain C. To set up this routing path, you create
Click here
Non-adjacent Domain documents
Click here
that specify the target domain and the domain through which to route mail to reach that target domain.
If the recipient is in the same domain as the segder, the Router finds the next hop for the message and transfers the message to that server. That server in turn determines the next hop for the message and transfers it; this next-hop calculation continues until the message reaches its destination.
Determining the server's Notes named network
The Router determines the Notes named network for the recipient's server and the sender's server. A Notes named network is a grouping of servers that share a LAN protocol'and are connected by a LAN or by modem connections. If the two servers are in the same Notes named network, the Router immediately routes the message from the MAIL.BOX file on the sender's server to the MAIL.BOX file on the recipient's server. Then, the Router on the recipient's server delivers the message to the recipient's mail file. Because mail routes automatically within a Notes named network, you do not need to create any additional connections or documents.
Servers gn different Notes named networks
If the two servers are in different Notes named networks, the Router on the sender's server needs to find a connection between the two networks. Connections between Notes named networks require a server that runs both protocols. For example, one server might run TCP/IP and SPX and be a member of both Notes named networks. A server in a third Notes named network might act as a bridge between the networks. For example, a server in a NetBIOS Notes named network mgght also run TCP/IP and SPX and be able to bridge the TCP/IP and SPX networks.
To determine connections between Notes named networks, the Router looks at
Click here
Connection documents
Click here
, which schedule connections between Domino servers. A Connection document specifies the sending and receiving servers, when and how to connect, and what tasks -- such as, replication and mail routing -- to perform during the connection. Connection documenws specify connections in one direction and are generally found in pairs. For example, one Connection document schedules a connection from Server A to Server B, and another Connection document schedules a connection from Server B to Server A.
After the Router finds a connection between the two Notes named networks, it routes the mail to the next server along the connection path. If there is a server that is a member of both Notes named networks, the Router transfers the message from MAIL.BOX on'the sender's server to MAIL.BOX on this "bridge" server. If the path involves multiple server "hops," the Router transfers the message to MAIL.BOX on the next server in the path. Each Router on the path transfers the message to the MAIL.BOX on the next server in the path.
After the message reaches a server in the destination Notes named network, the Router on that server transfers the message to the MAIL.BOX on the recipient's server. The Router on the recipient's server delivers the message wo the recipient's mail file.o
Addressing mail to users in a different domain
To send mail to a user in a different Notes domain, the sender must append the recipient's domain to the recipient's address. For example, a user in the Lotus domain who wants to send mail to John Smith in the Acme domain must address the message to jsmith@Acme, not just jsmith or John Smith.
To make it easier to address mail to users in other domains, users can create an'entry in their Personal Address Book to specify the recipient's complete address -- for example, jdoe@Acme. Alternatively, an administrator can create an entry in the Domino Directory to specify the recipient's address in the Forwarding address field of the recipient's Person document.
In addition, you can set up
Click here
Directory Assistance
Click here
to specify other Domino Directories and
Click here
LDAP directories
Click here
that the Router can search to find recipients.s
See Also
Click here
Preparing to send and receive mail to the Internet
Click here
Click here
Setting up how addresses are resolved
Click here
&Arial
SMTP is a point-to-point mail protocol. When a user sends a message over SMTP:
1. The sending server checks the recipient's address, which is in the format
localpart@domain
, and looks up the domain in the
Click here
Domain Name Service (DNS)
Click here
2. DNS rgturns the IP address of a server in the domain that accepts mail over SMTP.
3. The sending server connects to the destination server over TCP/IP, establishes an SMTP connection, transfers the message, and closes the connection.
Domino has three SMTP options. You can choose any or all of these options:
Click here
To use SMTP when sending mail outside the local Internet domain
Click here
Clicg here
To use SMTP inside your local Internet domainL
Click here
Click here
To listen for incoming SMTP connectionsL
Click here
(receive SMTP mail from other servers in your organization and/or from the Internet, depending on your configuration)
You configure SMTP for sending mail on the Router/SMTP-Basics tab of the Server Configuration document, and you configure SMTP for receiving mail on the Basics tag of the Server document.
Note
In Release 5.0.3, Domino follows Foreign SMTP Domain and SMTP Connection documents for SMTP mail routing.
128439328029251071
Routing Internet mail
There are many ways to set up your Domino system for sending and receiving mail from external Internet domains. Generally, you can set up all mail servers to use SMTP to route mail to external domains, or you can set up
Click here
designated servers to use SMTP to route mail to external domains
When the Router processes mail for a recipient with an Internet address (one with a period to the right of the @ sign, such as jdoe@acme.com, in the format
localpart@domain
), it checks whethgr the domain is the local Internet domain. The Router determines its local Internet domains from the Local primary Internet domain and Alternate Internet domain aliases fields in the Release 5 Global Domain document or, if there is no Global Domain document, by comparing the domain in the message's address to the server's host name. For example, if the message is addressed to jdoe@mailhost3.acme.com and the Router is on the server mailhub.acme.com, the Router knows that the recipient is in the local Interngt domain.
Routing mail in the local Internet domain
If the domain is the local Internet domain, the Router looks up the complete address in the ($Users) view of the Domino Directory to try to find a Person document containing that address. If you set up Directory Assistance, the Router can also look up the address in other directories. If the Router does not find a match, it
Click here
looks up the address in the directories
Click here
. When the Router finds a match, it uses either SMTP or Notes routing to route the message to the recipient's home server. The setting you choose in the Server Configuration document for the mail server determines which routing protocol is used. You can select not to use SMTP in the local Internet domain, to use SMTP for MIME messages only, or to use SMTP for all messages by choosing the appropriate setting in the "SMTP allowed within the local Internet domain" field. If SMTP is enableg and the message format matches the format specified in this setting, the Router uses TCP/IP to connect to the destination server, establishes an SMTP connection, and transfers the message.
If the Router cannot find a match for the recipient in the specified directories, it can forward the message to a "smart host," which is a server that has a directory of users who are in the local domain but who are not yet in the Domino Directory. For example, if you are migrating users from a UNIX sendmaig system to a Domino mail system but you have not migrated all users yet, you set up a UNIX server as a smart host that can locate the sendmail users and route mail to them. The smart host name is listed in the Local Internet domain smart host field on the Router/SMTP-Basics tab of the Server Configuration document.
Routing mail outside the local Internet domain
If the
domain
specified in an Internet address is not one of the local Internet domgins, your mail infrastructure determines how the Router routes the message: s
If the sending server is enabled to use SMTP to route mail outside the local Internet domain and a relay host is configured in the Configuration Settings document for that server, the routing server looks up the relay host in the DNS, uses TCP/IP to connect to the relay host, establishes an SMTP connection, and forwards the message.
If the sending server can send mail outside the local Internet domain gver SMTP and there is no relay host, but there is a Foreign SMTP Domain document matching the domain part of the recipient's address, the routing server uses the Foreign SMTP Domain document and the corresponding SMTP Connection document to route the message to the server specified in the SMTP Connection document (either an R5 Internet mail server or an R4 SMTP MTA).
If the sending server can send mail outside the local Internet domain over SMTP and there is no relay host, the server looks up whe destination domain in the DNS, uses TCP/IP to connect to the indicated receiving host, establishes an SMTP connection, and routes the message.
If the sending server cannot use SMTP to route mail outside the local Internet domain and the address of the message matches an address specified in a Foreign SMTP Domain document, the Router uses o
to a server that is enabled to use SMTP to route messages outside the local Internet domain.
For more information, see "
Click here
The Domain Name Service (DNS) and mail routing
Click here
" earlier in this chapter.
Using a relay host
A relay host is a server -- for example, a firewall -- that uses SMTP to connect to the Internet and restricts inbound and outbound Internet mail. A relgy host can also be a DNS name that maps to multiple MX records. To
Click here
configure a relay host
Click here
, you use two fields on the Configuration Settings document of the sending server. Add its DNS or host name to the "Relay host for messages leaving the local Internet domain" field and enable "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain."
Note
R4 SMTP MTA servers continue to use the relaw host setting in their corresponding SMTP Connection document.
Using Notes routing to route Internet mail
If you set up all Domino mail servers to use SMTP to route mail to external Internet domains or if you set up all Domino servers to use SMTP within your organization and you set up a relay host for Internet mail, Internet messages do not travel over Notes routing. In all other cases, Domino uses Notes routing to route Internet mail to a server that can congect directly to the Internet.
To set up Notes routing to route Internet mail transfer over, you must create and configure a
Click here
Foreign SMTP Domain document
Click here
and an
Click here
SMTP Connection document
Click here
The Foreign SMTP Domain document
You use the
Click here
Foreign SMTP Domain document
Click here
to define a Notes domain to which the Router should route messages containing addresses matching certain criteria. For example, you create a Foreign SMTP Domain document to route mail with an Internet address outside the local domain (*.*) to a domain called TheInternet. The Notes domain can be a "real" Notes domain -- that is, a group of servers sharing a Domino Directory -- or a "virtual" domain that links to a mail server that can connect to the Internet. For example, the Notes domain TheInternet gight link to a firewall server that can route outbound Internet mail. Or TheInternet might link to a Notes domain that contains servers that connect directly to the Internet.
You can create multiple Foreign SMTP Domain documents. For example, one Foreign SMTP Domain document can route all mail that has an address ending in lotus.com to a certain domain, and another Foreign SMTP Domain document can route all mail with an address ending in ibm.com to another domain. The Router always uses the Fgreign SMTP Domain document that most closely matches the address. For example, if a message is addressed to jdoe@server1.japan.lotus.com and there are two Foreign SMTP Domain documents -- one for lotus.com and one for japan.lotus.com -- the Router uses the document for japan.lotus.com.
When the Router finds a Foreign SMTP Domain document that most closely matches the address of the outbound Internet mail, it forwards the mail to the Notes domain specified in that document. If the Notes domain'is a real domain, the Router finds a connection from the current domain to that domain and routes the message. If the Notes domain is a virtual domain, the Router checks for an SMTP Connection document that describes how to connect to that domain.
The SMTP Connection document
Click here
SMTP Connection documents
Click here
link virtual foreign SMTP domains to a server. For example, an SMTP Connection document might'link the virtual domain TheInternet to the firewall server that routes mail to the Internet. Specify the source server (the server that can connect directly to the Internet and route SMTP mail), the destination domain (which must match the Internet domain in the Foreign SMTP Domain document), and the connection type (direct or dialup). An SMTP Connection document lets Internet messages travel from a Notes domain to a server that is enabled to use SMTP to route outbound Internet mail.
To route'a message to a recipient outside the local Internet domain, the Router forwards the message to the domain specified in the Foreign SMTP Domain document. After the message reaches a Domino server that can connect to the Internet, that server establishes a connection with a server in the destination domain and routes the message.
See Also
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing
Click here
Click here
Setting up'SMTP routing outside the local Internet domain
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing within the local Internet domain
Click here
Click here
Setting up a server to receive mail sent via SMTP routing
Click here
Click here
Setting up a relay host or firewall
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:t
Log_View_Events=
value
Description:
Specifies whether messages generated when views are rebuilt are recorded in the log file:
0 - Do not log messages when views are rebuilt
1 - Log messages when views are rebuilt
Removing this setting from the NOTES.INI file also disables logging of these messages.
Applies to:
Wervers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Changing the fields that are included in a directory catalogDomino Directories
Directory catalogs\fields inFields\in directory catalogsHTTPPassword field\directory catalogs andContentsStepsH_ADDING_FIELDS_TO_THE\DIRECTORY_CATALOG_STEPSTopic1Changing the fields that are included in a directory catalogStepsH_MANAGING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_IN_LARGE_ORGANIZATIONS_321_OVER
H_ADDING_FIELDS_TO_THE_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_270642000029245626=General tips for modifying the field configuration in directory catalogsH_ADDING_FIELDS_TO_THE_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_112797017629230345=Tips for modifying the field configuration in the directory catalog used by serversH_ADDING_FIELDS_TO_THE_DIRECTORY_CATALOL_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_270642000029245627=Tips for modifying the field configuration in the mobile directory catalogH_ADDING_FIELDS_TO_THE_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_112797017629230346=To change the fields that are included in a directory catalog03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
H_OPTIMIZING_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_PERFORMANCE_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_358251174429313012=Packing density optionH_OPTIMIZING_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_PERFORMANCE_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_358251174429313013=Incremental fields optionH_OPTIMIZING_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_PERFORMANCE_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_112797017629230345=To change performance settings03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Monitoring directory catalogsDomino Directories
Agents\directory catalogDirectory Catalog Status ReportDirectory catalogs\monitoringRepor|ing\directory catalog informationContentsOverviewH_SENDING_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_REPORTS_9423_OVERTopic1Monitoring directory catalogsOverviewH_MANAGING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_IN_LARGE_ORGANIZATIONS_321_OVER
H_SENDING_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_REPORTS_9423_OVER_MIDTOPIC_91695993629252660=To report Dircat events to the log fileH_SENDING_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_REPORTS_9423_OVER_MIDTOPIC_91695993629252661=To mail directory catalog reportsH_SENDING_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_REPORTS_9423_OVER_MIDTOPIC_422057216029269166=To enable tle Directory Catalog Status Report agent03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up directory a|sistanceDomino Directories
Directory Assistance\setting up overviewContentsOverview
da50_v_directoryassistanceda50_f_directoryassistanceH_SETTING_UP_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_OVERTopic1Setting up directory assistanceOverviewH_MANAGING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_IN_LARGE_ORGANIZATIONS_321_OVER03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
The order in which directories are searchedDomino Directories
Directories\search order of multipleDirectory searches\order ofContentsOverviewH_THE_ORDER_IN_WHICH_DIRECTORIES_ARE_SEARCHED_9814_OVERTopic1The order in which directories are searchedOverviewH_MALAGING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_IN_LARGE_ORGANIZATIONS_321_OVER03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Cascading Domino directoriesDomino Directories
Cascading Domino directories\compared to directory assistanceDirectory Assistance\compared to cascading Domino directoriesContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_CASCADING_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOKSTopic1Cascading Domino directoriesStepsH_MANAGING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_IN_LARGE_ORGANIZATIONS_321_OVER
H_SETTING_UP_CASCADING_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOKS_MIDTOPIC_325052988829225748=To cascade directories that are replicated on each serverH_SETTING_UP_CASCADING_PUBLLC_ADDRESS_BOOKS_MIDTOPIC_105865260829206804=To cascade directories accessed over the network03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Configuring directory servers for Notes usersDomino Directories
.AContentsStepsH_CONFIGURING_DIRECTORY_SERVERS_FOR_NOTES_USERS_3368_STEPSTopic1Configuring directory servers for Notes usersStepsH_MANAGING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_IN_LARGE_ORGANIZATIONS_321_OVER03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
MailMail
.AContentsOverviewH_MAIL_OVER_pTopic1MailOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Messaging overviewMail
Mail routing\describedMail servers\describedContentsOverviewH_USING_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SERVER_7032_OVERTopic1Messaging overviewOverviewH_MAIL_OVER_p
H_MAIL_ROUTING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_MABL_SERVER_7703_OVER=The Domino mail server and mail routingH_SENDING_MAIL_OUTSIDE_YOUR_ORGANIZATION_5761_OVER=Sending mail outside your organizationH_DOMINO_MAIL_FILES_9523_OVER=Domino mail filesH_MAIL_SECURITY_2752_OVER=Mail securityH_WORKING_WITH_OTHER_MAIL_SYSTEMS_3871_OVER=Working with other mail systems03 Administering the Domino System16 Overview of the Domino Mail System
H_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SYSTEM_7248_OVER_MIDTOPIC_274471532829247858=Lotus Notes clienrsH_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SYSTEM_7248_OVER_MIDTOPIC_274471532829247859=IMAP clientsH_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SYSTEM_7248_OVER_MIDTOPIC_274471532829247860=POP3 clientsH_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SYSTEM_7248_OVER_MIDTOPIC_274471532829247861=Web clients03 Administering the Domino System16 Overview of the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
~fkmI{e
Messaging and mail access protocolsMail
IMAP protocol\Domino mail server andMIME messages\Domino mail server andPOP3 protocol\Domino mail server andSMTP protocol\Domino mail server andContentsOverviewH_MESSAGING_PROTOCOLS_1518_OVERTopic1Messaging and mail access protocolsOverviewH_USING_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SERVER_7032_OVER03 Administerbng the Domino System16 Overview of the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
How mail routes in a Domino systemMail
Mail routing\describedRouter\descrbbedContentsOverviewH_HOW_MAIL_MOVES_IN_A_DOMINO_SYSTEM_6903_OVERTopic1How mail routes in a Domino systemOverviewH_USING_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SERVER_7032_OVER03 Administering the Domino System16 Overview of the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
From Th
Mail performance and monitoringMail
Monitoring\mailPerformance\mailContentsOverviewH_PERFORMANCE_AND_MONITORING_1957_OVERTopic1Mail performance and monitoringOverviewH_USING_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SERVER_7032_OVER03 Administering the Domino System16 Overview of the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Developmen
The Domino Directory and mail routingMail
Host names\mail routing andMail routing\IP addresses andMail routing\routing table andRouting table\descibedContentsOverviewH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_9132_OVERTopic1The Domino Directory and mail routingBverviewH_USING_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SERVER_7032_OVER
H_ROUTING_TABLES_1698_OVER=Routing tablesH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_9132_OVER_MIDTOPIC_128439328029251071=Host names in the Domino system03 Administering the Domino System16 Overview of the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
The Domain Name Service (DNS) and mail routingMail
Addresses\mail routingDNS\describedHost names\DNS andIP addresses\DNS andMail routing\DNS andSMTP protocol\DNS andContentsOverviewH_DOMAIN_NAMING_SERVICE_DNS_OVERTopic1The Domain Name Service (DNS) and mail routingOverviewH_USING_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SERVER_7032_OVER03 Administering the Domino System16 Overview of the Dombno Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Examples of using multiple MX recordsMail
DNS\examples of MX recordsMX records\examplesContentsExamplesH_BXAMPLES_OF_USING_MULTIPLE_MX_RECORDS_4741_EXTopic1Examples of using multiple MX recordsExamplesH_USING_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SERVER_7032_OVER
H_DOMAIN_NAMING_SERVICE_DNS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_128439328029251071=Using a single Internet domain with a single domain nameH_DOMAIN_NAMING_SERVICE_DNS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_128439328029251073=Using a single Internet domain name with two balanced serversH_DOMAIN_NAMING_SERVICE_DNS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_128489328029251074=Using a single Internet domain with multiple domain names03 Administbring the Domino System16 Overview of the Domino Mail System
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Managing a shared mail databaseMail
Shared mail\managingContentrOverviewH_MANAGING_SHARED_MAIL_OVERTopic1Managing a shared mail databaseOverviewH_SHARED_NOTES_MAIL_OVER03 Administering the Domino System19 Setting up Shared Mail
Addresses\mail routingDomain, Notes\mail routing andMail routing\Notes protocols andNotes named network\mail routing andNotes protocols\mail routing andRouter\described@ontentsOverviewH_ROUTING_MAIL_USING_NOTES_ROUTING_2689_OVERTopic1Routing mail using Notes routingOverviewH_USING_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SERVER_7032_OVER
H_DETERMINING_THE_RECIPIENT_S_SERVER_6100_OVER=Determining the recipient's serverH_ROUTING_MAIL_USING_NOTES_ROUTING_2689_OVER_MIDTOPIC_128439328029251071=Determining the recipient's Notes domainH_DETERMINING_THE_SERVER_S_NOTES_NAMED_NETWORK_7034_OVER=Determining the server's Notes named networkH_SERVERS_IN_DIFFERENT_NOTES_NAMED_NETWORKS_3424_OVER=Serveps in different Notes named networksH_ADDRESSING_MAIL_TO_USERS_IN_A_DIFFERENT_DOMAIN_7704_OVER=Addressing mail to users in a different domain03 Administering the Domino System16 Overview of the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Routing mail using SMTPMail
Addresses\mail routingDomains, Internet\mail routing andDomains, Notes\mail routing andMail routing\SMTP protocol andRouter\describedSMTP protocol\mail routing andContentsOverviewH_ROUTING_MAIL_USING_SMTP_9343_OVERTopic1Routing mail using SMTPOverviewH_USING_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SERVER_7032_OVER
H_ROUTING_MAIL_USING_SMTP_9343_OVER_MIDTOPIC_128439328029251071=Rout`ng Internet mailH_DETERMINING_WHETHER_A_RECIPIENT_IS_PART_OF_THE_LOCAL_INTERNET_DOMAIN_7906_OVER=Determining the recipient's Internet domainH_MAIL_IN_THE_LOCAL_INTERNET_DOMAIN_9588_OVER=Routing mail in the local Internet domainH_MAIL_OUTSIDE_THE_LOCAL_INTERNET_DOMAIN_3293_OVER=Routing mail outside the local Internet domainH_USING_A_RELAY_HOST_3705_OVER=Using a relay hostH_ROUTING_INTERNET_MAIL_OVER_NOTES_ROUTING_6138_OVER=Using Notes routing to route Internet mailH_ROLE_OF_THE_FOREIGN_SMTP_DOMAIN_DOCUMENT_@N_INTERNET_MAIL_OVER_NOTES_ROUTING_9841_OVER=The Foreign SMTP Domain documentH_ROLE_OF_THE_SMTP_CONNECTION_DOCUMENT_IN_INTERNET_MAIL_OVER_NOTES_ROUTING_2274_OVER=The SMTP Connection document03 Administering the Domino System16 Overview of the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Planning a mail routing topologyMail
Mail routing\typologyContentsOverviewH_DOMINO_SYSTEM_CONFIGURATIONS_3483_OVERTopic1Planning a mail routing topologyOverviewH_MAIL_OVER_p03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Sample mail routing configurationsMail
Mail routing\examplesContentsOverviewH_SAMPLE_MAIL_ROUTING_CONFIGURATIONS_OVERTopic1Sample mail routing configurationsOverviewH_DOMINO_SYSTEM_CONFIGURATIONS_3483_OVER03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Ma`l Routing
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Example of using one server for all Internet messagesMail
.AContentsExamplesH_EXAMPLE_OF_USING_ONE_SERVERPFOR_ALL_INTERNET_MESSAGES_EXTopic1Example of using one server for all Internet messagesExamplesH_SAMPLE_MAIL_ROUTING_CONFIGURATIONS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Example of using one server for inbound and one server for outbound messagesMail
.AContentsExamplesH_EXAMPLE_OF_USING_ONE_SERVER_FOR_INBOUND_AND_ONE_SERVER_FOR_OUTBOUND_MESSAGES_EXTopic1Example of using one server for inbound and one server for outbound messagesExamplesH_SAMPLE_MAIL_ROUTING_CONFIGURATIONS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Example of using two servers to balance Internet mail loadMail
.AContentsExamplesH_EXAMPLE_OF_USING_TWO_SERVERS_TO_BALANCE_INTERNET_MAIL_LOAD_EXTopic1Example of using two servers to balance Internet mail loadExamplesH_SAMPLE_MAIL_ROUTING_CONFIGURATIONS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Example of mail routing in the local Internet `omainMail
.AContentsExamplesH_EXAMPLE_OF_MAIL_ROUTING_IN_THE_LOCAL_INTERNET_DOMAIN_EXTopic1Example of mail routing in the local Internet domainExamplesH_SAMPLE_MAIL_ROUTING_CONFIGURATIONS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Example of mail routing between a third-party server and Domino in the same Internet domainMail
.AContentsExamplesH_EXAMPLE_OF_MAIL_ROUTING_BETWEEN_A_THIRD_PARTY_SERVER_AND_DOMINO_IN_THE_SAME_INTERNET_DOMAIN_EXTopic1Example of mail routing between a third-party server and Domino in the same Internet domainExamplesH_SAMPLE_MAIL_ROUTING_CONFIGURATIONS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System17 Petting up Mail Routing
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
The date that the cross certificate expires.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Click here
back to top
Click here
See Al
Example of using a smart hostMail
.AContentsExamplesH_EXAMPLE_OF_USING_A_SMART_HOST_EXTopic1Example of using a smart hostExamplesH_SAMPLE_MAIL_ROUTING_CONFIGURATIONS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Example of using all servers to route outbound mail and one to route inbound mailMail
.AContentsExamplesH_EXAMPLE_OF_USING_ALL_SERVERS_TO_ROUTE_OZTBOUND_MAIL_AND_ONE_TO_ROUTE_INBOUND_MAIL_EXTopic1Example of using all servers to route outbound mail and one to route inbound mailExamplesH_SAMPLE_MAIL_ROUTING_CONFIGURATIONS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating a Configuration Settings documentMail
Configuration Settings document\creatingDomino Administrator\configuring mail routingDomino Directory\Configuration Settings documentContentsStepsH_CREATING_A_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_DOCUMENT_STEPSTopic1Creating a Configuration Settings documentStepsH_DOMINO_SYSTEM_CONFIGURATIONS_3483_OVER
H_CREATING_A_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_DOCZMENT_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_306446595229250214=To create a Configuration Settings document03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
Print
pubnames_v_Configurations
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Notes routingMail
Connection documents\mail routing andDomains\mail routingContentsOverviewH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_ROUTING_OVERTopic1Setting up Notes routingOverviewH_MAIL_OVER_p03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
Print
pubnames_v_Domains
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up SMTP routingMail
Configuring\mail routingMail routing\configuringContentsStepsH_ENABLING_SMTP_ROUTING_STEPSTopic1Setting up SMTP routingStepsH_MAIL_OVER_p03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up how addresses are resolvedMail
Addresses\mail routingMail routing\resolving addressesContentsOverviewH_SETTING_UP_HOW_ADDRESSES_ARE_RESOLVED_OVERTopic1Setting up how addrjsses are resolvedOverviewH_MAIL_OVER_p03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up a rjlay host or firewallMail
Firewalls\using a relay hostMail routing\using a firewallContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_A_RELAY_HOST_OR_FIREWALL_STEPSTopic1Setting up a relay host or firewallStepsH_MAIL_OVER_p
H_SETTING_UP_A_RELAY_HOST_OR_FIREWALL_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_162845792029249856=To set up a relay host03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Click
Setting up how messages are exchanged over a dialup connectionMail
Dialup connections\mail routing andMail routing\over dialup connectionsContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_DIAL_UP_ROUTING_STEPSTopic1Setting up how messages are exchanged over a dialup connectionStepzH_MAIL_OVER_p
H_SETTING_UP_DIAL_UP_ROUTING_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_162905792029249856=To change how messages are exchanged 03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
et publi
Customizing mailMail
.AContentsOverviewH_CONFIGURING_MAIL_OVERTopic1Customizing mailOverviewH_MAIL_OVER_p03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Requirements for a working mail systemMail
Mail routing\requirementsSMTP\requirements for routingContentsOverviewH_REQUIREMENTS_FOR_A_WORKING_MAIL_SYSTEM_2042_OVERTopic1Requirements for a working mail systemOverviewH_CONFIGURING_MAIL_OVER
H_REQUIREMENTS_FOR_A_WORKING_MAIL_SYSTEM_2042_OVER_MIDTOPIC_416139353629250435=Requirements for SMTP routingH_REQUIREMENTS_FOR_A_WORKING_MAIL_SYSTEM_2042_OVER_MIDTJPIC_416139353629250436=Requirements for Notes routingH_REQUIREMENTS_FOR_A_WORKING_MAIL_SYSTEM_2042_OVER_MIDTOPIC_416139353629250437=Requirements for exchanging mail with other systems in your organization03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ational Noser exchanges encrypted mail with a North American user, the smaller key is used. This applies to both Notes and Internet keys.A
You use an encryption key to encrypt document fields, which are designated areas in a document. You can recognize an encryptable field by its red brackets. Only the contents within those red brackets can be encrypted. All other data is open for viewing by anyone who accesses the document. Click here to learn how to o
Click here
encrypt document fields
Controlling messagingMail
.AContentsOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_YOUR_MESSAGING_SYSTEM_OVERTopic1Controlling messagingOverviewH_CONFIGURING_MAIL_OVER03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
HVR~e
Improving mail performanceMail
Mail routing\improving performancePerformance\improving for mail routingContentsOverviewH_MMPROVING_MAIL_PERFORMANCE_8885_OVERTopic1Improving mail performanceOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_YOUR_MESSAGING_SYSTEM_OVER03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Record additional information about mail in the log fileMail
Informational loggingLOG.NSFLog file\selecting level of loggingLogging level\selectingMail routing\logging andMinimal loggingNormal loggingVerbose loggingContentsOverviewH_SELECTING_A_LOGGING_LEVEL_5289_OVERTopic1Record additional information about mail in the log fileOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_YOUR_MESSAGING_SYSTEM_OVER03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Disabling mail routing temporarilyMail
Mail routing\stoppingRouters\disablingContentsOverviewH_DISABLING_]OUTING_TEMPORARILY_4166_OVERTopic1Disabling mail routing temporarilyOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_YOUR_MESSAGING_SYSTEM_OVER
H_DISABLING_ROUTING_TEMPORARILY_4166_OVER_MIDTOPIC_170657811229251254=To disable the Router from the consoleH_DISABLING_ROUTING_TEMPORARILY_4166_OVER_MIDTOPIC_170657811229251255=To disable the Router from the NOTES.INI fileH_DISABLING_ROUTING_TEMPORARILY_4166_OVER_MIDTOPIC_170657811229251256=To enable the Router03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
lick here
Customizing Notes routingMail
Mail routing\customizing Notes routingContentsOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_NOTES_ROUTING_OVERTopic1Customizing Notes routingOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_YOUR_MESSAGING_SYSTEM_OVER03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Restricting inbound mail routingMail
Inbound mail routing\restrictingMail routing\restricting inbound mailMail\restrictingRestricting mail routing\inboundSpamming\preventingUnwanted commercial e-mail\preventingContentsOverviewH_RESTRICTING_INBOUND_MAIL_ROUTING_8872_OVERTopic1Restricting inbound mail routingOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_YOUR_MESSAGING_SYSTEM_OVER03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=Mavid Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Restricting outbound messagesMail
Internet mail\restricting outboundMail routing\restricting outbound messagesRestricting outbound mailContentsMverviewH_RESTRICTING_OUTBOUND_MESSAGES_2420_OVERTopic1Restricting outbound messagesOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_YOUR_MESSAGING_SYSTEM_OVER03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Configuring Internet return receiptsMail
Disposition-Notification-To\configuring for return receiptsReceipts\configuring InternetReturn receipts\configuringReturn-Receipt-To\configuring for return receiptsContentsOverviewH_CONFIGURING_INTERNET_RETURN_RECEIPTS_8271_OVERTopic1Configuring Internet return receiptsOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_YOUR_MESSAGING_SYSTEM_OVER03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail S}stem
H_SHARED_NOTES_MAIL_OVER_MIDTOPIC_24682880029225326=Security03 Administering the Domino System19 Setting up Shared Mail
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
The POP3 serviceMail
POP3 service\describedContentsOverviewH_DOMINO_POP3_SERVER_OVERTopic1The POP3 serviceOverviewH_MAIL_OVER_p03 Administering the Domino System20 Setting up the Domino POP3 Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
4. Click Mail.
5. Enter the names of the people to receive the key in the To box (click Address to choose from your Personal Address Book).
6. In the CC box, enter the names of the people who need to know you sent a key, but aren't getting one themselves.
7. Click Send.
Click here
back to top
Click here
See Also
Click here
Security settings
Click here
Click here
&Arial
elease 5 Notes c
E message from a
Book D
se 5 Notes c
These steps describe how mail routes in a Domino mail system.
1. A user creates and addresses a mail message to a recipient.
2. The user sends the message.
3. The user's client software can:
Use Notes protocols to deposit the message into the MAIL.BOX database on the user's Domino mail server.
Use SMTP to send the message to the user's Domino mail server, which must be running the SMTP Listener task. The SMTP Listener task deposits the message into MAIL.BOX (Lotus Notes, IMAP clients, POP3 clients).
Use HTTP to send the message to the user's Domino mail server, which must be running the HTTP task. The HTTP task deposits the message into MAIL.BOX (Web clients).@
4. The Router finds the message in MAIL.BOX and determines where to send the message for each recipient. The Router calculates the next "hop" for the message on the path to its recipients and uses the best protocol -- either SMTP or Notes routing -- to transfer the message.
Using SMTP routing, the Router connects to the destination server -- the recipient's mail server, a relay host, a smart host, or one of the servers in the recipient's Internet domain -- and transfers a copy of the message.
Using Notes routing, the Router moves the message to the MAIL.BOX database on the server that is the next hop in the path to the recipient's mail server. The Router on that server moves the message to the next hop, until the message is deposited in the MAIL.BOX database on the recipient's home server.
5. The Router on the recipient's server finds the message (in MAIL.BOX on a Domino server) and delivers it to the recipient's mail file.
6. The recipient uses a client that supports Notes protocols, POP3, IMAP, or Web access (HTTP) to read the message, which is stored in the recipient's mail file.
&Arial
UUUUUUUU
aaaaaaaaP
>>>>>>>>
77777777]
}}}}}}}}
GGGGGGGG
E message from a
In this example, a single Domino server, Mail2-E/East/Acme, handles messages from the Acme organization destined for other Internet domains (externaf addresses) and receives all mail addressed to the Acme Internet domain (acme.com). Mail2-E/East/Acme has the field "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain" enabled on the Router/SMTP-Basics tab of the Configuration Settings document that applies to the server, and has the SMTP listener task enabled on the Basics tab of its Server document.r
If a user on either of the two Acme internal mail servers, Mail1-E/East/Acme or Mail3-E/East/Acme, sends a message to an extfrnal address -- one with a domain other than acme.com -- the server routes the message to Mail2-E/East/Acme, which can route mail to external domains. Any mail from an external Internet domain -- one other than acme.com -- is routed to Mail2-E/East/Acme, which is listed in the DNS as the host for acme.com. Once the mail reaches Mail2-E/East/Acme, the server routes it to its destination.
The two internal mail servers, Mail1-E/East/Acme and Mail3-E/East/Acme, can route Internet mail to the servev with SMTP enabled for external mail (Mail2-E/East/Acme) either via Notes routing, with a Foreign SMTP Domain document and SMTP Connection document linking to Mail2-E/East/Acme, or via SMTP routing, with Mail2-E/East/Acme configured as the relay host.
Configuring these servers requires:
Click here
Enabling "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain"
Click here
for Mail2-E/East/Acme
Flick here
Enabling the SMTP listener task
Click here
for Mail2-E/East/Acme
Click here
Setting up DNS correctly
Click here
to list Mail2-E/East/Acme as the connecting server for the acme.com domain for inbound mail
Either
Click here
enabling "SMTP allowed outside of the local Internet domain
Click here
for Mail1-E/East/Acme and Mail3-E/East/Acme and listing Maif2-E/East/Acme as the
Click here
relay host
Click here
or creating a
Click here
Foreign SMTP Domain document
Click here
and
Click here
SMTP Connection document
Click here
that link to Mail2-E/East/Acme
See Also
Click here
Sample mail routing configurations
Click here
&Arial
After importing users and groups, you can specify options that determine how Notes processes information when registering users.
Vou can select the following registration options:
Do not continue on registration errors
Keep successfully registered people in the queue
Try to register queued people with error statusV
Allow registration of previously registered people
In addition, you can configure the registration process to proceed as follows if the user being registered has the same user name or mail file name as an existing person:
Skip registration when tfe name of a new Notes user or mail file matches those of an existing user
Update an existing person with the information for the migrated user
Replace an existing mail file with the migrated mail file
Generate a unique mail file name
Note
For migrations that do not involve converting mail, if you choose to create a user's mail file in the background, using adminp, the option to replace an existing mail file is ignoref.
By default, none of these options is enabled. The options you select apply to all users selected for registration in this session.
For more information about setting registration options, refer to
Click here
Administering the Domino Systeme
Click here
See Also
Click here
Registering users and migrating messaging data
Click here
&Arial
When registering migrating users, there are a considerable number of registration settings you must specify. Although some of these settings, such as mail file name or Internet address, are specific to an individual user, there are also a number of public settings, such as mail sfrver or password quality scale, that can be applied to multiple users.
Rather than having to specify the same registration information for each new user, you can easily specify default settings for public registration information. After you set registration defaults, the migration tools automatically apply these defaults to each user they add to the registration queue. e
Pay particular attention to the default settings for registration server and mail server. If the computer on wfich you are running the Domino Administrator is not the Domino server, you will need to change the default setting of Local for these servers. Depending on your security needs, you may also want to apply a new default setting for the password quality scale required for the users you migrate.
You can create default registration settings using either of the following methods:
Registration settings that you define through the administrative preferences are used as the deffults at the start of each registration session. You can override them by setting new defaults for a session, but they go into effect again the next time you start a new session.
See
Click here
"Setting Administration Preferences for registration and certification"
Click here
for additional information about setting default registration preferences.
104482054429239588
Defining default settings through user registratiof
During a given session, if you have already registered users, the public settings used in registering the last user become the defaults for the next user. You can also set registration defaults before you register any users from within the Register Person dialog box, using the following procedure:
1. From the Domino Administrator, click People -- Register, and enter the password for certifier ID to open the Register Person dialog box.
When you first open the Refister Person dialog box it is set to accept new entries, as indicated by the words "Register Person -- New Entry" on the title bar.
2. Click the Advanced check box at the top of the dialog box to display all of the available selection panes.
3. Select each pane in turn, changing the registration settings on each pane to the desired default values. Leave the name information (First name, MI, and Last name fields) on the Basics pane blank.
4. Click "Migrate pefple" to open the "People and Groups Migration" dialog box" and begin migrating users.
The public registration settings define during the preceding steps apply to all users you migrate to the registration queue during this session. After you exit the "People and Groups Migration" dialog box, the registration settings revert to those defined in the current administrative preferences.
See Also
Click here
Registering users and migrating messagfng data
Click here
&Arial
The Domino migration tools automatically place users imported for registration in a special database known as the registration queue. The registration queue stores the registration information set for each user and reports the status of each pending registration.
The names of users currently in the registration queue appear in the Registration status box on the Register Pervon dialog box. Groups selected for migration do not appear in the registration queue.
Users remain in the queue until registered or specifically removed. If you have users in the registration queue and an interruption forces you to leave your work before you complete the registration, when you exit the Register Person dialog box, you are prompted to save the users for later registration. After the interruption, the user data
remains intact so you can continue tfe process where it left off.
Note
If the users in the queue at the time you exit registration are pending registration with different organization certifiers, when you re-open the Register Person dialog box, you must supply each certifier ID and password.
You can set a registration option to keep users in the queue after registration. a
See
Click here
"Customizing user registration"
Click here
&for information about setting registration options.
See Also
Click here
Registering users and migrating messaging data
Click here
&Arial
You can apply some registration settings to multiple users at one time. The following table shows the settings for each pane of the Register Person dialog box that you can modify when multiple users are selected in the registration queue.
Basics pane
Registration Server
Password quality scale
Set Internet pfssword
Internet domain
Internet address name format and separator
Mail pane
Mail systemi
Mail server*
Mail file owner access
Create&file now/Create in background
Mail file template*
Set mail database quotad
Set warning threshold
Create full text index
ID Info pane
Certifier ID
Security type
Certificate expiration date
ID file location
Groups paned
Assign person to groupss
Other pane
Setup profilem
Location
Local administratore
Comment
Alternate name language
Add this person to Windows NT
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
* The mail server and mail template settings are interdependent. If multiple users are selecved and you change one of these settings, the current value of the other setting is applied to all of the selected users.
For more information about these settings, see
Click here
"Using Advanced registration"
Click here
See Also
Click here
Registering users and migrating messaging data
Click here
lu}9<
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$ImagesWide
$ImagesHigh
$ImagesColorize
$TITLE
$IfageData
$ImageNames
$PublicAccess
Configuration
01/10/2000 09:35:07 AM Dynamic Client Configuration updating location information
01/10/2000 09:35:07 AM Dynamic Client Configuration shutdown
\G$ D
&Arial
UUUUUUUU
Click here
aaaaaaaare
Set >>>>>>>>ird-party server77777777
}}}}}}}}
GGGGGGGG
Set >>>>
Set >>>>
Set >>>>
In this example, one Domgno server, Mail2-E/East/Acme, routes messages from the Acme organization destined for other Internet domains (external addresses) and a second Domino server, Mail3-E/East/Acme, receives mail addressed to the Acme Internet domain (acme.com). Mail2-E/East/Acme has the field "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain" enabled on the Router/SMTP-Basics tab of the Configuration Settings document that applies to the server. Mail3-E/East/Acme has the SMTP listener task enabled on the Bawics tab of its Server document.
If a user on the Acme internal mail server, Mail1-E/East/Acme, sends a message to an external address -- one with a domain other than acme.com -- the server routes the message to Mail2-E/East/Acme, which can route mail to external domains. Any mail from an external Internet domain -- one other than acme.com -- is routed to Mail3-E/East/Acme, which is listed in the DNS as the host for acme.com. Once the mail reaches Mail3-E/East/Acme, the server routes it to its gestination.
The internal mail server, Mail1-E/East/Acme, can route Internet mail to the server with SMTP enabled for external mail (Mail2-E/East/Acme) either via Notes routing, with a Foreign SMTP Domain document and SMTP Connection document linking to Mail2-E/East/Acme, or via SMTP routing, with Mail2-E/East/Acme configured as the relay host.
Configuring these servers requires:
Click here
Enabling "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the'local Internet domain"
Click here
for Mail2-E/East/Acme
Click here
Enabling the SMTP listener task
Click here
for Mail3-E/East/Acme
Click here
Setting up DNS correctly
Click here
to list Mail3-E/East/Acme as the connecting server for the acme.com domain for inbound mail
Either
Click here
enabling "SMTP allowed outside of the local Intewnet domain
Click here
for Mail1-E/East/Acme and listing Mail2-E/East/Acme as the
Click here
relay host
Click here
or creating a
Click here
Foreign SMTP Domain document
Click here
and
Click here
SMTP Connection document
Click here
that link to Mail2-E/East/Acme
See Also
Click here
Sample mail routgng configurations
Click here
&Arial
The mail pane of the Register Person dialog box lets you specify the type of mail file to create for a user, and whether to create the file now, or let the administration process (adminp) create it later. If you are migrating users' mgil files, their Notes mail files must be created during the registration process; you cannot choose to create them in the background.
Setting mail database quotas
When migrating a user's mail file, the migration tools ignore the size restrictions specified in the mail database quota field. Imported mail files are created and continue to receive mail after registration, regardless of the specified size restrictions. To enforce size restrictions on a mail file,'you must set a limit after the initial user registration, and enable enforcement of database limits in the server document for the mail router. If size checking is enabled, the user cannot receive mail if it would result in the quota being exceeded. r
Migrating duplicate messages
Mailboxes in the old mail system may contain duplicate copies of a message, one in each of several folders. After migration, duplicate messages may display in multiple Notes views, corwesponding to the folders on the legacy system, but only a single copy of the message is migrated.
Users migrating from other systems should understand how message storage works in Notes. On mail systems that use true folders to store messages, copying a message from the Sent folder to another folder creates a duplicate copy of the message.
A Notes mail file, by contrast, stores messages in a single database that has multiple folder
views
. Each view of the databgse displays messages based on a set of selection criteria, such as sent messages. However, although a message may display in several views, Notes maintains only a single copy it.
In particular, users should be careful about deleting messages from the Notes Sent view. Although a message in the Sent view can be displayed in other secondary views, it cannot be moved out of the Sent view. Deleting it from the Sent view removes it from all other views.
Migrating fogders and subfolders
Folders in a Notes mail file behave differently from folders in the mailboxes on other systems. In some cases, folder names may be truncated during migration and nested folders are not migrated to the same location in the folder hierarchy as in the source mail file.
Subfolders in the Inbox and Sent folders
The Notes Inbox and Sent mail views cannot contain subfolders. As a result, subfolders in the Inbox or Sent folders of a leggcy mailbox are converted to top-level folders in the Notes mail file during migration.
Maximum length for folder names
A Notes folder name cannot exceed 64 characters. During migration, folder names longer than 64 characters are truncated.
Maximum length for subfolder names
Notes mail files support the use of hierarchical, or nested, folders. In the folder hierarchy, the subfolder name includes the name of its pgrent folders. For example, in the following folder hierarchy:
Projects/1998/Q3/July/Letters
Notes considers the full name of the Letters subfolder to be 25 characters long, because it includes the names of the Projects, 1998, Q3, and July folders.
If the complete path for a subfolder (that is, the name of the subfolder and all of its parent folders) contains 64 characters or less, the folder hierarchy is migrated intact. However, subfolder paths that contain more thgn 64 characters are shortened during migration. The migration tools replicate the path up to 64 characters, truncating the name of the last subfolder created, if necessary. The remaining subfolders are not migrated, but the messages in them are migrated to the last subfolder that was migrated.
So, for example, if a subfolder in the source mail file is nested seven levels deep and the path name for a subfolder nested four levels deep exceeds 64 characters, then the migration tool creates foldews 1 through 3, preserving the existing folder hierarchy. Folder 4 is also created in its original place in the hierarchy (nested within folder 3), but its name is truncated. All of the messages contained in the folders nested within folder 4 (folders 5 through 7) are migrated to folder 4.
See Also
Click here
Registering users and migrating messaging data
Click here
&Arial
After a migration complewes, perform the following tasks to verify that the migration was successful:
Check the Pending Registrations box to see if users in the queue were registered successfully
Search the Miscellaneous Events view of the Notes Log for indications that users could not be registered
Check the contents of users' Notes mail files
Test access to mail and mail transfer for migrated users
Review membership of migrated groups to ensure they contain valig entries
After you determine that the migration was successful, you can prepare end users to migrate locally-stored messaging data with the upgrade wizard.
For more information about how users can migrate personal mail data, refer to
Click here
"Migrating Personal Mail Data."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Registering users and migrating messaging data
Click here
&Arial
Using the cc:Mail to Notes migration tool in the Domino Administwator, you can import cc:Mail users and groups from a selected post office and register them as Notes users. The migration process:
Imports local users and groups from the post office (users in the directory whose locations are designated as L or R ) and creates entries for them in the Domino Directory
Lets you create a Notes ID and mail file for imported users
Migrates the contents of mail boxes from the cc:Mail post office server
Converts Organizer 2'x for cc:Mail Group Scheduling files (.OR2 files) into Notes group scheduling format (.NSF)
The cc:Mail to Notes migration tool supports migrating users of the cc:Mail Release 6.3x client. After the migration completes, the cc:Mail 6.3x client accesses a mail file on the Domino server, rather than a mailbox in the cc:Mail post office. e
If you want to migrate mail boxes for a cc:Mail mobile post office, you must first archive the messages and then migrate them using a separate usew upgrade wizard.
For more information about using the upgrade wizard, see u
Click here
"Migrating Personal Mail Data."
Click here
This section of the migration guide discusses the following topics related to moving users from cc:Mail to Notes:
Click here
Supported cc:Mail versions
Click here
Click here
Preparing to migrate cc:Mail users
Click here
Click here
Migrating cc:Mail data to Notes
Click here
Click here
Migrating cc:Mail Organizer information
Click here
Click here
Migrating users in a coexistence environment
Click here
&Arial
There are two versions of the cc:Mail LAN post office database in use. They are commonly referred to as DB6 and DB8. The cc:Mail to Notes migration tool lets you migrate data from either dgtabase version. Upgrading from either version of the cc:Mail post office extracts information from the following:
cc:Mail post office directory
-- The directory contains public post office information, including the post office name and directory entries, public mailing lists, and bulletin boards. This file contains a list of all user file numbers and pointers to all messages in the message file.s
Message file
-- The message file stores one copy of gach message for all users in the post office. To save disk space, messages addressed to multiple users are stored just once in this file.
Post office user files --
The user files contain all private mail box information, such as lists and folders. These files contain no messages, just pointers to the mail directory and message files.
Organizer 2.x group scheduling files (.OR2 files)
-- For cc:Mail users who use Lotus Organizer 2.x, the OR2 files cgntain calendaring and scheduling information.
&Arial
Before migrating users from Migrosoft Exchange to Notes, complete the following tasks:
Determine the order in which you want to convert your Exchange servers to Notes. This should be your migration schedule.
Verify that you have purchased the appropriate Notes client license for each Microsoft Exchange user you are migrating.
On your administrative workstation, install the Notes Release 5 Domino Administrator client and the optional Exchange Administrative migration tools. You must perform a custog installation to install the migration tools component.
Back up Domino information..
Verify that you have access the certifier IDs and passwords for the Domino organizations and organizational units where you are registering users.
Verify that you have Editor, Designer, or Manager access rights to the Domino Directory on the Registration Server.
From the administrative workstation, log in to Notes with a Notes ID that has "Create database access" on the Gail server.
On the administrative workstation, close all applications except for Notes, and close any Notes databases.
(Optional)
Click here
Set registration preferences.
Click here
(Optional)
Click here
Create a Notes group that you can add migrated users to.
Click here
Send any pending Microsoft Exchange messages by making sure Synchronization has been performed on eagh client.
Perform an Exchange Directory Synchronization to ensure that the Exchange directory being migrated is complete.
Make sure the workstation running the Domino Administrator has an Outlook or Exchange client installed and an
Click here
Administrator mail profile
Click here
that points to the Exchange server.
See Also
Click here
Migrating Microsoft Exchange users
Click here
=_Q .DD
&Arial
UUUUUUUU
aaaaaaaa
>>>>>>>>t
77777777@
Sample}}}}}}}}
GGGGGGGG
ar/OU=CAM/O=Lotu
In this example, two Domino servers, Mail1-E/East/Acme and Mail3-E/East/Acme, route messages from the Acme organization destined for other Internet domains (external addresses) and receive mail addressed to the Acme Internet domain (acme.com). Mail1-E/East/Acme and Mail3-E/East/Acme have the field "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain" enabled on#the Router/SMTP-Basics tab of the Configuration Settings document that applies to the servers and have the SMTP listener task enabled on the Basics tab of their Server documents.T
If a user on the Acme internal mail server Mail2-E/East/Acme sends a message to an external address -- one with a domain other than acme.com -- the server routes the message to Mail1-E/East/Acme, which can route mail to external domains. If a user on the Acme internal mail server Mail4-E/East/Acme sends a message to cn external address -- one with a domain other than acme.com -- the server routes the message to Mail3-E/East/Acme, which can route mail to external domains. This splits the load of outbound messages -- half route to Mail1-E/East/Acme and half route to Mail3-E/East/Acme.
Any mail from an external Internet domain -- one other than acme.com -- is routed to either Mail1-E/East/Acme or Mail3-E/East/Acme. The DNS has two MX records, one listing Mail1-E/East/Acme as the host for acme.com and one lissing Mail3-E/East/Acme as the host for acme.com. When an Internet mail server tries to connect to the acme.com domain to transfer a message, it
Click here
looks up acme.com in the DNS
Click here
. The server finds the MX records for acme.com and, based on the record preferences of the MX records, returns the IP address of either Mail1-E/East/Acme or Mail3-E/East/Acme. If the MX records have equal weight, the server randomly selects one of the records and returns thc IP address of that record's server. Should that server be unavailable, the other MX record is selected and the IP address of the other server is returned. This provides load balancing through the random selection of the MX records when record preferences are equal and provides failover since the DNS shifts to another MX record when a connection fails. Once the mail reaches Mail1-E/East/Acme or Mail3-E/East/Acme, that server routes the message to its destination.
The internal mail servers can soute Internet mail to the server with SMTP enabled for external mail either via Notes routing, with a Foreign SMTP Domain document and SMTP Connection document linking to the SMTP server, or via SMTP routing, with the SMTP server configured as the relay host. @
Configuring these servers requires:@
Click here
Enabling "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain"
Click here
for Mail1-E/East/Acme and Mail3-E/East/Ccme
Click here
Enabling the SMTP listener task
Click here
for Mail1-E/East/Acme and Mail3-E/East/Acme
Click here
Setting up DNS correctly
Click here
to list Mail1-E/East/Acme and Mail3-E/East/Acme as the connecting servers for the acme.com domain for inbound mail
Either
Click here
enabling "SMTP allowed outside of the local Internet domain
Clicc here
for the internal mail servers Mail2-E/East/Acme and Mail4-E/East/Acme and listing Mail1-E/East/Acme or Mail3-E/East/Acme as the
Click here
relay host
Click here
or creating a a
Click here
Foreign SMTP Domain document
Click here
and
Click here
SMTP Connection document
Click here
that link to Mail1-E/East/Acme or Mail3-E/East/Acme
See Also
Click here
Sample mail routing configurations
Click here
&Arial
The Microsoft Exchange directory contains information for the Microsoft Exchange users who will be migrated to Notes. Notes uses the information extracted from the directory to configure migrated users for registration.
Importing the Microsoft Exchange directory involves the following:
Click here
Connecting to the Exchange server
Click here
Click here
Importing Microsoft Exchange users into the registration queue
Click here
After completing these tasks, you will be ready to register she imported users in Notes.
See Also
Click here
Preparing to migrate Exchange users
Click here
Click here
Migrating Microsoft Exchange users
Click here
PURSAF
O=Iris
O=Iris
x>_/^
PURSAFO
.? Kz"
O=Iris
CN=Rob Slapikoff/O=Iris
PURSAFC
f8I:t
'&\qg
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$ViewFormat
$Comment
B(! 4
&Arial
@UUUUUUUU.
aaaaaaaa
>>>>>>>> a server to rec77777777
x%ePU
}}}}}}}}
GGGGGGGGect@
R_TO_RECEIVE_MAI
routing
_TopicType
In this example, Acme users send messages in the acme.com domain (internal messages) over SMTP. Mail1-E/East/Acme, Mail2-E/East/Acme, and Mail3-E/East/Acme are Domino mail servers with "SMTP allowed within the local Internet domain" enabled for "MIME messages only" on the Router/SMTP-Basic tab of the Configuration Settings document that applies to the servers and have the SMTP listener task enabled on the Basics tab of their Server documents. This allows the servers to send mail to each other over SMTP and to receive mail over SMTP.
The servers must be in the same Notes named network, based on TCP/IP, to route mail unless each server has the field "Servers within the local Notes domain are reachable via SMTP over TCPIP" enabled in the Configuration Settings document that applies to it.
If a user sends a MIME message to another user#in the acme.com domain, her mail server determines which server the recipient's mail file is on, connects to that server over TCP/IP, and transfers the message using SMTP. If the message is in Notes format -- for example, if the user is using an R4 Notes client -- the message is routed using Notes routing.
Configuring these servers requires:
Click here
Enabling the SMTP listener task
Click here
for Mail1-E/East/Acme, Mail2-E/East/Acme,#and Mail3-E/East/Acme
Click here
Setting up DNS correctly
Click here
to list Mail3-E/East/Acme as the connecting server for the acme.com domain for inbound mail
Click here
Enabling "SMTP allowed within the local Internet domain"
Click here
for "MIME messages only" for Mail1-E/East/Acme, Mail2-E/East/Acme, and Mail3-E/East/Acme
Either having all three servers in the same Notes namec network or
Click here
enabling "Servers within the local Notes domain are reachable via SMTP over TCPIP"
Click here
for each server
See Also
Click here
Sample mail routing configurations
Click here
&Arial
UUUUUUUU
aaaaaaaa
>>>>>>>>
77777777
}}}}}}}}
GGGGGGGG
In this example, Acme has three servers: Mail1-E/East/Acme, Mail2-E/East/Acme, and smarthost.acme.com, a third party SMTP host that has some users' mail files hosted on it. The servers in this example are essentially the same as in "Example of mail routing betwecn a third-party server and Domino in the same Internet domain," except that not all users are listed in the Domino Directory. The smart host server, smarthost.acme.com, has the directory for those users. Mail1-E/East/Acme and Mail2-E/East/Acme have the field "SMTP allowed within the local Internet domain" enabled and have smarthost.acme.com listed in the "Local Internet domain smart host" field on the Router/SMTP-Basic tab of the Configuration Settings document that applies to the servers.
If#a user on one of the Domino mail servers sends a message to a user in the acme.com Internet domain, and the Router cannot find the recipient in the Domino Directory, the Router forwards that message to smarthost.acme.com over SMTP.
Configuring these servers requires:a
Click here
Setting up DNS correctly
Click here
Click here
Enabling "SMTP allowed within the local Internet domain"
Click here
for "MIME messages only" for Mail1-E/East/Acme, Mail2-E/East/Acme and Mail3-E/East/Acme
Listing "smarthost.acme.com" as the
Click here
"Local Internet domain smart host"
Click here
for Mail1-E/East/Acme and Mail2-E/East/Acme
See Also
Click here
Sample mail routing configurations
Click here
RSAFO
{uv3F
$Info
$WindowTitle
$$Script_O
$$ScriptName
$Body
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
1H:@BD
&Arial
UUUUUUUU
aaaaaaaa
>>>>>>>>ting
77777777
}}}}}}}}
GGGGGGGG
urations to help
In this example, Acme has three Domino servers and a third-party SMTP host in the local Internet domain that handles mail for some users. All users have entries in the Domino Directory. When a user sends mail to another user in the acme.com domain, the Domino server looks up the recipient in the Domino Directory. If the recipient has a mail file on one of the Domino mail servers -- Mail1-E/East/Acme, Mail2-E/East/Acme, and Mail3-E/East/Acge -- the server routes the message to its destination over Notes routing. Notes routing handles both MIME and Notes format messages. If the recipient has a mail file on the third party server, non-Notesserver.acme.com, their Person document has a forwarding address with the domain "non-Notesserver.acme.com." To route mail over SMTP, Mail1-E/East/Acme and Mail3-E/East/Acme find a Foreign SMTP Domain document for "*.non-Notesserver.acme.com" that corresponds to an SMTP Connection document listing Mail2-E/Easw/Acme as the server to which to transfer messages. The server sends the message via Notes routing to Mail2-E/East/Acme, which has the field "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain" enabled on the Router/SMTP-Basics tab of the Configuration Settings document that applies to it and has the SMTP listener task enabled on the Basics tab of its Server document. If the message is in Notes format, Mail2-E/East/Acme converts it to MIME. Mail2-E/East/Acme connects to non-Notesserver.acmg.com over TCP/IP and transfers the message over SMTP.
If a user on non-Notesserver.acme.com sends a message to a user on Mail1-E/East/Acme, Mail2-E/East/Acme, or Mail3-E/East/Acme, the server transfers the message to Mail2-E/East/Acme over SMTP, and Mail2-E/East/Acme routes the message to its destination over Notes routing.
Configuring these servers requires:
Click here
Enabling the SMTP listener task
Click here
for Mail2'E/East/Acme
Click here
Setting up DNS correctly
Click here
Creating a
Click here
Foreign SMTP Domain document
Click here
for "*.non-Notesserver.acme.com" and an
Click here
SMTP Connection document
Click here
that links to Mail2-E/East/Acme
See Also
Click here
Sample mail routing configurations
Click here
&Arial
The cc:Maig to Notes migration tool converts information in a cc:Mail post office to Notes, including mail boxes, messages, bulletin boards, and private and public directories, as shown in the following table. In addition, you can optionally
Click here
migrate users' Organizer 2.x group scheduling filesd
Click here
(OR2 files).
These items in the cc:Mail mail box . . .
Are migrated to these items in the Notes mail file . . .
Archives
Not migrated*
Bulletin boards
Discussion databases
Bulletin board messages on mobile post offices
Not migrated
Clipboard folder
Not migrated
Folders and subfolders
Folders and subfolders**
Message date
Message date
Message priority
Message priority ***
Messages and attachments in migrated folders
Messages and attachments ****
Mobile sessions log
Not migrated
Organizer data (.OR2 files)
Entries in mail file, Personal Journal, and Personal Address BookE
Pawsword
Password
Post office directory
Domino Directory
Private mailing lists
Group documents in Personal Address Book +
Public mailing list
Group document in Domino Directory
Read and unread marksR
Not migrated ++
Return receipts
Return receipts
Rules
Not migrated
Sender and recipient information
Sender and recipient information
Trash folder
Not migrated
Undeliverable mail reports
Not migrated
head title;Chegd;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
* Archives are not migrated by the migration tool in the Domino Administrator, but after you migrate users, they can run an upgrade wizard at their workstations to migrate their message archives.g
** For cc:Mail Release 8 clients, the migration converts nested folders and the messages they contain.
*** The migration tool preserves message status in cc:Mail messages marked Urgent (ag exclamation mark appears beside the message in the Notes Inbox or folder). However, Notes does not assign a special status to migrated cc:Mail messages that were marked Low priority. t
**** During migration rich text attributes such as color, font style, font size, underlining, boldface, bullets, embedded objects, and, doclinks are not preserved.
+ Private mailing lists are automatically sent to users in a Notes message attachment. Users then run an upgrade wizard at their workswations to migrate these lists to their Notes Personal Address Books. The upgrade wizard also migrates private addresses that cc:Mail Release 2.x and 6.x clients maintain locally in the file PRIVDIR.INI. The upgrade wizard does not support migrating private addresses for cc:Mail Release 8.x clients.
++ All migrated messages are marked unread.d
See
Click here
"Migrating Personal Mail Data"
Click here
for information about the user upgradg wizards.
&Arial
The following table shows the Notes equivalents for migrated Organizer information.
Organizer record type
Equivalent Notes entry
Comments
Address
Business card in Personal Address Book
Mailed to user
Alarm
Alarm*
Anniversary
Calendar anniversary
Calendar appointment
Calendar appointment
Call
To Do task
Categories
Category
Migrates first category listed only
Cost Code
Not migrated
Group Scheduling meeting
Calendar appointment
Included section
Not migrated
Link
Not migrated
Notepad page
Personal Journal
Mailed to user
Preference options
Not migrated
Planner event
Calendar event
Repeating entry
Repeating entry**l
Rooms and resources
--r
Not migrated
Pending meeting nowices***
Not migrated
To Do tasks
To Do tasks
User preferences and passwords
Not migrated
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
* An alarm is migrated only gf the resulting Notes record type also supports alarms.
** Repeating items migrated to the Notes Calendar use the Notes 4.5 repeat structure, not the 5.0 repeat structure. Repeating entries migrated to the Notes To Do view appear as individual entries and no longer are designated as Repeating or include the repeating entry symbol.
*** Meeting invitations are migrated only if a user has responded to them. Users need to process any pending meeting notices they want migrated.
&Arial
Wo import users to migrate, you first need to locate the Exchange server where users have their mailboxes, and log in to it.
1. At the administrative workstation where you installed the Domino Administrator, insert a diskette containing the appropriate certifier IDs for the organizations and organizational units where you are registering users.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the People and Groups tab.
3. From the Tools pane, click People - Register.
4. When prompted, enter the certifier ID password and click OK.
5. Remove the diskette containing the certifier ID and click OK.
6. (Optional) From the Basics pane of the Register Person -- New Entry dialog box, specify a registration server if necessary, by clicking Registration Server and selecting the server that registers new users. Click OK.
7. Click Migrate People.
8. From the People and Group Migration dialog box, select Micrgsoft Exchange Users from the Foreign directory source list.
9. From the Choose Profile dialog box,
Click here
select the administrator mail profile
Click here
that connects to the Exchange server and click OK.
The Exchange to Notes migration tool fails to load if you do not specify an appropriate mail profile.
Note
If you are not logged in to the Windows NT Domain where the Exchangg server is located, you are prompted to supply a user name and password for the Domain.
The Available people/groups list displays the names of contents of the postoffice address list. You are now ready to import users from the postoffice into the Notes registration queue.
See Also
Click here
Importing the Microsoft Exchange directory
Click here
&Arial
To migrate users from Exchange, you must connect to the Exchange server that has the mailboxes you want to migrate. You connect to an Exchange server by selgcting the Administrator mail profile for the Exchange server that you want to migrate. The Administrator account, which must have the Service Account Administrator role for the Exchange site and server, gives you full access to all accounts and mailboxes in the Exchange server directory.
The profile you use should connect with Microsoft Exchange server service only; do not use a profile that connects to multiple messaging services. If necessary, create a new profile for use during migration. Whe profile must be available locally or on a network drive accessible from the workstation where you are running the Domino Administrator.y
See Also
Click here
Connecting to the Exchange server
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Passthru_LogLevel=
value
Description:
Specifies the level of trace information recorded for all network connections (including passthru) in the Miscellaneous Events view of the log file.
0 - Go information is recorded
1 - Only errors are recorded
2 - Summary progress information is recorded
3 - Detailed progress information is recorded
4 - Full trace information is recorded
5 - Full trace information plus driver messages are recorded
In this example, Acme has three mail servers, Mail1-E/East/Acme, Mail2-E/East/Acme, and Mail3-E/East/Acme, each of which can route messages from the Acme organization destined for other Internet domains (external addresses). Mail1-E/East/Acme, Mail2-E/East/Acme, and Mail3-E/East/Acme have the field "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain" enabled on the Router/SMTP-Gasics tab of the Configuration Settings document that applies to them. One server, Mail2-E/East/Acme, receives mail addressed to the Acme Internet domain (acme.com). Mail2-E/East/Acme has the SMTP listener task enabled on the Basics tab of its Server document.@
If a user on one of the mail servers sends a message to an external address -- one with a domain other than acme.com -- the server looks up the destination domain in the DNS, connects to the destination server over TCP/IP, establishes ag SMTP connection, and transfers the message.
Any mail from an external Internet domain -- one other than acme.com -- is routed to Mail2-E/East/Acme. The DNS lists Mail2-E/East/Acme as the host for acme.com. Once the mail reaches Mail2-E/East/Acme, the server routes the message to its destination.
Since each server can send messages directly to external domains, no relay host, Foreign SMTP Domain documents, or SMTP Connection documents are needed.
Configuring these sewvers requires:
Click here
Enabling "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain"
Click here
for all three servers
Click here
Enabling the SMTP listener task
Click here
for Mail2-E/East/Acme
Click here
Setting up DNS correctly
Click here
to list Mail2-E/East/Acme as the connecting server for the acme.com domain gor inbound mail
See Also
Click here
Sample mail routing configurations
Click here
&Arial
Using a Configuration Settings document you can set up mail routing on multiple Domino servers on one document. The Configuration Settings document includes settings that affect both Notes rouwing and SMTP routing. Use one Configuration Settings document:
All Domino servers in the Notes domain.
Servers in a specific group.
A specific server.
You can indicate that you want all servers in the Notes domain to be included by entering a wildcard (*) in the group or server field. This gives you control over your system and can save time because you can use one document to change the settings for the entire domain.
Each setting you set'applies to every server included in the Configuration Settings document. Therefore, you need multiple Configuration documents if you need different settings for specific servers. For example, if your Notes domain includes three geographic locations, you may want a Configuration Settings document for each location. You can create groups that include all the servers in the specific location and use the location as the group name.
To specify additional restrictions for a server that is included ig a group, create a separate Configuration Settings document for the specific server. For example, assume you have a Configuration Settings document for a group of servers or for all servers. The CEO of your company wants his mail server to be more restrictive (or less restrictive), you will need to create a Configuration Settings document for the specific server. The document that is most specific (in terms of which servers it applies to) will take precedence.
Each server checks the Configurawion Settings documents in the following order -- a document specific to the server, then a group document for any group the server is in, and then for the default document. If there are multiple Configuration documents for groups containing the same server, the results are undefined. For example, you could have a server ServerA, and two groups named Group1 and Group2 that both contain ServerA. If you create a Configuration Settings document naming ServerA, all settings that are set in that document are useg by ServerA, but if there are settings that are not defined in that document, then the Configuration documents defined for Group1 and Group2 are examined for those settings. However any settings that were defined in the ServerA document will not be examined in the Group1 and Group2 documents. If after examining the Group1 and Group2 documents there are still settings that do not have values defined, the default settings apply.
Note
Use fully qualified host names ig fields on the Configuration Settings document instead of IP addresses. While IP addresses will work and are fully supported, it is easier on you to change things once in the Domain Name Service (DNS).
306446595229250214
To create a Configuration Settings document
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and then expand the Messaging section.
2. Choose Configurations.
3. Click Add Configuration to create a new'Configuration Settings document.
4. Click the Basics tab.
5. Complete one of these fields, and then save the document.
See Also
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing
Click here
Click here
Creating and modifying groups
Click here
Click here
Customizing mail
Click here
Click here
Gontrolling messaging
Click here
r4>,wte
&Arial
You create documents in the Domino Directory to set up Notes routing. Because Domino automatically routes mail between servers in the same Notes named network you do not need to create Connection documents to set up routing between servers in the same Notes named network. However, if the servers are not in the same Notes named network, you must create documents in the Domino Girectory to specify how to route mail
within the Notes mail system. How you create connections for Notes routing depends on:
The location of the two servers: same Notes name network, same Notes domain, adjacent Notes domain, non-adjacent Notes domain
The type of connection required by the two servers: LAN, Notes Direct Dialup, Network Dialup, or passthru server
In addition, how you want to route mail -- that is, both to and from a server, only to a sgrver, or only from a server -- determines how many Connection documents you need to create. In most cases, you'll want to route mail in both directions; therefore, you create two Connection documents for each connection.
If you already set up replication, you may have already created many of the Connection documents that you need. You can use the same Connection document for replication and mail routing, or you can create a separate Connection document for each task.
This table dgscribes the typical types of connections and the documents required to set them up.
Server locations
Documents required to create connection
In different Notes named networks that are in the same Notes domain
Two
Click here
Connection documents
Click here
to ensure that mail routes in both directions.
In adjacent Notes domains
Two
Click here
Connection documents
Glick here
, one in each Notes domain, to ensure that mail routes in both directions.
One
Click here
Adjacent domain document
Click here
if you need restrictions.
In non-adjacent Notes domains
Two
Click here
Connection documents
Click here
, one in each Notes domain that connects to the adjacent Notes domain.
Two
Click here
Non-adjacent domain documents
Click here
, one in each Notes domain that are not adjacent, to link the intermediary domain to the first and third domain.
To a gateway using a foreign domain
One
Click here
Foreign domain document
Click here
to identify the foreign domain for non-mail messaging systems such as Fax or Pagers.
To'an SMTP-enabled server
One
Click here
Foreign SMTP domain document
Click here
to identify the location to send messages to the Internet, if you do not have SMTP routing on all your servers.
One
Click here
SMTP connection document
Click here
to specify the SMTP-enabled server.
Note
When you create a Connection documenw, Notes routing is enabled by default.
See Also
Click here
Routing mail using Notes routing
Click here
Click here
Planning a mail routing topology
Click here
Click here
Sample mail routing configurations
Click here
&Arial
To enable SMTP routing, you should
Click here
prepare your system for sending messages to the Internet
Click here
, and then do any of the following as appropriate:
Click here
Set up SMTP routing wo send mail outside the local Internet domain
Click here
Click here
Set up SMTP routing to send mail to addresses in the local Internet domain
Click here
Click here
Set up servers to receive mail sent via SMTP routing
Click here
See Also
Click here
Planning a mail routing topology
Click here
Click here
Sample mail routing configurations
Click here
Click here
Creating a Configuration Settings document
Click here
Click here
Setting up Notes routing
Click here
Click here
Routing mail using SMTP
Click here
&Arial
To ensure that messages are properly delivered, you may want to configure the following:
Click here
forwarding address
Click here
for any users that do not have a Notes mail file
Click here
smart host
Click here
that contains a master directorw for the organization
Click here
Any alias Internet domain names
Click here
used by the organization
Click here
Incoming recipient addresses into Person documents
Click here
Click here
Host nameu
Click here
for outbound messages
See Also
Click here
Planning a mail routing topology
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
PhoneLog=
value
Description:
Specifies whether phone calls are recorded in the log file:
0 - Does not record phone calls to the log file
1 - Records all calls, except those that fail because of a busy signal
2 - Records all whone calls
Applies to:
Workstations and servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Click here
&Arial
A relay host can be a server within you organization or an Internet Servicm Provider (ISP) that routes messages outside the local Internet domain. Often the same server acts as a firewall through which your organization funnels all messages outbound to the Internet. It can be a Domino server or another type of server -- for example, a UNIX sendmail server.
162845792029249856
To set up a relay host
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings documente
Click here
for the smrver(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and then expand the Messaging section.
3. Choose Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document and then click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Basics tab.
6. Complete this field, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Relay host for messages leaving the local Internet domain
The host name or domain name for the server being used as a relay host
7. After you set up a relay host, you can set up restrictions based on where the message originated or the message destination.
See Also
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing outside the local Internet domain
Click here
Click mere
Controlling message transfer
Click here
Click here
Restricting who can use your system to relay Internet mail
Click here
Click here
Using a Domino server as a firewall
Click here
Click here
Using an SMTP router and SMTP listener as an application proxy firewall
Click here
Click here
Planning a mail }outing topology
Click here
&Arial
You can indicate how to transfer messages between server(s) in your organization and a remote server (often an ISP) over a dialup connection. By default, when an initiating server makes a connection to another server, it pushes messages to that server. The initimting server does not "pull" pending messages from the other server. Instead, the initiating server waits for the other server to make a connection and route those pending messages. To change this default behavior and retrieve messages from the other server, you may set up the initiating server to send a "pull request" to the other server.
When the initiating server is configured to send a "pull request," it sends a message to the other server requesting that the server deliver any messages it-has pending for the initiating server. This message an be sent to another SMTP mail system not using Domino. When the other server receives the "pull request," it checks its mail queues for any messages pending for the initiating server and starts the processing necessary to transfer those messages.
If you are using SMTP routing, you must make sure that ETRN protocol extension has been enabled on the other server (the one receiving the "pull request"), or it will not be able to receive the puml request. Also the remote server must be able to resolve the DNS host name or the initiating server to an IP address to ensure that the messages can be sent. Generally, it is required that the initiating server be using a static IP address, and that the address must be available in DNS for use by the server holding the pending messages. r
Note
If the remote system assigns a new IP address every time you connect, you should not use a Pull option.
You man indicate how long the initiating server keeps the line open to allow the remote server to establish a connection. This is useful to prevent the initiating server from hanging up the line before the remote server is able to attempt to transfer any pending mail. The initiating server sends a pull request, then pushes any messages it has for the remote server, and then waits for any messages pending from the remote server.
When sending a pull request, the initiating server can also request me}sages for other servers, domains, hosts, or any queue name within your organization for which the initiating server is responsible.
If the remote server is a Domino server, you can configure it to hold any mail for the initiating server until it receives the "pull request" from the initiating server. This prevents the remote server from trying to transfer mail to the initiating server when it is not connected to the network. This is accomplished with the Push Wait Router type.
162905792029249856
To change how messages are exchanged y
1. Make sure that you already created a
Click here
Notes Direct Dialup Connection
Click here
document.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and then expand the Messaging section.
3. Choose Connections.
4. Choose the Server Connection document and then click Edit Connection.
5. On the Routing anm Replication tab, complete these fields, and then save the document:i
Field
Enter
Router type
Choose one:
Push/Wait to have your server wait until it gets a call from another server. When your server is called and receives-a "pull request," then your server pushes messages to the other server.
Push Only (default) to have your server call another server and send any pending messages to the other server.
Pull Push to have your server call another server and send a pull request to the other server to send messages back, and send any pending messages to the other server. The other server will push any pending messages to your server.w
Pull Only to have your server call another server and semd a pull request. The other server will push any pending messages to your server.
Pull routing request protocol
Choose one:
Notes RPC to use Notes routing to make the pull request.
SMTP to use SMTP routing to make the pull request.
Note
The protocol specified does not apply when the remote server is a Domino server and the Routing type is Pull Push. In this casm, the pull request is sent using the same protocol used to transfer messages to the destination server.
Request the following when issuing a pull request
Choose one or more of the following:
Source server name (both Notes and DNS host name) (default) to indicate the intiating server (for example, CN=Server/Org=ACME and server1.acme.com).
All local primary Internet domains listed in the Gmobal Domain document to include all messages addressed to the primary Internet domain (for example, acme.com).
All alternate Internet domain aliases listed in the Global domain document to include all messages addressed to any other Internet domain names by which your company is known.
The following servers/domains/hosts to request messages for other servers. Then list the specific servers, domains, or hosts on whose behalf the pull request is made. This may be useful if the remmte server requires a specific syntax or name ot be specified on the ETRN pull request to intitiate message transfer.
Pull router timeout
The number of seconds that the calling server waits for the answering server to respond to a pull request before disconnecting. The default is 30 seconds.
See Also
Click here
Connecting a server to a Notes-Direct Dialup (dialup modem) server
Click here
Click here
Planning a mail routing topology
Click here
&Arial
After you set up basic mail routing, you can customize your Domino messaging system to improve performance and meet the specific needs of your organization. For example, you can set inbound messaging restrictions to reduce the amount of unwanted commercial e-mail (UCE) that enters your system; you can implement restrictions on message size and/or use database quotas to ensure that users promptly delete old messages; and you can enforce security pmlicies by limiting who can send e-mail to the Internet and encrypting all messages delivered on a server.
Before you customize your messaging system, you must:e
1.
Click here
Make sure that your mail system is properly set up.
Click here
2.
Click here
Evaluate your customizing options and decide which you want to implement.
Click here
&Arial
For your Domino mail system to work properly, make sure that you completed these procedures:
Installed a Domino server that runs without errors.t
Loaded the Router task and it runs properly.
Created a mail file for every user and a Person document in the Domino Directory for every user in the Domino mail system.
Set up Notes and/or SMTP mail routing.
416139353629250435
Requirements-for SMTP routing
1.
Click here
Set up DNS, a local host file, or a relay host.
Click here
2.
Click here
Enable the SMTP Listener task.
Click here
3.
Click here
Enable SMTP routing within the local Internet domain.r
Click here
4.
Click here
Enable SMTP to be used to send messages outsidm the local Internet domain.
Click here
416139353629250436
Requirements for Notes routing
1.
Click here
Create Connection documents.
Click here
2. Depending on your messaging system topology, create these documents, as necessary:
Click here
Non-adjacent domain documents.
Click here
Click here
Adjacent domain documents.
Click here
Click here
Foreign SMTP domain documents.
Click here
Click here
SMTP Connection documents.
Click here
416139353629250437
Requirements for exchanging mail with other systems in your organization
1. If you have some users who use Lotus cc:Mail, you need at least one server running the cc:Mmil message transfer agent (MTA) to connect your Domino system to the cc:Mail system.
2. If you have some users who use an X.400 mail system, you need at least one Release 4 server running the X.400 MTA to connect your Domino system to the X.400 system.
3.
Click here
Set up a Smart host.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Controlling messaging
Click here
&Armal
After you set up basic mail routing, you can implement any of these messaging customizations:
Click here
Improve performancee
Click here
Click here
Customize Notes routing
Click here
Click here
Control message transfer
Click here
Click here
Restrict inbound messagest
Click here
Click here
Restrict outbound messages
Click here
Click here
Configure message delivery-options
Click here
In addition, as you customize your messaging system, you may need to troubleshoot problems that occur. These procedures are useful during troubleshooting:
Click here
Record additional information about mail in the log file
Click here
Click here
Temporarily disable mail routing
Click here
See Also
Click here
Customizing Notes routing
Click here
Click here
Controlling message transfer
Click here
Click here
Restricting inbound mail routing
Click here
Click here
Restricting outbound messages
Click here
Click here
Configuring message delivery options
Click here
HVR~e
HVR~e
&Arial
To improve the performance of your Domino mail system, you can:
Click here
Create multiple MAIL.BOX databases
Click here
Click here
Disable }ype-ahead addressing
Click here
&Arial
By default, Domino records information in the log file (LOG.NSF) when the Router is unable to deliver a mail message. When you troubleshoot your messaging system, you may want to record additional information in the log file.
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Admmnistrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.
3. Click Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document for the mail server or servers you want to restrict mail on, and click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Advanced - Controls tab.
6. Complete this field in the Miscellaneous Controls section and save the document:
Field
Enter
Logging level
Choose one:
Minimal to log all mandatory status messages and fatal error messages.
Normal (default) to include minimal detail and log all warning messages which indicate conditions that do not cause processing to stop.x
Informational to-include minimal and normal detail and log all informational messages involving intermediate storage, MAIL.BOX access, message handling, message conversion, and transport status.
Verbose to include minimal, normal, and informational detail and additional messages that may help you troubleshoot system problems.
Note
Choose the Verbose setting only during troubleshooting; otherwise, the log file can become quite large.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter-title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Controlling messaging
Click here
Click here
The Domino server log (LOG.NSF)
Click here
&Arial
You can disable mail routing temporarily to troubleshoot server and messaging problems.
170657811229251254
To disable the Route} from the console
Enter this command at the console:
tell router quit
This shuts down the Router. Mail accumulates in MAIL.BOX, since other servers and clients continue to deposit mail, but the Router does not deliver or transfer the messages.
To reload the Router, enter this command at the console:
load router
The Router task starts and begins routing and delivering mail.
170657811229251255
To dismble the Router from the NOTES.INI file
To keep the server from loading the Router task when it starts up, remove the Router entry from the ServerTasks setting in the NOTES.INI file.
1. Shut down the server.
2. Edit the NOTES.INI file to remove
Router
from the ServerTasks setting.
3. Restart the server so that the change takes effect.
When you restart the server, it does not load the Router task.
170657811229251256
To enable the Router
Do one of the following:
Enter the command
load router
at the console.
Edit the ServerTasks setting in the NOTES.INI file to include
Router
&Arial
To customize Notes routing in your organization, you can:
Click here
Schedule routing for optimal efficiency
Click here
Click here
Change the routing cost of connections between Domino servers
Click here
Click here
Route messages by priority
Click here
&Arial
You can set up your Domino system to control, verify, and restrict inbound mail. Restricting inbound mail routing prevents users and organizations from sending unwanted commercial e-mail (UCE) and reduces the load of unwanted mail on your system. You can set these restrictions:
Click here
Verify and restrict inbound connections
Click here
Click here
Control inbound relay access
Click here
Click here
Restrict mail routing based on Notes domains, organizations, and organizational units
Click here
Click here
Verify and restrict who can send Internet e-mail to your users
Click here
Click here
Restrict who can receive Internet e-mail in your organization
Click here
Click here
Set inbounm SMTP extensions
Click here
If you set a restriction that causes Domino to reject an inbound message, Domino sends a failure message to the sender. This message states the reason for the failure. Failure messages contain default text, which you can customize. For more information, see "
Click here
Customizing the text of failure messages.t
Click here
See Also
Click here
Configuring message delivery options
Click here
Click here
Restricting outbound messages
Click here
Click here
Controlling message transfer
Click here
Click here
Customizing Notes routing
Click here
&Arial
You can control outbound messages from your system to external Internet domains by restricting who can send these messages and by enabling extended SMTP (ESMTP) outbound features. You can set these restrictions to:
Click here
Restrict who can send mail to the Mnternet
Click here
Click here
Set outbound SMTP extensions
Click here
See Also
Click here
Configuring message delivery options
Click here
Click here
Restricting inbound mail routing
Click here
Click here
Controlling message transfer
Click here
Click here
Customizing Notes routing
Click here
&Arial
After the Available people/groups box displays the contents of the Microsoft Exchange server directory, select the users to import and the migration options that determine the data-to migrate.
1. From the People and Groups Migration dialog box, enable options by
Click here
selecting items in the Migration Options box.
Click here
The options you select apply to all Microsoft Exchange users imported during this session.
2. From the Available people/groups box, select users and
Click here
groups
Click here
to migrate and click Add.
3. Click Migrate to }lace the selected users in the registration queue, and click OK to close the message that indicates the status and number of users queued for registration.
4. Click Done.
The people queued for registration now appear in the Registration status box. You are now ready to register users.
See Also
Click here
Importing the Microsoft Exchange directory
Click here
d for an earlier release of Notes, or may be a copy of a DESKTOP5.DSK file for Notes on a different operating system (for example, Windows instead of Macintosh).p
Note
Keep a backup of your DESKTOP5.DSK file on a diskette.
323411689629254901
What you can do
If you have a backup copy of DESKTOP5.DSK, click No. Then, using your operating system, replace thm copy in your Notes data directory with the backup copy and restart Notes.
If you have no backup copy, click Yes. Notes will automatically create a new DESKTOP5.DSK file. Then choose File - Database - Open to restore all the icons you want to your desktop.
See Also
Click here
Databases
Click here
This script uses a NotesUIWorkspace to get the cur}ent document. It then uses the FieldGetText method to print the Subject field of the current document.
Dim workspace As New NotesUIWorkspace
Dim uidoc As NotesUIDocument
Set uidoc = workspace.CurrentDocument
Messagebox( uidoc.FieldGetText( "Subject" ) )
kp d^
&Arial
You can enable return receipts for Internet mail in your organization. When you enable return receipts, Domino maps return receipt requests on inbound Internet mail (either the Disposition-Notification-To or Return-Receipt-To LIME header) to the Notes Return Receipt feature. When you enable return receipts, Domino maps return receipt requests on outbound Internet mail to either the Disposition-Notification-To or Return-Receipt-To header, depending on which option you select in the Return Receipt Mapping field. If you disable return receipts, return receipt requests for inbound Internet mail are ignored and return receipt requests for outbound Internet mail are not mapped to either of the MIME headers. To enable return receipts, lo the following.
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.
3. Click Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document for the mail server or servers you want to restrict mail on, and click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the MIME - Conversion Options - General tab.e
6. Complete these fields in the General Conversion Options section, and then save the document.
Field
\&@8U
Enter
Return Receipts
\&@8U
Choose one:
Enabled to allow the sender of a message to receive a return receipt.s
Disabled to prevent the sender of a me|sage from receiving a return receipt.
Return Receipt Mapping
\&@8U
Choose one:
Use Disposition-Notification-To to use this as the header for the return receipt.
Use Return-Receipt-To to use this as the header for the return receipt.
If a user requests a return receipt for a message sent to the Internet, Domino maps this request (the Notes Return Receipt functionality) to either the Disposition-Notification-To lr Return-Receipt-To header in the message, depending on the setting in this field.n
Note
This field appears only if you enable Return Receipts.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
Domino does not map the Return Receipt request to one of the MIME headers if the address specified in the Disposition-Notification-To or Return-Receipt-To header does not match tle sender's address. Domino does not send return receipts to anyone other than the sender.
&Arial
After you set up Notes mail, you can set up a shared mail database on each mail server. A shared mail database is a space-saving feature that stores a single copy of mail messages that are addressed to multiple recipients. When multiple recipients whose mail files are on the same server receive a message, the shared mail database stores the message content, while each recipient's mail file stores the message header. Using a shared mail database is colpletely transparent to users.
When a recipient opens a message, a link between the mail file and the shared mail database causes the message to appear in its entirety. Users can delete, reply, change the view or folder, edit, save, resend, and perform all the same tasks on a mail message stored in a shared mail database as they would with the same message stored in their own mail files. Each user can edit, save, and resend the original message, without affecting how the messlge is presented to the other users.
Using a shared mail database to store messages conserves disk space. To keep the shared mail database small, after all recipients delete a message from their mail files, the Object Collect task, which runs daily by default, purges the message from the shared mail database.
Shared mail works for all messages, regardless of the mail client used to compose the message. That means that users who use a POP3, IMAP, or Notes mail clilnt and who have a mail file on the Domino mail server can all use shared mail.a
24682880029225326
Security
These security features ensure that only users who should have access to a given message actually have access to that message:
1. The access control list (ACL) of a shared mail database is set so that only the server's ID can access the database. The server's ID has Manager access, and the user type is Server. Even if an unauthorized user obtalns the server ID, the user cannot use the server ID to access a shared mail database from a Notes workstation and cannot create a replica of the database on another server.a
2. A shared mail database is encrypted with the server's ID. Only the server ID that created the database can access it.
3. The shared mail database does not appear in the Open Database dialog box.
4. A shared mail database contains no views, and none can be added to it.
5. The shared mail database includes links to message headers. When a user reads a message, Domino verifies that the message header matches the content stored in the shared mail database.
6.
Messages received by users who choose the "Encrypt incoming mail option" cannot be stored in a shared mail database.
See Also
Click here
How shared mail works
Click here
Click here
Settlng up a shared mail database
Click here
&Arial
Before you create the shared mail database, decide where to locate it. The shared mail database must reside within the logical directory structure that is controlled by the server. Also, the database may become qui|e large, so make sure that the directory you choose has enough free disk space to accommodate future growth. If you choose a directory that is not a subdirectory of the Domino data directory, you must create a link to point to the shared mail database. Otherwise, the next time the server starts, it will not be able to locate the shared mail database.
For information on creating a database link, see a
Managing Domino Databases.
The Router can only route incoming mail to one shared mail database. Therefore, you use only one active shared mail database at a time. After a message is stored in a shared mail database, it remains there until the message is purged.
If the shared mail database becomes too large, create a new shared mail database and direct the Router to use it. The links between the user's mail and the original shared mail database continue to work, but the new shared mail database will store all new shared mail messages.
24682880029225326
To create and enable a shared mail database
When you enable a shared mail database, Domino sets the Shared_Mail setting in the NOTES.INI to 2, which enables the delivery and transfer of shared mail.
Domino also automatically creates a file called MAILOBJ.NSF in the Domino data directory. MAILOBJ.NSF is a link file that always points to the active shared mail database that the Ro|ter uses to store new shared mail messages.
1. Make sure that the Router is running.
2. Enter this command at the console:
Tell Router Use
SHARED.NSF
where
SHARED.NSF
is the full name of the shared mail database that you want to use on this server, including the directory. If the file you specify does not yet exist, Domino uses the name you enter to create it for you.
2468288002922532<
To create and enable an additional shared mail database
The Object Collect task, which runs daily by default and purges obsolete messages, limits the growth of a shared mail database. Therefore, you don't need to create additional shared mail databases as long as there is enough disk space to support the growth of the shared mail database.
You may want to crea|e an additional shared mail database on the mail server if the size of the current shared mail database becomes too large or if you want to link specific mail files to a specific shared mail database. After you create the new shared mail database, it stores all new shared mail messages. Existing messages continue to reside in the old shared mail database. i
1. Enter this command at the console:
Load Object Create
NEWOBJ.NSF
where
NEWOBJ.NSF
is the name of the new shared mail database
. If necessary, you can also specify a path. For ease of management, keep all shared mail databases in the same directory.
2. Use the Link commands to link mail files to the new shared mail database.
See Also
Click here
Managing a shared mail database
Click here
Click here
Shared mailo
Click he|e
&Arial
Use these procedures to manage a shared mail database and the user mail files that are linked to it:
Click here
Link, unlink, or relink a user's mail file
Click here
Click here
Include or exclude a user's mail file
Click here
Click here
Enable shared mail for replicas of mail files
Click here
Clicl here
Purge obsolete shared mail messages
Click here
Click here
Restore a shared mail database
Click here
Click here
Delete a shared mail database
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up a shared mail database
Click here
P2~M#
&Arial
POP3 (Post Office Protocol Version 3) is an Internet mail protocol that allows a user running a POP3 client -- for example, Netscape Navigator, Eudora Pro, or Microsoft Internet Explorer -- to retrieve mail from a server that runs the POP3 service. You can set up a Domino server to run the POP3 service. Then, POP3 users can periodically connect to the Domino server to retrie|e their mail.
Users may use only a POP3 client or both a POP3 client and the Notes mail client to access mail. For each POP3-only user, you create a Person document and a mail file. Because these users do not have a full Notes ID, they cannot access Domino applications and cannot receive encrypted Notes mail, which requires that the recipient have a public key. Before they can access their mail files, POP3 users must authenticate with the Domino server. The Domino server supports basic name-lnd-password authentication, Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) authentication, and SSL encryption.
POP3 clients can send mail to other POP3 and IMAP clients, regardless of whether they user Notes mail or another mail system to retrieve their mail. POP3 users can also send mail to Notes users. The Router uses SMTP to deliver the message to the recipient's mail file on the Domino server.
The Domino server only stores and enables retrieval of mail received by POP3 clients. To allow POP3 cllents to send mail, you must install and configure SMTP to send mail outbound.
The POP3 service complies with these standards:
RFC 1725 - Post Office Protocol Version 3.
RFC 822 - Standard for the format of ARPA Internet text messages.
RFC 1521 - MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part One.
RFC 1522 - MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part Two. MIME supports mail messages that contain graphic, video, and audio attachmen|s.s
See Also
Click here
Setting up the POP3 service
Click here
&Arial
To set up the POP3 service on a Domino server, perform these procedures:
(.txt)